General Regulations

194
VI. General Regulations

CONTENTS
Page
Section VI-1: Survey and certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 855 concerning notification of newbuilding, sur-
vey and certification etc. of mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Section VI-2: Safety management system and risk analysis. . . . . . 212
Regulations of 2 March 1999 no. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for
mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Regulations of 22 December 1993 no. 1239 concerning risk analyses for mobile off-
shore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Section VI-3: Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 856 concerning construction of mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Regulations of 31 January 1984 no. 227 concerning precautionary measures against fire
and explosion on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 857 concerning anchoring/positioning systems
on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision
and watertight/weathertight closing means on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 879 concerning ballast systems on mobile off-
shore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Regulations of 17 December 1986 no. 2318 concerning the construction and equipment
of living quarters on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Regulations of 10 February 1994 No. 123 for mobile offshore units with production
plants and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Regulations of 22 December 1993 no. 1240 concerning helicopter decks on mobile
offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 860 concerning potable water systems and po-
table water supply on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Regulations of 17 December 1986 no. 2319 concerning field moves and towing of mo-
bile offshore units and concerning towing system and mooring of supply ships at such
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Section VI-4: Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Regulation of 11 April 2003 No. 492 concerning life-saving appliances and evacuation
Regulations of 13 January 1986 no. 31 concerning deck cranes, etc. on mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
General Regulations
196
Regulations of 16 December 1993 no. 1200 concerning the installation and use of radio
equipment on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Regulation of 12 November 2002 No. 1314 concerning conditions for periodical main-
tenance of float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Regulation of 11 April 2003 no. 480 concerning welding equipment etc. for the wel-
ding gases acetylene and oxygen in mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Regulation of 11 April 2003 no. 491 concerning diving systems on mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Section VI-5: Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 858 concerning the operation of mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Regulations of 15 September 1992 no. 693 concerning the form and keeping of ships
log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Regulations of 1 April 1996 no. 319 concerning the manning of mobile offshore units 704
Regulations of 6 February 1978 no. 9131 concerning towing assistance for drilling
platforms and other mobile units of similar construction when navigating in Norwegian
territorial and inner waters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Regulations of 13 January 1986 no. 32 for the use of radioactive sources on board mo-
bile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Regulations of 1 December 1975 no. 5 for preventing collisions at sea . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Section VI-6: Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Regulations of 22 July 1983 no. 1331 concerning the prevention of pollution from the
maritime operation of mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Regulations of 16 June 1983 no. 1122 concerning the prevention of pollution from
ships, etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Regulation of 28 November 2000 No. 1194 concerning environmental declaration in
connection with environmental differentiation for ships and mobile offshore units . . . . 802
Regulation of 2 April 1987 no. 231 concerning the reporting of accidents at sea . . . . 810
Regulation of 9 July 1992 no. 1269 concerning notification of acute pollution or dan-
ger of acute pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Regulations of 12 June 1998 no. 663 concerning a ban on the discharge of sewage, etc.
from ships to watercourses or near-coastal waters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Section VI-7: Protective measures, working conditions, health
etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 859 concerning protective, environmental, and
safety measures on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Regulation of 9 March 2001 No. 439 concerning medical supplies on ships . . . . . . . . 858
Regulations of 25 November 1988 no. 940 concerning supervision of maritime ser-
vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Regulations of 31 January 1986 no. 222 concerning the scope of the Seamens Act . . 884
Section VI-8: Qualification requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Regulation of 9 May 2003 no. 687 concerning qualification requirements and certifi-
cate rights for personnel on board Norwegian ships, fishing vessels and mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
General Regulations
198
Section VI-9: Tonnage measurement, registration, name, etc. . . . 964
Regulations of 26 July 1994 no. 749 concerning tonnage measurements of ships . . . . 966
Regulation of 27 June 2002 no. 754 concerning names of ships, signal letters, home
port, certificate of nationality, etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Regulation of 30 July 1992 no. 592 relating to the registration of ships in the Norwegi-
an International Ship register (NIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Regulation of 30 July 1992 no. 593 relating to the registration of ships in the Norwegi-
an Ordinary Ship register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Section VI-10: Trade areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
Regulations of 30 June 1987 no. 579 concerning special trade areas for vessels and
mobile offshore units engaged in the petroleum activity and registered in the Norwegian
International Ship Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Section VI-11: Control of foreign mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . 980
Regulation of 1 July 2003 No. 969 concerning the control of foreign ships and mobile
offshore units in Norwegian ports, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Section VI-12: Maritime inquires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Regulations of 1 September 1987 no. 742 concerning the implementation of the rules in
Chapter 14, Part II, of the Maritime Act of 1994 concerning maritime inquiries . . . . . 1018
Section VI-13: Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Regulations of 2 February 1996 No. 115 concerning collection of fees to the treasury
for surveys, issue of certificates etc. carried out pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act etc.
(the fee regulations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Regulation of 20 December 2001 No.1578 (Tariff of Fees) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Regulation of 21 December 2001 No. 1490 (Fees for the issue of competency docu-
ments). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
200
SECTION VI-1:
Survey and certification
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 855 concerning notification of newbuilding, sur-
vey and certification etc. of mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
855/87 Certification regulation
202
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2 Scope of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
3 Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4 Notification of newbuilding. Submission of drawings . . 204
5 Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
6 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
7 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8 Safety Management System, System Audit and Ver-
ification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9 Repairs, alterations and conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
11 Penal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Regulations 4 September 1987 No. 855 concerning
notification of newbuilding, survey,
and certification etc. of mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating
to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships 1, 9a, 35, 41 and 41 a, cf. Royal Decrees of 12
October 1962, 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978, and 25 May 1984, and also Formal Delegations of
15 January 1979, 6 June 1984. Amended 11 October 1996 and 2 March 1999. Amended 11 April
2003 No. 395, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
1
Definitions
For the purpose of the present regulations the following definitions shall apply:
1. Unit: Mobile platforms, including drilling ships, equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum
deposits, and mobile platforms for other use than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
2. Owner: Whoever contracts and/or is responsible for the operation of a unit.
3. Safety Management System: All systematic efforts which the owner is required to make to
ensure that activities are planned, organized, performed and maintained in accordance with
requirements applicable to areas regulated by the legislation mentioned in 1 of the Regula-
tions of 2 March 1999 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore units.
4. System audit: Systematic and independent examination to determine whether the Safety
Management System is established, effectively carried out, and appropriate for its purpose
5. System: Formalized collection of mutually co-ordinated procedures.
6. Verification: Confirmation, by investigating and producing objective evidence, that speci-
fied requirements are fulfilled
7. Recognized classification society: Any classification society with which the Ministry has en-
tered into an agreement pursuant to 9 of the Seaworthiness Act:
204
Det Norske Veritas (DNV).
Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS).
Bureau Veritas (BV).
Germanischer Lloyd (GL).
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS).
8. MOU classification society: A recognized classification society with which there is an
agreement on its carrying out inspections and surveys, etc. on mobile offshore units. The fol-
lowing societies are MOU classification societies:
Upon request, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in each individual case use other re-
cognized classification societies for the carrying out of inspections and surveys, etc. on mo-
bile offshore units.
Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 395 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 542 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
Scope of application
These regulations apply to mobile offshore units which are or will be registered in a Norwegian
register of ships.
Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 542 (in force 1 July 2003).
3
Responsibility
The owner and the platform manager are responsible for compliance with the provisions of
these regulations
1
.
1
See also Regulations of 2 March 1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore units.
4
Notification of newbuilding. Submission of drawings
1. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall be notified of construction of units on an ap-
proved form. The notification shall be submitted in triplicate in ample time and at least three
months prior to the keel being laid or prior to the unit having reached a similar stage of con-
struction.
2. In the event of cancellation, changes in the contract terms or the like implying that the unit no
longer is to be registered under the Norwegian flag, the Directorate shall immediately be no-
tified, ref. the Seaworthiness Act, 11 third paragraph. If the building takes place in Norway
it rests with the yard and if the building takes place abroad it rests with the owner (whoever
placed the order) to submit such notification.
3. It rests with the owner to ensure that drawings which pursuant to regulations are requested by
the Directorate are submitted. Such drawings shall be submitted through the owner to the Di-
rectorate.
5
Survey
1. Units are subject to surveys as follows:
1.1. Initial survey (survey during construction)
1.2. Annual intermediate survey
206
1.3. Periodical survey every 5th year
1.4. Inspection whenever the Directorate considers this necessary
2. Surveys as mentioned in subsection 1 above are to be carried out by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate or anyone authorized by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
3. Surveys of electrical installations, area classification and equipment covered by the regula-
tion on maritime electrical installations and the regulation on electrical equipment
1
currently
in force shall be carried out by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergen-
cy Planning or an institution authorized by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection
and Emergency Planning.
4. In the course of a five-year period, four annual intermediate surveys shall be carried out. The
surveys shall be carried out at one-year intervals based on the date of certificate issue. In-
termediate surveys shall take place within a period of three months before and three months
after the date of certificate issue each year. Intermediate surveys shall normally be carried
out in sheltered waters but may also be accepted to take place during operation. The interme-
diate survey shall be carried out to establish that the unit has not been subject to substantial
damage or deficiencies relative to the regulations in force.
5. A 5-year periodical survey shall normally be carried out in sheltered waters. On special con-
sideration such survey may be carried out outside of sheltered waters when the necessary ar-
rangements have been made. The survey shall cover necessary control of cracks, corrosion,
deformation, and possible fatigue, and also control of wear. The control shall be carried out
using suitable and, as far as practicable, non-destructive test methods. The survey shall cover
all requirements laid down by the Directorate or other public institutions.
6. Units which are laid up for a period of time exceeding 12 months shall be surveyed prior to
being put back in operation. The scope of the survey is decided by the Directorate in each in-
dividual case, taking into consideration, among other things, the maintenance programme in
the laying up period. In order to maintain the validity of the units certificates during the lay-
ing up period the prescribed annual intermediate surveys shall be carried out. In the event
that a unit is laid up, a postponement of the 5-year periodical survey may be granted. How-
ever, the original survey and certification periods will be sustained.
7. Units which are not classed by a MOU classification society are to be surveyed by the Nor-
wegian Maritime Directorate with respect to all requirements contained in the regulations in
force laid down by the Directorate.
Amended by regulations 18 feb 1997 no. 139 (in force 1 jan 1998), 11 April 2003 no. 542 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
The regulation implements Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive) of 3 May 1989 with amendment directive 92/21/EEC.
The EMC Directive applies to all pieces of equipment on mobile offshore units which may cause electromagnetic disturbance
or whose functioning can be influenced by such disturbance. Among others, EMC Directive require CE-marking of all such
equipment.
6
Certificates
1. Units shall be supplied with the following certificates:
1.1. Mobile Unit Certificate of Fitness
1.2. Mobile Unit Safety Construction Certificate
1.3. Mobile Unit Safety Equipment Certificate
1.4. Mobile Unit Load Line Certificate
1.5. Mobile Unit Safety Radio Installation Certificate
1.6. International Oil Pollution prevention Certificate (IOPP-certificate)
1.7. Safety Management Certificate (SMC).
1.8. Specification of crew.
2. The validity of the Certificate of Fitness is dependent on the certificates mentioned in sub-
sections 1.2. to 1.8 above also being valid.
3. As an addition to the certificate mentioned in subsection 1.1 above, two annexes will be is-
sued.
208
Annex 1 indicates the most important constructional and/or operational limitations for the
units. Annex 2 indicates the regulations according to which the units have been constructed
and any non-conformities accepted from those regulations. In addition, a list of any orders
which must be complied with within the specified time limits is to be annexed.
4. Drilling ships shall, in addition to the certificates mentioned in subsection 1 above, be sup-
plied with the national and international certificates prescribed for ships at the time in ques-
tion.
5. The certificates are issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or the institution author-
ized by the Directorate subsequent to completed control and survey in accordance with sec-
tion 5, section 7 and section 8.
6. The certificates mentioned in subsections 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 are issued for a period
of up to five years from the date of completion of the survey without possibility of further ex-
tension.
The certificate mentioned in subsection 1.7 is issued in accordance with the provisions of
the Safety Management System Regulations
1
.
The specification of crew mentioned in subsection 1.8 is issued without a specific period
of validity.
7. The owner of the unit is responsible for the unit being at all times supplied with valid certifi-
cates. The Directorate is to be advised in ample time in advance and at least one month prior
to the expected performance of surveys as required by 5.
8. The wording of certificates as mentioned in subsection 1 shall be as decided by the Directo-
rate.
9. If a unit has been subject to substantial damage, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall be
advised immediately and will decide whether the Certificate of Fitness or other certificates
referred to in subsection 1 shall be considered non-valid, or if the operation shall be subject
to limitations or conditions. Repairs of substantial damage shall be carried out in accordance
with the provisions of these regulations.
10. Certificates as mentioned in subsection 1 above, or if applicable, exemption certificates,
shall be posted in original or certified copy, in a conspicuous and readily accessible position
on board.
Amended by regulations 11 Oct 1996 no. 976 (in force 1 Jan 1997), 11 April 2003 no. 542 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Regulations of 2 March 1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore units.
7
Control
The control to ascertain that a unit is constructed and operated in accordance with the regula-
tions laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate in pursuance of the Seaworthiness Act, or
regulations stipulated by other control authorities, may be carried out by control of drawings and
surveys carried out by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or anyone authorized by the Directo-
rate.
Amended by regulations 18 feb 1997 no. 139 (in force 1 jan 1998), 11 April 2003 no. 542 (in force 1 July 2003).
8
Safety Management System, System Audit and Verification
Control is also carried out through the Owners Safety Management System, cf. regulations of 2
March 1999 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore units. System audit of
the Owners Safety Management System may be carried out by the Directorate to check that the
owner and whoever carries out work for him, have the necessary system and use this in such a
manner that the regulations are complied with. Verification may be carried out by the Directorate
during the construction and operation phases to ensure that activities, products or services are in
accordance with specified requirements laid down in the regulations of the Directorate.
Amended by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 395 (in force 1 Sept 1999).
210
9
Repairs, alterations and conversions
1. Substantial damage to the unit, its installations and equipment shall be reported immediately
to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, which will decide whether the damage is to be sur-
veyed.
2. Alterations and conversions shall be notified to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or any-
one authorized by the Directorate well in advance of the commencement of such activities.
Documentation of compliance with the rules and regulations shall be submitted insofar as it
is requested by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or anyone authorized by the Directorate.
10
Deviations
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may, in individual cases and upon written application,
deviate from the requirements of these regulations. There must be special reasons that make the
deviations necessary and they must be justifiable in terms of safety. If the requirements of the
coastal state and the requirements of these regulations are irreconcilable, the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate may deviate from the requirements insofar as safety considerations allow. Deviations
must not contravene international agreements to which Norway has acceded.
11
Penal provisions
Wilful or negligent violation of these regulations is punishable by fines pursuant to the General
Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, 339 subsection 2, ref. 48a and 48b, unless a more
severe penalty is applicable pursuant to any other statutory provision.
12
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 November 1987.
212
SECTION VI-2:
Safety management system and risk
analysis
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 2 March 1999 no. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for
mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Regulations of 22 December 1993 no. 1239 concerning risk analyses for mobile off-
shore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
394/99 Safety management regulation
214
CONTENTS
Chapter I: Introductory provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Chapter II: General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
3 The obligations of the owner and platform manager . . . . 218
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5 Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Chapter III: Provisions for a Safety Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
7 Requirements for a Safety Management System for de-
sign and construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8 Requirements for a Safety Management System for op-
eration, Safety Management Certificate and Document
of Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
9 Supervision by the authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Chapter IV: Concluding provisions, transitional pro-
visions and entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
11 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Regulations 2 March 1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety
Management System for mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to 9 a and 106 of the Act of 9
June 1903 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships. Cf. Royal Decree of 2 August
1991, and the Ministry of Trades Formal Delegation of 14 August 1991. The regulations have
been notified in accordance with Council Directive 83/189/EEC. Amended 11 April 2003 No.
546, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Preface:
These regulations require the owner to establish, follow up and develop further a Safety Man-
agement System. The Safety Management System is to ensure that activities are in compliance
with the requirements of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate relating to mobile offshore units.
These regulations implement the International Safety Management Code for the Safe Operation
of Ships and for Pollution Prevention (ISM Code), adopted by the International Maritime Organi-
zation (IMO) by resolution A.741(18), as amended by resolution MSC.104(73), making the Code
applicable to all Norwegian mobile offshore units.
Self-propelled mobile offshore units must document ISM Code compliance by carrying a valid
Safety Management Certificate (SMC) and be operated by a company provided with a valid
216
Document of Compliance (DOC) which documents ISM Code compliance for the shore organiza-
tion. SMCs and DOCs are issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
Until 1 July 2002 the company may, as an alternative, comply with the requirements of the Re-
gulations of 28 June 1985 No. 1218 concerning the owners duty with regard to internal control of
mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian register of ships.
The Regulations of 28 June 1985 No. 1218 concerning the owners duty with regard to internal
control of mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian register
of ships will be repealed on 1 July 2002.
Chapter I
Introductory provisions
1
These regulations apply to the establishment, following up and further development of a Safety
Management System for compliance with the requirements of the authorities relating to mobile
offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian register of ships, in areas
regulated by:
a) the Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships.
b) the Norwegian Maritime Code of 24 June 1994 No. 39.
c) the Act of 5 June 1981 No. 42 relating to Certification of Personnel on Norwegian Ships,
Drilling Units and other Mobile Offshore Installations.
2
Definitions
a) Unit: Mobile platforms, including drillships, equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum de-
posits and mobile platforms for uses other than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
b) ISM Code: International Safety Management Code for the Safe Operation of Ships and for
Pollution Prevention (International Safety Management Code), adopted by the International
Maritime Organization (IMO) by resolution A.741(18), as amended by resolution MSC.104
(73).
c) Safety Management System: All systematic efforts which the owner is required to make to
requirements applicable to areas regulated by the legislation mentioned in 1.
d) System audit: Systematic and independent examination to determine whether the Safety
Management System is established, effectively carried out, and appropriate for its purpose.
e) Verification: Confirmation, by investigating and producing objective evidence, that speci-
fied requirements are fulfilled.
218
Chapter II
General provisions
3
The obligations of the owner and platform manager
The owner and the platform manager shall ensure compliance with the provisions of these regu-
lations. Employees shall participate in the introduction and following up of the Safety Manage-
ment System.
4
Deviations
5
Mutual recognition
Requirements laid down by or on behalf of another state which is a party to the European Eco-
nomic Area agreement or by or on behalf of a member of the European Community which are
equivalent to the requirements laid down in this regulation, shall be given equal status.
Documents of Compliance and Safety Management Certificates issued by or on behalf of an-
other state which is a party to the European Economic Area agreement or by or on behalf of a
member of the European Community are deemed to be equivalent to Documents of Compliance
and Safety Management Certificates referred to in this regulation 8.
6
Documentation
The owner shall be able to document compliance with the requirements of these regulations.
Documentation shall be sent to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on demand. The contents, ex-
tent, and type of documentation and the time of its forwarding shall be determined by the Norwe-
gian Maritime Directorate.
220
Chapter III
Provisions for a Safety Management System
7
Requirements for a Safety Management System for design and
construction
The owner is required to establish, follow up and develop further a Safety Management System
to ensure that design and construction are in accordance with the requirements applicable to areas
regulated by the legislation mentioned in 1.
The following elements, inter alia, shall form part of the Safety Management System:
a) Description of the goals of the organization in the areas of safety and protection of the envi-
ronment.
b) Procedures, instructions or other routines describing the planning and carrying out of activ-
ities to reach the goals of the organization.
c) The organization, planning and carrying out of operations with associated activities.
d) Specification of the distribution of responsibilities, authority and tasks, as well as command
structure.
e) An overview of relevant rules and regulations, as well as a description of how the organ-
isation keeps itself updated with regard to the consequences of new or amended legislation.
f) Description of and requirements for documentation and information systems, as well as pro-
cedures for the control and management of these.
g) Procedures and/or instructions for nonconformance treatment and reporting.
h) Plans for the following up and further development of the Safety Management System.
i) Procedures and/or instructions to ensure that contractors involved in activities associated
with mobile offshore units observe the requirements laid down by or pursuant to an Act as
mentioned in 1.
j) Procedures and/or instructions to ensure that competent personnel are used during the plan-
ning and carrying out of activities.
k) Procedures and/or instructions to ensure that the Owners employees and the contractors
employees receive training as required.
All sections of the company shall be provided with all relevant parts of the Safety Management
System.
Responsibility for supervision of the Safety Management System shall lie within a separate sec-
tion of the organization. This section shall have sufficient freedom to supervise all systems and
shall normally be without operative responsibility. The section shall be in direct contact with the
highest level of management.
At regular intervals, the section assigned responsibility for supervision of the Safety Manage-
ment System shall perform system audits, report any nonconformities and follow up the carrying
out of corrective action.
At regular intervals, the other parts of the organization covered by the Safety Management Sys-
tem shall perform verification. The unit carrying out the verification shall have the necessary in-
dependence in relation to the domain which is the subject of verification.
The owner shall ensure that sufficient resources are available for the establishment, following
up and further development of the Safety Management System.
8
Requirements for a Safety Management System for operation, Safety
Management Certificate and Document of Compliance
The Owners Safety Management System for the operation of mobile offshore units shall satis-
fy the requirements of the ISM Code.
222
Mobile offshore units shall have a valid Safety Management Certificate (SMC).
The company shall have a valid Document of Compliance (DOC).
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate shall issue
the documents referred to in the second and third paragraphs of this section.
An SMC or a DOC shall be valid for five years, provided that system audits and verifications
confirm that the Safety Management System fulfils the requirements.
9
Supervision by the authorities
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate may at any
time perform a system audit or verification of the Safety Management System.
Chapter IV
Concluding provisions, transitional provisions and entry into
force
10
Penalty
11
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 January 2000.
Until 1 July 2002 the company may, as an alternative, comply with the requirements of the Re-
gulations of 28 June 1985 No. 1218 concerning the owners duty with regard to internal control of
mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian register of ships.
The Regulations of 28 June 1985 No. 1218 concerning the owners duty with regard to internal
control of mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian register
of ships will be repealed on 1 July 2002.
1239/93 Risk analyses regulation
224
CONTENTS
1 Scope of applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3 The obligations of the owner and master . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Chapter III: Documentation and revision . . . . . . . . . . 232
5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6 Acceptance and approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
7 Revision of the risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Chapter IV: Execution of risk analyses for mobile
offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
8 Qualification requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9 The risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
10 The owners plan for the risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
11 General requirements for the risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12 Concept analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
13 Design analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
14 Construction analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15 Reliability/vulnerability analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
16 Emergency preparedness analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Chapter V: Execution of risk analyses for existing
mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Chapter VI: Acceptance criteria with derived design
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
19 Objectives and acceptance criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
20 Basic acceptance criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
21 Design criteria for safety functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
22 Requirements for equipment and systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
23 Acceptance criteria for accidents at work . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Chapter VII: Identification of accidental events and
systems important for safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
24 Identification of accidental events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
25 Systems important for safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Chapter VIII: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
26 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
27 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Preface
The Regulations stipulate requirements for the execution of risk analyses for Norwegian-regis-
tered mobile offshore units.
The purpose of risk analyses is to carry out a general and overall safety evaluation of mobile
offshore units. By means of the risk analysis the mobile offshore unit is checked against dimen-
sioning accidental events (worst accidental event which the unit is expected to withstand, retain-
ing important, defined safety functions). Dimensioning accidental events may be given in or be
226
derived from a regulation requirement, be defined by the owner or be derived from an analysis of
a possible accident situation.
Through the execution of a risk analysis the aim is to pinpoint targets for risk reducing mea-
sures, including preconditions relating to operations, maintenance, manning and training to be ta-
ken into account during the operation phase.
The risk analysis shall also make a contribution towards ensuring a secure and safe physical
working environment, and prevent pollution from mobile offshore units.
In order to obtain risk reduction, systematically chosen operational risk reducing measures re-
sulting from the risk analysis shall be incorporated into the Safety Management System for mo-
The risk analysis forms part of the basis for the issuance of maritime certificates for mobile off-
shore units.
The risk analysis may serve as documentation for the evaluation of equivalent solutions in
comparison with detail requirements in Regulations for mobile offshore units.
The risk analysis shall cover the mobile offshore unit itself and its operation in normal operat-
ing conditions and in emergency situations, and in transit and in port.
The risk analysis shall also include reliability analyses/vulnerability analyses carried out for
certain systems with equipment important for safety.
The owner shall specify as a precondition for the carrying out of the risk analysis, the standard
operational conditions for the unit, including dimensioning accidental events (worst accidental
event).
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate will evaluate the necessary scope of quantitative analyses
in addition to qualitative analyses, depending on the degree to which the object of analysis is well
known, has been previously analysed and documented.
For the purpose of carrying out risk analyses, aids like recognised standard methods of analysis
for qualitative and/or quantitative analyses should be used. Qualitative methods of analysis may
be of the FMEA, HAZOP or similar types. A method of analysis may also be a combination of a
qualitative and quantity method, such as a risk matrix, in which probability and consequence are
given in a two-dimensional matrix.
A quantitative method may be a fault tree analysis, event tree analysis, block diagrams for the
calculation of reliability etc, including computer-based simulation models, for instance a simula-
tion model where the mobile offshore unit is modelled graphically (CAD model), and in which
possible escalation developments of an accident situation may be simulated, as well as identifica-
tion of redundancy.
The models used should be such that modifications of eg. the units layout, equipment etc. will
involve only a simple and consistent way of recalculating the model, so that a revision of the ana-
lysis due to altered premises may be carried out in the least demanding and most correct manner
possible.
Risk analyses carried out under these regulations shall include all matters on which the issuance
of the maritime certificates is based. Consequently, in addition to covering the areas under the su-
pervision of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, the risk analyses shall also cover areas under
the supervision of MOU classification societies and other supervisory services.
It is the objective of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate to make the necessary arrangements
to enable the owner to use risk analyses under these regulations as documentation to shelf states
requiring risk analyses to be carried out.
Risk analyses will not be required in areas where regulation requirements through previous risk
analyses have proved to be adequate.
Risks beyond and external to those which apply to the mobile offshore unit itself with systems
and equipment, ie. field-related possible accidental events with accidental loads beyond those
given in the annex to the maritime certificates, are presumed to be covered by risk analyses as re-
quired by shelf authorities.
228
Regulations 22 December 1993 No. 1239 concerning risk
analyses for mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 no. 7 relat-
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, 1, 3, 4, 9, 9a, 42, 114, 117, cf Royal De-
cree of 1 December 1978, Royal Decree of 25 May 1984, Formal Delegation by the Ministry of
Trade of 15 January 1979, Formal Delegation by the Ministry of Trade of 6 June 1984, Formal
Delegation by the Ministry of the Environment of 8 January 1980. Amended 10 October 1996 and
2 March 1999. Amended 11 April 2003 No. 501, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter
XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
1
Scope of applicability
1. The regulations apply to mobile offshore units which will be or are registered in a Norwegian
register of ships.
2. Units registered in a Norwegian register of ships may until the next certificate issuance
comply with the requirements in force at the time of the last certificate issuance.
Amended by regulation 11 Oct 1996 no. 981 (in force 1 Jan 1997), 11 April 2003 no. 501 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations.
1. Acceptance criteria: means criteria based on regulations, standards, experience and/or theo-
retical knowledge used as a basis for decisions about acceptable risks. Acceptance criteria
may be expressed verbally or numerically.
2. Other supervisory services involved: means institutions which in addition to the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate exercise supervisory authority pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 relat-
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships.
3. Defined hazard and accident situations: means hazard and accidents situations forming the
basis of establishment of the activitys emergency preparedness.
4. Dimensioning accidental event: means an accidental event which, in accordance with the de-
fined acceptance criteria, represents an unacceptable risk and which therefore forms the ba-
sis of the design and use of the mobile offshore unit and its emergency preparedness.
5. Dimensioning base accidental load: means the greatest load which the mobile offshore unit
must be capable of withstanding for a length of time sufficient to allow all persons on board
and, if necessary, the mobile offshore unit to be brought to safety, and which therefore forms
the basis of the design and use of the unit and its emergency preparedness.
6. FMEA: means Failure Mode and Effect Analysis.
7. FTA: means Fault Tree Analysis.
230
9. MOU classification society: A recognized classification society with which there is an addi-
tional agreement on its carrying out inspections and surveys, etc. on mobile offshore units.
The following societies are MOU classification societies:
10. HAZOP: means Hazard and Operability Analysis.
11. Mobile offshore unit: means a mobile platform, including drilling ship, equipped for drilling
for subsea petroleum deposits, and mobile platform for other purposes than drilling for sub-
sea petroleum deposits.
13. Reliability/vulnerability analysis: means an analysis which, based on the systems/equip-
ments design, structural restrictions, layout etc., considers the probability of functional fai-
lure, including an assessment of any weak sides of the system/equipment.
14. Owner: means whosoever contracts and/or is responsible for the operation of a unit.
15. Risk: means an expression of the hazard represented by an undesirable incident to human be-
ings, the environment or material assets. The risk is expressed as the probability of, and con-
sequences of, an accidental event.
16. Risk analysis: means a systematic procedure to describe and/or calculate the risk to persons
on board, the environment and the mobile offshore unit itself. The risk analysis is carried out
by identifying undesirable incidents and the causes and consequences hereof.
17. Vital operating system: means a system used in normal operating situations, the failure of
which can cause a major accident.
18. Safety and emergency system: means a system with a designated safety and emergency func-
tion of which shall be activated in the event of an abnormal incident, the failure of which can
cause serious escalation of the incident.
19. Safety functions: means functions to ensure that control of the unit, escape and evacuation
are possible after an accidental event has occurred.
20. Accidental event: means an uncontrolled event which may lead to loss of human life, person-
al injury, damage to the environment and financial loss.
21. Verification: Confirmation, by investigating and producing objective evidence, that speci-
fied requirements are fulfilled.
Chapter II
General provisions
3
The obligations of the owner and master
The owner and the master shall ensure compliance with the provisions of these regulations
1
.
1
232
4
Deviations
Chapter III
Documentation and revision
5
Documentation
The owner shall be able to document that the requirements of this regulation are complied with.
Documentation shall be sent to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on request. The contents,
scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by the Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate.
6
Acceptance and approval
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 501 (in force 1 July 2003).
7
Revision of the risk analysis
1. The owner shall, if necessary, revise the risk analysis if the preconditions of the analysis have
been altered as a consequence of physical modifications of the unit, and also take account of
technical development and experience of accidents.
Considerable alterations of working conditions and operating conditions shall be incorpo-
rated into the owners Safety Management System with subsequent corrections of the risk
analysis.
The owner shall establish criteria for determining when to revise the risk analysis.
2. When the unit undergoes its 5-year periodical survey the status of the risk analysis, or, where
appropriate, the revised risk analysis, shall be reviewed by the owner and the protection and
environment committee.
Chapter IV
Execution of risk analyses for mobile offshore units
Heading amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 501 (in force 1 July 2003).
234
8
Qualification requirements
The risk analysis shall be carried out by a group having the following members:
a) personnel having technical/practical and operational experience in the operation of units
b) persons who can provide documentary evidence of knowledge of, and experience in, the ex-
ecution of risk analysis, and who are familiar with the units technical and operational sys-
tems
c) Head Safety Delegate
9
The risk analysis
The risk analysis shall be divided into the following sub-analyses:
a) Concept analysis
b) Design analysis
c) Construction analysis
d) Reliability/vulnerability analysis
e) Contingency analysis (may be incorporated into a, b, and c)
For mobile offshore units which have already been put into operation or units which are regis-
tered in a Norwegian register of ships after construction, no concept or design analysis is required.
10
The owners plan for the risk analysis
1. The owner shall prepare a plan for the execution of the risk analysis.
2. The plan shall contain:
a) A specification of which persons in the owning company are responsible for the ex-
ecution of the risk analysis, including the persons in the owning company responsible
for following up the analysis results in further work with the mobile offshore unit.
b) The owners specification of the standard intended operation which the mobile off-
shore unit with equipment is expected to carry out.
c) A specification of the vital operating systems and safety and emergency systems for
which the owner will carry out reliability/vulnerability analyses.
d) The dimensioning accidental events/accidental loads defined by the owner, for which
the owner wishes to dimension the unit, and which form the basis for the use of the un-
it.
e) The dimensioning accidental events/accidental loads given in or derived from other
relevant regulation requirements.
f) The acceptance criteria defined by the owner beyond the requirements of these regu-
lations, cf. Chapter VI, and requirements of other relevant regulations.
g) Time schedule for the execution of the risk analysis with sub-analyses.
11
General requirements for the risk analysis
1. The risk analysis for mobile offshore units shall document that the unit satisfies acceptance
criteria as set out in these regulations and acceptance criteria defined by the owner, after the
necessary risk reducing measures have been taken.
2. The scope of the risk analysis may be limited where risks have previously been documented
to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
236
3. If the operator or the operators sub-contractor brings on board equipment which may affect
the risk level, additional analyses shall be carried out, covering the actual equipment and the
way in which it affects the mobile offshore units other systems and emergency preparedness
on board.
4. The risk analysis shall include:
a) The owners general operational conditions and the necessary technical documenta-
tion with associated structural restrictions.
b) Specified dimensioning accidental events, and the consequences which such events
may have for the mobile offshore unit, persons on board and pollution of the environ-
ment.
c) Where appropriate, new dimensioning accidental events and/or modifications of those
originally specified by the owner.
d) Risk evaluation against the owners acceptance criteria and relevant regulation re-
quirements.
e) Sub-analyses as referred to in 9, including special risk evaluations required by other
relevant regulations for mobile offshore units.
f) In addition to technical malfunctions etc., the risk analysis shall attempt to take ac-
count of malfunctions of the human factor.
g) Evaluation of various important risk areas, of whether the introduction of new tech-
nology, modified operational procedures etc., have contributed to previous risk mo-
dels, data etc. having become invalid, or the preconditions of the same having been al-
tered. The risk model of a blowout, for which a detailed analysis must be carried out
for each mobile offshore unit, is of particular importance in this connection.
h) A technical environmental analysis identifying the potential for reducing the risk of
pollution, in a normal condition and in an accident situation.
5. The risk analysis shall consider, i.a., the following:
a) Whether local accidental events may lead to the loss of systems important for safety,
cf. 25.
b) Whether accidental events may be restricted to one area, e.g. by physical barriers and
emergency shut-down systems.
c) Whether an accidental event will escalate if several systems fail successively.
d) Whether efficient emergency action may be carried out, using the planned safety and
emergency system.
e) Whether escape, removal of persons to a safe area, emergency transit and evacuation
by sea or other forms of evacuation would be possible.
6. The risk analysis shall result in:
a) A list of the dimensioning accidental events/accidental loads analysed in the risk ana-
lysis, and which are to be specified in an annex to the maritime certificates.
b) A list of recommended, systematically chosen constructional risk-reducing measures
to be taken before the mobile offshore unit is put into operation. Probability-reducing
measures shall be given priority over consequence-reducing measures.
c) A list of systematically chosen risk reducing measures relating to operations, mainte-
nance, contingency, training and manning, presumed to be taken by the owner in the
operational phase.
d) A conclusion stating whether the mobile offshore unit is considered capable of satis-
fying the acceptance criteria in accordance with these regulations and the acceptance
criteria defined by the owner (cf. 10 subsection 2 f, 19, 20, 21, 22 and 23).
12
Concept analysis
The lay-out analysis shall be carried out in an early phase, in order that potential hazards may
be identified and eliminated or minimised through layout and constructional measures.
238
The lay-out analysis shall in particular consider the safety of new methods of arranging sys-
tems, operating or organising activities.
1. The concept analysis shall include:
a) The mobile offshore units layout, including subdivision and location of systems im-
portant for safety, and power supply, control systems, cable routing etc., and the loca-
tion of these in relation to each other.
b) The need for duplication and segregation of systems, and any necessary barriers in the
event of an accident.
c) Consideration of accidental events within any area/space, and whether such events
will put vital systems out of operation. Including how safety and emergency systems
can be arranged in order to be operative in the event of such accidents.
2. The concept analysis shall result in:
a) Lists in accordance with the requirements of 11 subsection 6 a, b and c.
b) Conclusion in accordance with the requirement of 11 subsection 6 d.
13
Design analysis
The design analysis is to bring the concept analysis up to date and extend it by incorporating re-
sults from analyses completed in accordance with requirements of these regulations, including en-
hanced detailed knowledge of layout and systems etc.
1. The design analysis shall include:
a) Alterations in design, location of equipment and systems etc., in relation to the con-
cept analysis.
b) Results of reliability/vulnerability analyses carried out by sub-contractors for vital op-
erating systems and safety and emergency systems.
c) Results of special risk evaluations in accordance with requirements of other regula-
tions for mobile offshore units.
2. The design analysis shall result in:
a) Adjusted lists in accordance with the requirements of 11 subsection 6 a, b and c.
b) Conclusion in accordance with the requirement of 11 subsection 6 d.
14
Construction analysis
The construction analysis is to bring the design analysis up to date for areas in which it has been
necessary to carry out alterations during the construction phase.
1. The construction analysis shall include:
a) Alterations in design, location of equipment and systems etc. in relation to the design
analysis.
b) Final constructional limits and restrictions on the equipment and systems.
2. The construction analysis shall result in:
a) A final list of dimensioning accidental events/loads to be specified in an annex to the
maritime certificates.
b) A final list specifying how the recommended constructional risk-reducing measures
have been implemented, and/or taken account of through compensating measures of
an operational kind.
c) A final list of special risk-reducing measures relating to operations, maintenance, con-
tingency and manning, to be taken by the owner in the operational phase, and which
are presumed to be incorporated into the Owners Safety Management System. In-
cluding incorporation into the operations manual, maintenance system, training plan,
contingency manual, organisation plan, and to be taken into consideration when the
size of the manning and qualifications of the crew are determined.
240
d) The final conclusion establishing whether the mobile offshore unit meets the accept-
ance criteria of these regulations, cf. Chapter VI and 10 subsection 2 f.
15
Reliability/vulnerability analysis
In the risk analysis the owner shall incorporate a reliability/vulnerability analysis from every
vendor of vital operating systems and safety and emergency systems. The result of the reliability/
vulnerability analyses shall be incorporated into and taken into account in the design analysis and
construction analysis.
1. The reliability/vulnerability analysis shall include, i.a.:
a) The vendors general operational conditions and constructional restrictions, and the
necessary technical documentation for equipment/systems.
b) Identification and probability of critical single failures, and an identification of weak-
nesses in the system in an accidental event.
c) The owner/subvendor shall also describe consequences resulting from possible crit-
ical single failures.
d) All preconditions in connection with installation, testing and operation on board.
2. The reliability/vulnerability analysis shall result in:
a) A list of constructional restrictions for vital operating systems and safety and emer-
gency systems.
b) A list of recommended constructional risk-reducing measures to be taken before the
mobile offshore unit is put into operation.
c) Proposals for systems to combat accidental events in the system/equipment con-
cerned.
d) A list of operational, maintenance and contingency measures presumed to be taken by
the owner in the operational phase.
e) The necessary manning and qualification requirements for the operation of the sys-
tem/equipment concerned.
f) A conclusion specifying whether the system/equipment concerned is considered to be
capable of meeting the acceptance criteria of these regulations, cf. Chapter VI, 22.
16
Emergency preparedness analysis
1. An emergency preparedness analysis shall form part of the risk analysis, i.e. contingency
preparedness shall be considered in the concept, design and construction analyses.
2. The emergency preparedness analysis shall be carried out on the basis of the defined hazard
and accidental events, including the dimensioning accidental events with the accidental
loads forming part of the risk analysis, and shall include the vital operating systems and safe-
ty and emergency systems on the mobile offshore unit.
3. The emergency preparedness analysis shall result in:
a) A list of constructional and operative contingency measures. The conclusions of the
reliability/vulnerability analysis (cf. 15 subsection 2 c and d) shall be included.
b) A list of necessary safety and emergency equipment, including its planned use in var-
ious defined hazard and accidental events.
c) A description of specific contingency requirements to be implemented in order to
meet the acceptance criteria.
4. Defined hazard and accident situations with contingency plans shall be described and in-
corporated into the contingency manual, including technical, organisational, operational and
training measures in connection with emergency preparedness on board. A summary emer-
gency preparedness plan, including warning procedures, shall be prepared as an introduction
to the contingency manual.
242
5. The owners training manual shall contain a training programme developed with its basis in
the defined accidental events. Special emphasis shall be placed on training contingency mea-
sures preventing further development of defined hazards and accidents and dimensioning ac-
cidental events.
6. The total contingency, including technical, organisational, operational and training matters,
shall be reviewed at least once per year to maintain and improve the level of safety on board.
Chapter V
Execution of risk analyses for existing mobile offshore units
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 501, in force 1 July 2003.
Chapter VI
Acceptance criteria with derived design criteria
19
Objectives and acceptance criteria.
1. The risk of accidental events involving persons, the unit and the environment shall be re-
duced as far as practicable.
2. The owner may specify his own acceptance criteria beyond the requirements of these regula-
tions, adapted to the mobile offshore units constructional and operational conditions.
3. In the risk analysis the owner shall specify the overall objectives of safety, for the unit and its
personnel in the operational phase. Based on the overall objectives, specific sub-objectives
shall be set out for the planning and carrying out of safety work, which shall be subject to
current evaluation during the operational phase in accordance with the overall objectives.
The results of the risk analysis (cf. 14 subsection 2) shall form the basis for the owners
continued safety work in day-to-day operation to reduce risks.
20
Basic acceptance criteria
1. The mobile offshore unit shall be capable of withstanding defined dimensioning accidental
events/loads in accordance with criteria given in these regulations (cf. 21), other regula-
tions or as prescribed by the owner.
2. It shall be highly probable that the safety functions (SF) as set out in 21 of the regulations
will remain intact during a dimensioning accidental event for a sufficient period of time to be
able to control and combat the accident, to carry out emergency transit and/or evacuation.
3. Acceptance criteria shall also cover risks which are not a consequence of direct accidental
events, but which nevertheless expose personnel on board to harmful effects which, in turn,
may cause accidents, as for instance poisoning due to incorrect treatment of foodstuffs/pot-
able water.
21
Design criteria for safety functions
1. Safety functions:
Based on acceptance criteria as set out in 19 and 20, general minimum design criteria
are derived for safety functions as specified below:
a) SF 1. Escape routes
1
:
244
In an accidental event there shall be at least one escape route from every space/area,
leading to a temporary refuge (TR). It shall be possible to maintain escape routes to
temporary refuges for at least 15 minutes.
b) SF 2. Temporary refuges (TR)
1
:
It shall be possible to maintain a temporary refuge for all persons on board for at
least 30 minutes, in order that it will be possible to await further development of the
accident, combat the accident and if necessary carry out an evacuation by sea from
this area.
Where it can be documented that the unit has a compensating ability to carry out a
speedy emergency transit, e.g. away from a blowout, fire on the sea or similar inci-
dent, a shorter period of time for protection against accidental loads against the tem-
porary refuge may be stipulated.
A temporary refuge for all persons on board shall be located near the main evacu-
ation appliances and be built-in, insulated against fire, and fitted with suitable ventila-
tion to keep out smoke and other gases.
Important monitoring and control functions shall be located in the temporary re-
fuge, e.g communication sets, unit shutdown panel and means for the activation of
fixed fire-extinguishing systems, deluge systems etc..
c) SF 3. Supporting structure:
The hull, including lifeboat platforms etc. shall remain intact for a period of time
sufficient to allow emergency transit and/or evacuation of the unit to be carried out.
d) SF 4. Evacuation appliances:
It shall be possible to use the main evacuation appliances for all persons on board,
in any dimensioning accidental event and in any weather.
e) SF 5. Vital systems which shall be intact/capable of functioning to a necessary degree
in a dimensioning accidental event:
Important control functions to ensure control shall be kept intact for a period of
time necessary to prevent accident aggravation, and to combat an accident before a
possible evacuation is carried out.
1
Ref. regulation of 11 April 2003 no. 492 concerning life-saving appliances and evacuation on mobile offshore units.
22
Requirements for equipment and systems
1. Possible single faults in equipment and systems shall not cause critical incidents. Possible
critical single faults shall be disclosed by the reliability/vulnerability analysis, and shall be
eliminated by constructional measures. Where elimination is not possible, the critical com-
ponent or, if relevant, parts of the system, shall be listed in the analysis with accompanying
suggestions of systematically chosen risk-reducing measures, including measures in respect
of operation and maintenance, and requirements for personnel with qualifications to ensure a
low probability of failure.
2. Vital operating systems and safety and emergency systems shall be redundant. This shall be
achieved by segregation, duplication, protection against common mode failure or similar, in
order that a failure/accidental event in an area/space will not cause functional failure.
3. The degree of redundancy of the individual system/piece of equipment may be adapted to the
degree of hazard of a functional failure in the same system/piece of equipment, assessed
against:
a) Component reliability.
b) The design of a system/piece of equipment to avoid a fault leading to critical function-
al failure (fail to safety).
c) Maintenance.
d) Training and practice.
246
23
Acceptance criteria for accidents at work
1. Work shall be planned and carried out in such a way that injury prohability for is diminished.
2. A work permit shall be issued for special operations not covered by the owners operations
manual, based on a safe job analysis. The work permit shall contain instructions to be fol-
lowed when the work is carried out.
Chapter VII
Identification of accidental events and systems important for
safety
24
Identification of accidental events
Through carrying out of the risk analysis, the owner shall identify possible dimensioning acci-
dental events with dimensioning accidental loads, in order to evaluate the overall risk picture of
the unit.
1. For all mobile offshore units, the risk analysis shall as a minimum consider whether the fol-
lowing accidental events are relevant:
a) Collisions:
Collision with supply ship.
Collision with merchant ship.
Collision with fishing vessel.
Collision with standby vessel.
Collision with underwater craft.
Collision with drifting objects.
b) Incorrect weight distribution:
Shifting of deck cargo.
Shifting of ballast.
Icing.
c) Falling objects:
Shifting, falling deck cargo.
Falling crane booms.
Falling crane lifts.
d) Drift:
Line breakage.
Multiple line breakage/dragging anchor.
Failure of dynamic positioning system.
Winch failure.
e) Helicopter accident on the unit.
f) Hull/structural failure.
g) Fires in enclosed spaces:
Fire in accommodation spaces.
Fire in machinery spaces.
Fire in work rooms.
h) Explosions in machinery spaces and other equipment rooms.
i) Loss of control during transit:
Collision during transit.
Grounding.
Towing failure.
248
j) Incorrect operation of systems, including systems treating foodstuffs (storage method
etc.) and potable water.
2. Accidental events to be specially considered for mobile offshore units engaged in explora-
tion and production drilling:
a) Hydrocarbon blowout:
Shallow gas blowout on seabed.
Shallow gas blowout underneath drilling floor or in diverter system.
Reservoir blowout on drilling floor.
Blowout caused by various possible events.
b) fire due to release of hydrocarbons:
Fire in mudpit.
Fire in shaleshaker room.
Fire in well stream testing system.
c) Explosions due to release of hydrocarbons:
Explosion in mudpit.
Explosion in shaleshaker room.
Explosion in well stream testing area.
3. Accidental events to be specially considered for crane vessels:
a) Failure in dynamic ballasting systems.
b) Falling cargo.
c) Critical accidental events in connection with crane operations in general.
4. Accidental events to be specially considered for pipe-laying vessels:
a) Critical accidental events in connection with pipe-laying in general.
5. Accidental events to be specially considered for diving vessels:
a) Critical accidental events in connection with diving operations in general.
6. Accidental events to be specially considered for production vessels:
a) Release of hydrocarbons, etc.:
Release of hydrocarbons from processing equipment.
Release of hydrocarbons from risers, manifolds and cross connections to process-
ing equipment.
Release of hydrocarbons from storage tanks.
Release of hydrocarbons from loading and unloading systems.
Release of SOx.
Release of NOx.
7. Accidental events to be specially considered for flotels:
a) Smoke and gas due to fire, release from nearby installations.
b) Accident involving gangway.
c) Narrow escape routes.
d) Evacuation possibilities, in view of a large number of persons, life-saving appliances
etc.
25
Systems important for safety
A reliability/vulnerability analysis shall be carried out for vital operating systems and safety
and emergency systems.
1. Vital operating systems are, inter alia:
Ballast/sounding system and watertight subdivision.
Anchoring and positioning system.
Electrical power supply.
Fuel oil system.
Drilling system.
Machinery monitoring system.
250
Ventilation of electronic equipment.
Ventilation of hazardous areas.
2. Safety and emergency systems are, inter alia:
Alarm systems.
Emergency communication systems.
Well control system.
Emergency shut-down system.
Ventilation with damper system.
Structural safety systems, fire partitions, etc.
Fire pump system.
Fixed fire-extinguishing system.
Electrical emergency power supply.
Evacuation system.
Chapter VIII
Concluding provisions
26
Penalty
27
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force 1 January 1994 for new mobile offshore units and 1 Septem-
ber 1994 for existing mobile offshore units.
252
SECTION VI-3:
Construction
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 856 concerning construction of mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Regulations of 31 January 1984 no. 227 concerning precautionary measures against fire
and explosion on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 857 concerning anchoring/positioning systems
Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision
and watertight/weathertight closing means on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 879 concerning ballast systems on mobile off-
shore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Regulations of 17 December 1986 no. 2318 concerning the construction and equipment
of living quarters on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Regulations of 10 February 1994 No. 123 for mobile offshore units with production
plants and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Regulations of 22 December 1993 no. 1240 concerning helicopter decks on mobile
offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 860 concerning potable water systems and pot-
able water supply on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Regulations of 17 December 1986 no. 2319 concerning field moves and towing of mo-
bile offshore units and concerning towing system and mooring of supply ships at such
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
856/87 Construction regulation
254
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5 System audit, verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6 Construction and strength etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6a Electrical installations and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
6b Machinery systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
7 Operation in areas with temperatures considerably lower
than 0C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
8 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
9 Freeboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
10 Distance between sea level and deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
11 Emergency power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12 Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
13 Marking and navigational aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
14 Fixed means of access, ladders, stairs, railings etc. out-
side the accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
15 Doors, corridors and passages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
16 Decks and flooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
17 Railings and enclosures, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
18 Ventilation outside the living quarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
19 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
20 Portable electric equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
21 Special purpose containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
22 Drilling installations and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
23 Passenger and cargo lifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
24 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
25 Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
26 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
27 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
APPENDIX I Appendix to 6 subsection 2.11.1 Environ-
mental data, meteorological data, and mobile
unit performance data, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
APPENDIX II Appendix to 8 Wind tunnel test
procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
APPENDIX III Requirements for fixed, battery-operated
emergency lights with reference to 7 to be
installed on units which shall be capable of
operating in areas with temperatures consid-
erably lower than 0C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
256
construction of mobile offshore units
to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships 1, 9a, 35, 41 first paragraph, 41 a, 42, 47, 48,
55, 68, and 69, cf. Royal Decrees of 12 October 1962, 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978, and 25
May 1984, and also Formal Delegations of 15 January 1979 and 6 June 1984. Amended 12 May
1989, 22 May 1990, 1 November 1990, 29 February 1994, 10 October 1996 and 18 February
1997. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended regulations have been notified in accordance with
Council Directive 83/189/EEC. Amended 11 April 2003 No. 496, cf. the EEA Agreement Appen-
dix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
1
Definitions
Upon request, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in each individual case use other
recognized classification societies for the carrying out of inspections and surveys, etc. on
mobile offshore units.
4. Functional loads: Constant static loads (aggregate weight of structure and fixed equipment).
Movable static loads (weight of equipment, etc.). Variable static loads (weight of supplies,
ballast, etc.). Dynamic loads (loads from cranes, etc.).
5. Environmental loads: Waves, wind, current, tide, marine growth, temperatures, sea bed con-
ditions.
6. Water level: Depth as given in the chart.
9. Special purpose containers: Containers to be used for purposes other than transport and/or
storage of goods (such as test containers, workshop containers, diesel generator containers
etc.).
10. Fire-resistant cabel: Fire-resistant according to the International Electrotechnical Commis-
sion - 331 (IEC-331).
11. Certified:
a) In respect of equipment and materials: Equipment which satisfies the requirements
specified or materials complying with a recognized standard which are certified, ap-
proved or type-approved by:
258
a Notified Body,
an accredited certifying body,
a recognized classification society,
other public or private institution which is recognized by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate, or
the administration of a country that has ratified the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS)
Convention.
b) In respect of the execution of work: Personnel who according to regulatory require-
ments are required to hold special qualifications for performing specific tasks and cer-
tified by:
an accredited certifying body, or
otherpublic or private institution which is recognized by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
Amended by regulations 12 May 1989, 22 May 1990, 29 Dec 1998 no. 1467 (in force 1 Jan 1999), 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in
force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
1. These regulations apply to mobile offshore units which are or will be registered in a Norwe-
gian ship register.
2. Mobile offshore units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register may, until the next
certificate issue, comply with the requirements that applied at the time of the last certificate
issue.
3. For units which will be used in areas outside the North Sea for some length of time or which
are built especially for operation in such areas, other solutions than those prescribed in these
regulations may be accepted if local conditions indicate that this is justifiable. A prerequisite
of such solutions is that the safety of crew and equipment corresponds to that which applies
to operation in the North Sea for units constructed and operated in accordance with the provi-
sions governing such acitvities.
In this connection The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may certify mobile offshore units
according to IMOs Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling
Units, 1989 (1989 MODU-Code, A.649(16)).
4. The owner shall make a general evaluation of the total safety and document that alternative
solutions as referred to under subsection 4 above will give satisfactory safety.
Amended by regulations 28 Feb 1994 no. 153, 11 Oct 1996 no. 980 (in force 1 July 1997), 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1
Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
3
The owner and platform manager shall ensure compliance with the provisions of these regula-
tions
1
.
1
4
Documentation
1. The owner shall be able to document that the requirements of these regulations are complied
with. Documentation shall be sent to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on request. The
contents, scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by the
Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
260
2. For units being built for classification in a MOU classification society, drawings, specifica-
tions, information, etc. concerning those matters (control areas) that are delegated shall be
submitted to the MOU classification society in question. The classification society shall re-
port to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate in accordance with the terms of the agreement
between the two parties.
3. For units which are not classed by a MOU classification society, the owner shall be able to
document a safety standard that is equivalent to that of units having such class.
4. The owner shall be able to document that electrical installations and area classification (haz-
ardous areas) comply with the regulation in force on maritime electrical installations laid
down by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning. The con-
tents, scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by the Nor-
wegian Directorate for Fire and Electrical Safety, which upon request shall receive the re-
quested documentation directly.
1
Amended by regulations 18 Feb 1997 no. 142 (in force 1 Jan 1998), 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April
2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
equipment.
5
System audit, verification
Repealed by regulations 11 April 2003 no. 496, in force 1 July 2003.
6
Construction and strength etc.
1. General
1.1. The unit shall be constructed in such a manner as to be strong enough to withstand the
weather and wind conditions which may be anticipated in the areas in which the unit
shall operate. The unit shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the most unfavour-
able combination of maximum environmental and functional loads.
2. Calculations
2.1. A strength calculation of the unit, such as hull, deck, legs, leg supports, elevating and
locking system for legs, deck houses, fenders, and other main structural members,
shall be carried out. The elevating machinery for jack-up units shall be constructed to
lift 50% over normal loading. The locking system for the legs shall be designed for 3
times normal loading.
2.2. Calculations shall be carried out for the relevant loading conditions with the most un-
favourable combination of maximum environmental and functional loads.
2.3. The calculations shall be carried out in accordance with the design criteria and calcu-
lation methods in force at any time of a MOU classification society.
2.4. For submersible and self-elevating unit a calculation shall be carried out showing that
the unit has a safety factor of 1.5 against capsizing (proportion between stabilising and
overturning moment). When calculating the capsizing moment the most unfavourable
combination of environmental and functional loads shall be taken into account. The
moment shall be calculated around the maximum stressed edge of the foundation of
the legs.
2.5. In selecting materials for hull and legs, temperature conditions which may be expect-
ed shall where necessary be taken into consideration. In constructions exposed to spe-
cial stresses, such as legs etc., steel of good resistance capability against brittle frac-
ture and which is certified by a recognized classification society shall be used.
2.6. Where material fatigue may occur due to variable load, this must be taken into ac-
count during the design stage.
262
2.7. Vibration due to wind, waves, and propulsion machinery etc. and which can cause
damage to unit or legs, shall be examined and if possible avoided.
2.8. The unit shall be calculated for the stresses which may be anticipated from fenders
and other mooring attachments.
2.9. The maximum wave height and related wave period or similar criteria which the unit
is intended to tolerate during jacking down, short hauls (less than 12 hours between
positions where it is safe and possible to jack up the unit) and long hauls, and under
what maximum conditions jacking up can be commenced to avoid damage to the unit,
shall be calculated. Similar calculations shall be carried out for submersible and semi-
submersible units in order to establish under what maximum conditions the unit can
be towed/sailed before it has to be submerged.
Practical information on the limitations established by these calculations shall be
included in the operation manual for use on board. Where it is practicable to take ac-
tion to reduce the risk of damage to the unit during towing/sailing, for instance by al-
tering speed and/or course, lowering of legs, etc., necessary practical information on
these precautions shall be included in the operation manual.
2.10. All decks for cargo shall be calculated for a certain maximum deck load per m
2
in ad-
dition to loads from constant static loads. The operation manual shall contain practical
information about the maximum allowable deck loadings.
3. Meteorological data (M data) and unit performance data (P data)
3.1. All units shall have equipment and instruments on board for the collection of the fol-
lowing M data:
air temperature and atmospheric pressure
humidity
wind force and direction (mean values for a 10-minute period)
weather since previous observation
sea temperature and state
visibility
3.2. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may require that the owner send in M data to the
Norwegian Meteorological Institute.
3.3. For units of a novel construction (design), the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may
require that the owner collect experience data for the units performance and move-
ments (P data).
4. Construction and control
4.1. Only welders certified according to NS-E1-287 part 1 or to an equivalent standard
shall carry out welding of main structures.
4.2. A 100% welding control of all important joints and other important connections and
welding constructions shall be carried out by means of x-ray, ultrasonic, magnaflux or
similar methods. Furthermore, the welding control shall be carried out to such extent
as to ensure that the work has been satisfactorily carried out.
4.3. Construction connections and joints and other important details shall be so construct-
ed that stress concentrations are avoided as far as practicable.
4.4. Plates in main structures loaded in directions of the thickness shall be ultrasonically
tested before welded into the construction. In addition ultrasonic checks shall be made
after welding to ensure that the plate has not been laminated during welding.
4.5. There shall be good alignment between scantlings on each side of transverse mem-
bers.
5. Elevating system of jackup units
5.1. The elevating system of the unit shall be so constructed that the relative position of
legs and unit can be controlled during a cut-off of the power supply to the elevating in-
stallation or one of the elevating installations of a leg.
5.2. The elevating system shall be constructed in such a manner that it is possible to pre-
load each of the legs with a load which is heavier than the load which will occur dur-
ing all operational conditions in a jacked-up position.
264
5.3. Self-elevating units must have legs suitable for the existing sea bed conditions in drill-
ing position.
6. Drainage from decks
The decks of the unit shall be constructed in such a manner that shipped water easily drains
off.
7. Securing of superstructures and equipment during heeling
7.1. The units superstructures and fixed equipment shall be constructed and mounted in
such a manner that they will be able to withstand heeling corresponding to the most
unfavourable angle of heel in any direction which the unit could get following damage
as defined in 21 of the Stability Regulations.
1
7.2. The unit shall be so constructed that all equipment which is not fixed and which may
block escape routes or represent a danger for the persons on board by displacement or
heeling, may be secured in a safe manner in order to withstand the above mentioned
angle of heel.
1
Cf Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight clos-
ing means on mobile offshore units.
6a
Electrical installations and equipment
Electrical installations and equipment shall be in accordance with the regulation in force on ma-
ritime electrical installations, and the regulation on electrical equipment.
1,2
Added by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Ref. the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning.
2
or whose functioning may be influenced by such disturbance. Amongst other things, the EMC Directive provides that all such
equipment must be CE-marked.
6b
Machinery systems
1. Machinery, appurtenant systems and components shall be in accordance with the rules of the
MOU classification society pertaining to mobile offshore units. This includes:
machinery, appurtenant systems and single components in general;
main and auxiliary machinery;
propulsion and steering arrangement;
boilers, pressure vessels, thermal oil installations and incinerators;
pumps and piping related to the machinery systems and the hull; and
ventilation of machinery spaces with combustion machinery.
2. Machinery installations in hazardous areas shall be in accordance with chapter 6.7 of the
MODU Code (1989).
Added by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
7
Operation in areas with temperatures considerably lower than 0C
1. For units which are desired to be able to operate in areas with a daily mean temperature be-
low 0C, it shall be possible to document that the unit will be able to operate safely under the
environmental conditions in question.
2. On 22 August 1988, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate laid down requirements for fixed,
battery-operated emergency lights to be installed on units which shall be able to operate in
areas with temperatures considerably lower than 0C. Those requirements are included as
Appendix III to these regulations. The owner shall supply information about the maximum
266
environmental conditions (temperature in air and sea, air humidity, etc.) under which it is de-
sired to operate.
3. Documentation
3.1. The documentation for operation under these environmental conditions shall be pos-
sible to submit as:
Technical documentation
Operation instructions
3.2. It is a condition that under technical documentation all documentation of the unit as
such has been included, as well as documentation that all relevant equipment and sys-
tems have been constructed to operate under the specified environmental conditions.
Grouping of the documentation may for instance be:
3.2.1. Construction of the unit as such. (For instance hull, crane pedestal, derrick
foundation, helicopter deck, etc.).
3.2.2. Systems and equipment for daily normal operation of the unit. (For instance
cranes, ballast systems, anchoring systems, fresh water systems, air, systems,
ventilation etc.).
3.2.3. Systems and equipment for operation during emergency situations. (For in-
stance alarm systems, battery emergency lighting, life-saving equipment, fire
line, rapid release of anchor winches etc.).
3.2.4. Structural strength consequence of formation of ice loads on components and
equipment. (For instance under helicopter decks, on crane arms, pipelines, ca-
ble conduits, etc).
3.2.5. Estimate of maximum assumed ice loads as well as load condition with this
ice load included. With regard to stability the result shall satisfy the KG limit
value in question.
3.2.6. Arrangement and equipment for keeping certain areas of the unit free of ice.
(For instance defrosting system for escape routes, life-saving equipment,
work areas, etc.).
3.2.7. Protection in order to prevent critical conditions in the working environment.
(For instance wind screens or walls, heating).
3.2.8. Equipment to compensate for the safety consequences represented by a clos-
ed construction. (For instance gas alarm systems, ventilation systems etc.).
3.2.9. Use of materials in equipment and systems. (For instance cold critical mate-
rials in anchor winches and counter measures, e.g. heating).
3.2.10. Drilling equipment.
4. Operation manual
An operation manual shall be worked out, including the measures necessary for safe and se-
cure operation in areas with a daily mean temperature below 0 C. The instructions shall
draw clear lines for when operative measures must be taken, for instance at low temperatures
during a long period of time, low temperatures combined with high air humidity (danger of
ice formation) etc. The operation manual shall also state necessary measures to take in the
event that the design criteria are exceeded, for instance in case of greater ice formation than
presupposed in the stability calculations, or lower temperatures than those for which the unit
has been documented.
Amended by regulation 22 august 1988, 1 Nov 1990, 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
8
Stability
Repealed by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 402, in force 1 Sept 1999.
268
9
Freeboard
Repealed by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 402, in force 1 Sept 1999.
10
Distance between sea level and deck
1. The lower deck of the unit shall be at a safe distance from the sea level.
1.1. Semi-submersible units
1.1.1. The distance between the lower deck and the sea level is governed by the
freeboard. For provisions on freeboard and load line conditions, reference is
made to 29 of the Stability Regulations.
1
1.1.2. If the unit is intended to pump over board ballast in heavy weather in order to
increase the distance between the lower deck and the sea level, the procedure
on when and how such operation shall be carried out shall be included in the
operation manual.
1.1.3. By means of model tests or by calculation it shall be shown that the unit has a
safe movement and immersion characteristic in all probable wave spectra and
up to wave heights being at least 10% higher than the maximum wave height
for which the unit is designed. If the unit with superstructures, deckhouses,
etc. has not been designed for wave forces, there shall be a distance of 1.5 m
between the lower deck and the maximum wave crest elevation.
1.2. Jack-up units
The distance between the maximum design wavecrest and the lower deck shall not be
less than 1.5 m. When calculating the maximum wavecrest elevation, the water level
including storm and astronomical tide shall be used as a basis.
1
Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight closing
means on mobile offshore units.
11
Emergency power supply
1. Units shall be equipped with an independent emergency power supply which is arranged and
designed to be capable of maintaining a maximum continuous output for at least 18 hours at
the most unfavourable angle of heel pursuant to 21 of the Stability Regulations.
1
2. Emergency sources of power shall be certified. In connection with the certification of the
emergency sources of power (generator with driving machinery), a prototype shall be per-
formed while it is heeling at least:
25 degrees in any direction for semisubmersible units;
15 degrees in any direction for jack-up units; and
22.5 degrees combined with 10 degrees trim for units of ship type.
This prototype test shall be performed with maximum load for at least 4 hours.
3. The capacity of the emergency power supply shall be sufficient to simultaneously serve the
following emergency power consumers:
Emergency lighting as prescribed by 12.
Navigational lights, light and sound signals in accordance with regulations in force.
Fire and gas alarm and detection systems.
Lifeboat alarm.
Communications.
One of the fire pump systems, as well as the control of remote-operated valves.
Any one ballast pump with control and valve system which is required to be connected to
an emergency source of power.
270
Diving equipment, including derrick for diving bell if it requires electricity, if such equip-
ment does not have a separate emergency source of power.
Helideck edge lighting.
Charging devices for battery installations serving as an emergency source of power.
High-pressure compressor for the recharging of compressed-air bottles to be used with the
firemans outfit.
Consumers other than those mentioned above, if considered to be necessary in an emer-
gency.
4. The emergency generator room shall be located above the waterline in the greatest and most
unfavourable damage condition in accordance with 21 of the Stability Regulations
1
, and
shall be easy to access from the open deck following such damage.
Special consideration shall be given to the positions of openings for ventilation, air cool-
ing system, combustion air and exhaust in relation to the waterline referred to above.
The emergency switchboard and transformer shall be located in the emergency generator
room. The emergency switchboard can normally be supplied from the main switchboard,
provided that this does not influence the emergency switchboard if faults or breakdown
should occur in the main switchboard.
On units where the main generators are located in two or more engine rooms with inde-
pendent switchboards separated from each other in respect of fire safety, one or more of the
generators in at least two of the independent engine rooms may be used as an emergency
source of power. In such cases, each emergency source of power with appurtenant panel shall
be self-sufficient and completely independent of any other emergency source of power. The
fire barrier to any adjacent machinery space shall be at least either:
a class A-60 division plus cofferdam, or
a steel bulkhead insulated to class A-60 on both sides.
Emergency sources of power shall be located in spaces outside damage areas defined by
the Stability Regulations
1
.
An emergency source of power shall be so located in relation to the engine room of cate-
gory A or explosive areas that fire or explosion in those areas does not jeopardize the oper-
ation of the emergency source of power.
5. Any occurrence of damage to or failure of the emergency source of power or emergency gen-
erator room shall not influence the main power supply.
6. The main and emergency power supply shall not be carried through the same space if the
space is a machinery space of category A or a service space with a high fire risk.
7. Cables to emergency power consumers as provided in subsection 3 shall to the largest pos-
sible extent be laid outside engine rooms of category A and service spaces with a high risk of
fire. Where that is not possible, the cables shall be fire-resistant.
Cables for emergency power and lighting shall as far as possible be separated from cables
for other purposes and shall be separated from pipes used for the transport of hydrocarbons.
8. Cables to emergency power consumers and safety-critical equipment shall not be carried
through a hazardous area outside the area where the equipment itself is located.
9. As emergency sources of power may be used generators with a diesel motor or gas turbine as
driver, or accumulator batteries, or a combination of these, as for example where the gener-
ator delivers power to big consumers, and accumulator batteries shall give the necessary
energy for the required time to smaller consumers without recharging and without the volt-
age dropping below 12% of the batterys nominal voltage.
10. There shall be a separate fuel oil tank for the emergency source of powers diesel motor or
gas turbine which is located in the same room as the emergency source of power. The oil
shall have a flame point not less than 43 degrees Celsius.
11. Starting arrangement.
The driving machinery shall have an automatic starting device.
The source of starting power shall be stored in two separate units which each shall be cap-
able of at least 6 starting attempts. One of the units shall be reserved for manual operation.
Stored energy may be either automatically charged batteries or automatically charged
compressed-air bottles.
272
The number of automatic starting attempts shall be between 3 and 6.
The charging devices shall be connected to the emergency switchboard.
12. Emergency sources of power shall at their installation and subsequently every two years be
tested for at least 4 hours with the greatest load which the source of power may be exposed to
on board.
1
Cf Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight clos-
12
Emergency lighting
1. Permanently fitted emergency lighting connected to the emergency source of power shall be
arranged on the unit to an extent that provides sufficient lighting for safe escape from all
areas on board. Emergency lighting shall be fitted in the accommodation, in corridors, in
staircases, along escape routes, on both sides of all watertight closing of access openings and
emergency exits, in closets for the storage of firemans outfits in engine rooms, in control
rooms, lift cars and places of work, on the open deck, at helicopter decks, emergency sta-
tions, mustering stations, lifeboat stations and liferaft stations.
In the wheelhouse or other places where the light may disturb the navigation, emergency
lighting may be connected to a switch that is operated in the wheelhouse.
2. The emergency lighting at lifeboat stations and liferaft stations shall be capable of illuminat-
ing life-saving appliances while they are being prepared for launching. The sea where life-
boats or liferafts are launched shall also be possible to illuminate.
3. Emergency lighting requirements:
Emergency lights shall be certified.
Emergency lights shall be designed to withstand vibrations and other environmental re-
quirements in accordance with IEC 92-504 or an equivalent standard.
Emergency lights shall have such enclosure rating (IP) as is required for the intended type
and place of use, however not lower than IP 56 on the open deck.
Additionally, emergency lights shall be so designed or arranged that there will be no con-
densation.
4. In addition to emergency lighting connected to the emergency source of power, permanently
fitted separate or combined emergency lights with a built-in battery source of power shall be
arranged in the places referred to in subsection 1 above. The following additional require-
ments shall apply to such battery-operated emergency lights:
The battery source of power shall be continuously charged and immediately start to oper-
ate in the event of failure of the emergency source of power.
The emergency lights shall provide continuous light for at least one hour at the temper-
ature limit in question provided in 7.
The emergency lights shall not have lower protection from explosion than zone 2, ref. 26
of the Fire Regulations.
1
The emergency lights shall have a built-in rectifier/charger provided with a built-in alarm
function in the event of failure of the batterys charging circuit or voltage.
Emergency lights shall be conspicuously provided with a sign exhibiting, the date when
the battery was put into operation, the normal life of the battery, and the type of battery to
be used for replacement.
5. Battery-operated transportable lamps shall be located in readily accessible places in the con-
trol rooms and in the offices of the platform manager, drilling manager and technical section
leader and at the drillers control panel. Such lamps shall be of a type that is constantly
charged and be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 1.
1
Ref. Regulations of 31 January 1984 No. 227 concerning precautionary measures against fire and explosion on mobile off-
shore units.
274
13
Marking and navigational aids
1. The unit shall be marked with the name of the unit and the name of the licensee. The
marking shall be such as to make identification readily possible from vessels as well as from
aircraft. The marking shall be easily visible in daylight as well as at night. Letters and figures
shall be at least 1 metre high.
2. The unit shall be equipped with:
2.1. One or more white lights placed so as to ensure that at least one light is visible from
any direction. Lights shall be placed not more than 30 metres and not less than 12
metres above sea level and shall be visible - in a dark night with good visibility - for at
least 15 nautical miles. There shall be arranged an emergency system with a nominal
visibility of at least 10 nautical miles. The lights shall give a signal in the shape of the
Morse letter U every 15 seconds. The lenses of the lights shall be so constructed as to
ensure that the light - in addition to being visible for the above-mentioned distance is
visible from anywhere in the vicinity of the unit.
2.2. One or more synchronized devices which are so constructed and installed as to emit
sound signals that are audible in all directions. The sound devices shall be audible at a
distance of at least 2 nautical miles in calm weather. The character of the fog signal
shall be the Morse letter U every 30 seconds. The sound signals shall be given when
the visibility is less than 2 nautical miles.
2.3. A separate and continuously charged battery source of power with capacity for 4 days
continuous operation of backup U lights and the sound signalling system as referred to
in subsections 2.1 and 2.2 . The battery source of power shall come into operation
automatically. The above-mentioned light and sound signalling devices shall be such
that they function without attendance in the event that the unit is evacuated.
3. Units shall be equipped with lights in accordance with the International Rules of the Road at
Sea.
4. Self-propelled units shall be equipped with navigational aids in accordance with the regula-
tions currently in force for ships.
5. Equipment referred to in subsections 2.1 and 2.2 shall be certified. Equipment referred to in
subsections 3 and 4 shall be type-approved by a Notified Body and marked in accordance
with the Marine Equipment Regulations.
1
Amended by regulations 11 Oct 1996 no. 980 (in force 1 July 1997), 28 Jan 1997 no. 122 (in force 1 July 1997), 2 March 1999
no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Ref. Regulations of 29 December 1998 No. 1455 concerning marine equipment.
14
Fixed means of access, ladders, stairs, railings etc. outside
the accommodation
1. Number, type and location of stairs and ladders.
1.1. Closed rooms which are normally in use shall have at least two exits. Small rooms
where the distance from any point in the room to the exit does not exceed 5 metres
may in certain cases be constructed with only one exit.
1.2. Stairs shall be placed in routes where the difference in level is more than 450 mm.
1.3. Permanent ladders may be permitted in cargo rooms, store rooms, tanks etc. and on
cranes where it is impracticable to arrange stairs.
1.4. In principle the ladders shall be inclined. However, vertical ladders in a height up to
18 metres may be arranged where it is impractical to arrange inclined ladders.
1.5. Should it for practical reasons be impossible to arrange fixed ladders/stairs, remov-
able ladders/stairs may be permitted provided they can be securely fastened.
1.6. Fixed ladders shall be placed at all points where it is necessary to climb more than 1.5
metres to carry out inspections.
276
2. Access openings.
2.1. Access openings to cofferdam, tanks et. shall be arranged with a nominal size of at
least 600 by 400 mm (NS 2635).
2.2. Access hatches to other rooms than those mentioned in subsection 2.1 above, as well
as access hatches for stairs and ladders shall have a free opening of at least 600 x 600
mm. The openings shall be rounded and free of sharp edges.
2.3. The hatch covers shall be capable of being opened by one person and shall be operable
from both sides. An exception is hatches for tanks which is not necessary to operate
from both sides. It shall be possible to secure the covers in open position. The covers
shall be equipped with counterweights or similar arrangements where this is consid-
ered necessary.
2.4. Access hatches with coamings lower than 750 mm shall be equipped with a perma-
nent rigid railing of 1 metre. Where this is difficult to arrange in a practical manner, al-
ternative arrangements providing an equivalent safety level may be used.
2.5. The railing for protection of access openings shall simultaneously afford an effective
handhold during ascent or descent through the opening.
2.6. The access and ladder arrangement shall be such as to permit ascent and descent with
self-contained breathing apparatus (compressed air apparatus). Furthermore, it shall
be possible to get a grown person on a stretcher up from spot where passage or in-
spection may occur.
2.7. The access to hatches shall be at least 600 mm wide and free of obstructions.
2.8. There shall be a free vertical height of at least 2 metres above inclined ladders.
2.9. Hatch coamings of a height of more than 1 metre shall be furnished with necessary
steps and handrail on the outside to give safe access.
3. Construction requirements for stairs/permanent ladders:
3.1. Stairs shall have railing on both sides and the inclination shall not exceed 50. The
steps shall be at least 150 x 600 mm and shall be slip-proof in all directions. Steps in
outside stairs and steps which may be exposed to oil spills, mud, etc., may be required
made of self-draining grating. Railings shall have a vertical height above steps of at
least 1000 mm and shall be furnished with at least one middle railing.
The projection of the steps shall overlap one another.
3.2. Fixed, vertical ladders shall have a breadth of minimum 350 mm, but of maximum
500 mm, between the bearers, a depth of minimum 150 mm behind the steps and the
vertical distance between the steps shall be at least 250 mm, but not more than 350
mm. Between each rest platform and in the entire ladder, all the steps shall be evenly
spaced and be in alignment.
3.3. Fixed, inclining ladders shall have a breadth of minimum 400 mm between the bearers
and a minimum depth of 150 mm behind the steps. The vertical distance between the
steps shall be at least 200 mm, but not more than 250 mm. Between each rest platform
and in the entire ladder, the steps shall be evenly spaced. The inclination of the ladder
shall not exceed 70.
3.4. The steps shall be made of minimum 22 mm square steel bar and so mounted that one
of the square bar corners will point upwards. There shall be single rungs in the vertical
ladders and double rungs in inclined ladders.
3.5. Single steps mounted direct on hatch coamings, bulkheads or similar, shall be of 22
mm square steel bar or equivalent, and have the same depth behind the steps, distance
between and breadth as mentioned in subsection 3.2 above. The steps shall be of a de-
sign which effectively stops the foot from slipping sideways and shall be aligned with
the ladders below and above. There shall also be a satisfactory handhold. If necessary
a separate handhold shall be arranged.
3.6. The maximum allowed continuous height of a ladder is 9 metres. If the climbing
height exceeds this, rest platforms with railing shall be arranged at intervals of maxi-
mum 6 metres.
3.7. If the climbing height for vertical ladders is more than 6 metres, and for especially ex-
posed ladders, safety hoops shall be arranged from a height of 2.5 metres and up-
278
wards. Wherever possible, safety hoops shall be carried 1 metre above the upper level
and have a breadth/depth of at least 600 x 600 mm.
3.8. Platforms and gangways shall be made of slip-proof open grating or the like, be at
least 600 mm wide and have a railing at least 1 metre high. If there is a passage or
work area underneath, the openings of the grating shall be so small that a ball of 15
mm diameter will not fall through. Alternatively a special, fine grating may be ar-
ranged underneath the platforms/gangways.
3.9. When dimensioning ladders and stairs, fastenings, rest platforms and safety hoops,
environmental conditions (sea, weather, and wind etc.) shall be taken into consider-
ation and also possible strain wherever the ladders/stairs are in an exposed position
due to the handling of cargo. Platforms and gangways shall be dimensioned for 400
kp/m
2
. The allowed bending of the gangways shall be maximum 1/250 between the
point of support.
3.10. It is not allowed to discontinue the bearers of vertical ladders. The bearers shall be
continuous to give a safe handhold.
3.11. Inclined ladders shall have an effective handrail on each side.
3.12. In exposed places, such as masts, deckhouse, cranes, etc. where maintenance work is
necessary, effective railing or safety hoops for footing shall be arranged.
3.13. The steps shall be carried through the bearers and have continuous welding on both
sides. Other constructions which are just as effective may also be allowed.
3.14. All joints in stairs and ladders and the mounting of same shall have continuous weld-
ing of at least 5 mm weld thickness. If, for special reasons, it is necessary to bolt the
stair/ladder to fasten it, the bolts shall be effectively secured.
3.15. Single steps shall be fastened so securely that they will be deformed before they
loosen.
4. Access to the unit.
The unit shall have a safe and secure access arrangement when alongside the quay or an-
chored in sheltered waters, so that persons may board in a safe manner.
15
Doors, corridors and passages
1. Doors shall have a free breadth of at least 600 mm and a height of at least 2050 mm above
deck level. The height of thresholds in doors in escape routes and in doors with heavy traffic
shall not be made unnecessarily high.
2. The dog bolts of steel doors shall be marked with the direction of openings or closing and be
arranged so that they are locked in the open position. Doors in escape routes shall have cen-
trally operated dog bolts.
3. It shall not be possible to open doors which give direct access to a stair leading to a lower le-
vel, unless a suitable landing has been arranged in connection with the stair.
4. In the accommodation and on deck, corridors and passages shall be free of protruding ar-
rangements and sharp edges which may hinder passage or cause personal injury.
5. All doors, corridors, and passages shall be constructed so that an injured person on a stretch-
er can be carried through and so that they allow passage with portable breathing apparatus
strapped on.
6. It shall be possible to move from the forward to the stern part of the unit without having to
cross open decks.
280
16
Decks and flooring
1. At places of manoeuvre, e.g. around winches, cranes, windlasses and the like, where spilling
of oil, mud, etc. may occur, there shall be expanded metal or similar material which ensures a
good foothold.
2. In areas where people move about there shall be no protruding structures over which a per-
son might stumble or on which he could hurt himself. Wherever it is absolutely necessary to
place such structures, they shall be painted in conspicuous colours.
3. Suitable platforms shall be arranged above cable or pipe-lines which cross passageways.
4. Openings in the deck, passageways, platforms etc. which are more than 100 x 100 mm shall
be covered with rigid grating or be protected by railing or the like.
17
Railings and enclosures, etc.
1. Railings.
1.1. Decks, passageways, scaffolding, and platforms which are 800 mm or more above the
level below, shall be furnished with fixed strong railing with toeboards along the outer
edge. Where it is impractical to arrange a fixed railing, alternative arrangements pro-
viding an equivalent safety level may be used.
1.2. The height of railings, handropes, etc. shall be at least 1 metre from deck to upper rail.
There shall be two intermediate rails with a distance of maximum 380 mm. The open-
ing below the lower rail in the railing shall not exceed 230 mm at the open part of the
deck. The distance between stanchions shall be maximum 1.5 metres.
18
Ventilation outside the living quarters
1. Spaces where persons normally work or stay during working hours shall have an effective
permanent mechanical ventilation. The ventilation capacity shall be at least 8 air changes per
hour.
The inlet of air shall take place through ventilation aggragates so that the temperature may
be checked. The ventilation shall be strong enough to remove annoying dust, steam, gas, etc.
but shall not cause unpleasant draught.
2. In places where the pollution of air may be especially heavy, separate exhaust air outlets shall
be installed at the source of pollution, e.g. at places such as shale shakers, areas where powd-
er material or chemicals are openly handled, welding shop, etc.
3. It shall be possible to sufficiently ventilate pump rooms, valve rooms, etc. with at least 5 air
changes per hour. Signs shall be posted stating that entry shall not take place before these
rooms have been ventilated until they are found to be free of gas.
4. Rooms for storage of substances which are health-hazardous, which smell, or which may
produce aspyxiant gases, as well as rooms for storage of oils, paints, etc., shall be mechan-
ically ventilated with at least 12 air changes per hour.
5. Requirements for ventilation in areas where there is a danger of gas occurring, are stipulated
by the Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning.
19
Lighting
1. Areas which persons on board may have to pass on their way to, from or during their work
shall be adequately lighted.
282
2. The lighting shall be at least 100 lux in stair wells. The sources of illumination shall be so ar-
ranged as to avoid shadows on the steps of the stairs. The normal lighting shall be at least 100
lux in vestibules and corridors. The lighting shall be at least 10 lux wherever it is necessary to
pass during manoeuvring or navigation of the unit. On the instrument panels in the pilot
house etc. the lights must be capable of being regulated by means of rheostat, or screened.
The lighting shall be at least 100 lux wherever work is carried out during loading or dis-
charging. This applies to cargo holds, as well as exits from the holds, and the deck.
3. In machinery spaces where persons pass and work, the lighting shall be at least 200 lux.
Measuring and control apparatus shall have a lighting of at least 300 lux.
4. For the lighting of tanks for oil and other inflammable liquids, and also of holds where espe-
cially inflammable cargo is carried, or of holds and tanks which are not free of gas, the lamps
used shall be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 1.
1
1
20
Portable electric equipment
Portable electrical equipment (lamps, VHF equipment, etc.) which is to be used outside the liv-
ing quarter, shall be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 1.
1
1
21
Special purpose containers
1. Special purpose containers (ref. 1) which are brought on board shall as a minimum satisfy
the following requirements:
1.1. They shall be built of steel or other equivalent material with regard to strength and fire
resistance. Containers with lifting arrangements shall, with regard to strength, be de-
signed for the loads that may occur in offshore handling. The dynamic additional
loads may alternatively be taken into consideration by using standard containers with
work loads accordingly reduced (reduced load utilization).
1.2. All lining, insulation, and any furnishings, shall be made of non-flammable materials.
Surface materials shall have low flame spread characteristics.
1
1.3. They shall be fitted with alarm, an appropriate automatic fire detection system and a
two-way communication system all designed for connection to the corresponding
mother systems of the unit or otherwise be equipped with satisfactory arrangements
for detection/warning/communication adapted to each individual case.
1.4. They shall be fitted with at least 1 appropriate fire extinguisher, located at the exit.
1.5. A fixed extinguishing system shall be installed in containers where, for similar spaces
on board, such equipment would required according to the current regulations con-
cerning precautionary measures against fire and explosion on mobile offshore units.
As a minimum requirement, it shall be possible to release the system manually from
outside the container. Common precautions against inadvertant release etc. must be ta-
ken.
1.6. Containers in which personnel will normally stay and in which no fixed extinguishing
system is required, may be fitted with windows.
1.7. At least 1 battery emergency light shall be installed.
1.8 All electrical equipment shall be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 2.
2
If ex-
ceptions have been made for containers located in safe areas, the electricity supply
must be connected to the units emergency shut-down system.
Containers which are not equipped for location in Zone 2 areas shall be clearly
marked that they may be located in safe areas only. If the container contains sources of
ignition, it shall be equipped for connection to the units emergency shut-down sys-
284
tem, and be marked that it must be connected to this system, cfr. requirements for
emergency shut-down etc. in the regulations at any time currently in force concerning
precautionary measures against fire and explosion on mobile offshore units.
1.9. All equipment on and in containers are subject to the same safety, inspection and
documention requirements as similar equipment on the unit where the container is
placed.
1.10. The location of containers must be evaluated and be found safe and proper in each in-
dividual case.
1.11 Containers shall be mounted in accordance with the regulations so that they will with-
stand the maximum heeling angle, cfr. 6 subsection 7.1 above.
1.12. Containers with a length of more than 6.5 metres shall have at least 2 exits, one of
which may be an emergency exit. The main exit shall face the escape route which is
assumed to be the safest, attention being paid to the prevailing circumstances.
1.13. Containers in which personnel do not normally stay are subject to the above provi-
sions of subsections 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 (for automatic fire detection systems), 1.5, 1.8, 1.9,
1.10 and 1.11.
Added by regulation 22 May 1990. Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Ref. Regulations of 31 January 1984 No. 227 concerning precautionary measures against fire and explosion on mobile off-
shore units, chapter IV.
2
22
Drilling installations and equipment
1. Drilling installations shall conform to a safety level that is not lower than that prescribed by
Det Norske Veritas, Drilling Plant (DRILL) or any other internationally recognized standard.
Such conformance shall be checked and approved by a MOU classification society or in any
other way decided by the authority of the state to which the Continental Shelf belongs.
2. The risks of the operation of drilling installations in relation to the other systems of the unit
and the risks of the other systems in relation to the operation of drilling installations shall be
assessed as part of the risk analysis. Cf. Regulation of 22 December 1993 No. 1239 concern-
ing risk analyses for mobile offshore units.
Added by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999). Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1
July 2003).
23
Passenger and cargo lifts
The construction, installation, operation and checking of passenger and cargo lifts shall comply
with the rules of the recognized classification society for lifts on ships, provided those are at least
equivalent to the international standard in force at any time, ISO No. 8383, Lifts on ships Spe-
cific requirements.
24
Deviations
Added by regulation 22 May 1990. Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999), (former 22), 11
April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
286
25
Mutual recognition
Where the regulations require that particular fittings, materials, equipment or devices or type of
equipment etc. be procured or found on a vessel, or that some specific measure be taken or the
construction or design safety specific requirements, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall
permit that other appurtenances, materials, devices or types of such are installed or found on the
vessel or that other measures are taken on board or that the vessel is built or designed in another
way.
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall accept this provided that it is documented by testing
or other means that the appurtenances, materials, equipment or devices or types of such, or the ar-
rangement, construction or design is at least as effective as specified by the requirements of the re-
gulations.
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall accept the results of tests performed by recognized
testing institutions, including testing institutions in other EEA countries. Such acceptance will be
given on condition that the tests give an apropriate and satisfactory guarantee of a technical, pro-
fessional, and independent nature.
Added by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999).
26
Penalty
Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999), (former 23), 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July
2003).
27
Entry into force
As from the same date, Regulations of 13 January 1986 concerning the construction and oper-
ation of mobile drilling platforms and other mobile offshore units for use other than drilling for
subsea petroleum deposits, which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian Register of
Ships, are repealed.
21, Special purpose containers, of these Regulations enters into force on 22 May 1990 for
containers which will be placed on board. Containers which have already been placed on board
shall comply with the requirements of 21 by 1 January 1991.
Amendments of these Regulations 2, 4 subsection 1.3. and 1.4., 8 and 9 conserning sta-
bility and freeboard enter into force 1 January 1992.
From 1 September 1999 Regulations of 17 December 1986 No. 2316 concerning the construc-
tion, installation, operation and control of passenger lifts and cargo lifts on board Norwegian mo-
bile offshore units, and Regulations of 13 May 1987 No. 396 concerning drilling installations and
equipment, etc. on mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian
Ship Register, are repealed.
Amended by regulation 22 May 1990, 28 Jan 1997, 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999, former 24).
288
APPENDIX I
Appendix to 6 subsection 2.11.1 Environmental data,
meteorological data, and mobile unit performance data, etc.
Repealed by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 402 (in force 1 Sept 1999).
APPENDIX II
Appendix to 8 Wind tunnel test procedure
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 496 (in force 1 July 2003).
APPENDIX III
Requirements for fixed, battery-operated emergency lights
with reference to 7 to be installed on units which shall be
capable of operating in areas with temperatures considerably
lower than 0C
1. In accordance with 12 of Regulations of 4 September 1987 concerning construction of mo-
bile offshore units, mobile offshore units shall be equipped with emergency lighting. In ac-
cordance with 7 of the present regulations units which shall be able to operate in areas with
temperatures considerably lower than 0 C, shall be able to document the reliable operation
of the equipment under such conditions.
2. In addition to complying with international provisions and requirements relating to ordinary
emergency lights, emergency lights for use in areas with temperatures below -10 C shall
comply with the following requirements:
2.1. Emergency lights which are to be used for operation in areas where the monthly mean
temperature (see supplement to this appendix) may be as low as -10 C or the 24-hour
mean temperature may be as low as -20 C shall be tested and shall function (includ-
ing battery and fittings) for surrounding temperatures of -20 C to +55 C.
2.2. Emergency lights which are to be used for operations in areas with temperatures lower
than those mentioned in item 1 above shall be tested and shall function (including bat-
tery and fittings) for surrounding temperatures of -30 C to +55 C.
2.3. For emergency lights which are to be used for mean temperatures below -30 C, each
individual case shall be specially considered.
2.4. Emergency lights to be used in heated rooms or in areas with temperatures down to
-10 C need not be specially tested for cold provided that satisfactory cold perform-
ance has been documented by the supplier.
290
Supplement for Appendix III
Calculation of temperatures
Monthly mean temperature is calculated from the following formula:
M = n - k (n - Min)
in which
n = the mean of the observations at (08.00) 07.00 13.00 19.00 (MET) hours
MET = Meteorologic European Time
k = a factor varying with the time of year and from station to station
Min = the mean minimum temperature for every day in a month
The temperature extremes apply to the day calculated from 10.00 to 19.00 hours
Calculation of the 24-hour mean temperature:
Td = T07 + T19 + Tmin. + Tmax.
4
Td = the 24-hour mean temperature
T07 = the temperature measured at 07.00 hours
T19 = the temperature measured at 19.00 hours
TMin = the minimum temperature of the 24 hours
TMax = the maximum temperature of the 24 hours
227/84 Fire regulation
292
CONTENTS
Chapter I: General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2 A The obligations of the owner and platform manager . . . . 300
3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
3A Approval system audit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
3B Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4 Risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
5 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chapter II: Fire extinguishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
6 Fire pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7 Fire mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
8 Hydrants and fire hoses, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
9 International shore connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
10 Fire extinguishing arrangements in machinery spaces
and other spaces of high fire risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
11 Fire extinguishing system for galley ventilation . . . . . . . 308
12 Portable fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
13 Firemans outfit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
14 Supplement for firemans outfit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
15 Storage and location of firemans outfit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Chapter III: Fire safety measures on helicopter
decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Chapter IV: Fire safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
19 Protection of accommodation spaces, service areas, ma-
chinery spaces and control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
20 Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
21 Thermal load from flare boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Chapter V: Alarm and intercommunication system . 322
22 Fire alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
23 Communication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Chapter VI: Gas detection, Emergency shut-down . . 326
24 Gas hazard/system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
25 Gas detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
26 Emergency shut-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
27 Operating and preparedness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
28 Maintenance of explosion-proof equipment . . . . . . . . . . 334
29 Equipment brought on board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Chapter VII: Miscellaneous provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
30 Special provisions for existing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
31 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
32 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
33 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
294
Regulations 31 January 1984 No. 227 concerning
precautionary measures against fire and explosion on
mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate by the Act of 9 June 1903, No. 7, relating to
Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, 1, 42, 54a, cf. Royal Decree of 1 December 1978
and Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979. Amended 13 January 1986, 4 September 1987, 12
May 1989, 11 October 1989, 22 May 1990 and 2 March 1999. Amended 11 April 2003 No. 493,
cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
General provisions
1
1
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations, the following definitions shall apply:
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS)
Bureau Veritas (BV)
Germanischer Lloyd (GL)
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS)
6. Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/API/DIN/NEPA/ISO/CEN/IEC or any oth-
er standard or body of rules, as appropriate, which is recognized nationally and/or interna-
tionally for a particular sphere of application. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in
each individual case decide which standard is considered to be recognized.
7. Certified:
a Notified Body,
296
other public or private institution which is recognised by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate, or
Convention.
tified by:
other public or private institution which is recognised by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
8. FTP Code: International Code for Application of Fire Test Procedures.
9. Non-combustible material: Any material that neither burns nor gives off gas in sufficient
quantities for self-ignition when heated to approx. 750C and classified as non-combustible
in accordance with the FTP Code. All other materials shall be considered to be combustible
materials.
10. Low flame spread: A surface which will satisfactorily restrict the spread of flame in accord-
ance with the FTP Code.
11. Standard fire test: A fire test conducted for class A and class B divisions in accordance
with the FTP Code.
12. A class divisions: Divisions formed by bulkheads and decks which are:
12.1. constructed of steel or other equivalent material;
12.2. be suitably stiffened;
12.3. so constructed as to be capable of preventing the passage of smoke and flame to the
end of the one-hour standard fire test; and
12.4. insulated with approved non-combustible materials such that the average temperature
of the unexposed side will not rise more than 140 C above the initial temperature, nor
will the temperature, at any one point, including any joint, rise more than 180 C
above the original temperature, within the time listed below:
class A-60: 60 minutes
class A- 0: 0 minutes
13. B class divisions: Divisions formed by bulkheads, decks, ceilings or linings which:
13.1. are so constructed as to be capable of preventing the passage of flame to the end of the
first half hour of the standard fire test;
13.2. have an insulation value such that the average temperature of the unexposed side will
not rise more than 140 C above the original temperature, nor will the temperature at
any point, including any joint, rise more than 225 C above the original temperature,
within the time listed below:
class B-15: 15 minutes
class B- 0: 0 minutes, and
13.3. are constructed of certified non-combustible materials and all materials entering into
the construction and erection of B class divisions being non-combustible.
14. H class divisions: Divisions which are:
14.1. constructed of steel or other equivalent material;
14.2. adequately stiffened;
14.3. so constructed as to prevent the passage of smoke and flame for two hours when ex-
posed to heat generated by a hydrocarbon fire as described in the revised edition of
ISO 834 (HC curve);
14.4. so insulated on the fire-exposed side that the average temperature of the unexposed
side will not rise more than 140 C above the initial temperature. Nor will the temper-
ature at any one point, including any joint, rise more than 180 C above the initial tem-
perature, within the time listed below:
298
Class H-120: 120 minutes
Class H- 60: 60 minutes
Class H- 0: 0 minutes; and
14.5. insulated using certified non-combustible materials. Materials that are not completely
non-combustible may be used if such use is documented by tests and analyses to be
justifiable from a safety perspective.
15. Control stations: spaces where the following are located: radio, main navigation equipment,
equipment for operation and control of ballast pumps, ballast valves and permanently in-
stalled fire extinguishing systems, centres for fire-recording equipment, centres for equip-
ment for alarm and public address system, centres for equipment for closing watertight doors
and fire doors, or emergency sources of power.
16. Accommodation spaces: spaces used for public spaces, corridors, stairway enclosures, lava-
tories, cabins, offices, crew accommodation, barber shops, remote isolated pantries and simi-
lar spaces.
17. Public spaces: those portions of the accommodation which are used for lounges, dining
rooms, common rooms and similar permanently enclosed spaces.
18. Service spaces (low risk): spaces used for lockers, and store-rooms having a floor area of less
than 2 m
2
, drying rooms and laundries.
19. Service spaces (high risk): galley, main pantries (except isolated pantries), store-rooms
having a floor area of more than 2 m
2
, mail and specie rooms, workshops other than those
forming part of the machinery spaces, and similar spaces and trunks to such spaces, and paint
and lamp rooms.
20. Oil fuel unit: is the equipment used for the preparation of oil fuel for delivery to an oil-fired
boiler, or equipment used for the preparation for delivery of heated oil to an internal combus-
tion engine, and includes any oil pressure pumps, filters and heaters dealing with oil at a
pressure of more than 1.8 kp/cm
2
.
21. Machinery spaces of category A: All spaces containing internal combustion machinery used
for the units main propulsion, or where the aggregate total output of the internal combustion
machinery is not less than 375 kW, or spaces containing any oil-fired boiler or oil fuel unit,
and trunks to such spaces.
22. Machinery spaces: All machinery spaces of category A and all other spaces containing pro-
pulsion machinery, boilers, oil fuel units, steam and internal combustion engines, generators
and major electrical machinery, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing, ventilation and
air conditioning machinery, switchboard spaces and rooms containing only electrical equip-
ment, and similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.
23. Steel or other equivalent material: where the words steel or other equivalent material oc-
cur, equivalent material means any material which, by itself or due to insulation provided,
has structural and integrity properties equivalent to steel at the end of the applicable exposure
to the standard fire test (e.g. aluminium alloy with appropriate insulation).
24. Hazardous area: Hazardous areas are all those areas where, due to the possible presence of a
flammable atmosphere, the use without proper consideration of machinery or electrical
equipment may lead to fire hazard or explosion.
Hazardous areas are divided into zones 0, 1 and 2:
Zone 0: in which an explosive gas/air mixture is continuously present or present for long pe-
riods.
Zone 1: in which an explosive gas/air mixture is likely to occur in normal operation.
Zone 2: in which an explosive gas/air mixture is not likely to occur, and if it occurs it will
only exist for a short time
2
.
25. Open deck: (see 20): all open deck areas and other exposed surfaces except hazardous
areas.
26. Drilling area: area for drilling derrick with appurtenant equipment.
27. Design fire: A fire which according to the defined acceptance criteria poses an unacceptable
risk and which therefore forms the basis of the design and use of the mobile offshore unit.
Amended by regulations 4 Sept 1987, 22 May 1990, 2 March 1999 no. 397 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in
force 1 July 2003).
300
2
1. These regulations apply to mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in
a Norwegian ship register.
issue.
Amended by regulations 22 May 1990, 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
2 A
tions
1
.
1
3
Documentation
The contents, scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by the
The owner shall be able to document that electrical installations and area classification (haz-
ardous areas) comply with the regulation in force on alectriccal installations, maritime installa-
tions, and the regulation on electrical equipment laid down by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil
Protection and Emergency Planning
1
. The contents, scope and type of documents and the time of
submission shall be decided by the Norwegian Directorate for Fire Electrical Safety, which upon
request shall receive the requested documentation direct.
Amended by regulations 17 Feb 1997 no. 135 (in force 1 Jan 1998), 2 March 1999 no. 397 (in force 1 sept 1999), 11 April
2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
equipment.
3A
Approval system audit verification
3B
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
302
4
1
Risk analysis
1. Spaces/areas with fire or explosion hazards.
1.1. A risk analysis shall be carried out with regard to technical anti-fire measures for all
such spaces/areas. The risk analysis may be a Failure Mode and Effect Analysis
(FMEA).
2. Accommodation quarters. Control stations.
2.1. A risk analysis shall be carried out with regard to the ability of accommodation quar-
ters to withstand the accident loads which may be expected to have significance for
this area. Control stations which must be kept operational for a certain period of time
after the accident took place (such as control station for anchor operation) shall be par-
ticularly considered.
2.2. Outer surfaces of accommodation quarters and control stations which may be exposed
to hydrocarbon fires, shall be protected on the outside. If the risk analysis carried out,
including the evacuation plan, requirements for operation of the unit in the relevant
accident situation and arrangements otherwise, shows that protection in excess of the
requirements of 20, subsections 2 and 3, is necessary, the external fire protection shall
be dimensioned to keep structures intact for the time considered to be necessary. As a
guide, a minimum of 1/2 hour is stipulated for maintaining operational capability.
3. Evacuation routes.
3.1. A risk analysis shall be carried out with regard to evacuation routes from all parts of
the platform to the rescue stations. Protection of the evacuation routes against fire and
explosion in the different areas shall also be considered also taking consideration the
accident loads which may arise as a result of a blow-out of gas/oil in the well area, or
as a result of discharge of gas from the mud treatment system, pipes, gas separators
and similar equipment.
1
Refer also to Regulations of 22 December 1993 No. 1239 concerning risk analyses for mobile offshore units.
5
General provisions
1. On all units, updated fire control drawings shall be displayed, giving a schematic presenta-
tion of fire preventive and fire extinguishing arrangements. The drawings shall be perma-
nently displayed in the control stations and central, clearly visible places in the accommoda-
tion spaces which permits of a quick survey and they shall give a clear picture of the arrange-
ments. Coloured symbols in accordance with IMO Res. 654(16), NS 6160 or equivalent ap-
proved standards shall be used.
2. It is the duty of everybody on board to excercise caution when dealing with anything which
may cause a fire. This applies in particular in the case of storage and use of inflammable
equipment and materials, such as explosives, inflammable fluids and gases, and substances
which are liable to self-ignite, etc.
3. Where a particular fire-extinguishing system, equipment or arrangement is required, this
may be substituted by a corresponding other system, equipment or arrangement which can be
documented to be at least as effective as that which is required.
4. Use of fire, naked lights or performance of spark-inducing work operations is only allowed
where this can take place without risk of fire or explosion and only with the consent of the
304
fire safety supervisor. No-smoking shall be notified by the necessary number of signs in Nor-
wegian and English and by internationally understood symbols in the areas covered by the
prohibition.
5. Welding or cutting with gas or electricity must take place in a safe manner and in accordance
with the regulations in force at the time in question. Equipment for electric welding shall
comply with the regulations stipulated by the Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergen-
cy Planning. Whenever hot work is planned, a permit must be issued prior to the commence-
ment of such work. The work must be carried out with the observance of all necessary safety
rules. The fire safety supervisor shall ensure:
that welding and cutting equipment is in order;
that the work area is gas-free, and that as far as possible no combustible articles are located
near the work area. Combustible articles which cannot be removed, must be properly
covered.
that a duty fireman and necessary fire safety equipment are at hand. After completion of
the work, the work site shall be inspected carefully so that smouldering fires is prevented.
Chapter II
Fire extinguishing
6
Fire pumps
1. The unit shall be provided with at least 2 separate fire pump systems. One system shall be
connected to the emergency power source. The fire pumps shall normally only be used to
fight fires. By fire pump system is meant the total system for feeding water, i.e. water inlet,
fire pump(s), delivery pipes, power source(s), power transmission(s), fuel line(s)/tank(s).
2. The fire pump systems shall be separated and be located so that fire in one area does not put
all fire pump systems out of operation. For each system, remote starting of pumps and re-
mote control of necessary valves shall be arranged.
3. Each fire pump system shall have capacity to simultaneously deliver the quantities of water
calculated to be necessary for the biggest design fire
1
. The total fire pump capacity shall in
no case be less than 180 m
3
/hour. The pressure shall be suited to calculated consumption and
sufficient to satisfactorily operate the fire-extinguishing equipment in use. The fire main
pressure shall in no place be less than 7 bar at the greatest calculated consumption.
4. Fire pumps shall start automatically upon a drop in pressure in the ring main. In the com-
mand center from which fire extinguishing is being led, and in any other places from which
the fire pumps can be operated, there shall be a satisfactory indication of whether the fire
pump system is running or not running.
1
Reference is also made to Regulations of 22 December 1993 No. 1239 concerning risk analyses for mobile offshore units.
7
Fire mains
1. There shall be a ring main for fire water supply to all areas on the unit. The design of the fire
mains shall be in accordance with the requirements of the MOU classification society and
the diameter of the fire main shall be sufficient to supply water for the greatest calculated
consumption.
2. Each fire pump system shall be connected to the ring main in a suitable way, so that damage
to the fire main in an area does not cause all supplies to be lost.
306
3. The ring main with supply shall to the greatest possible extent be routed outside areas where
it might easily be subject to damage. The ring main shall be protected against outside in-
fluences where necessary.
4. The ring main shall be equipped with the necessary number of shut-off valves and cross lines
to be able to isolate parts of the ring main. Service lines to hazardous areas shall be connected
to the ring main outside the hazardous area. Service lines to hazardous areas shall be con-
nected to the ring main outside the hazardous area. Service lines to machinery spaces of cate-
gory A, mud rooms, shale shaker rooms, drilling areas, production plants, etc. shall be pro-
vided with shut-off valves which are located in readily accessible places outside the areas re-
ferred to above. Such valves shall, in addition to manual operation, be capable of remote con-
trol if located in less accessible places or where it is likely that any possible explosion or fire
makes them less accessible or dangerous to approach.
5. The fire-fighting system shall be protected against frost regard being had to the minimum
temperatures which may be expected. Insulation of the fire main and arrangement of heating
coils around the main will be required for units operating in cold waters.
8
Hydrants and fire hoses, etc.
1. The number and position of hydrants shall be such that at least two jets of water not emanat-
ing from the same hydrant can reach any part of the unit. One jet of water shall be discharged
from a single hose length and the other from maximum three hose lengths. One single hose
length shall not exceed 15 m and not be less than 10 m. At each hydrant there shall be a hose
station. A hose station shall consist of hose with associated dual purpose (jet and waterfog)
nozzle including connection joints to the hydrant and 2 sets of connecting keys.
2. Fire hoses shall, together with the necessary equipment, adaptors and tools, be kept ready for
use in easily accessible places near the hydrants and shall be stored in lockers suitable for the
purpose. Fire hoses shall be at least 51 mm in diameter. Within the accommodation a smaller
diameter is acceptable. All connections shall fit everywhere on the unit.
9
International shore connection
The unit shall be provided with at least one international shore connection in accordance with
Regulation 19 of Chapter II-2, SOLAS 1974 as amended in 1981. The shore connection shall be
able to be connected to the fire main on any side of the unit.
10
Fire extinguishing arrangements in machinery spaces and other spaces
of high fire risk
1. The following spaces shall be provided with a fixed-arrangement fire extinguishing system
for total space extinguishing:
1.1. All category A machinery spaces, including emergency generator room regardless of
output.
1.2. Machinery spaces other than category A machinery spaces which are of vital impor-
tance to the safety of the unit where manual fire fighting would be incapable of pre-
venting considerable damage or would entail great danger to the fire-fighting person-
nel. Examples of such spaces could be thruster rooms, pump rooms, switchboard
rooms, and transformer rooms.
308
1.3. Any space other than a machinery space where the fire risk according to the risk ana-
lysis is estimated to be so high that manual fire fighting will not be sufficient or will
entail great danger to the fire-fighting personnel.
2. The following types of fixed-arrangement fire extinguishing systems are acceptable:
2.1. A fixed gas fire extinguishing system in accordance with SOLAS, Chapter II-2, Regu-
lation 5 and MSC/Circ. 776 with the extinguishing gases carbon dioxide, inergen, ar-
gonite, and halotron II.
2.2. A fixed pressure water-spraying fire extinguishing system in accordance with SO-
LAS, Chapter II-2, Regulation 10, MSC/Circ.668 and MSC/Circ.728.
2.3. A fixed high-expansion foam fire-extinguishing system in accordance with SOLAS,
Chapter II-2, Regulation 9.
3. In addition to systems required in subsection 1, category A machinery spaces shall be pro-
vided with one portable dry-powder extinguisher with a kink-free hose containing at least 25
kg powder, and also at least one certified portable foam applicator unit (cf. subsection 4). In
lieu of a portable foam applicator unit, a 50 kg portable certified powder aggregate with 8 m
hose with nozzle may be accepted. In addition there shall be a sufficient number of certified
portable fire extinguishers, nevertheless at least 2 in every category A machinery space and
in emergency generator rooms.
4. Portable foam applicator units.
4.1. Foam applicator units with a foam rate of 6-10:
One foam applicator unit shall consist of:
One foam nozzle having a water capacity of 400-500 l/minute at 5 bar
One intermediate injector with a suction hose of 2.5 m
One 25 m hose (same dimension as the other hoses on board)
Two containers of foam concentrate each containing 20-30 l.
4.2. Foam applicator units with a foam rate of 75-200:
One foam applicator unit shall consist of:
One intermediate foam pipe having a water capacity of at least 150 l/minute at 5 bar
One intermediate injector with a suction hose of 2.5 m
One 25 m hose (same dimension as the other hoses on board)
Two containers of foam concentrate each containing 20-30 l.
4.3. Hose connections shall fit all hydrants on board. The required foam containers shall
be corrosion resistant.
4.4. The above equipment shall be stored in a box of steel or other equivalent material. The
box shall be provided with brief instructions for use written in Norwegian and Eng-
lish. The instructions for use shall, as far as possible, illustrate the application of the
equipment with symbols/drawings.
Amended by regulations 11 Oct 1989, 22 May 1990, 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
11
Fire extinguishing system for galley ventilation
A permanently installed fire-extinguishing system shall be provided in the extractor ventilation
duct from the grease filter from the galley. When the system is released, the ventilation shall shut
down automatically and the fire dampers shall close.
Amended by regulations 11 Oct 1989, 22 May 1990.
12
Portable fire extinguishers
1. Accommodation spaces, machinery spaces, service spaces and other areas where fires may
break out, shall be provided with a sufficient number of certified portable fire extinguishers.
These extinguishers shall be located in appropriate places and shall always be ready for use.
One of the portable fire extinguishers intended for use in a particular space, shall be placed
310
near the entrance to that space. Extinguishers which may be exposed to freezing shall be
frost-proof. Sufficient quantities of recharging material for the portable fire extinguishers
shall be provided on the unit at all times.
2. Required portable fire-extinguishers shall have a total weight not exceeding 20 kg. CO
2
-ex-
tinguishers shall have a CO
2
charge of at least 5 kg. Water extinguishers shall have a charge
of at least 9 l. Dry-powder extinguishers shall have a charge of at least 12 kg.
3. In the accommodation, there shall be no more than 15 m between each portable fire extin-
guisher. All public spaces shall be provided with portable fire extinguishers. In corridors at
least one portable fire extinguisher shall be placed at each exit.
4. The following types of extinguishers and appropriate combinations of extinguishers, shall as
a general rule be used in the various parts of the unit:
Accommodation:
water extinguishers and
dry-powder extinguishers and, if desired, in addition to this
CO
2
extinguishers.
Dry-powder extinguishers shall be located in the vicinity of fuse boxes and other electrical
installations. Water extinguishers shall be located so that there is always another water ex-
tinguisher within reasonable distance.
Control stations:
dry-powder extinguishers, and/or
CO
2
extinguishers.
Machinery spaces:
CO
2
extinguishers.
Service areas:
water extinguishers, and/or
CO
2
extinguishers.
13
Firemans outfit
1. Each unit shall be provided with at least 8 sets of firemans outfit.
2. Each set of firemans outfit shall consist of:
2.1. One certified self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus. The breathing appa-
ratus shall be capable of functioning for at least 2 hours including necessary spare
charges, based on an air consumption of 60 l/minute. Each breathing apparatus shall
be supplied with one extra membrane, one set of gaskets, one extra headband set, one
box of silicone grease, and necessary tools. Additionally, 3 sets of instruction manuals
and posters for each type of apparatus which is delivered on board shall be provided.
2.2. A fire-proof lifeline of sufficient length (approx. 30 m) and strength attached by
means of a snaphook to a harness.
2.3. A safety lamp (hand lamp) certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 1. Where dry
batteries are used, these shall be of an alkaline type.
2.4. A small fire-axe capable of being attached to a belt or a harness.
2.5. A certified and suitable protective suit for fire-fighting and smoke diving operations.
2.6. One set of safety boots and gloves.
2.7. One fire helmet with vizor and neck protector.
2.8. A blanket made of fire-retardant material.
312
14
Supplement for firemans outfit
In addition to the firemans outfit, the following shall be provided on board:
1. One high pressure compressor suitable for filling air bottles for compressed air-operated
breathing apparatus. The compressor shall have a capacity of at least 75 l free air per minute.
The compressor shall be located where the air is clean enough to be used as breathing air.
2. One portable certified UHF radio set for internal communication for each set of firemans
outfit, extinguishing supervisor, technical fire team, and wheelhouse, at least 11 sets. The
sets shall also be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 1. The radio sets may be used for
other internal communication on board but the required number of sets shall always be avail-
able in case of fire. The UHF sets shall have connecting cables for smoke diving equipment.
3. One certified self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus intended for use in the radio
room and located near the entrance to the radio room.
4. For every other set of firemans outfit:
a certified and suitable protective suit against radiant heat;
a portable acetylene/oxygen cutting apparatus; and
a crowbar and one steel bar with a wedged tip.
5. The necessary number of axes, to be placed in the vicinity of exits.
6. Key personnel with supervising responsibility in the event of a fire according to the units
muster list shall wear clothing the colour or marking of which is clearly distinguishable from
that of other personnel.
15
Storage and location of firemans outfit
The firemans outfits shall be stored in special rooms, and shall be ready for immediate use.
The outfits shall be stored in at least four locations separated from each other so that access to all
firemans outfits cannot be blocked by fire in one area. At least two outfits should be stored at
each location. Equipment referred to in 13 subsection 2 shall be stored together. Two of the sets
shall be stored in the vicinity of the helicopter deck.
Chapter III
Fire safety measures on helicopter decks
Repealed by regulation 2 March 1999 no, 397, in force 1 Sept 1999. Cf. Regulations of 22 December 1993 No. 1240
concerning helicopter decks on mobile offshore units.
Chapter IV
Fire safety measures
19
Protection of accommodation spaces, service areas, machinery spaces
and control stations
1. The hull, superstructures, load-bearing bulkheads, deck and deck houses shall be constructed
of steel or other equivalent material.
2. Corridor bulkheads, including doors, shall satisfy the requirements for fire-safe Class A or
Class B divisions, cf. 20. The bulkheads shall extend from deck to deck and all the way to
314
adjacent bulkheads. If the ceiling all the way is of Class B-15, the corridor bulkheads may
terminate at the ceiling. Doors to the accommodation may be provided with a small closable
ventilation grill in the lower part.
3. Stairways shall be made of steel or equivalent material. A stairway connecting only two
decks shall be enclosed on at least one of the decks. The enclosure shall be of steel or non-
combustible bulkhead class B. Stairways connecting more than two decks shall be enclosed
on all decks. Such enclosures and doors shall be of steel and insulated to at least A-60 with
the exception of boundaries to rooms of little or restricted fire risk. Doors in stairway enclo-
sures shall be close-fitting, self-closing and without ventilation openings. Self-closing doors
shall not be capable of being kept open by means of a hold-back hook. Doors may be kept
open by means of magnetic door holders or the like which are released in conjunction with
the fire alarm system or which can be remote-released.
4. Lift trunks and doors to such trunks shall be of steel. Any trunk connecting more than two
decks shall be insulated as a stairway enclosure.
5. Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panelling or linings shall be suitably divided by close-
fitting draught stops not more than 14 m apart.
6. Ceilings, linings, bulkheads and insulation, except for insulation in cooling and refrigerating
rooms, shall be of non-combustible material. Vapour barriers and adhesives used in connec-
tion with insulation and also insulation materials for cold water pipes, need not be of non-
combustible materials. The use of such materials shall nevertheless be as restricted as prac-
ticable, and uncovered surfaces shall have low flamespread characteristics.
7. Framework and nailbattens and their associated grounds and joining pieces for bulkheads,
linings, ceilings and draught stops shall be made of non-combustible material.
8. Deck coverings shall be of a certified material which does not readily ignite and which has
low flame spread characteristics and does not pose a toxic or explosion hazard at high tem-
peratures as determined in accordance with the FTP Code.
9. Surface materials of interior bulkheads, linings, and ceilings shall be certified, have low
flame spread characteristics and shall not generate large amounts of smoke or toxic substanc-
es as determined in accordance with the FTP Code. This requirement shall also apply to any
barrier laminates on the backside of the panelling or ceiling.
10. Paints, varnishes and other types of finishes used on interior surfaces shall be certified, have
low flame spread characteristics and shall not generate large amounts of smoke or other toxic
substances as determined in accordance with the FTP Code.
11. Furniture, cupboards, curtains, carpets, etc. shall comply with the following requirements:
11.1. Furniture with drawers or cabinets or cupboards, for instance desks, wardrobes, dress-
ing tables, chests of drawers or dressing chests shall be made of certified, non-com-
bustible material, except that the surface of such furnishings may be a combustible ve-
neer not more than 2 mm thick.
11.2. Free-standing furniture such as chairs, sofas, beds and tables shall be made with
frames of non-combustible material.
11.3. Curtains and other hanging textiles shall be made of materials certified in respect of
their resistance to the spread of flames as determined in accordance with the FTP
Code.
11.4. Carpets shall be certified in respect of their low flame spread characteristics.
11.5. Materials used for all upholstery purposes and bedding shall be certified in respect of
their resistance to ignition and the spread of flames as determined in accordance with
the FTP Code.
12. Ventilation ducts leading to hazardous areas shall not be permitted to pass through accom-
modation spaces, service spaces or control stations.
13. Ventilation ducts leading to accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations shall
not be permitted to pass through hazardous areas.
14. Ventilation ducts for machinery spaces of category A and galleys shall not be permitted to
pass through accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations where such ducts are
not in accordance with the specifications laid down in subsections 14.1 or 14.2:
316
14.1. The ducts are made of steel and with a thickness of at least 3 mm in the case of ducts
with a diameter/width of up to 300 mm and at least 5 mm in the case of ducts with a
diameter/width equal to or greater than 760 mm. For canal sizes between 300 and 760
mm the thickness of the steel shall be determined by interpolation.
The ducts are insulated to Class A-60 standard throughout in accommodation spac-
es, service spaces or control stations.
14.2. The ducts are constructed as provided in 14.1 first sentence and fitted with fire dam-
pers near the spaces to which the ducts lead. The ducts are insulated to Class A-60
standard from the machinery spaces and galleys to at least 5 m beyond each fire dam-
per.
15. Ventilation ducts for accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations shall not be
permitted to pass through machinery spaces of category A and galleys where such ducts are
not in accordance with the specifications laid down in subsections 15.1 or 15.2:
15.1. The ducts are constructed as provided in 14.1 and insulated to Class A-60 standard
within machinery spaces of category A and galleys.
15.2. The ducts are constructed as provided in 14.1 within machinery spaces of category A
and galleys and fitted with fire dampers in the divisions to those spaces.
16. All ventilation ducts, where not required to be constructed of steel, shall be of certified non-
combustible material.
17. Where ventilation systems penetrate bulkheads or decks of category A, precautions shall be
taken to reduce the likelihood of smoke and hot gases passing from one deck to another
through the system. Ventilation ducts shall, where necessary, be insulated as required for the
relevant bulkhead or deck.
Ducts of 750 cm
2
or more in sectional area which penetrate bulkheads or decks of category
A shall be fitted with fire dampers. Penetrations less than 750 cm
2
in sectional area need not
be fitted with fire dampers provided the penetration for a total length of at least 900 mm is
made of steel, has a thickness of at least 3 mm and is fire insulated to the same standard as the
relevant bulkhead or deck. Ventilation ducts may penetrate adjoining spaces without fire
dampers being fitted provided the ducts in their entire length within said spaces have the
same fire integrity as the deck or bulkhead which the duct penetrates.
18. Fire dampers shall be automatic. Additionally, they shall be capable of being operated
(opened/closed) from the control station and locally from both sides of the division in which
they are fitted. Indication of the actual position (opened/closed) of the fire dampers shall be
provided locally and in the control station. The fire dampers shall be certified in accordance
with IMO resolution A.754(18) or equivalent.
19. Main intakes and outlets of all ventilation systems shall be capable of being closed from an
easily accessible and safe place outside the spaces being ventilated. Additionally, it shall be
possible to close such openings from the control station.
20. Ventilation fans shall also be capable of being stopped from the places referred to in the pre-
ceding subsection.
21. Where in individual cases other materials than steel are permitted to be used in pipe systems
for sanitary systems, etc., penetrations in bulkheads and decks of category A shall be made of
steel and shall have a total length of at least 900 mm, or other certified penetration.
22. Windows and sidescuttles facing the drill-floor shall be provided with dead-lights of steel or
equivalent material. Such dead-lights may be substituted by a water deluge system which
protects the windows and sidescuttles. Windows and sidescuttles approved for a thermal load
corresponding to A-60 rating may be used without deadlights or deluge systems.
23. Windows and sidescuttles, except windows in wheelhouses, shall be of a non-opening type.
Windows in wheelhouses shall, if they can be opened, be capable of being closed quickly.
24. Exterior doors shall be made of steel and shall be self-closing. Stricter rules may be applied
in pursuance of other sections or regulations.
Added by regulation 4 Sept 1987. Amended by regulations 12 May 1989, 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
318
20
Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks
1. In addition to requirements referred to in 19, bulkheads and decks shall as a minimum be
constructed and insulated in accordance with the tables in subsections 2 and 3.
2. Fire integrity of bulkheads separating adjacent areas.
1
Spaces (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Control (1) A-0 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 +
stations d/ a/ a/ e/
Corridors (2) C B-15 B-15 B-15 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
A-0 e/
b/
Accommodation B-15 B-15 B-15 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-30 +
spaces (3) A-0 A-0 e/
except corridors b/ b/
and stairways
Stairways (4) B-15 B-15 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
A-0 A-0 e/ +
b/ b/
Service areas (5) C A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
(low risk)
Machinery spaces + A-0 A-60 A-60 +
of category A (6) a/ a/ e/
Other machinery A-0 A-0 A-0 +
spaces (7) a/c/ e/
Hazardous (8) A-0
areas e/
Service spaces (9) A-30 +
(high risk) c/
Open deck (10)
320
3. Fire integrity of decks separating adjacent areas
1
.
Spaces Spaces
below above (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Control (1) A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-15 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 +
stations e/
Corridors (2) A-60 + + A-0 + A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
e/
Accommodation A-60 A-0 + A-0 + A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
spaces (3) e/
except corridors
and stairways
Stairways (4) A-60 A-0 A-0 + A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
e/
Service areas (5) A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 + A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
(low risk)
Machinery spaces A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 + A-60 A-60 A-60 +
of category A (6) a/ e/
Other machinery A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 + A-0 A-0 +
spaces (7) a/ a/ e/
Hazardous (8) A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0
areas e/
Service areas (9) A-60 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 +
(high risk) e/ c/
Open deck (10) + + + + + + + +
1
Notes to be applied to the tables in 20, subsections 2 and 3.
Note 1: a) Where the space contains an emergency source of power or components of an emergency source of
power, this space is not permitted to be adjacent to a space containing the units diesel generator in-
stallation or components of this installation. The space for the emergency source of power shall be
located at a safe distance from the hazardous area.
b) For classification of bulkheads, see 19, subsections 2 and 3.
c) Where spaces are of the same numerical category and superscript c appears, a bulkhead or deck of
the raiting showed in the tables is only required when the adjacent spaces are for a different purpose.
d) Bulkheads separating the chartroom of the wheelhouse from the radio room may be of B-15 rating.
e) Depending on the classification area the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may stipulate stricter re-
quirements with regard to fire integrity and structural separation of adjacent areas/spaces after a
more detailed estimate of risk, cf. 4.
+ denotes that a division is required to be of steel or equivalent material, but is not required to be A
class standard. Exterior surfaces which may be exposed to hydro carbon fires, shall be specially con-
sidered.
denotes no requirements.
Note 2: Accommodation spaces and control stations shall be located outside hazardous areas and shall be sep-
arated as far as practicable from such areas. Exterior surfaces facing the drilling or production area shall
at least be insulated to A-60 standard. On the basis of the results of risk analyses/calculations of design
fire, class H fire divisions may be required.
Note 3: When locating main machinery spaces/generator spaces, the fire integrity towards the drilling area shall
be specially considered.
Note 4: Installation of sprinkler systems gives no reduction in the insulation values.
322
21
Thermal load from flare boom
The thermal load from the flare booms shall be calculated in accordance with API 520, Part 1,
Appendix A, and the consequences for relevant machinery, equipment, etc. on the unit shall be
evaluated and taken into consideration. The thermal load where personnel may stay for short pe-
riods, shall not exceed 6.3 kW/m
2 1
.
1
When burning off for longer periods, the thermal load should not exceed 4.7 kW/m
2
where personnel may stay.
Chapter V
Alarm and intercommunication system
22
Fire alarm
1. An electrically operated alarm system shall be provided so that those on board can be warned
in case of danger.
2. In addition, an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system shall be provided in accommo-
dation spaces, control stations, machinery spaces, service areas (high risk), mud rooms, shale
shaker rooms and other areas exposed to fire hazards. The two alarm systems may be in-
tegrated. Alarm bells (sirens) or other satisfactory audible warning system shall be provided
in accommodation spaces, in machinery spaces, on the drill floor, on open decks and in other
areas where work is carried out, so that everybody on board can hear the alarm when it is ac-
tivated.
3. The electric installations of the alarm system shall be in accordance with regulations in force
concerning electrical installations, maritime installations, and the electrical equipment regu-
lations laid down by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Plan-
ning. Alarm bells may be replaced by pneumatically operated typhoons.
4. The power supply system shall consist of at least two independent sources of power, each
capable of supplying the alarm system for a period of 18 hours. One of the sources of power
shall be an emergency source of power consisting of batteries being continuously charged.
5. The detection system shall be divided into loops. There shall be separate loops for accommo-
dation spaces, for machinery spaces of category A and for hazardous areas.
6. All areas in machinery spaces of category A and in emergency generator rooms shall be ef-
fectively monitored by suitable detectors. Areas particularly exposed to fire near engines,
generators and oilfired boilers shall be particularly well covered. The detector installation
shall be based on two different detector principles one of which shall be sensitive to combus-
tion gases (smoke detectors). In accommodation spaces the detector installation shall be
based on smoke detectors.
7. There shall be manually operated call points on the drill floor on the helicopter deck or in its
immediate vicinity, in the wheelhouse, control stations, machinery spaces of category A, oth-
er major service spaces, common rooms, stairways, and corridors in accommodation spaces.
8. In spaces where the noise level exceeds 90 db(A), flashing or rotating lights connected to the
system shall be mounted in addition to bells (sirens).
9. Automatically activated alarms shall first initiate signals in the fire alarm central (i.e. the
room containing centralized fire-recording equipment) and in the wheelhouse or some other
place where there is continuous watch. From the fire alarm central it shall be possible to ma-
nually activate alarm to the entire unit or to particular areas. If the signals indicated in the fire
alarm central have not received attention within 2 minutes, alarm signals shall be
automatically initiated all over the unit. Activation of manually operated call points shall in-
itiate alarm signals direct all over the unit.
324
10. Lifeboat alarm is given by a continuous signal on the siren or horn, at the same time as a con-
tinuous alarm is given by the alarm system. The fire alarm is given by intermittent alarm by
the alarm system.
11. Automatic fire alarm systems shall be certified in accordance with the requirements of re-
cognized standards such as EN-54, IEC 92-504 or equivalent.
12. It shall be verified that the system is in accordance with the relevant regulations and works
satisfactorily and that the alarm bells and loudspeakers, etc. which have been mounted can be
heard by those on board everywhere in accommodation spaces, service spaces and machin-
ery spaces. At least once a year there shall be a practical test to check that the alarm system
works satisfactorily.
Amended by regulations 22 May 1990, 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
23
1
Communication system
1. The unit shall be equipped with a two-way intercommunication system, which may be a tele-
phone system with a power supply which is independent of the main net. Means shall be pro-
vided for two-way communication between inter alia control rooms, wheelhouse, radio
room, machinery spaces, offices, day rooms, mess rooms and officers cabins.
2. The unit shall further be provided with a public address system through which messages can
be transmitted from the control centre, control stations, radio room and offices to the whole
unit, selectively or collected. Highest priority shall be given to the control centre. The loud-
speaker circuits shall be so arranged that the public address system receives a satisfactory
signal from at least two independent circuits all over the unit. Each circuit shall be protected
against overload caused by earth fault or short circuit. Any fire or explosion within an en-
closed space or other limited areas shall not disrupt the operation and functioning of the pub-
lic address system in other spaces or areas. The power supply system shall consist of at least
two independent sources of electrical power, one of which shall be a battery source of electri-
cal power being continuously charged. The battery source shall have a capacity equalling 18
hours operation of the system.
3. There shall be a separate loudspeaking communication system between the drill floor, der-
rick platform and lower deck.
4. Where an integrated public address system and alarm system has been arranged, there shall
be at least two independent amplifiers and tone generators with automatic switch-over in
case of fault. Each amplifier shall have sufficient capacity to operate the alarm and public ad-
dress system. The loudspeaker circuits shall be so arranged that a satisfactory loudspeaker
function from at least two independent circuits is maintained all over the unit after a fault in
one of the amplifiers. The alarm function shall have priority over the communication func-
tion. The battery source of electrical power shall have sufficient capacity to supply both the
public address system and the alarm system for a period of 18 hours.
5. The public address system shall be certified in accordance with the requirements of a recog-
nized standard.
Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 397 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003)
1
Ref. also Regulations of 4 September 1987 No. 857 concerning anchoring/positioning systems on mobile offshore units, 6
subsection 7.1, and Regulations of 13 January 1986 No. 31 concerning deck cranes, etc. on mobile offshore units, 5 sub-
section 11.
326
Chapter VI
Gas detection, Emergency shut-down
24
Gas hazard/system
1. Areas with systems carrying oil/gas and drilling mud which may give off gas shall be design-
ed and segregated from other areas/systems in such a way that gas leaks are quickly detected,
the dispersion of gas is prevented, and the consequences of a possible fire and explosion are
reduced.
2. Areas for accomodation spaces shall be located as far away as possible from drilling and pro-
duction areas.
3. For flotels, constructions and maintenance vessel, and other mobile units which do not have
gas sources on board but where escaped hydrocarbon gas may come from near-by installa-
tions, the gas hazard shall be assessed from the owners operational strategy for the unit in
the event of a critical situation.
Based on the owners specified operational strategy, an assessment must be made of how
the gas detection and emergency shut-down systems of the flotel should be arranged, and to
what extent it is necessary that the equipment remaining after an emergency shut-down is ex-
plosion-protected. Electrical equipment which shall be able to function after an emergency
shut-down shall be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 2.
4. Mechanical ventilation systems shall be designed so that as far as practicable the spread of
gas, fire, and explosion is prevented. Ventilation systems for accomodation spaces and con-
trol stations shall be arranged in such a way that the penetration into these areas of any flam-
mable, toxic and noxious gases and smoke is prevented. Overpressure ventilation from areas
as safe as possible may be one way of complying with this requirement.
5. Control stations shall be located according to an evaluation of possible accidents, such as e.
g. explosion and fire.
6. Gas discharge from safety valves etc. which may occur under abnormal operating conditions
shall be led through pipes to an area without explosion or fire hazard.
7. The risk of explosion in double bottoms shall be considered. If there is a risk that an explo-
sive atmosphere may form because of leaks from adjacent spaces, oil leaks from pipelines in
double bottoms etc., the double bottom shall normally be fitted with adequate mechanical
ventilation. The ventilation shall provide overpressure in relation to adjacent zone 1 and 2
areas. (Cf. 25 subsection 1.2).
8. Tools etc. intendent for use in a gaseous atmosphere (e. g. for stopping a gas leak) shall be
designed for use in hazardous areas.
9. In hazardous areas the fastening of equipment shall be especially evaluated with regard to the
risk that the equipment may fall down or bump together so that sparks are created.
25
Gas detection
1. Gas detectors outside hazardous areas.
1.1. Gas detectors for hydrocarbon gas (HC) shall be installed in all ventilation intakes for
the accomodation spaces. In geographical areas where H2S gas may occur in the reser-
voir the owner shall consider the need to also install H2S detectors.
Gas detectors for hydrocarbon gas (HC) shall be installed in all external intakes for
combustion air.
For other ventilation systems, there shall either be arranged gas detectors for HC
gas in all ventilation intakes, or these ventilation systems shall be automatically shut
328
off when gas is detected (low level) in hazardous areas zone 1 or zone 2. (Cf. 26 sub-
section 1.1.)
1.2. If mechanical ventilation has been arranged for double bottoms, the air intake shall be
monitored by gas detectors. If a leak in a double bottom may lead to the formation of
hydrocarbon gas, outlets shall also be monitored by gass detectors.
1.3. Certified portable gas detectors for hydrocarbon gas (HC) and hydrogen sulphide gas
(H2S) (at least two of each) shall be easily accessible on board. (Ref. 25 subsection
5.1.)
2. Gas detectors in hazardous areas, zone 1 and zone 2.
2.1. Gas detectors for hydrocarbon gas (HC) and hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S) shall be per-
manently installed in:
the drill floor area
the shale shaker room, above or inside the outlet for the drilling fluid backflow from
the well
other areas where drilling fluid, reduction valves or blow-out preventors on deck
may give off gas.
2.2 In addition to detectors located in spaces as specified in subsection 2.1 above, gas de-
tectors for HC gas and H2S gas shall be installed in the extractor ventilation from spac-
es where gas will first naturally be released from the drilling fluid, i.e. usually in the
shale shaker room.
2.3. There shall otherise be gas monitoring in areas where this is reasonable, e. g. at test
separators and similar.
2.4. The well monitoring companys own gas detection system is regarded as a separate
system in addition to the above.
3. The gas detection system.
3.1. A gas detection central shall be located in a manned control station/emergency control
station. A gas detection central or a slave panel clearly showing where gas has been
detected shall be installed on the drill floor. A seperate alarm shall be given for HC gas
and H2S gas. On flotels and other construction and maintenance vessels where gas de-
tection systems have been arranged, the gas detections central shall be located in a
manned control station.
3.2 The gas detection system shall indicate gas concentrations in per cent of the lower ex-
plosion limit (LEL) for HC gas and indicate parts per million (ppm) for H2S gas.
3.3 It shall be possible to give gas alarm at two levels of concentration.
Hydrocarbon gas (HC) at 20% of the LEL (low level) and 60% of the LEL (high le-
vel).
Hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S) at 10 ppm (low level) and 20 ppm (high level).
A visual and audible alarm shall be given in the following areas at both low and high
level gas indication:
where gas is detected
on the drill floor
in the manned control station/emergency control station
in other similar areas
Alarms shall be located in such a way as to be easily visible and audible and shall
comply with a recognized standard
1
.
3.4. The gas detection system shall be arranged with an alarm for failure in the power sup-
ply and signal cable rupture.
3.5. The gas detection system shall be supplied with electricity from two independent
souces of power, one of which shall be an accumulator battery under automatic charg-
ing. In the event that the normal power supply fails, the reserve power supply shall
automatically take over.
3.6. The gas detection central and gas detectors shall be certified.
4. Gas detectors.
Gas detectors shall be located so that any gas discharge is registered quickly and reliably. In
330
order to achieve a reliable function, the type of detector and the limitations/recommendations
specified by the manufacturer shall be taken into consideration.
5. Calibration and testing etc.
5.1. Gas detectors shall be of a type which can be easily calibrated/checked for errors.
5.2. When locations for gas detectors are chosen, special attention shall be paid to the pos-
sibilities for testing and calibration.
5.3. In areas where calibration/testing may be difficult, suitable gas detectors, for example
of the self-monitoring type, must be used, combined with special testing systems.
1
Ref., inter alia, IMO resolution A.830(19) - Code on Alarms and Indicators 1995.
26
Emergency shut-down
1. Automatic emergency shut-down.
1.1. When a low-level gas concentration of (HC gas) or (H2S gas) is registered in the venti-
lation intake for the accomodation spaces on drilling platforms, this ventilations sys-
tem shall automatically shut down. This involves the stopping of fans and closing of
dampers in intakes and outlets.
In mechanical ventilation for all other spaces outside hazardous areas, with the ex-
ception of spaces as referred to in subsections 1.2, 1.4, and 1.5 below, either the in-
dividual ventilation system shall be automatically shut down separately when gas is
registered, or alternatively be arranged so that all these ventilation systems are auto-
matically shut down when gas is registered (low level) in hazardous areas, zone 1 or
zone 2 (cf. 25 subsection 1.1).
1.2. The ventilation for the machinery space should normally shut down automatically
when low-level gas concentractions (HC) and (H2S) are registered. (For combustion
air, ref. 26 subsection 1.5).
The choice of shut-down arrangements for machinery space ventilation must be
evaluated against the possible need to maintain certain safety-critical functions/equip-
ment in the machinery space.
1.3. Ventilation systems in connection with hazardous areas shall not shut down automat-
ically.
1.4. Any standby fans to ventilate gas or prevent the penetration of gas shall start auto-
matically in the event of low-level gas detection.
1.5. The supply of combustion air for motors for main and emergency generators shall be
separated from the other machinery space ventilation systems. The separate combus-
tion air intakes shall be fitted with gas detectors giving alarm in a manned control sta-
tion. All diesel engines and similar on drilling platforms shall be fitted with a damper
in the intake for the manifold which automatically cuts the supply of combustion air
when the engine is raced because of gas. The requirement for automatic stopping of
engines may, upon evaluation, be waived for dynamically positioned mobile units if
faults in the automatic system may lead to inadvertent stopping of the engines. In case
of a manual emergency shut-down Level 2, the same damper shall be activated (cf.
26 subsection 2.4.2. below).
2. Manual emergency shut-down.
2.1. It shall be possible to carry out a manual emergency shut-down of the unit from at
least two strategic locations, one of which shall be outside hazardous areas (normally
the drill floor and a manned control station). For flotels any manual emergency shut-
down is required from only one station.
2.2 Manual emergency shut-down may be permitted as a step-by-step operation, in which
case the activation on one level shall automatically activate all subjacent levels. The
step-by-step emergency shut-down may be adapted to the individual unit, but subsec-
tion 2.4 below shall as a minimum be complied with. Alternatively, several (i.e. more
332
than 2) step-by-step emergency shut-down levels may be used if this can be verified as
being conducive to safety.
2.3. The manual activation mechanism, button, switch or similar, for emergency shut-
down shall be protected against unintended operation.
2.4 Manual step-by-step emergency shut-down:
2.4.1. Level 1. Emergency shut-down includes:
All ventilation systems except the ventilation systems in hazardous areas,
ventilation necessary to maintain the operation of generator sets for the
electrical power supply and ventilation for critical monitoring and safety
equipment.
Burners for auxiliary boilers and incinerators.
Any well-flow testing equipment.
2.4.2. Level 2. Emergency shut-down includes:
Equipment mentioned in subsection 2.4.1.
Main generator set for electrical power supply including the ventilation
system and other auxiliary systems for these.
Emergency generator set.
Battery systems with the exception of the battery systems which form part
of the equipment referred to below in subsection 2.5.
Pressure relief of any well-flow testing equipment.
Other diesel engines and similar which are not approved for zone 2.
2.5. After a level 2 emergency shut-down the following equipment shall as a minimum be
functional:
Emergency lighting (battery lights)
Control systems for the blow-out preventor (BOP)
General alarm system
Public address system (PA)
Communication equipment for external and internal distress communication (UHF/
VHF communication)
Release system for fixed fire-extinguishing installations
Equipment for release of anchor lines, including the deluge installation
Light and sound signals as prescripted by 13 subsections 2.1 and 2.2 of the Con-
struction Regulations
1
Diving system if this is necessary for the safety of the divers
Indicating system for effectuated emergency shut-down
The above equipment shall be certified for use in a hazardous area, zone 2. All elec-
trical equipment shall comply with the regulations currently in force laid down by the
Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning. The battery package itself
need not be specially explosion-protected if located in a safe area. Electrical equip-
ment which is to remain in function during major gas discharges and which is protect-
ed by excess pressure (Ex.p.) must be ensured excess pressure even if the main and
emergency power fails.
2.6. When emergency shut-downs in accordance with subsection 2.4 have been effectuat-
ed, this must be indicated on the drill floor, in a manned control station and in any
emergence control station.
2.7. When an emergency shut-down has been activated, automatic attempts at re-starting
the machinery shall be disconnected for as long as the shut-down is activated.
2.8. The emergency shut-down system shall be so constructed that operations in progress
are safely terminated (e.g. hoisting of drill string). The emergency shut-down shall be
carried out in a safe manner which will not involve any risk of further accidents.
2.9 The emergency shut-down system shall be so constructed that it will fail to the condi-
tions which is safest for the unit both in the event of signal failure and failure in the
power supply. What is the safest conditions shall be evaluated for each individual sys-
tem.
334
2.10. The emerency shut-down system shall be protected against common mode failures
and physical damage. This may be achieved by separation of equipment and appor-
priate physical and electrical division of the system.
2.11. From the central for emergency communication equipment (UHF/VHF) it shall be
possible to communicate individually with the various UHF/VHF sets and with all of
them simultaneously. UHF/VHF sets shall be capable of maintaining communication
in noisy areas.
2.12 There shall be two sources of power for the operation of the emergency shut-down-
system. In the event of a failure in the regular power supply the reserve power supply
shall automatically take over.
1
Ref. Regulations of 4 September 1987 No. 856 concerning construction of mobile offshore units.
27
Operating and preparedness
1. For special operations which may involve an increased risk of gas discharge on the unit (e.g.
testing of well flow) the operations manual shall contain procedures for preparing, starting,
effectuating, and finishing the operation. Check lists or similar are expected to be used in or-
der to ensure that all circumstances of significance to a successful operation are covered.
2. The operations/preparedness manual shall include plans/procedures in connection with pos-
sible minor gas discharges in hazardous areas and for major gas discharges spreading beyond
hazardous areas. The procedures shall cover any possible gas situations and relevant emer-
gency shut-down levels, including situations in which it may be correct to move the unit by
releasing risers and anchor lines.
The procedures shall further include all planned forms of emergency shut-off of the gas
discharge, pressure relief, and also active fighting of the gas hazard, and evacuation.
Preparedness procedures for flotels shall in addition contain alarm procedures and co-or-
dination between the permanent installation and the flotel.
Added by regulation 22 May 1990
28
Maintenance of explosion-proof equipment
1. Maintenance of equipment.
Special routines are required for the maintenance of electrical explosion-proof equipment
so that this equipment maintains its function. Particular mention is made of flame-proof
joints in flame-proof equipment (Ex.d.) and earthing of zener barriers for intrinsic safety
equipment (Ex.i.). (Ref. regulations in force laid down by the Directorate for Civil Protection
and Emergency Planning.)
2. Maintenance of gas detection systems.
There shall be a system for calibration and maintenance of gas detection systems. The sys-
tems shall be calibrated and tested before the unit is put into operation and subsequently as
often as necessary for the systems to function as intended (minimum 90% accessibility).
3. Maintenance of the emergency shut-down system.
There shall be a system for testing and maintainance of the emergency shut-down system.
All function shall be tested before the unit is put into operation and subsequently as often as
necessary for the systems to function as intended.
Total shut-down (level 1 and level 2) shall be carried out at least once per year.
336
29
Equipment brought on board
Equipment which is sent on board by operator companies/service companies etc., such as work-
shop containers, testing equipment, logging equipment etc., shall have been checked through the
operators/service companys Safety Management System and documented as being in order prior
to arrival on board. The equipment shall be adapted to the equipment to which it will be connected
(e.g. pressure, class/barriers) and to the location (zone area) it will have on board. Emergency
shut-down procedures for such equipment shall be clarified, whether the equipment is linked to
the units own emergency shut-down system or not.
Added by regulation 22 May 1990. Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 397 (in force 1 Sept 1999)
Chapter VII
Miscellaneous provisions
30
Special provisions for existing units
Added by regulation 22 May 1990. Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
31
Deviations
Amended by regulations 12 May 1989, 22 Mai 1990, 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
32
Penalty
Amended by regulations 12 May 1989, 22 Mai 1990, 11 April 2003 no. 493 (in force 1 July 2003).
33
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force at once.
Chapter VI of the regulations enters into force on 22 May 1990 for new units. Existing units (cf.
30 second paragraph) shall comply with the requirements of Chapter VI by 1 January 1991.
857/87 Anchoring regulation
338
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
3 The obligations of the owner and the platform manager . 340
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5 Approval system audit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
6 The anchoring/positioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
7 Testing and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
8 Operation of the anchoring/positioning system . . . . . . . . 350
9 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
9 A Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
11 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
anchoring/positioning systems on mobile offshore units
to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships 1, 9a, 41 first paragraph, and 41a, cf. Royal
Decrees of 12 October 1962, 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978, 25 May 1984, and also Formal Del-
egation of 15 January 1979 and 6 June 1984. Amended 2 March 1999 and 11 April 2003 No. 506,
cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
1
Definitions
For the purpose of the present regulations, the following definitions shall apply:
340
6. Certified:
a Notified Body,
Directorate, or
Convention.
tified by:
Directorate.
Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no, 403 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 506 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
gian ship register.
issue.
3
The obligations of the owner and the platform manager
The owner and the platform manager are responsible for compliance with the provisions of
these regulations
1
.
1
4
Documentation
The owner shall be able to document that the requirements of these regulations are complied
with. Documentation shall be sent to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on request. The con-
tents, scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate.
342
5
6
The anchoring/positioning system
1. General
The anchoring/positioning system shall be such that the unit is kept in place with the nec-
essary accuracy and reliability under the weather conditions which may reasonably be ex-
pected. The requirements specified below have basically been given for units equipped for
drilling for subsea petroleum resources and units operating in the vicinity of permanent in-
stallations. For less risky operations the requirements may be reduced.
2. Anchor winch
2.1. The anchor winch shall be constructed in such a way that no nominal tension in the
structure occurs which exceeds 90 % of the material yield point when subjected to a
static load equal to the breaking strength of the anchor chain/steel rope.
2.2. The anchor winch shall have at least two independent holding brake systems engaged
at any time. The total static holding force shall at least correspond to the breaking
strength of the relevant anchor chain/steel rope (first steel rope layer). The weaker
brake shall be able to hold at least 50% of the said breaking strength. In addition the
winch shall have a dynamic brake system. The winch brakes shall be able to stop pos-
sible combined loads from anchor, anchor chains/steel rope and anchor handling ves-
sel during setting of the anchor at maximum speed (cf. 2.3 below). Nominal tension in
the brake system (i.e. in all parts that are being exposed to loads during the braking)
shall during such loads not exceed 85 % of the minimum specified yield point of the
material though a maximum of 80% of the breaking strength of the material. On
winches without chain/steel rope stoppers the holding brakes shall work directly on
the wildcat or wildcat axle.
2.3. The characteristics of speed/load to which the dynamic brake system can be exposed
during setting of the anchor without damaging overheating occurring shall be docu-
mented and included in the operation manual.
2.4. When engaged, the brakes of the anchor winch shall not be affected by failure in the
normal power supply. If the power supply fails during operation of the winch, a re-
mainder braking force of minimum 50% of the winchs maximum braking force shall
be instantly and automatically engaged.
2.5. It shall be possible to release the brakes in the same way as mentioned in subsection
3.1 below by means of stored energy in the course of 15 seconds, and in such a way
that there is a controlled lowering of the entire chain/steel rope in an emergency.
2.6. The anchor winch with its associated parts shall be designed so as to permit release of
the entire chain/steel rope in a safe manner at the most unfavourable angle of heel pur-
suant to 21 of the Stability Regulations.
1
2.7. There shall be a system which efficiently prevents the possibility of sparks resulting
from lowering of the anchor chain from igniting gas. This may be done by e.g. a per-
manent sprinkler or a system for slow lowering of the anchor chain.
2.8. The anchor winch shall be positioned and arranged in such a way that a minimum of
additional loads in the anchor chain/steel rope will occur apart from the pure tensional
strains.
2.9. The anchor winch shall have a pulling force which after anchoring makes it possible
to test the holding force of the anchor system statically up to the maximum load to be
expected in accordance with calculations or which experience has proved necessary to
secure anchor holding force under extreme weather conditions, nevertheless a mini-
mum of 0.350.4 times the breaking load of the anchor chain/steel rope.
344
2.10. Anchor winches shall be certified by an MOU classification society. Every winch
shall be delivered with a certificate which includes information on:
Anchor chain and/or wire dimension and length for which the winch has been de-
signed.
Static brake holding forces (first steel rope layer).
Braking capacity during setting of the anchor, as specified in subsection 2.3 above.
Maximum setting speed(s) as a function of anchor line tension (should be given in
the form of a table or curve).
Remainder braking force (after failure in power supply).
Maximum pulling force of the anchor winch (steep force).
Break-in capacity. Maximum break-in capacity(-ies) as a function of anchor line
tension (should be given in the form of a table or curve).
3. Chain/steel rope stoppers
3.1. It shall be possible to release chain/steel rope stoppers and any pawl mechanism in-
dividually or in convenient groups from a well protected area by the winch itself, and
from a manned control room or bridge. The release operation shall be possible without
special preparations and by means of stored energy in the course of 15 seconds and up
to a tension corresponding to the breaking strength of the anchor chain/steel rope.
During this operation the nominal tension in the structure shall not exceed the mini-
mum specified yield point of the material, nevertheless a maximum of 80% of the
breaking strength of the material. No single error, including operators error, shall lead
to the release of more than one anchor line. Release of chain/steel rope stoppers shall
be co-ordinated and run in conjunction with the release of the brakes mentioned in
subsection 2.5 above.
3.2. The chain/steel rope stopper shall be designed in such a way that the necessary
maintenance and associated functional testing of the stopper can be carried out in a
simple manner.
3.3. Chain/steel rope stoppers shall be certified by an MOU classification society. Such
equipment shall be delivered with a workshop certificate which includes information
on:
maximum load in the chain/steel rope which the stopper will be able to release
anchor chain/steel rope dimension (tolerances).
4. Fairlead, etc.
4.1. The nominal tension in the fairlead as well as the fairlead attachment to the vessel
shall not exceed 80% of the minimum specified yield tension, with anchor chain and/
or steel rope in the most unfavourable direction to the breaking point. By most un-
favourable direction is understood unfavourable angles of incidence according to the
operating manual +/-10 in horizontal direction. Attachment of the fairlead shall be
designed and dimensioned in such a way that in case of a possible overload of the fair-
lead no hull damange occurs.
4.2. The fairleads shall have a mounting as free of maintenance as possible and have such
a design that unnecessary break in steel rope and wear of chain are avoided.
4.3. Fairleads shall be designed and positioned so that no considerable, additional tension
develops in the anchor chain/steel rope. Furthermore, the maximum permitted wear
which can be allowed without considerable, additional tension developing in the
chain/steel rope, shall be specified in the operation manual.
4.4. The fairleads shall have a minimum of 7 pockets and the groove width shall not ex-
ceed 1.7 times the chain diameter. Other constructions which provide similar or better
support for the chain may also be accepted.
4.5. Steel rope/fairleads shall have a diameter and groove construction according to the
recommendations of the steel rope manufacturer.
5. Anchor chain and/or steel rope system
5.1. Anchor chain, steel rope or a combination of these can be used.
5.2. For the selected anchoring system it shall be possible to document by means of stan-
dard calculations that the system will provide a safe and secure anchoring in those
346
areas in which the unit will operate. If not, special calculations must be made for each
anchoring. The Directorate may in special cases of anchoring and for special units re-
quire additional calculations and/or special anchoring equipment.
5.3. The consequences of a line break in any anchor line during maximum operating con-
ditions and in extreme weather conditions shall be calculated and shown in the form of
calculated unit deviation and new tension in the remaining anchor lines.
5.4. The calculation methods and environmental loads used, as well as the result of the cal-
culations, shall be documented in an anchoring analysis.
5.5. Unless otherwise stipulated, the following safety factors for tension in the anchor lines
shall be used for calculation purposes:
3 against chain/steel rope breaks under maximum operating conditions.
2 against chain/steel rope breaks under maximum operating conditions after break
in an anchor line (1.4 in the outermost transient).
2 against chain/steel rope breaks under extreme weather conditions.
1.4 against chain/steel rope breaks under extreme weather conditions after break in
an anchor line (1.0 in the outermost transient). For units operating in the vicinity of
other installations, the safety factor shall be 2.0 in the sector facing away from the
installations. The size of the sector is determined in each individual case on the ba-
sis of the risk of collision.
These safety factors are based on a quasi-static method of calculation. For other
methods of calculation, other safety factors may be used where it can be documented
that they will provide equal safety.
5.6. Thruster-assisted anchoring and dynamic positioning:
5.6.1. Thruster-assisted anchoring
Thrusters may be used as an aid for reducing the anchor line forces under
extreme weather conditions, and then according to the following:
70% of the thruster capacity is accepted for units with single manual remote
steering system for the thrusters. For units with an additional, automatically
steered thruster system for optimum use of the thruster which also automat-
ically compensates for possible line breaks, 100% of net thruster capacity is
accepted. Thrust with manual remote steering is not accepted for units sta-
tioned in the vicinity of permanent installations.
5.6.2. Dynamic positioning
If the unit is to keep its position only by using thrusters, the dynamic posi-
tioning system shall satisfy MSC/Circ 645 - Guidelines for dynamic position-
ing of 6 June 1994 or an equivalent standard. The choice of equipment class
shall be based on the consequences that any loss of position may have with re-
gard to the operations which the unit is intended to carry out.
5.7. In addition to the pure tension calculations mentioned in 5.2 and 5.3 above it may for
the maximum loaded anchor line be required calculations of tensions in anchor chains
in the most unfavourable position of the fairlead. In cases where there are doubts
about the calculation methods, measurements will be required as mentioned in section
7, subsection 1.
5.8. Anchor chain and/or steel rope shall be laid out in such lengths so as to avoid vertical
forces on any anchor at the maximum tension under 5.5 above. This shall be possible
to document by calculations.
5.9. Attachments in anchor chain lockers shall not have a higher strength than for the an-
chor winch to be able to pull off the attachment without damaging the unit. The end of
the anchor chain shall not be able to puncture the hull in case of emergency release.
5.10. Fastening of loops and the like on steel ropes shall be carried out by personnel with the
required training or who are licensed by the manufacturer to carry out such work. It
shall be possible to document that the loop hold has at least the same strength as its re-
lated steel rope.
5.11. The anchor chain/steel rope shall be certified by an MOU classification society. Mini-
mum acceptance criteria may be stipulated by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
348
Additional requirements may be made for anchor lines particularly exposed to fatigue
and use of highly solid materials and the like where the requirements of the classifica-
tion society are not considered to be completely adequate.
5.12. Steel ropes shall be protected against corrosion by galvanization according to ISO
Quality A or better. Lower protection against corrosion may also be used in combina-
tion with special inspection procedures on board.
6. Anchors
6.1. The anchors shall as far as practicable be shaped and have such weight that they have
sufficient holding power in relation to the expected maximum tensile force in the an-
chor chain/steel rope under extreme weather conditions and with the highly loaded an-
chor line out of service. The anchor shall in addition be arranged so as to permit hook-
ing of additional anchors. (Cf. also 5.2 above).
6.2. The anchors shall be tested for strength along the same lines as for ships anchors by
an MOU classification society, though with a minimum load equal to 50% of the
breaking load of the related anchor chain/steel rope. The load during testing and re-
lated anchor chain/steel rope type shall be stated in the certificate.
7. Operation and instrumentation
7.1. It shall be possible to operate the anchor winches from a well protected separate oper-
ating house by the winch itself. From the operating house it shall be possible to survey
the anchor handling vessel, chain/steel rope, anchor winch, anchor chain/steel rope
stoppers to such an extent that a safe laying out and heaving in can be performed. The
house shall be located so that it will not be hit by the end of the anchor line in case of
release of the whole length.
7.2. A satisfactory communications system shall be installed between the manned control
room or bridge and the operating house by the winch. The sound level in the operating
house shall be such that communication can take place without problems. (Recom-
mended sound level not higher than 75dB (A)). It shall not be necessary to let go of
operating handles in order to work the communications system (e.g. headphones with
microphone).
7.3. Instruments for reading anchor chain/steel rope velocity and of tension in anchor
chain/steel rope, as well as the length laid out shall be installed on the operating panel
locally for the winch. Control room or bridge where remote release can be performed
shall have instruments for continuous reading of tension in anchor chain/steel rope.
The instruments shall have the relevant danger limits marked. Additionally, the Nor-
wegian Maritime Directorate may require that the unit is equipped for registration of
the anchor line tension.
7.4. In connection with the remote release system from control room of bridge (cf. 3.1
above) or in connection with any other remote operation system, a loudspeaker/bell or
other sound signal shall be installed by every winch for alarm purposes. At locations
where remote operation/release of the winch can be carried out, a signboard shall be
put up with information that the alarm shall be sounded prior to remote operation of
the winch.
7.5. In addition, other instruments, alarms and the like which are essential to the safe and
correct use of the system shall be installed at all locations from which the anchoring
system can be operated.
1
Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight closing
7
Testing and inspection
1. An anchoring test shall be carried out when the anchoring system is new. At this test, the fol-
lowing shall be undertaken:
1.1. Function tests without stress of all anchor windlasses, chain/steel rope stoppers, etc.
350
1.2. Calibration of instruments. Pressure tests of hydraulic systems.
1.3. Setting of all anchors at top speed and tension in the anchor line for testing of the dy-
namic and static braking capacity of the winch (cf. section 6 subsection 2.3).
1.4. Testing of emergency release of all chain/steel rope stoppers and brakes under stress
(cf. section 6 subsection 3.1).
1.5. Controlled lowering, stopping and lowering of anchor chain/steel rope by means of
stored energy (cf. section 6 subsection 2.5).
1.6. Control of the maximum pulling force of the anchor winch.
1.7. Control of the remainder braking force after failure in the power supply (cf. section 6
subsection 2.4).
1.8. Tension measurement in the anchor chain where this runs over wildcat and fairleads,
can be required (cf. section 6 subsection 5.7).
1.9. Functional and redundancy testing of any thruster-assisted system and dynamic posi-
tioning system.
2. During the operating phase, anchor chain and steel ropes with wildcats shall be inspected in
accordance with the rules of the MOU classification society.
3. Inspection, calibration, and functional tests shall be carried out annually on the anchor
winches and anchor chain/steel rope stoppers, thrusters, instrumentation, etc.
4. In the event of anchor line breakage or other conditions which indicate more stringent con-
trol, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may require the execution of a particular inspec-
tion and testing programme.
8
Operation of the anchoring/positioning system
1. The owner shall see to it, and be able to document, that those in charge of anchor handling
and positioning have been given the required training in function and operation of the an-
choring and positioning system. Those in charge shall also check whether the regulatory re-
quirements with regard to safety factors etc. have been met in connection with anchoring and
positioning.
2. Anchor handling shall not commence if the person in charge of the operation in consultance
with the operators of anchor handling vessels finds that the weather conditions are or may
become so bad that the safety of crews and unit or anchor handling vessel can be jeopardized.
3. The information necessary for the safe use of the anchoring/positioning system shall be
given in the operation manual. The consequence of failure in the positioning system shall be
known. The guidelines necessary for operation of the system shall be given so that the re-
quirements in these regulations are complied with at all times. Furthermore, there shall be a
system for documentation of the operation being carried out in accordance with the condi-
tions laid down in these regulations and in anchoring and positioning calculations.
4. Subsequent to every new anchoring the anchor chains/steel ropes shall be test loaded to the
maximum point which, according to calculations, information on environmental conditions
and previous experience, is necessary to secure anchor holding power under extreme weather
conditions (survival conditions). The positioning system shall also be function tested for all
functions, including normal and emergency operation. Programme for such testing shall be
kept on board.
5. When operating in the vicinity of other structures, the permitted maximum line tension under
normal operations must not exceed 80% of the tested anchor holding power (cf. subsection 4
above), nevertheless a maximum of 1/3 of the breaking load of the anchor line. It is assumed
that there is the necessary winch arrangement and adequate winch power on the windside to
pull the unit away under specified maximum conditions without the loads on the lines in-
creasing more than necessary during such operations. (It must be possible to distribute the
load evenly at all times on the loaded lines).
352
6. In connection with each anchor handling, the anchor winch, chain/steel rope stopper, fair-
leads, instrumentation and the like shall be checked and the entire chain/steel rope shall be
visual inspected by the person in charge be each anchor winch. Furthermore, a visual in-
spection of the mooring lines, shackles etc of the anchor buoys or chasers shall be conducted.
The results shall be entered in the deck log or in a special log for the anchoring system.
7. The emergency release system for brakes and for chain/steel rope stoppers shall through
stored energy and with load be function tested by the person in charge of the anchor handling
at every new anchoring. The result shall be entered in the deck log or in a special log for the
anchoring system.
8. The anchor winch sprinkler facility for chain and wildcat shall be tested at every new anchor-
ing. The result shall be entered in the deck log or in a special log for the anchoring system.
9. In the case of anchor breaks or other significant defects or anchors, anchor winches, stop-
pers, instrumentation and the like, the Directorate shall be notified.
10. There shall also be a log on board the unit indicating how each anchor line has been used and
any incidents during use with regard to replacements, maintenance, inspections, breaks, etc.
9
Deviations
9 A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Added by regulation 2 March 1999 no, 403 (in force 1 Sept 1999).
10
Penalty
354
11
Entry into force
878/91 Stability regulations
356
878/91 Stability regulation
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Chapter III: Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
6 Approval System Audit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
7 Requirements for loadline certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Chapter IV: Inclining test and light ship data . . . . . . 364
8 Inclining test and light ship data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Chapter V: Modes of operation, corresponding sta-
bility requirements, KG limit curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
9 Modes of operation, KG limit curves and operational
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
10 Operating condition, stability requirements, curve I-op . 366
11 Transit condition, stability requirements, curve I-tr . . . . 368
12 Survival condition, stability requirements, curve II . . . . 368
13 Temporary condition for semi-submersible units, stabil-
ity requirements, curve III, (de-)ballasting curves . . . . . . 368
14 Continuous KG limit curve for damage stability . . . . . . . 370
Chapter VI: Daily calculations, loading conditions . . 370
15 Calculation of daily loading conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
16 Use of KG limit curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
17 Loading conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Chapter VII: Detailed requirements, stability . . . . . . 372
18 Righting moment curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
19 Inclining moment curves (wind moment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
20 Intact stability requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
21 Damage stability requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
22
1
Reserve buoyancy requirements for semi-submersible
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
23 Damage assumptions and watertight subdivision . . . . . . 386
24 One-compartment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
25 Collision damage to units of ship design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
26 Collision damage to self-elevating units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
27 Collision damage to semi-submersible units . . . . . . . . . . 388
28 Exceptions from damage assumptions for semi-sub-
mersible units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chapter VIII: Freeboard and load lines . . . . . . . . . . . 388
29 Freeboard and load lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chapter IX: Watertight bulkheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
30
1
Strength of watertight bulkheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
31 Openings in watertight bulkheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Chapter X: General requirements for watertight
closing appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
32 Requirements for watertight closing means . . . . . . . . . . 390
358
33 Requirements for provide remote-controlled closing sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
34 Requirements for dimensioning and testing . . . . . . . . . . 392
35 Emergency battery lighting
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
36 Other types of watertight closing means . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Chapter XI: Remote-controlled closing systems and
control systems for watertight closing means . . . . . . . 394
37 Equipment on, and location of, control console and con-
trol station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
38 Master switch for the remote-controlled closing system . 394
39 Mechanical/hydraulic remote-controlled closing system 396
40 Control, indicator and alarm systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Chapter XII: Additional requirements for watertight
sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
41 General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
42 Function in normal operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
43 Function in emergency closing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
44 Signals during emergency closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Chapter XIII: Watertight closing on self-elevating
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
45 Additional requirements for watertight closing of open-
ings on self-elevating units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Chapter XIV: Weathertight integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
46 Weathertight closure of openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
47 Weathertight closing means on self-elevating units . . . . 400
48 Weathertight closing means on drilling ships . . . . . . . . . 400
Chapter XV: Operations manual, routines and in-
structions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
49 Stability instructions and operations manual . . . . . . . . . . 402
50 Special routines for self-elevating units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
51 Special routines for units of a ship design . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Chapter XVI: Final provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
52 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
53 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Regulations 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning
stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/
weathertight closing means on mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 no. 7 con-
cerning Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, sections 1, 9a, 55, cf. Royal Decree of 1 De-
cember 1978 and delegation of authority of 15 January 1979, Royal Decree of 25 May 1984 no.
1156 and delegation of authority of 14 August 1991. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended regula-
tions have been notified in accordance with Council Directive 83/189/EEC, and amended 11 April
2003 No. 543, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
1
These regulations apply to mobile offshore units which are or will be registered in a Norwegian
ship register.
360
Mobile offshore units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register may, until the next cer-
tificate issue, comply with the requirements that applied at the time of the last certificate issue.
2
Definitions
1. Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/API/DIN/NFPA/ISO/CEN/IEC or any oth-
2. Ballasting and deballasting curve: A curve which, with a given reference point, shows how a
units vertical centre of gravity varies as a function of draught, alternatively displacement,
when ballast tanks are filled or emptied in the order complying with the units ballasting pro-
cedures.
3. Transit condition: The condition in which the unit changes its position either by towing or by
its own means of propulsion, and which is within the operational limitations and precondi-
tions set for the condition.
5. Unit: Mobile platform, including drilling ship, equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum de-
posits, and mobile platform for other use than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
6. KG limit curve: A curve showing the maximum allowable vertical centre of gravity (max.
KG) as a function of draught, alternatively displacement, for the stability requirements to be
complied with.
7. Control station: Spaces in which equipment for monitoring, remote control and operation of
the unit is located. These include:
7.1. spaces in which radio, main navigating equipment, emergency source of power and
operations centres for inter-communication, alarm and public address systems are lo-
cated;
7.2. spaces in which equipment for remote control and operation of anchoring systems,
ballast systems, fire-doors, diving systems, dynamic positioning systems,fixed fire-
extinguishing systems, emergency sources of power and watertight doors are located.
8. MODU Code: IMOs (International Maritime Organization) Code for the Construction and
Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, 1989.
10. Operating condition: The condition in which the unit carries out its normal functions, e.g.
drilling, and which is within the operational limitations and preconditions set for the condi-
tion.
11. Owner: Whosoever contracts and/or is responsible for the operation of a unit.
362
12. Survival condition: The condition in which the operational limitations (maximum allowable
wind velocity) for the relevant operating or transit condition have been exceeded, and/or in
which the measures necessary for the condition have been taken.
the requirements of or pursuant to legislation referred to in 1 of Regulations of 2 March
1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore units.
14. Temporary condition: The condition in which a semi-submersible unit changes its draught
from one mode of operation to another, e.g. from transit condition to operating condition.
15. Watertight closing appliance: Closing means capable of withstanding a specified water pres-
sure (normally from either side) to secure the watertight subdivision of the unit.
16. Weathertight closing means: Closing means which, under all relevant sea conditions, pre-
vents water from entering the unit.
Chapter II
General provisions
3
lations
1
.
1
4
Deviations
4 A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
364
Chapter III
Documentation
5
Documentation
6
Approval System Audit Verification
Repealed by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 406, in force 1 Sept 1999.
7
Requirements for loadline certificate
The unit shall carry a valid international loadline certificate (1966), cf. 29.
Chapter IV
Inclining test and light ship data
8
Inclining test and light ship data
1. When as near to completion as possible, every unit shall undergo an inclining test to deter-
mine its light ship data (weight and position of centre of gravity).
2. A record shall be kept of all changes in the weight and location of the equipment included in
the light ship weight. Updated light ship data shall allways be used when calculating daily
loading conditions.
3. After conversions, a new inclining test shall be carried out. For minor alterations where the
weights involved are clearly identified and detailed calculations of weight after completion
of alterations show consistency with a displacement measurement, cf. subsection 4, the re-
quirement for an inclining test may be waived upon application pursuant to 4.
4. A displacement measurement shall be made at every 5-yearly periodic survey of the unit to
discover any change in the light ship weight. If there is a difference between the light ship
weight and the updated light ship data kept on board, or if other circumstances may indicate
and error in the light ship centre of gravity used, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may
require a new inclining test to be conducted.
366
Chapter V
Modes of operation, corresponding stability requirements,
KG limit curves
9
Modes of operation, KG limit curves and operational limitations
1. Operation of the unit is divided into four modes of operation:
operating condition, cf. 10,
transit condition, cf. 11,
survival condition, cf. 12
temporary condition (ballasting/deballasting), cf. 13.
2. For each mode of operation a KG limit curve shall be drawn. All KG limit curves shall be
presented in one diagram together with any ballasting/deballasting curves and continuous
damage stability KG limit curve, cf. 13 and 14.
3. Relevant operational limitations alongside with regard to maximum wind velocity, prohibi-
tion against vessels alongside the unit, tanks which shall be full etc. shall be indicated in con-
nection with the KG limit curve for each individual mode of operation. The maximum wind
velocity permitted for a mode of operation may not exceed the wind velocity used for the cal-
culation of the maximum KG for intact stability. Wind velocities shall refer to a height of 10
m above the water level and shall be an average of measurements over a period of 10 min-
utes.
4. If it is desirable to raise the level of operational limitation as regards the maximum wind ve-
locity permitted for a condition, this may be achieved by using higher wind velocities for the
calculation of maximum KG than what is indicated as the minimum. The ratio between the
wind velocity employed for intact and damage stability shall still be 1.4.
10
Operating condition, stability requirements, curve I-op
1. In the operating condition the unit shall comply with the intact stability requirements laid
down in 20 with a wind velocity of at least 36 metres per second (m/s) (70 knots) and the
damage stability requirements laid down in 21 with a wind velocity of at least 25.8 m/s (50
knots) following assumed damage in accordance with 23. In addition semi-submersible un-
its shall satisfy the reserve buoyancy requirements laid down in 22.
2. Maximum KG to comply with the above stability requirements shall be drawn up for all rele-
vant operating draughts and will subsequently be referred to as curve I-op. Relevant oper-
ational limitations for the condition shall be indicated in connection with the KG limit curve.
3. The unit shall be capable of attaining the survival condition from any operating condition by
deballasting only, or, if necessary by dumping liquid drilling mud, cf. 12. If the max KG re-
lating to the survival condition or temporary conditions impose limitations with regard to the
capability of the unit in attaining the survival condition from the operating condition, these
limitations will determine the max. KG for the operating condition, cf. 13.
4. The above requirements do not apply to submersible and self-elevating units.
1
5. Special conditions for operation.
KG limit curves for special or short-term operations may be based on other criteria or low-
er wind velocities than those referred to in subsection 1. This requires the total safety for the
condition to be at least equal to that of ordinary operating conditions, when operational lim-
itations are also taken into account.
Amended by regulation 2 March 1999 no, 406 (in force 1 Sept 1999).
1
Ref. safety requirements to prevent capsize in the Regulations of 4 September 1987 concerning the construction of mobile
offshore units, 6 subsection 2.4.
368
11
Transit condition, stability requirements, curve I-tr
1. In the transit condition the unit shall comply with the intact stability requirements laid down
in 20 with a wind velocity of at least 36 m/s (70 knots) and the damage stability require-
ments laid down in 21 with a wind velocity of at least 25.8 m/s (50 knots) following as-
sumed damage in accordance with 23.
2. Maximum KG to comply with the above stability requirements shall be drawn up for all rele-
vant transit draughts and will subsequently be referred to as KG limit curve I-tr. Relevant op-
erational limitations for the condition shall be indicated in connection with the KG limit
curve.
3. The unit shall be capable of attaining the survival condition from any transit condition by
ballasting only, or, if necessary, by dumping liquid drilling mud. If the max. KG relating to
the survival condition or temporary conditions, cf. 12 and 13, impose limitations with re-
gard to the capability of the unit in attaining the survival condition from the transit condition,
these limitations will determine the max. KG for the transit condition.
12
Survival condition, stability requirements, curve II
1. In the survival condition the unit shall comply with the intact stability requirements laid
down in 20 with wind velocity of 51.5 m/s (100 knots). For the survival condition no re-
quirements as to damage stability apply, provided no vessel is permitted alongside the unit.
Other activities which may represent a danger of damage or flooding shall restricted to the
minimum necessary for the safety of the unit. If the intended function of the unit precludes
compliance with the above requirements, the damage stability requirements laid down in
21 shall be complied with, with the wind velocity of at least 36 m/s (70 knots) following as-
sumed damage in accordance with 23.
2. Damage stability is not required for accommodation units in survival condition unless neces-
sitated by the above circumstances or other grounds, as e.g. when units connected by gang-
way do not pull away from other installations in survival condition.
3. Max. KG to comply with the above stability requirements shall be drawn up for all the rele-
vant draughts for survival conditions and will subsequently be referred to as KG limit curve
II. Relevant operational limitations in accordance with the above shall be indicated in con-
nection with the KG limit curve for the survival condition. When survival draughts are deter-
mined for semi-submersible units account must also be taken of the requirements regarding
distance between sea level and deck.
1
4. For submersible and self-elevating units the above requirements are applicable only in con-
nection with transit.
1
Ref. requirements for distance between sealevel and deck in the Regulations of 4 September 1987 concerning the construc-
tion of mobile units, 10.
13
Temporary condition for semi-submersible units, stability requirements,
curve III, (de-)ballasting curves
1. In the temporary condition the unit shall comply with the intact stability requirements laid
down in 20 with a wind velocity at least equal to the one used for the calculation of intact
stability for operating and transit conditions, minimum 36 m/s (70 knots).
2. Damage stability is not required if vessels are not permitted alongside at the unit during this
condition. Other activities which may represent a danger of damage or flooding shall be res-
tricted to the minimum necessary to ballast/deballast the unit. If vessels are permitted along-
side the unit during temporary conditions, the unit is also required to comply with the dam-
370
age stability requirements laid down in 21 with a wind velocity of at least 25.8 m/s (50
knots) following damage assumptions in accordance with 23, cf. also 14.
3. Max. KG to comply with the above stability requirements shall be drawn up for all the rele-
vant draughts for temporary conditions and will subsequently be referred to as KG limit
curve III. Relevant operational limitations in accordance with the above shall be indicated in
connection with the KG limit curve for temporary conditions.
4. For semi-submersible units ballasting and deballasting curves shall be drawn up to show that
the unit is capable of attaining the survival condition from both transit condition and operat-
ing condition, and that KG is below curve III for temporary conditions.
14
Continuous KG limit curve for damage stability
In addition to the KG limit curves referred to in 10 to 13 inclusive, a separate curve for
draughts apart from specific operating or transit draughts shall be drawn up to show the max. KG
when the unit complies with the damage stability requirements laid down in 21 with a wind ve-
locity of at least 25.8 m/s (50 knots) following assumed damage in accordance with 23.
Chapter VI
Daily calculations, loading conditions
15
Calculation of daily loading conditions
1. Daily loading conditions with corresponding survival condition shall be calculated on board
on the basis of the relevant quantity of load (deadweight) placed in the most adverse position
which may apply. The KG limit curves shall be used as indicated in 16.
2. The operations manual and the form for calculation of daily loading conditions shall give
specific instructions on when the survival condition is required and on the measures to be ta-
ken to bring the unit to that condition. Any necessary dumping of liquid drilling mud shall be
clearly indicated. Only drilling mud permitted dumped under environmental requirements
shall be assumed to be dumped in the calculations.
3. When calculating displacement and vertical centre of gravity (KG), the amount of chains/
wire which has been paid out/remains onboard shall be taken into account. Account shall al-
so be taken of other vertical forces which may have an adverse effect on the units stability,
for example from the rotary table/derrick hook load or the riser tension load.
16
Use of KG limit curve
1. The KG values for all operating and transit conditions, corrected for the effect of free liquid
surface, shall be below the values given in curve I-op and curve I-tr respectively.
2. For semi-submersible units account shall also be taken of the increased effect of free liquid
surface which may occur in temporary conditions during any ballasting/deballasting in prep-
aration for the survival condition, cf. 13 subsection 4.
3. When the wind velocity exceeds 36 m/s, or any higher verified limit, the units KG values,
corrected for the effect of free surfaces, shall be below the values given in curve II.
4. The KG values for all temporary conditions, corrected for the effect of free liquid surfaces,
shall be below the values given in curve III.
372
17
Loading conditions
The following conditions shall be calculated and shall be included in the operations manual:
1. Normal operating condition at maximum draught with maximum deck load and equipment
in the most adverse position applicable.
2. Survival condition at maximum survival draught, using the same weight distribution as in
subsection 1, except for necessary adjustments of ballast and any dumping of liquid drilling
mud. For drilling units the riser shall be disconnected, and a representative number of drill
pipes shall be standing in the derrick set back area.
3. Normal transit condition with maximum deck load. For self-elevating units the transit condi-
tion shall be checked with the legs standing at their highest position and if relevant, laid
down for ocean tow.
4. Survival condition at maximum survival draught, using the same weight distribution as in
subsection 3, except for necessary ballast adjustments and any dumping of liquid drilling
mud. For the purpose of the calculations the units anchors are assumed to be on board.
Chapter VII
Detailed requirements, stability
18
Righting moment curves
1. Righting moment curves, cf. figures 1 and 2, shall be prepared as supporting material for the
KG limit curves calculated.
2. Calculations of the righting moment shall be based on the unit being able to trim freely dur-
ing inclination, and the effects of mooring forces shall be disregarded.
3. Openings into spaces presumed as buoyant when calculation righting moments shall be fit-
ted with the following closing means:
a) watertight closing means up to the requilibrium waterline in both intact and damage
condition, taking wind moments into account, cf. 20 subsection 1 and 21 subsec-
tion 1. For semi-submersible units, see also requirements in 22 subsection 2 a).
b) weathertight closing means up to the angle at which the requirement as to area be-
tween the curves of the inclining and righting moments has been complied with, at
least 30 inclination for the intact condition, cf. the requirement for second intercept
in 20 subsection 1 b) (figs. 1 and 2). For semi-submersible units, see also require-
ments in 22 subsection 2 b).
4. Closing means of a lower standard than referred to in subsection 3 above shall be considered
as resulting in progressive flooding. This shall be shown as steps in righting moment curve.
(Cf. 22 subsection 3).
19
Inclining moment curves (wind moment)
1. Wind inclining moment curves shall be prepared as supporting material for the KG limit
curves calculated. Wind inclining moments can be determined either by wind tunnel tests or
by calculations. Wind inclining moments may be prepared and presented in accordance with
guidelines issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or other recognized methods.
2. Wind inclining moments shall be prepared for the wind velocities used for the calculation of
max. KG for the various modes of operation. These will normally be 36 and 51.5 m/s for in-
374
tact stability and 25.8 m/s for damage stability, cf. chapter V. The wind velocity shall refer to
a height of 10 metres above the sea level.
3. Wind forces shall be considered from any direction relative to the unit. For the purpose of de-
fining the wind moment curves for the units total draught area, the wind moments shall be
documented for a sufficient number of inclination axis and angles of inclination.
4. The wind moment curves shall take into account maximum deck load and equipment in the
most adverse position applicable. The unit shall be assumed to be floating free of mooring
restraints so that the arm of the wind overturning force is considered to be equal to the verti-
cal distance from the centre of pressure of all surfaces exposed to the wind to the centre of
lateral resistance of the underwater body of the unit.
5. For units with a dynamic positioning system, the wind moment curves shall also be calculat-
ed by taking into account the reactive wind force operating at thruster level. The most ad-
verse wind moment shall be used for the calculation of the units max. KG in the dynamical-
ly positioned condition.
6. Where a unit has undergone alterations which affect the wind inclining moment, new wind
inclining moments shall be prepared either by means of wind tunnel tests or by calculation.
20
Intact stability requirements
1. General requirements for intact stability (cf. fig. 1):
a) Static angle of inclination due to wind (1) shall not exceed 17 in any condition.
b) The second intercept between the righting moment curve and the wind inclination
moment curve (2) shall occur at an angle of 30 or more. The second intercept is de-
fined as the point where the righting moment curve, corrected for any progressive
flooding, crosses the wind inclination moment curve for the second time.
c) The righting moment curve shall be positive over the entire range of angles from
upright to the second intercept.
2. Additional requirements for units of a ship design and self-elevating units:
a) The metacentric height shall be 0.5 metres or higher.
b) The area under the righting moment curve up to the second intercept, or alternative-
ly to a smaller angle, shall be not less than 40% in excess of the area under the wind
inclination moment curve to the same limiting angle.
3. Additional requirements for semi-submersible units:
a) The metacentric height (GM) shall be at least 1.0 metres for all operating conditions
and survival conditions. The metacentric height shall never be less than 0.3 metres in
temporary conditions.
b) The area under the righting moment curve up to the second intercept, or alternative-
ly to a smaller angle, shall be not less than 30% in excess of the area under the wind
inclination moment curve to the same limiting angle.
4. Alternative stability requirements may be approved by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate,
e.g. based on model tests, cf. 4, provided an equivalent level of safety is maintained.
21
Damage stability requirements
Stability requirements applicable when the unit is assumed to be damaged in accordance with
23 to 28:
1. The waterline in the final state of equilibrium after flooding, taking into account the effect of
wind, should be below the lower edge of any opening which might lead to progressive flood-
ing of compartments assumed intact in the calculations. These openings include air pipes (re-
gardless of closing means), ventilators, ventilating openings, non-watertight means of clo-
sure, cf. chapter X. Openings fitted with remote-controlled watertight doors kept closed dur-
376
ing operation of the unit and portholes which cannot be opened are not considered to result in
progressive flooding.
2. In the above-mentioned state of equilibrium the angle of inclination (1) shall never exceed
17 in any direction.
3. The area under the righting moment curve shall be at least equal to the area under the in-
clining moment curve up to the second intercept (2) of the curves. Both areas shall be cal-
culated from the static angle of inclination without wind (0). (See fig. 2).
4. The possibility of reducing angles of inclination by cross-flooding arrangements, by
emptying ballast tanks or other tanks or by taking into account anchoring forces etc. shall not
be taken into consideration for the purpose of complying with the requirements laid down in-
subsections 1 to 3 inclusive.
22
1
Reserve buoyancy requirements for semi-submersible units
Reserve buoyancy requirements for semi-submersible units are (see fig. 3):
1. The righting arm curve after assumed damage in operating condition (cf. 10) shall have a
positive range of at least 10 between the first and second intercept with the wind moment
curve. For one and the same angle (wa) within the positive range the following shall apply:
a) The righting lever curve after damage (righting moment divided by displacement)
shall reach a value of at least 2.5 m.
b) At least 1.0 m of this righting lever shall arise from enclosed watertight volumes
above watertight barriers positioned at or above the lowest continuous deck (top of
column).
2. Requirements for the closing of volumes assumed to provide buoyancy after damage:
a) All openings submerged at the angle wa, shall be fitted with watertight closing
means, cf. chapter X. Closing means activated by submersion may be accepted for
smaller openings if adequate strength and reliability of function can be documented.
b) Openings submerged beyond the angle wa, minimum to the range required by sub-
section 1 (angle for first intercept with the wind moment curve plus 10), shall at least
be fitted with weathertight closing means which can be closed from a dry deck at the
angle wa, and which have operating facilities as described in chapter XIV. This mi-
nimum range for weathertight integrity is shown as we in fig. 3.
3. Steps in the righting lever curve:
a) Any opening referred to in subsection 2 a) and b) without satisfactory closing means
shall be considered to result in flooding of adjacent spaces from the angle at which the
lower edge of the opening is submerged. This shall be shown as steps in the righting
lever curve.
b) Loss of buoyancy as referred to above shall not cause the righting lever curve to fall
below a value twice the value of the inclining wind lever (wind moment divided by
displacement) for the same angle.
1
Mobile offshore units registered before 1 January 1992 for which an equivalent safety level concerning reserve buoyancy
can be documented are considered to meet the requirements of this Section.
378
380
382
A = GZ-curve inclusive bouyant volumes above watertight flats at or above the lowest
continuos deck.
B = GZ-curve exclusive bouyant volumes above watertight flats at or above the lowest
continuous deck.
WHL = Wind heeling lever curve.
= First intercept between GZ curve and WHL curve.
= Second intercept between GZ curve and WHL curve.
wa = Minimum extent of watertight integrity.
we = Minimum range of weathertight integrity.
Fig. 3
Reserve buoyance for semi-submersible units
384
386
23
Damage assumptions and watertight subdivision
1. General provisions.
The unit shall be divided by means of watertight decks and bulkheads to resist flooding as
the result of two main categories of damage:
One-compartment damage in accordance with 24.
Collision damage in accordance with the extent of damage for the type of vessel in
question, cf. 25, 26 and 27 below.
Damage and flooding shall be assumed for the individual modes of operation as specified
in the requirements laid down in 10 to 13 inclusive.
2. Pipes etc. in the damage area.
All shafts, piping and ventilation ducts which may cause flooding of compartments press-
umed to be intact shall be placed outside the damage area for the individual type of vessel, cf.
25, 26 and 27.
3. Permeability factors.
The following permeability factors shall be used for flooding as referred to in subsection
1:
Store rooms 0.60, engine rooms 0.85, accommodation spaces, empty compartments and
tanks 0.95. For spaces where there is reason to believe that deviations from the above factors
exist, the permeability shall be calculated.
24
One-compartment damage
One-compartment damage shall be assumed for any compartment which is wholly or partially
under the waterline in question, and in addition either is limited by the sea or containing piping
systems which lead to the sea.
25
Collision damage to units of ship design
1. In assessing collision damage to units of ship design, the following extent of damage shall be
assumed to occur anywhere within the length of the ship:
longitudinal extent: 3.0 m;
horizontal penetration: 1.5 m;
vertical extent: from the base line and vertically upwards without limit.
2. The units watertight subdivision shall be such that when collision damage is assumed ac-
cording to subsection 1, at least one watertight bulkhead may be assumed to be damaged.
Where damage of a lesser extent than that referred to in subsection 1 results in a more severe
condition, such lesser extent shall be assumed.
26
Collision damage to self-elevating units
1. In assessing collision damage to self-elevating units, the following damage shall be assumed
to occur anywhere at the periphery of the unit:
horizontal extent: 3.0 m;
horizontal penetration: 1.5 m;
vertical extent: from the base line and vertically upwards without limit.
388
3. Where a mat is fitted, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may permit deviations from the
above requirements, if the distance betweeen the hull and the mat is great, cf. 4.
27
Collision damage to semi-submersible units
1. In assessing collision damage to semi-submersible units, the following extent of damage
shall be assumed:
a) Only those columns and pontoons on the periphery of the unit shall be assumed open
to damage, and it is assumed that damage will only occur to exposed parts. Ex-
posed parts are those portions of columns and pontoons, or other parts providing
buoyancy which are located outside a line drawn through the centres of the peripheral
columns (see fig. 4). Vertical limits will be from 5 metres above the maximum oper-
ational draught to 3 metres below the minimum transit draught.
b) Vertical extent: 3.0 m within 5 metres above and 3 metres below the waterline in que-
stion.
c) Horizontal extent: 3.0 m measured along the periphery of the shell.
d) Penetration: 1.5 m measured at a right angle to the shell.
28
Exceptions from damage assumptions for semi-submersible units
For semi-submersible units the calculations of damage stability after assumed damage accord-
ing to 24 and 27 may disregard the flooding of ballast tanks which are always full at the rele-
vant draughts, provided that:
1. The ballasting procedure in the operations manual clearly states that the tanks in question
shall be full at the relevant draughts, irrespective of loading condition.
2. An indication is given on the KG limit curve of the tanks which are required to be full and the
draught area to which this applies.
Chapter VIII
Freeboard and load lines
29
Freeboard and load lines
1. The units load line marks shall indicate the maximum permissible draught, based on the un-
its stability and strength and any other provisions of significance to the determination of
draught.
2. The draught determined shall not be less than laid down in the requirements and chapter V of
these regulations.
1
3. Drilling ships and any other types of unit to which the International Load Line Convention,
1966, applies, shall be subject to the provisions of the said Convention. The maximum
draught shall not exceed the load line calculated in accordance with this Convention.
390
4. Air pipes for tanks and similar with closing means shall be well protected against the sea and
against being struck by deck cargo which has become loose.
1
Ref. also requirements for strength and the distance between sea level and deck in the Regulations concerning the construc-
tion of mobile units, 6 and 10.
Chapter IX
Watertight bulkheads
30
1
Strength of watertight bulkheads
1. General requirements.
The bulkheads which with reference to the damage stability calculations are expected to be
watertight shall be dimensioned for the maximum water pressure that may occur during in-
clination following damage according to the stability requirements of 21, with a utilization
factor of 0.75 against the materials limit of floatability. If necessary, a confirmation from a
MOU classification society of the strength shall be submitted.
2. Additional requirements for semi-submersible units.
a) All submerged bulkheads around volumes providing buoyancy, and watertight bar-
riers at the top of columns shall also be dimensioned to withstand the water pressure
which may occur during inclining, in accordance with the stability requirements of
22 subsection 1 a) and b). If necessary, a confirmation from a MOU classification
society of the strength shall be submitted.
b) Bulkheads and barriers referred to in a) above are permitted with a utilization factor of
0,95 against the materials ultimate strength.
c) As a minimum requirement, watertight bulkheads around volumes providing buoy-
ancy located above the top of the column shall be dimensioned according to require-
ments laid down in rules for external bulkheads exposed to waves, issued by a MOU
classification society.
31
Openings in watertight bulkheads
The number of openings in bulkheads which with reference to the damage stability calculations
are expected to be watertight, shall be limited to the minimum compatible with the design and safe
operation of the unit.
Chapter X
General requirements for watertight closing appliances
32
Requirements for watertight closing means
1. Watertight closing means shall be arranged for all openings or penetrations in watertight
bulkheads in order to maintain the units watertight subdivision.
392
2. Access openings for personnel through watertight bulkheads shall be closed by watertight
sliding doors equipped in accordance with the requirements of Chapter XII. Other types of
watertight doors may be used, provided that the assumptions of 33 subsection 2 is fulfilled.
33
Requirements for provide remote-controlled closing systems
1. Closing means required to be of a watertight type in accordance with the requirements of
18 subsection 3 a), 21 subsection 1, 22 subsection 2 and 45, shall be arranged with re-
mote-controlled closing systems operated from a control console, cf. 37.
2. Closing means may, however, be arranged without a remote-controlled closing system pro-
vided that the following conditions are satisfied:
a) they are kept closed and instructions are posted at each closing appliance, stating that
it should be kept closed whenever the unit is at sea
b) they are used as access openings to closed rooms that are not in use, or in areas not de-
signed for common traffic,
c) the control system otherwise satisfies the requirements of 37 subsections 1b), 1c),
1d), subsection 2 and subsection 3, and
d) central operated dogs are fitted on closing means used as access openings or emergen-
cy exits.
34
Requirements for dimensioning and testing
1. Watertight closing means shall be dimensioned to withstand pressure, normally from eihter
side. The design pressure shall correspond to the maximum water pressure that may occur
during inclination as specified in 30. Strength calculations shall be carried out according to
recognized standards, cf. 2 subsection 1.
2. As a minimum requirement, closing means located in watertight bulkheads above the top of
the column shall dimensioned according to 30 subsection 2 c).
3. A prototype of the closing appliance, fitted in the same way as required on board, shall be
pressure-tested by the manufacturer according to the following criteria:
a) minimum test pressure = relevant water pressure + 5m waterhead, for windows 3 x re-
levant water pressure minimum 5m waterhead
b) pressure testing to be conducted using water from the most critical side
c) acceptable leakage of water = 2 litre per minute/m
2
light area.
4. The closing means shall not be permanently deformed as a result of the pressure test.
5. Following installation on board, closing means such as doors, hatches and flaps shall be test-
ed for watertightness using a hose test. If the seal is clearly visible when the means is closed,
testing using a detector, chalk-testing, etc. may be accepted.
6. If the closing means are also to be used as fire division the prototype shall be tested from the
most critical side, according to the fire safety requirements in force. For watertight sliding
doors, cf. also 41 subsection 5.
35
Emergency battery lighting
1
1
Ref. Regulations of 4 September 1987 No. 856 concerning construction of mobile offshore units.
394
36
Other types of watertight closing means
1. Other types of watertight closing means than those referred to in these regulations will be
evaluated particularly with regard to requirements concerning strength, remote control, and
alarm systems.
2. If the closing means have remote-controlled closing system and personnel may be injured
during remote-controlled closing, the system shall satisfy the standard specified in Chapter
XII with regard to local alarms and the possibility of stopping the remote-controlled closing
locally.
Chapter XI
Remote-controlled closing systems and control systems for
watertight closing means
37
Equipment on, and location of, control console and control station
1. The control console for the closing means shall be equipped with:
a) Remote-controlled closing system with a master switch with two modes of control:
normal operation and emergency closing, cf. 38
b) Diagram showing the location of each closing means.
c) Visual indicators showing whether each closing means are open or closed (indicators
on closing mechanism/dogs).
d) Sound alarm which indicates within one hour that closing means which should have
been closed, have been left open.
e) For closing means operated by mechanical or hydraulic remote control, an alarm sys-
tem giving:
low-level alarm for the hydraulic oil tank
low-level alarm for stored energy (pressure) in the accumulators
low-level alarm for the power supply (measured as close as possible to source)
2. The control console shall be located in the same manned control station as the ballast control
console
1
.
3. The control station shall be located above the most unfavourable waterline for angles of in-
clination as specified in 30, and shall be sufficiently protected against the weather.
1
See eqvivalent requirements regarding location in Regulation of 20. December 1991 concerning ballast system, 16.
38
Master switch for the remote-controlled closing system
1. The master switch shall normally be in the normal operation mode. The closing means
shall then only be capable of being opened and closed locally.
2. With the master switch in the emergency closing mode, closing means which are open
shall be automatically closed by remote control. After reopened locally, the closing means
shall return to closed position.
3. Instructions for use of the master switch shall be located near the switch.
396
39
Mechanical/hydraulic remote-controlled closing system
1. The power supply for the mechanical/hydraulic remote-controlled closing system shall be
connected to the main and the emergency switchboards.
2. The mechanical/hydraulic system shall be separate from other systems and shall be designed
so that a single failure normally only affects the operation of one closing means and under no
circumstances leads to the opening of any closing means which is closed.
3. The mechanical/hydraulic remote-controlled closing system can either be:
a) a centralized system with two independent pumps each connected to accumulators.
The total capacity of the accumulators shall be sufficient to operate 50% of all closing
means at least 3 times (closed-open-closed) during inclination as specified in section
30. For watertight sliding doors, see also requirements in Chapter XII; or,
b) an independent system for each closing means, each with its own pump and accum-
ulators. The capacity of the accumulators shall be sufficient to operate each closing
means at least 3 times (closed-open-closed) during inclination as specified in 30.
For watertight sliding doors, see also requirements in Chapter XII; or,
c) a combination of alternatives a) and b).
4. When the unit is in the upright position, the system/accumulators shall also have the capacity
to close all the closing means simultaneously by remote control within 60 seconds.
5. The time taken from the closing means begin to move until it is completely closed shall be
between 20 and 40 seconds both for the normal operation and for the emergency closing
modes. Opening the door shall be at least equally quick.
40
Control, indicator and alarm systems
1. The control, indicator and alarm systems for the closing means shall be connected to the
main and the emergency switchboard. In addition they shall have battery connection.
2. The collective capacity of the batteries shall be sufficient to operate 50% of all closing means
at least 3 times (closed-open-closed) during inclination as specified in section 30.
3. The systems and their components shall be separate from any other system and shall be de-
signed in such a way that a single failure in a component or a ruptured pipe/cable will not
prevent remote-controlled closing of more than one closing means, or cause already closed
means to open. Similarly, a single failure in the indicator or alarm systems shall not prohibit
the closing, either by remote control or locally, of the closing means.
4. During and after emergency closing the closing means shall not be capable of being opened
or closed unintentionally due to electrical short circuit in the remote-controlled closing sys-
tems. Closing means at access openings shall still be capable of being operated locally.
Chapter XII
Additional requirements for watertight sliding doors
In addition to requirements laid down in Chapters X and XI watertight sliding doors shall satis-
fy the following requirements:
41
General requirements
1. All doors should be capable of being closed mechanically/hydraulically and by hand-pump
during inclination as specified in 30, when water is flowing through the opening applying a
static head equivalent to a water column of 1 m above the sill on the centreline of the door.
398
2. When the unit is in the upright position, local closure of the doors by hand-pump shall be
possible within 90 seconds. A single failure in the remote-controlled closing system shall not
prohibit operation of the doors by means of the hand-pump.
3. Local operation of the doors shall be carried out by one handle, i.e. the same handle shall be
used for normal operation, emergency closing and for the hand-pump.
4. To guard against incorrect operation of the doors while the unit is at a quay/in a yard or simi-
lar, the remote-controlled closing system must be capable of being disconnected manually
and locked in this position. The watertight doors will then remain open. Under these condi-
tions no form of remote-controlled closing or local operation of the doors shall make the
doors close until the system has been re-activated manually.
5. Watertight sliding doors may also be fire doors provided that:
a) the doors have been insulated so that they are equivalent to the fire bulkheads in which
they will be fitted
b) the mechanical/hydraulic remote-controlled closing system has been designed so that
the doors will not open under the influence of heat.
42
Function in normal operation mode
1. When the remote control master switch in the control room is switched to the normal oper-
ation mode, the doors shall be capable of being opened and closed locally, from both sides,
both mechanically/hydraulically and by hand-pump.
2. Doors shall be opened by activating the local control handle. The door shall then open when
the handle is held in the open position and stop when it is released. Systems whereby the
doors open completely and remain in the open position although the handle is released are al-
so acceptable.
3. To close doors locally, the control handle shall be held in the closed position until the door is
closed. If the handle is released before the door is completely closed, the movement of the
door shall stop or the door shall automatically return the open position again. After the stop,
it shall be possible either to continue closing the door or to reopen the door without com-
pletely closing the door first.
43
Function in emergency closing mode
1. When the remote control master switch in the control room is switched to the emergency
closing mode, the doors shall still be capable of being opened and closed locally, from both
sides, by using the normal control handles. The location of the handles shall be such that they
are capable of being operated simultaneously from both sides of the door when it is open.
This is in order to ensure that the door does not close during transit through the door. The
doors shall also be capable of being opened and closed by hand-pump.
2. The door shall close automatically when the handles are released. It shall be possible, by us-
ing the handles, to stop the door during closure or to reopen the door without waiting for
complete closure first.
44
Signals during emergency closing
A sound signal shall be activated locally during emergency closing of an open door. The signal
shall also be activated during any subsequent local operation of the door if this is still centrally
emergency closed. A visual signal shall be arranged in areas where the sound signal is not likely to
be heard because of noise.
400
Chapter XIII
Watertight closing on self-elevating units
45
Additional requirements for watertight closing of openings on self-
elevating units
If ventilators or similar equipement or devices are located where they may be damaged or torn
off by the sea or by equipment or deck cargo which has become loose, and by this lead to flooding
of compartments which in the stability calculations are considered to provide buoyancy at angles
of inclination given in 21, the ventilators shall have a watertight closing means located so that it
will still be fit for use after such accident.
Chapter XIV
Weathertight integrity
46
Weathertight closure of openings
1. Openings to spaces which according to 18 subsection 3 b) shall be weathertight when
closed, shall be fitted with weathertight closing means.
2. Each closing means shall be designed and hinged so that it can be easily closed by one per-
son. The design shall take into account the inclination at which it is necessary to close the ap-
pliance, cf. 30.
3. The design and calculation of the strength of weathertight closing means shall comply with a
recognized standard, cf. 2 subsection 2. Where the closing means serve as access openings
they shall be fitted with central operated dogs.
47
Weathertight closing means on self-elevating units
48
Weathertight closing means on drilling ships
402
Chapter XV
Operations manual, routines and instructions
49
Stability instructions and operations manual
1. Written instructions for the daily follow-up of stability in accordance with these regulations
shall be prepared. The instructions shall be incorporated into the units operations manual.
2. The follow-up of stability shall be carried out by:
calculation of loading conditions and checking of the result against the KG limit curve
follow-up of light ship data
maintenance of the watertight subdivision
and, where applicable, separate routines for:
ballasting from operating condition to survival condition and from transit condition to sur-
vival condition, cf. 17 and 28
special operations, cf. 9 subsection 5
maintenance of the watertight subdivision for self-elevating units, cf. 50, or for drilling
ships cf. 51.
3. The operations manual shall also include at least the following information necessary to car-
ry out the above follow-up:
short outline of the regulations according to which the unit has been documented and their
implications for the operation of the unit
KG limit curves with limitations and explanations, cf. 9, 16 and 28
form for the calculation of daily loading conditions, cf. 15 subsection 2
necessary data for the calculation of daily loading conditions, cf. 15 and 16
examples of loading conditions, cf. 17
light ship data and form for follow-up of light ship data, cf. subsection 2
watertight subdivision plan, also showing which watertight closing means are to be kept
closed at all times, and which are to be closed by remote control in an emergency situation
or when the unit goes to survival condition
plan of the weathertight closing means, also showing which closing means are to be kept
closed either in an emergency situation or when the unit goes to survival condition.
Amended by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 406 (in force 1 Sept 1999). Amended by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 406 (in force
1 Sept 1999).
50
Special routines for self-elevating units
1. Before the unit is made waterborne an entry shall be made in the official log-book, the shift
report or similar reporting system, stating that all watertight and weathertight closing means
that shall be closed in accordance with 49, have been witnessed closed.
2. As long as the unit is waterborne, all closing means, unless they have to remain open, shall be
kept closed. Instructions stating that it should be kept closed whenever waterborne, shall be
posted on these closing means.
3. As long as the unit is waterborne, inspection and reporting routines shall ensure and docu-
ment that the closing means remain closed.
51
Special routines for units of a ship design
1. Before the ship goes to survival condition, cf. 2 subsection 12, all openings in accordance
with the plan required by 49, shall be closed weathertight.
404
2. As long as the ship is in the survival condition, inspection and reporting routines shall ensure
and document that the closing means remain closed.
Chapter XVI
Final provisions
52
Penalty
53
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force 1. January 1992.
879/91 Ballast regulations
406
879/91 Ballast regulation
CONTENTS
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
4 a Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
6 Approval System Audit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Chapter IV: General ballast system requirements . . . 412
7 Requirements for ballast systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
8 Requirements for risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
9 Requirements for components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
10 Internal communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Chapter V: Ballast pumps and piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
11 Capacity requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
12 Requirements for function in the event of a failure . . . . . 414
13 Valves, air pipes and suction lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Chapter VI: Control and indicating systems . . . . . . . 416
15 Ballast control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
16 Location of ballast control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
17 Emergency stop device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
18 Local controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
19 Requirements for function in the event of a failure . . . . . 418
20 Requirements for tank level indicating system . . . . . . . . 418
21 Draught indicating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Chapter VII: Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
22 Instructions in operations manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Chapter VII: Final provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
23 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
24 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Regulations 20 December 1991 No. 879 concerning ballast
systems on mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to 1, 9a and 80 of Act No. 7 of 9
June 1903 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc. cf. Royal Decree of 1 De-
cember 1978 and Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979, Decree No. 1165 of 25 May 1984 and
Formal Delegation of 14 August 1991. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended regulations have
been notified in accordance with Council Directive 83/189/EEC. Amended 11 April 2003 No.
408
Chapter I
1
Application
These regulations apply to units which are or will be registered in a Norwegian ship register.
Units registered in a Norwegian ship register are permitted, until the next issue of certificate, to
comply with the regulations in force at the time of the most recent issue of certificate.
2
Definitions
2. Ballast system: Pumps, valves, piping systems and the like with associated power supply and
control systems necessary for the ballasting and deballasting of a unit.
3. Transit draught: The draught of a unit when it is changing position, either by being towed or
under its own propulsion.
4. IMO: The International Maritime Organization.
5. Unit: Mobile platform, including drilling ship, equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum de-
posits, and mobile platform for other use than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
6. Control station: Spaces in which equipment for monitoring, remote control and operation of
the unit is located. These include:
6.1. spaces in which the radio, main navigating equipment, emergency source of power
and operations centre for the inter-communication, alarm and public address systems
are located.
6.2. spaces in which equipment for remote control and operation of anchoring systems,
ballast system, fire-doors, diving systems, dynamic positioning systems, fixed fire-
extinguishing systems, emergency sources of power and watertight doors are located.
7. MODU Code 1989:Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling
Units, 1989.
9. Operating draught: The draught of a unit under normal working conditions.
410
12. Survival condition: The condition in which the operational limitation (maximum allowable
wind velocity) for the relevant operating or transit condition have been exceeded, and/or in
which the measures necessary for the condition have been taken.
Chapter II
General provisions
3
lations
1
.
1
4
Deviations
4 a
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Chapter III
Documentation
Heading amended by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 407 (in force 1 Sept 1999).
412
5
Documentation
6
Approval System Audit Verification
Chapter IV
General ballast system requirements
7
Requirements for ballast systems
1. Units shall be equipped with a pump system capable of ballasting and deballasting any
ballast tank under normal operational and transit draughts. Controlled gravity ballasting of
tanks is permitted.
2. In the case of flooding of any space on self-elevating units or any space in the columns or
pontoons of semi-submersible units, ballasting in accordance with 11, subsection 2, shall
still be possible.
8
Requirements for risk analysis
An analysis shall be carried out to verify the ability of the ballast system to function in accord-
ance with the provisions of these regulations.
9
Requirements for components
The strength, function and workmanship of the components of the ballast system shall satisfy
the requirements stipulated by the MOU classification society with respect to the levels of pres-
sure, capacity, load and the like specified in these regulations.
10
Internal communication
A communication system shall be installed between the control station and spaces from which
ballast pumps, valves and other equipment necessary for the operation of the ballast system can be
controlled locally, ref. requirements provided in 18. The communication system shall be inde-
pendent of the units main source of power.
414
Chapter V
Ballast pumps and piping
11
Capacity requirements
1. The ballast system shall be capable of changing the draught of the unit from any given oper-
ational or transit draught to survival draught within three hours.
2. With all pumps intact, the ballast system shall within 3 hours be capable of restoring the unit
to an upright position and an acceptable draught as regards strength after damage as spec-
ified in 21 of the Stability Regulations
1
. For units which must use the emergency source of
power to comply with this requirement, it is accepted to return to the main source of power
when an angle is restored at which the main source of power can operate. It shall be possible
to document that the main source of power may be restarted at this angle after heeling as re-
ferred to in the above requirements.
3. When any of the pumps is inoperable, the ballast system shall be capable of restoring the unit
to an upright position and an acceptable draught as regards strength after damage as spec-
ified in 21 of the Stability Regulations
1
. In the event of any damage to spaces where ballast
pumps are installed, the ballast pump or pumps of the space shall be assumed to be inoper-
able. Associated parts of the ballast system in the same flooded space shall also be assumed
to be inoperable, except for components designed to withstand submersion into water and re-
lated pressures.
4. For semi-submersible units, with the unit in operational draught, it shall be possible to comp-
ly with the requirements specified in subsections 2 and 3 above without taking on additional
ballast. Counter-flooding may be considered as an operational measure provided that there
are approved procedures covering the areas of strength and stability.
1
Cf. Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight clos-
12
Requirements for function in the event of a failure
1. The ballast system shall be equipped with at least two independent pumps arranged so that
ballasting can be continued in the event of a failure of any such pump. Pumps other than the
dedicated ballast pumps may be used for ballasting, provided that these are readily available
for such use at all times.
2. The ballast system shall be arranged so as to prevent any single failure in the system or any
operator failure from causing ballast water to be inadvertently transferred from one tank to
another or causing the unintentional flooding/emptying of tanks.
3. The emergency source of power shall be capable of serving the ballast system in such a way
as to satisfy the requirements in 11 subsection 3 and 12 subsection 1.
13
Valves, air pipes and suction lines
1. All valves and operating controls shall be clearly marked identifying the function they serve.
Each valve shall be provided with local means to indicate whether the valve is open or
closed.
2. Each ballast tank shall be fitted with air pipes located outside the damage areas in accordance
with the requirements specified in 23 to 28 of the stability regulations
1
, and their number
416
and cross-sectional area shall permit efficient operation of the ballast system under the con-
ditions specified in these regulations.
3. Air pipe openings for those tanks intended to be used to right the unit after damage shall be
located above the most unfavourable waterline for the inclinations specified in 11, sub-
section 2, or be arranged in some other way to ensure a supply of air to the tanks during emp-
tying.
4. The suction lines from the tanks specified in subsection 3 shall be positioned in such a way
that as much water ballast as possible can be pumped out when the angle of inclination
makes this necessary.
1
See Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight clos-
Chapter VI
Control and indicating systems
14
1. The remote control and indicating systems shall be connected to the main and emergency
switchboards.
2. Means to indicate whether a valve is open or closed shall be provided at each location from
which the valve can be controlled. The function of the indicator shall rely on movement of
the valve spindle, or be otherwise arranged with equivalent reliability.
15
Ballast control
1. The ballast control shall be equipped with the following control and indicating systems:
a) remote ballast pump control system
b) ballast pump status-indicating system
c) remote ballast valve control system
d) ballast valve position-indicating system
e) remote tank level indicating system
f) draught indicating system
g) heel and trim indicators
h) power availability indicating system (main and emergency power source)
i) ballast system hydraulic/pneumatic pressure-indicating system
j) emergency stop device
2. The ballast control console shall be designed according to ergonometric principles so as to
provide a satisfactory working posture for the operators.
16
Location of ballast control
The ballast control shall be located in the same continuously manned control station as the con-
trol for watertight closing means.
1
1
See equivalent requirements regarding location in Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 878 concerning stability, watertight
subdivision and water/weathertight closing means on mobile offshore units, 37.
418
17
Emergency stop device
The emergency stop device shall be capable of isolating or disconnecting the power supply to
the remote control systems and to the pumps. The ballast system shall then automatically change
to safe position, i.e. with valves closed and pumps stopped. The emergency stop system shall be
separate from the ordinary remote control system.
18
Local controls
In addition to remote control from the control station, all ballast pumps and valves shall be fit-
ted with independent local controls operable in the event of remote control failure. The indepen-
dent local controls for each ballast pump and its ballast tank valves shall be located in the same
place.
19
Requirements for function in the event of a failure
1. The remote control and indicating systems shall be separate and function independently of
one another, or have sufficient redundancy such that a failure in one system does not jeopar-
dize the operation of any of the other systems.
2. In the event of loss of control power, the ballast valves shall automatically close. On re-
activation, the valves shall remain closed until the ballast control operator assumes control of
the reactivated system. Ballast valve systems which do not automatically close upon loss of
control power are accepted, provided that it can be documented that the safety of the unit is
not thereby impaired.
20
Requirements for tank level indicating system
1. The tank level indicating system shall provide means to:
a) indicate liquid levels in all ballast tanks. A secondary method of determining levels in
ballast tanks shall also be provided, i.e. sounding pipes or other measuring equipment.
b) at inclinations specified in 11, subsection 2, approximately indicate liquid levels at
the suction line in those ballast tanks intended for use when righting the unit.
c) indicate liquid levels in other tanks which affect the stability of the unit, e.g. fuel oil,
fresh water and drilling water/liquid storage tanks
21
Draught indicating system
The draught indicating system shall show the draught at each corner of semi-submersible and
jackup units, and fore and aft for units with a ships hull.
420
Chapter VII
Operating instructions
22
Instructions in operations manual
1. Written instruction shall be worked out on the use of the ballast system according to these re-
gulations. The instructions shall be incorporated in the operations manual of the unit.
2. The operating instructions shall contain the following:
brief information about the system and how it should normally be operated
for semi-submersible units, procedures for ballasting from transit condition to surviv-
al condition and from operating condition to survival condition
1
brief information about how to proceed in the event of failure (this may be included in
the emergency instructions). Procedures for the use of counter-flooding after damage
are to be included if this is to be used as an operational measure, cf. 11, subsection 4.
1
See eqvivalent requirements in Regulations of 20 December 1991 no. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and
water/weathertight closing means, 17, 28 and 49.
Chapter VII
Final provisions
23
Penalty
24
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 January 1992.
2318/86 Living quarter regulations
422
2318/86 Living quarter regulation
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
5A Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Chapter II: Living quarters, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
7 Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
8 Corridors, exits, emergency exits and escape routes . . . . 428
9 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
10 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
11 Ligthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
12 Galley and provision room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
13 Cabins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
14 Furniture and other equipment for cabins . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
15 Mess rooms, day rooms and office rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
16 Health office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
17 Sanitary rooms, changing rooms, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
18 Rooms for washing and drying clothes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Chapter III: Miscellaneous provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
19 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
20 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
21 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Regulations 17 December 1986 No. 2318 concerning the
construction and equipment of living quarters on mobile
offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relat-
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1, 9a, 46 and 52, cf. Royal Decree of 5
April 1963, 1 December 1978, 25 May 1984 and Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979 and 6
June 1984. Amended 2 March 1999 and 11 April 2003 No. 495, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix
II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
424
Chapter 1
General
1
Definitions
4. Living quarters: Those areas of the unit which are described in these regulations.
5. Mustering station: A meeting place for entering lifeboats and liferafts.
6. Emergency station: A meeting place for personnel who are assigned special duties in an
emergency situation.
2
1. These regulations apply to mobile offshore units which are registered or which will be regis-
tered in a Norwegian Register of Ships.
issue.
3
lations
1
.
1
4
Documentation
5
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no.495, in force 1 July 2003.
426
5A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Chapter II
Living quarters, etc.
6
1. Living quarters shall be so located as to be adequately separated from danger areas on the un-
it. Living quarters shall not be adjacent to explosion-hazardous areas and shall comply with
the requirements of the regulations in force concerning precautionary measures against fire
and explosion on mobile offshore units.
2. Living quarters shall be sufficiently sound-proof and protected against the weather, heat and
cold.
3. Living quarters shall be provided with a sufficient number of exits/staircases which provide
easy access to the mustering stations. All stairs, doors and corridors shall satisfy the require-
ment for quick and safe evacuation.
4. Living quarters shall be so marked, either by special signposting or by the use of different
colours in corridors, etc. on each separate deck, as to facilitate orientation with regard to
ones whereabouts in the living quarters.
5. Living quarters shall be so arranged as to ensure that a proper hygienic standard is maintain-
ed.
6. Living quarters shall be so constructed and located as to ensure adequate ventilation and
heating.
7. Living quarters shall contain a sufficient number of bedrooms, day rooms, mess rooms,
changing and shower rooms, rooms for washing and drying clothes, sanitary rooms, offices
and other store rooms and working rooms, as well as galleys, provision rooms, cooling and
refrigerating rooms and a health office. The rooms shall be suitably furnished and equipped,
so that they can function as intended.
8. Living quarters shall be suitably furnished and equipped for male and female persons.
9. For operation in arctic areas, special requirements may be made as regards the construction
of accommodation.
10. All rooms in the living quarters shall be clearly marked with intended use and where appro-
priate, number of berths/persons.
428
7
Structural requirements
1. External floors, ceilings and bulkheads in living quarters which are exposed to the weather
and/or are bounded by machinery, equipment, work areas, etc. shall be adequately insulated.
The insulation shall have a K-value not exceeding 0.50. The insulation material shall be laid
in such a way that condensation is avoided and shall be securely fastened.
2. For boundary bulkheads and decks in or adjacent to living quarters, constructions having a
noise reduction complying with the sound-proofing requirements applicable to ships at the
time in question, shall be used.
3. All materials used in the living quarters shall be easy to keep clean.
4. Bulkheads surrounding engine spaces, heated tanks and areas with low and/or high temper-
atures bounding directly on living quarters, and also steam and hot water piping in living
quarters shall be adequately insulated.
5. Piping systems which through leakage may cause damage to persons or environment shall
not be lead through living quarters.
6. Bulkheads and ceilings in sanitary rooms shall be of steel or another equivalent material and
be insulated against external bulkheads.
7. Ceiling height in living quarters where unrestricted movement is necessary shall be at least
2300 mm, measured from the top of the finished floor to the lower edge of the ceiling.
8. Free width in corridors shall be at least 1000 mm.
9. Door frames in living quarters shall have an interior width of at least 750 mm. Door frames in
doors to sanitary rooms and to toilet enclosures in common sanitary rooms may nevertheless
have an interior width of 600 mm. The door frame to the health office shall have an interior
width of at least 850 mm.
Doors shall have a height above deck of at least 2050 mm.
8
Corridors, exits, emergency exits and escape routes
1. From each deck in the living quarter there shall be at least 2 exits to an open deck, and an in-
terior staircase.
2. All common rooms of more than 20 m
2
shall have at least 2 exits/staircases placed on op-
posite sides of the room. Doors in common rooms shall open outwards.
3. Blind passageways of more than 5 metres in length shall have an emergency exit/escape
route. The emergency exits/escape routes shall have a width of at least 600 x 800 m.
4. All doors and hatches in emergency exits shall open in the direction of the escape route and
shall be easily opened from each side by one person. Doors and hatches with dog bolts shall
be operated centrally. Doors to cabins shall be equipped with a kick-through panel or be un-
locable.
5. Staircases, emergency exits and escape routes shall not be obstructed or covered, and they
shall be so arranged as to provide safe access to the emergency and mustering stations.
6. Emergency exits/escape routes shall be marked in accordance with the regulations in force at
the time in question concerning measures for protection, environment and safety on mobile
units.
7. No stairs in living quarters shall be angled more than 45, measured from the horizontal
plane, and the steps shall be equidistant. The stairs shall have a serviceable internal width be-
tween winders, though not less than 800 mm. Stairs shall be provided with banisters or han-
drails on both sides. Stairs of a width exceeding 1 600 mm, shall also have a handrail in the
middle.
8. Corridors shall be provided with at least one handrail. Corridors of more than 1 600 mm in
width an in other larger openings adjacent to corridors shall have handrails on both sides.
430
9
Ventilation
1. The living quarters shall be adequately ventilated by mechanical ventilation means and be
overpressured with 50 Pascal compared with the surroundings. The ventilation system with
air intakes shall be so located and constructed that fire-hazardous, noxious or unwholesome
gases, dust, etc. are prevented from penetrating into the living quarters.
2. It shall be possible to regulate the ventilation system so that it ensures a comfortable temper-
ature and sufficient circulation of air without draft under the climatic conditions under which
the unit is specified to operate. The relative humidity shall not be below 30 % or above 70 %.
3. Air vents from health offices, galleys, laundries and lavatories shall be led in special ducts
and never be recirculated.
4. The ventilation system shall have such capacity that every room in the living quarters will be
supplied with at least 30 m
3
fresh air per person per hour. The number of air changes per hour
shall be as follows in the rooms mentioned below:
Radio room: 10
Mess rooms and day rooms: 6
Dry stores rooms: 10
Galleys: 20 for supply and 30 for suction
5. Injection of fresh and/or heated /cooled air to lavatories may only be permitted where the la-
vatories have a door to an open deck or mechanical venting.
6. On units with unrestricted trade area, day rooms shall be equipped with air conditioning sys-
tems which shall be dimensioned at least in accordance with the fresh air quantity specified
under subsection 4 above.
6.1. At an outdoor temperature of plus 35C and a relative humidity of approx 70 %, it
shall be possible to obtain an indoor temperature of plus 29, and a relative humidity
of 50 %. Return air shall not exceed 50 %.
6.2. The cooling engines and air coolers of the system shall moreover be so adjusted that at
an outdoor temperature of plus 28C and approx. 80 % relative humidity, it shall be
possible to obtain an indoor temperature of plus 24, and a relative humidity of approx
50 %.
7. The spare parts necessary to ensure continuous operation of the ventilation system shall be
on board.
10
Heating
1. The heating system shall be so dimensioned as to ensure a minimum temperature of plus 20,
under the climatic conditions which the unit is specified to operate. Under the conditions
mentioned above, the temperature difference in each individual room shall not exceed 5.
Store rooms, working rooms, washing and drying rooms for clothes, provision rooms and
cooling and refrigerating rooms are exempt from this requirement.
2. Heating fixtures shall be securely mounted and screened so that risk of fire or other inconve-
niences for those on board is avoided.
3. It shall be possible to adjust the temperature independently in each individual cabin in a sa-
tisfactory manner.
11
Ligthing
1. Cabins, health offices, mess rooms, day rooms and galleys shall as far as possible be lighted
by natural light.
2. Artificial lighting shall satisfy the requirements mentioned below.
432
2.1. The average artificial lighting in each living room shall be at least 100 lux. In cabins
and day rooms, ceiling lamps, wall lamps and table lamps facilitating varied lighting
shall be provided. There shall be a reading lamp at every berth.
2.2. On writing desks: At least 300 lux.
2.3. Galleys: At least 300 lux on working levels 1 m above the floor.
2.4. Bath rooms and toilet rooms: At least 150 lux.
2.5. Corridors: At least 50 lux. Near deck exits, it shall in a transition zone be possible to
vary the corridor lighting between daylight: 100 lux, and night light: 20 lux.
2.6. Stairways: At least 100 lux. The light sources shall be so arranged that shadows in the
staircase steps are avoided.
3. For measurement of average lighting in a room, all electric light sources normally in use shall
be turned on. When the light measurements are performed, all day light shall be blinded off.
Five measurements shall be made (one measurement in the middle of the room and one mea-
surement in each of the corners of the room). The measurements shall be made 1 m above the
floor.
12
Galley and provision room
1. Bulkheads and ceilings in the galley, refrigeration room and cold storage room shall be of
stainless steel. To the extent possible, pipe systems, ducts, cables, etc. shall be concealed and
such that the surfaces are even and easy to clean.
2. The floor of the galley shall have a no-skid surface which is easy to keep clean. The floor-
wall junction shall be so designed as to make it easy to keep clean. The floor shall be provid-
ed with a sufficient number of water drains, at least one on each side at the lowest point in all
normal heel contitions.
3. The floor area of the galley shall not be less than 35 m
2
.
4. Special rooms for storage of provision shall be arranged. The storage rooms shall be located
as close to the galley as possible.
5. The provision rooms shall be located, designed and furnished in such a way that orderly stor-
age is facilitated and that provisions will avoid detoriation for reasons such as intense heat,
draft and condensation or because of damage and contamination caused by vermin.
6. There shall be a refrigerated room sufficiently large to hold the supply of foods which should
be kept frozen. The refrigerated room shall be equipped with a thermometer which can be
checked from outside the room. The temperature of refrigerated room shall be minus 18C or
lower.
7. There shall be cold storage rooms sufficiently large to hold the supply of foods which should
be kept cooled. The temperature of the cold storage rooms shall be between minus 1C and
plus 4C.
8. It shall be possible to open the doors of refrigerated rooms and cold storage rooms from the
inside even if the door is locked from the outside. There shall be an alarm system from refrig-
erated rooms and cold storage rooms to the galley.
9. It shall be possible to drain the refrigerated rooms and the cold storage rooms.
10. Galleys shall be equipped with facilities for handwashing with mixing batteries which can be
operated without using the hands.
13
Cabins
1. Every person living on the unit shall have his own berth. Rooms intended as bedrooms
(cabins) shall not be used for other purposes.
2. Cabins shall be furnished for a maximum of 2 persons.
434
Outside the Norwegian Continental Shelf, this requirement only applies to the regular
crew. The term regular crew applies to persons who, because of their field of activity, fol-
low the unit from one location to another.
3. The floor area of a cabin shall be at least 8 m
2
if the cabin is intended for only one person, and
at least 12 m
2
if the cabin is intended for two persons.
4. When the floor is measured, the part of the surface which is occupied by berths, closets,
chests of drawers and seating shall be included, but not small and irregular shapes of the
floor surface which are not effectively increasing the room that can be used to move around.
Bathroom area may be included in the minimum size of the cabin.
5. There shall be no direct openings to cabins from day rooms, mess rooms, galleys, washing
and drying rooms or change rooms.
14
Furniture and other equipment for cabins
1. Berths shall be at least 2000 mm long and 800 mm wide, both measurements made internally.
2. The vertical distance beween berths and between the upper berth and the ceiling shall be at
least 900 mm.
3. In each cabin, there shall be a lockable closet for clothes for every berth. In addition, there
shall be a separate closet or place for hanging up the survival suit.
4. The closet shall have an inside height of at least 1800 mm and an inside cross-section of at
least 600 x 600 mm.
5. In each cabin, there shall be at least two lockable drawers of 0.06 m
3
for every berth.
6. Cabins shall be equipped with a table and comfortable seatings.
7. In cabins intended for more than one person, berths shall be furnished with curtains.
15
Mess rooms, day rooms and office rooms
1. The mess rooms shall be sufficiently large to serve at least 50 per cent of the total crew be-
longing to eat at the same time. The floor in the mess room shall be at least 1.2 m
2
per person
the room is intended for.
2. Mess rooms shall be furnished with several tables.
Each person at the table shall have an area at least 600 mm in width and 400 mm in depth.
Tables and chairs shall be placed in such a way that the access to the tables is as free as pos-
sible. Chairs shall be equipped with back rests.
3. There shall be separate day rooms for smokers and non-smokers.
4. There shall be a separate room where films can be shown.
5. Day rooms and film rooms shall together make up at least 1 m
2
per person of the maximum
number of persons that may be on board. One of these rooms shall hold at least 50 per cent of
these persons.
6. As a general rule, the platform manager, the stability section leader, the technical section
leader, and the catering manager shall each have a separate room furnished for use as an of-
fice. In case it is desired to use a joint office, this must be of a size and be so furnished that
the requirement for separate sections can be complied with to the extent possible.
7. On board, there shall be a separate room with appliances for hot and cold drinks. The room
shall be located in such a way that it has direct entrance from deck. The room shall be
equipped with a wash basin or facilities for hand washing, and shall be heated. The furnish-
ing shall be suitable for out-door working personnel. The floor shall have sufficient drain-
holes.
436
8. Furniture, including chairs, in film rooms and day rooms shall be securely fastened. If chairs
in mess rooms are not fastened to the floor, there shall be a device in front of the exit doors
preventing these from being blocked in case of listing.
16
Health office
1. There shall be a health office in the living quarters. The office shall be located in such a way
that stretcher transportation of sick or injured persons may be made in a safe way from a
medical point of view inside the living quarters and to/from the work areas and the helicopter
deck.
2. The health office shall be so furnished and equipped that all medical examination and treat-
ment may be carried out in a medically safe way.
3. A sanitary room shall be provided adjacent to the health office. The room shall be equipped
with WC, shower, bath tub and wash basin with mixing battery.
17
Sanitary rooms, changing rooms, etc.
1. Adjacent to every cabin there shall be a sanitary room equipped with a water closet, shower
and wash basin with hot and cold water. The sanitary room shall be equipped with a mirror
and a cupboard for toiletries.
2. If there is a sauna on board, the door to this shall open outwards. The sauna shall be equipped
with an alarm connected to an alarm bell in the corridor outside and in the control room.
3. In sanitary rooms intended for more than one person, and in changing rooms, the shower
shall be screened. For each shower, there shall be a separate water drain.
4. Located close to the galley, there shall be a separate toilet with hand washing facilities for
galley personnel.
5. There shall be at least one WC on the work deck and one near control rooms.
6. If there are more than one WC in a room, or WC in common washing rooms and bathrooms,
each WC shall be in a separate enclosure equipped with a lockable door.
7. All doors to sanitary rooms shall be lockable.
8. There shall be separate rooms for changing clothes, etc. Changing rooms shall be located
near the entrance of the living quarters and be equipped with individual lockers. The lockers
shall be of a size of at least 1 800 x 300 x 350 mm. Their doors shall be lockable. There shall
be an arrangement for drying of working clothes and footwear.
9. Adjacent to the changing room, there shall be wash basins, showers, water closets and uri-
nals in such number as is deemed to be reasonable considering the number of people as-
sumed to be using the room at the same time. If several smaller changing rooms are arranged,
such rooms shall be provided with at least one wash basin, one shower and one water closet.
10. Joint WCs, washing rooms, changing rooms and shower rooms shall be conveniently located
in relation to work areas and mess rooms.
11. There shall be a broom closet with a utility sink on each deck in the living quarters. The floor
shall have drains for water.
12. Storage rooms for linen shall be located on each deck where there are cabins.
18
Rooms for washing and drying clothes
There shall be facilities for washing and drying clothes to the extent necessary. The washing of
working clothes shall take place in a separate washing machine. Washing rooms shall be so ar-
438
ranged that working clothes and private clothes are not mixed. The floor shall have at least one
drain hole in each corner.
Chapter III
19
Deviations
20
Penalty
21
Entry into force
1. These regulations enter into force on 2 Februar 1987. For units the building of which was
started prior to 1 March 1982, the requirements of 7 subsections 7, 8 and 9 do not apply.
2. As from the same date, Regulations of 13 January 1986 concerning the Construction and
Equipment of Living Quarters on Drilling Units and Other Mobile Offshore Units are re-
pealed.
129/94 Production plant regulations
440
123/94 Production plant regulation
CONTENTS
1 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
6 Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
7 Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Chapter IV: Technical requirements for the produc-
tion plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
8 General requirements for the production plant . . . . . . . . 448
9 Riser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Chapter V: Technical requirements for the mobile
offshore unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
11 General requirements for the mobile offshore unit . . . . . 450
12 Hull structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
13 Machinery and piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
14 Area classification and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
15 Turret system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
16 Anchoring and positioning systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
17 Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Chapter VI: General risk-reducing measures . . . . . . . 460
18 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Chapter VII: Structural fire and explosion safety
measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
19 Structural fire safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
20 Structural explosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Chapter VIII: Gas and fire detection systems . . . . . . 464
21 Gas detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
22 Fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Chapter IX: Active fire safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . 466
23 Fire pump system for fire water main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
24 Fire pump system for deluge systems using water/foam . 466
25 Other special fixed extinguishing installations . . . . . . . . 468
26 Portable fire extinguishing equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Chapter X: Fire and explosion protection of storage
tanks in the hull structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
27 Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
28 Active safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Chapter XI: Emergency shutdown and emergency
release systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
29 Automatic process safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
30 Manual emergency shutdown system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
31 Automatic emergency shutdown system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
32 Manual emergency release system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
442
Chapter XII: Other special requirements and anti-
pollution precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
33 Emergency power and emergency power consumers . . . 474
34 Anti-pollution precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Chapter XIII: Loading and mooring system . . . . . . . 474
35 Loading and mooring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Chapter XIV: Maintenance, operation and manning . 476
36 Spare parts and maintenance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
37 Operations manual/contingency manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
38 Manning/training system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Chapter XV: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
39 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
40 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Preface
The regulations apply to mobile offshore units with production plants and equipment for stor-
age, carriage and/or transfer of hydrocarbons to tankers.
The regulations have been prepared to cover the special conditions caused by such plants and
equipment to the safety of personnel on board, the mobile offshore units structure, its maritime
systems and the marine environment. The regulations thus supplement the Norwegian Maritime
Directorates other relevant requirements for mobile offshore units.
Compliance with the regulation requirements is a condition for the issuance of maritime certifi-
cates for mobile offshore units with production plants.
Regulations 10 February 1994 No. 123 for mobile offshore
units with production plants and equipment
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 no 7 relat-
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships etc, 1 subsection 2 third paragraph, 9a, 41,
42 and 54a, cf Royal Decrees of 12 October 1962, 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978, 25 May 1984
and Formal Delegations of 15 January 1979 and 6 June 1984. Amended 11 October 1996 and 18
February 1997. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended regulations have been notified in accord-
ance with Council Directive 83/189/EEC and 11 April 2003 No. 544, cf. the EEA Agreement Ap-
pendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
1
Applicability
1. These regulations apply to all mobile offshore units which are or will be registered in a Nor-
wegian ship register.
issue.
3. These regulations do not apply to units carrying out well-stream testing during exploration
drilling or production drilling. Such operations are subject to the provisions currently in
444
force concerning drilling installations and equipment laid down by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
2
Definitions
2. Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/API/DIN/NFPA/ISO/CEN/IEC or any oth-
3. The production plant means the total plant of production systems and production equip-
ment, including the associated process plant.
4. Dimensioning fire means a fire which, in accordance with the defined acceptance criteria,
represents an unacceptable risk, and which therefore forms the basis of the design and use of
the mobile offshore unit.
5. Dimensioning explosion means an explosion which, in accordance with the defined ac-
ceptance criteria, represents an unacceptable risk and which therefore forms the basis of the
design and use of the mobile offshore unit.
6. Dimensioning accidental event means an accidental event which, in accordance with the
defined acceptance criteria, represents an unacceptable risk and which therefore forms the
basis of the design and use of the mobile offshore unit and its emergency preparedness.
7. Hazardous areas means all areas where, due to the possible presence of a flammable at-
mosphere, the use of unsuitable equipment, machinery or electrical equipment may cause a
fire or explosion.
Zones: Hazardous areas are divided into zones 0, 1 and 2.
Zone 0: Areas where an explosive gas/air mixture is continuously present or present
for long periods.
Zone 1: Areas where an explosive gas/air mixture is likely to occur in normal operat-
ing conditions.
Zone 2: Areas where an explosive gas/air mixture occurs only in exceptional cases
and for short periods of time.
8. Mobile offshore unit means a mobile platform, including drilling ship, equipped for drill-
ing for subsea petroleum deposits, and mobile platform for other purposes than drilling for
subsea petroleum deposits.
446
11. Loading system means the system which transfers hydrocarbons from the mobile offshore
unit to a reception terminal, eg on a tanker.
12. Operating condition means any unit condition when risers are connected and production is
in progress (ie processing of oil/gas) or when the production systems contain hydrocarbons
under pressure.
13. Survival condition means any unit condition when risers have been disconnected due to
weather conditions etc.
14. Owner means whosoever contracts and/or is responsible for the operation of a unit.
15. Risk means an expression of the hazard represented by an undesirable incident to human
beings, the environment or material assets. The risk is expressed as the probability of, and
consequences of, the undesirable incident.
16. Risk analysis means a systematic procedure to describe and/or calculate the risk. The risk
analysis is carried out by identifying undesirable incidents and the causes and consequences
hereof.
17. Environmental load means the load imposed on the unit by eg waves, wind and currents.
18. NDT means Non Destructive Testing.
19. Standby mode: means any unit condition when rises are connected and the production has
been shut down.
Chapter II
General provisions
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Deviations
4 A
Mutual recognition
way.
448
gulations.
Chapter III
Documentation
5
Documentation
1. The owner shall be able to document that the requirements of this regulation are complied
with. Documentation shall be sent to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on request. The
contents, scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by the
2. There shall be consultations with the Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Plan-
ning and the MOU classification society concerned on the nature of the additional documen-
tation to be submitted to those control institutions.
6
Approval
7
Surveys
Chapter IV
Technical requirements for the production plant
8
General requirements for the production plant
1. Drilling installations shall conform to a safety level that is not lower than that prescribed by
Det Norske Veritas, Hydrocarbon Production Plant or any other internationally recognized
standard. Such conformance shall be checked and approved by an MOU classification socie-
ty or in any other way decided by the authority of the state to which the Continental Shelf be-
longs.
2. The risks of the operation of the production plant in relation to the other systems of the unit
and the risks of the other systems in relation to the operation of the production plant shall be
450
assessed as part of the risk analysis, ref. Regulation of 22 December 1993 No. 1239 concern-
ing risk analyses for mobile offshore units.
9
Riser system
10
Repealed by regulation 18 Feb 1997 no. 234, in force 1 July 1997.
Chapter V
Technical requirements for the mobile offshore unit
11
General requirements for the mobile offshore unit
Units with oil storage tanks:
The relevant parts of the Norwegian Maritime Directorates regulations currently in force con-
cerning oil tankers shall apply to mobile offshore units storing crude oil on board.
Units with gas storage tanks:
The relevant parts of the Norwegian Maritime Directorates regulations currently in force con-
cerning the carriage by ship of special or dangerous goods in bulk shall apply to mobile off-
shore units storing gas in tanks on board. Ref Chapter III.
12
Hull structure
1. A special fatigue calculation shall be made for mobile offshore units which will be located
for a long time in the same direction in relation to the wave direction. Reinforcement of the
hull may be required on the basis of such calculations.
2. A hull strength calculation shall be made, showing satisfactory safety against the progressive
collapse of the mobile offshore unit after design collision and hull damage events. The calcu-
lations shall show that semi-submersible units and jack-up units after such damage, and in
the most adverse relevant loading condition, will withstand the most adverse environmental
loads which may be expected once per year without collapsing. In the analysis the safety fac-
tor shall be 1.2 for semi-submersible units and 1.3 for jack-up units. Units of a ship type shall
after such damage be capable of withstanding environmental loads which may be expected
once every 100 years (level of probability 10-2), with a safety factor of 1.0.
3. When production systems and equipment are installed, account shall be taken of the elastic
flexing of the hull caused by environmental loads and cargo/ballast distribution.
13
Machinery and piping
1. Boilers, combustion engines etc shall not be located in hazardous areas. Such equipment may
be located in spaces surrounded by a hazardous area, provided the following conditions are
fulfilled:
the space is kept overpressured
452
ventilation air for overpressure is taken from a safe area
an alarm system is provided to warn of any loss of overpressure
an air lock system with self-closing doors is arranged between the space and a zone 1 area;
self-closing doors are sufficient between the space and a zone 2 area
exhaust outlets are located in a safe area
surfaces do not have a temperature exceeding the self-ignition temperature of HC gases
(approx. 200 C)
combustion air intake is from a safe area.
2. Fuel gas supply lines for combustion machinery may be routed through non-hazardous
areas, with the exception of living quarters and control stations, if the supply lines are spe-
cially protected by ventilated surrounding pipes (jackets), where ventilation air is monitored
by gas detectors. Or fuel supply lines are all-welded, of specially solid construction with re-
gard to materials and dimensions, without flanges, and well labelled and protected against
external damage, 100% tested (NDT) of welds and the space is fitted with gas detectors.
3. Efficient spark-arrester equipment shall be fitted in exhaust ducts from all combustion en-
gines and all combustion equipment (except gas turbines). Exhaust from gas turbines shall be
sufficiently cooled and led to a safe area. Exhaust shall not obstruct escape or evacuation or
be capable of igniting gas in the event of controlled or uncontrolled gas discharges. Water-
cooled exhaust pipes shall be fitted with an alarm to warn of any failure of the cooling water
supply. All exhaust shall be led in such a way that it will not be a nuisance to personnel or
cause dangerous situations for helicopter operations.
4. The surface of machinery or piping which may be exposed to hydrocarbons from leaks or
any other uncontrolled discharge shall not, in the normal operating condition, have a temper-
ature exceeding the ignition temperature of the hydrocarbons (ie normally not exceeding
200 C).
5. Piping.
Vital piping for steam, cooling water, instrument air, fuel, hydraulic oil etc forming part of
the equipment for the maritime operation of the unit shall not be connected with production
systems in such a way that an error in these will also cause a functional failure in vital mari-
time systems (and vice versa). There shall likewise be segregation between production sys-
tems and any drilling systems if both systems are to operate simultaneously. Nor shall there
be a connection of systems, eg between a gas cooling water system and sanitation system, so
that a gas leakage can spread into an area which is basically intended as a safe area.
14
Area classification and ventilation
1. The unit shall be area classified with regard to hazardous areas in accordance with the Nor-
wegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Plannings regulations currently in
force, Regulations for electrical plants, maritime installations.
2. Ventilation air intakes and outlets shall be located so that correct pressure differences be-
tween non-hazardous areas and hazardous areas, as well as correct flow rates, may be main-
tained in all wind directions and wind forces for which it is desired to keep up production.
Tests may be required.
3. There shall be a distance of at least 4,5 m between the air intake and ventilation outlet. There
shall be separate ventilation systems for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
4. Ventilation air for explosion-proof pressurised electrical equipment (Ex(p)) which shall be
maintained after a full emergency shutdown, shall be separated from general ventilation sys-
tems.
5. Heating elements in ventilation systems shall not be capable of igniting gas due to high sur-
face temperatures after ventilation shutdown.
454
15
Turret system
1. The turret and its bearings shall be dimensioned for simultaneously transferred loads from
the anchoring system and risers.
2. The turret with rotation machinery shall be designed so that a single failure in any active
component (including bearings) will not cause loss of the possibility of rotating the mobile
offshore unit.
3. Turret systems which are not designed to rotate n x 360 shall have procedures to ensure
relevant restrictions as a result of this, eg requirements for production shutdown during rota-
tion up into the weather due to rolling motion.
4. Units on which the turret cannot rotate n x 360 shall have an arrangement for quick dis-
connection of crossovers for hydrocarbons, electrical cable connections etc between the tur-
ret and the other parts of the unit. Procedures for when to carry out disconnection shall be
prepared and included in the operations manual
1
.
5. Any operational restrictions on the turret system will be specified in an annex to the maritime
certificates.
Amended by regulation 11 Oct 1996 no. 977 (in force 1 July 1997).
16
Anchoring and positioning systems
1. The anchoring and positioning system shall be in accordance with the Norwegian Maritime
Directorates requirements for anchoring/positioning systems.
2. When it is difficult to determine in the calculation analysis the units basic forces, such as
wind, current, wave drift, and mass and damping coefficients and transfer functions, the un-
certainties shall be clarified by model experiments.
3. Calculations of motion shall be made for the unit and the loading tanker or for the unit
against a fixed installation with regard to drift/collision. The calculations shall be made for
relevant weather conditions including the most severe single failure for the unit (anchor line
breakage, thruster stop or similar), or the most severe single failure for the tanker (main en-
gine or thruster stop).
After such events the distance between the unit and the tanker or other fixed installation shall
not become less than 10 metres.
4. The effect of marine growth on the anchor chains shall be included in the anchoring calcula-
tions if the unit is planned for operation in areas where anchor chains may be fouled.
5. Consequence classes and safety factors which shall form the basis of the dimensioning of the
anchor system are specified in tables I and II.
6. In addition to the requirements of subsection 5, the calculations of the positioning system
shall be checked and the system dimensioned for double failures based on 10 years of weath-
er conditions. If operation in consequence class 3 is planned to be determined before a ten-
year weather condition is reached, the calculation of double failure may be based on the max-
imum operation condition. If operation in consequence class 3 is planned to be terminated
before a ten-year weather condition is reached, the calculation of double failure may be
based on the maximum operation condition.
456
7. Table I contains consequence classes for the various operational phases which shall form the
basis for calculations of the safety factor. Table II contains safety factors.
Table I Consequence classes
CONSEQUENCE CLASS for anchor chains on units when the unit is anchored:
Location in
relation to
other instal-
lations
- not in the
vicinity
- in the
vicinity but
greater than
X
- in the
vicinity but
greater than
X
- in the
vicinity but
greater than
X
- in the
vicinity but
greater than
X
Direction of
anchor line
in relation to
other instal-
lation
facing facing away facing facing away
Condition
Operation
condition 3 3 3 3 3
Standby
condition 2 2 2 2 3
Survival
condition 1 1 2
The distance X is given by the distance between the unit and the other installation being
so great that the unit, following a possible multiple line failure (3 or more) will turn clear
of the other installation with a smallest distance not less than 10 metres in the most ad-
verse phases.
458
Table II Safety factors
CONSEQUENCE CLASS
Condition Class 3 Class 2 Class 1
QU DY QU DY QU DY
Intact condition 3,0 2,5 2,7 2,3 2,0 1,65
Equilibrium position
after single failure 2,0 1,65 1,8 1,5 1,4 1,25
Maximum excursion
after single failure 1,4 1,2 1,4 1,2 1,1 1,0
Equilibrium position
after double failure* 2,0 1,65 1,8 1,5
Maximum excursion
after double failure* 1,4 1,2 1,4 1,2
DY = Dynamic method of calculation.
QU = Quasistatic method of calculation
* For a double failure the 10-year weather condition is used. If maximum operation condition is below the 10-year condition,
the maximum operation condition should be used.
8. A plan shall be drawn up for production control, shipyard control and follow-up control dur-
ing operation of anchor lines and other components exposed to tension and/or wear, such as
fairleads and wildcats in the anchoring system. The extent of the follow-up control will de-
pend on the production and shipyard control carried out and component design and dimen-
sioning and material used. The plan shall cover the lifespan of the components and shall in
addition to standard control and maintenance take special account of the following:
components exposed to repeated high loads and/or load variations (fatigue)
components exposed to substantial wear, corrosion, erosion, fouling, etc.
special seabed conditions
other operational conditions calling for special control.
The plan shall be included in the operations manual/maintenance system.
9. The breaking strength of anchor lines which forms the basis of the mooring calculations shall
be adjusted for reductions in strength due to corrosion, wear, etc.
10. Anchors (including pile anchors) shall have a holding force at least 25 % greater than the
maximum force to which the anchor may be exposed according to the anchoring calcula-
tions. The strength of the anchors and their holding force shall be possible to document on
the basis of calculations or tests. The calculations shall take seabed conditions and any pre-
vious tests into consideration.
11. If it is intended that the length of the anchor lines shall be adjustable depending on weather
conditions (active anchoring system), this operation shall be tested and documented for rele-
vant weather conditions. For such systems it shall be possible to plan the adjustment on
board by means of simulation. Winches shall normally be capable of being operated without
causing shutdown of other critical systems. The owner shall prepare a plan and instructions
for such active winch operation, to be included in the operations manual.
12. It shall be possible to carry out a functional test of all winch functions although the winch is
in operation.
460
13. Fairleads for chains shall be constructed with at least 7 pockets.
14. The effect of dynamic forces on the anchoring system shall be taken into consideration when
calculating the total tension in the anchor lines for operation in depths of more than 200
metres.
15. The owner shall prepare a plan for control of the embedding of the anchor lines in the seabed
in order to check that the line lengths and line profiles on which the mooring calculations are
based are maintained.
16. It shall not be possible to release anchor lines while risers are connected to the unit. A special
safety system preventing this shall be provided. Emergency release shall nevertheless be
possible with risers connected after a manual cancellation of the above safety system. A risk
analysis as provided by the regulations of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate in force at
any time concerning risk analyses shall determine whether a disconnect mechanism for risers
is necessary and which dimensioning accidental events necessitate such disconnection.
2
17. The maximum excursion of the unit in intact condition and after a possible single failure or
double failure shall not exceed the maximum excursion which the riser is designed to with-
stand. A safety margin of 2,5% of the water depth shall be used for rigid risers, whilst a safe-
ty margin of 5% of the water depth shall be used for flexible risers.
Amended by regulations 11 Oct 1996 no. 977 (in force 1 July 1997), 18 Feb 1997 (in force 1 Jan 1998), 2 March 1999 no. 410
(in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 544 (in force 1 July 2003).
17
Stability
1. When the production process is in progress or hydrocarbons are under pressure in the pro-
duction systems, the requirements for intact and damage stability for operating conditions
shall be in accordance with the Norwegian Maritime Directorates currently applicable regu-
lations concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight closing
2. A collision with a supply vessel of 5000 tons displacement with a speed of 2 m/s shall not
cause a discharge of crude oil from storage tanks or from process equipment on deck. The
production plant shall be capable of withstanding the inclinations occurring without resulting
in critical events.
3. The effect on stability of a quick release of risers and/or anchor lines according to emergency
procedures shall not result in a dynamic angle of inclination in the most adverse case exceed-
ing 17 in any direction.
Chapter VI
General risk-reducing measures
18
Layout
1. Living quarters and main evacuation equipment shall be separated from the production and
wellhead areas.
2. The following equipment areas shall be separated and protected from one another:
wellhead area
production area
storage tanks for hydrocarbons
auxiliaries which are fired (boilers, incinerators etc.)
machinery
living quarters and areas containing vital safety equipment, eg equipment for positioning,
evacuation, etc.
462
3. The production equipment may be located above storage tanks for crude oil provided that the
tanks are equipped with an inert gas system and that vents for gas from the tanks are arranged
so that gas is never released to the process area. Such gas releases shall be ventilated to a safe
area.
4. Ballast tanks adjacent to storage tanks for oil shall be protected against corrosion and shall be
painted inside with a light-coloured paint (coating) in order to be easy to inspect for cracks
and resulting leaks.
5. Ventilation intakes shall have the safest location possible with regard to possible gas/smoke
emissions from an accidental event, also taking the wind direction into consideration.
6. Equipment which may represent a potential source of ignition shall not be installed in the vi-
cinity of possible sources of leakage of hydrocarbons.
7. There shall be at least two escape routes from every area/space. The escape routes shall be
protected to the extent necessary with regard to the design accidental events. Where it may
be necessary to pass close to the production plant in an evacuation situation, an enclosed, re-
lief ventilated and insulated escape route shall be arranged past this area.
Chapter VII
Structural fire and explosion safety measures
19
Structural fire safety
1. The production plant shall be surrounded by appropriate fire barriers and the necessary ex-
plosion pressure relief structures to prevent the further spread of a fire or explosion that has
occurred. On the background of design accidental events and consequence analyses, it shall
be considered whether minimum requirements for structural fire safety against adjacent
areas are adequate or whether additional requirements are necessary to meet specified ac-
ceptance criteria, ref the Norwegian Maritime Directorates regulations currently in force
concerning risk analyses, and regulations concerning precautionary measures against fire
and explosion.
2. The production plant, drilling area and wellhead area shall be separated from each other by
class H-O fire barriers as a minimum.
3. The barrier between the production plant and the living quarters shall be a structure that is at
least equivalent to fire class H-60.
4. Accesses to non-hazardous areas, and air intakes and other openings shall be located as far
away as possible from areas where gas leaks from production equipment may occur.
5. Load-bearing structures, supports, foundations, etc. for the production plant shall be fire-
protected to withstand the calculated design fire load for a sufficient period of time with re-
gard to the time needed for pressure relief.
6. Pipes, valves, cables and accumulators, etc. for emergency shutdown valves and for safety
and emergency systems in the production area shall be tested with regard to fire resistance.
Valves which do not have metal-to-metal sealing shall satisfy the fire safety requirements of
API 607 or an equivalent, recognized standard.
7. Processing equipment for the treatment of oil shall be fitted with drip pans or frame sumps of
sufficient capacity for the collection of oil spills. The drip pan shall be drained. For the pur-
pose of calculating the drainage capacity a design base leakage (eg rupture of the largest
pipe) and the normal rolling angle shall be taken into consideration. Oil spills shall be
drained through a water lock to an enclosed spill oil tank/collecting tank (if necessary a slop
tank). Drainage shall be provided on both sides under separators and similar tanks. The col-
lecting tank shall be capable of holding all oil contained in the largest separator.
464
8. Drainage systems for spaces and areas classified as hazardous shall be separated from drain-
age systems for non-hazardous areas. Collecting tanks for drainage from hazardous areas
shall be covered by inert gas.
9. Between tank decks and mezzanine decks with drip pans under the production plant there
shall be a space which is ventilated and accessible for inspection. Tank decks in relevant
areas shall be protected and designed for any jet fires from processing equipment located
above, so that the tank deck cannot be exposed to unacceptable heating in the event of igni-
tion of oil or gas leaks.
10. Emergency flaring must not expose escape routes and evacuation stations to excessive heat
loads, nor prevent the access to and operation of control stations. Protection against heat
loads from flares shall be designed in accordance with the largest hydrocarbon quantity
which the flare system will be capable of flaring off. Heat loads from flares shall not exceed
4,7 kw/m
2
in areas where escape and evacuation by sea may take place.
20
Structural explosion protection
1. Load-bearing members, such as decks, roofs and walls shall, if considered to be necessary by
the risk analysis, be arranged for explosion relief eller designed so that these structural mem-
bers are not destroyed in a design explosion. Open spaces, blast panels/hatches or light-
weight walls collapsing in a controlled manner may be used as explosion relief. In order that
depressurisation may be taken into consideration for the purpose of specifying the survival
capability of critical equipment in spaces where an explosion has occurred, the opening pres-
sure and opening time of blast panels must be documented.
2. Calculations of explosion pressure based on the area in question, the shape of spaces, blast
panels, and the location of equipment may be required in order to determine the design pres-
sure (equivalent static pressure) on structural members such as walls, columns, tanks, pipes
etc, and to provide the design basis.
3. Fire protection (including fire insulation) for an area/space shall withstand a specified design
pressure without loss of fire integrity.
4. Containers and associated pipes etc which may hold flammable liquids and gases shall be de-
signed and protected so that leaks will not occur if such equipment is exposed to a specified
design pressure from a design explosion.
Chapter VIII
Gas and fire detection systems
21
Gas detection system
1. The gas detection system and arrangement of gas detectors shall comply with the Norwegian
Maritime Directorates currently applicable regulations concerning precautionary measures
against fire, and explosion. In addition gas detectors shall be fitted in areas for:
production; in addition to spot detectors the production area shall be covered by infra-red
line detectors
turret/wellhead with manifolds
cargo oil pumps
machinery/boilers fuelled by gas.
466
2. Gas detectors shall be installed in all ventilation intakes to spaces with mechanical ventila-
tion. If the production area is enclosed in a space with mechanical ventilation, gas detectors
shall also be fitted in ventilation outlets.
3. Pump rooms with pumps for hydrocarbons shall be equipped with a continuously measuring
gas detection system. The gas concentration shall be capable of being read in the cargo con-
trol room, and so that an alarm is given at a predetermined gas concentration in pump rooms.
4. The owner shall consider installing H2S gas detectors in the production area for each separate
assignment.
22
Fire detection system
1. The fire detection system for the production plant shall be based on two different detector
principles, eg heat and flame detectors. Detectors shall be of an addressable type.
2. The detector system shall function in the event of an error in any detector or a cable breakage
between detectors. The loops shall be equipped with monitoring of short-circuits, breakage
and earth faults.
3. There shall be a separate processor/logic controller (loop card) for each separate detector
loop. In the event that the main processor fails (where there is one single processor) it shall
still be possible to have an indication of the loop from which an alarm comes.
Chapter IX
Active fire safety measures
23
Fire pump system for fire water main
1. Capacity of the fire pump system:
The fire water capacity shall be based on the estimated consumption in a dimensioning
fire event.
2. For units of a ship design with storage of oil on board and where the production plant is locat-
ed in the tank deck area, a dimensioning fire in the production area shall require simultane-
ous fire water for:
the deluge system, including remote-operated foam monitors for extinguishing in the pro-
duction area;
the laying of a foam carpet on the tank deck;
the number of hose reels which may be used simultaneously for fire-fighting in this area;
sprinkler for cooling areas and equipment, such as external bulkheads of adjacent areas
and helifuel tanks, depending on the arrangement and degree of passive fire protection.
3. Additional requirements for the number, location and protection of the fire pump systems
and their power supply shall be considered and determined on the basis of risk analyses, ref.
Risk analyses regulation
1
.
1
Cf. regulation 22 December 1993 no. 1239 concerning risk analyses for mobile offshore units.
24
Fire pump system for deluge systems using water/foam
1. The production plant shall be protected by a foam/water deluge system. The deluge system
shall be arranged so that 100% extinguishing and cooling capacity is maintained after a di-
mensioning accidental event in the production plant destroying one water/foam supply.
468
There shall be sufficient foam concentrate to maintain foam application for at least 15
minutes. Foam concentrate shall be capable of being supplied from two separate and protect-
ed areas on the unit.
2. Using a risk analysis as basis, the owner shall suggest the type and arrangement of the fixed
fire protection system for the production plant.
3. Deluge systems
1
shall as a minimum be installed to cover the areas and equipment listed be-
low, and have the following minimum capacities:
Area: Capacity:
risers, turret, manifold and wellhead area (foam and water) 20 (l/min m
2
)
production area (foam and water) 10 (l/min m
2
)
surface of pressure vessels and tanks with flammable contents (water) 10 (l/min m
2
)
shipping terminal (foam and water) 10 (l/min m
2
)
On the basis of the result of the risk analysis referred to in subsection 2 as basis, the Nor-
wegian Maritime Directorate may require sprinkling of other areas such as outer surfaces of
the living quarters, as well as a larger capacity than specified above.
4. In addition to local and remote manual release, the deluge system for the process plant shall
also be fitted with automatic release in the event of a fire.
5. An automatic deluge system shall be protected against inadvertent release, and any such re-
lease shall not result in safety-critical consequences.
6. Where the nozzle type and capacity are concerned these shall in the various areas be suitable
for possible gas jet fires, liquid pool fires, running liquid fires and combinations of these, de-
pending on what is relevant in the circumstances.
1
Systems may be installed in accordance with NFPA 15 Water spray fixed systems, NFPA 16 Deluge foam-water sprin-
kler and foam-water spray systemsfor equivalent, recognised standards Foam shall be of the film forming type (AFFF, Fire-
stop).
25
Other special fixed extinguishing installations
In areas/spaces which are enclosed or partially enclosed a waterfog system may be used.
26
Portable fire extinguishing equipment
In the processing area a sufficient number of portable fire extinguishers shall be located, with
an extinguishing agent of the film forming foam type.
Chapter X
Fire and explosion protection of storage tanks in the hull
structure
27
Structural requirements
Units which store extracted hydrocarbons on board shall comply with SOLAS-74 Chapter II-2
part D, Regulation 56 Location and separation of spaces with regard to their arrangement and
separation of living quarters, machinery spaces, tanks etc.
470
28
Active safety measures
Mobile Units which in the production phase store extracted hydrocarbons on board shall be
equipped with the following:
1. Foam monitors to cover the tank deck, which shall comply with SOLAS-74 Chapter II-2 part
D, Regulation 61, Fixed deckfoam systems. In addition to manual operation, according to
SOLAS-74, the foam monitors shall be capable of remote operation from a location provid-
ing a good view.
2. Foam shall be capable of being delivered to the tank deck underneath the production equip-
ment.
3. Tank ventilation shall as a minimum comply with SOLAS-74 Chapter II-2 part D/Reg 59,
Venting, purging, gas-freeing and ventilation.
4. Inert gas systems shall comply with SOLAS-74 Chapter II-2 part D/Reg 62, Inert gas sys-
tems.
5. Fixed fire-extinguishing systems in pump rooms shall satisfy the requirements of SOLAS-74
Chapter II-2 Part D, Reg 63, Cargo pump-rooms.
6. Cargo oil pumps in pump rooms shall be monitored by instruments for measuring temper-
atures in shaft bearings, pump casings and shaft penetrations. It shall be possible to read tem-
peratures in cargo control rooms and to give an alarm in the event of temperature increase.
Chapter XI
Emergency shutdown and emergency release systems
29
Automatic process safety system
30
Manual emergency shutdown system
1. It shall be possible to carry out manual emergency shutdown in accordance with the Norwe-
gian Maritime Directorates currently applicable regulations concerning precautionary mea-
sures against fire and explosion.
2. In addition it shall be possible to carry out manual emergency shutdown of:
the production plant, including depressurisation
cargo oil pumps.
3. It shall be possible to carry out emergency shutdown of the well stream of oil and gas as
closely as possible to the location where that stream comes on board the mobile offshore un-
it, for instance in the immediate vicinity of the point where the riser is suspended.
4. It shall be possible to carry out manual emergency shutdown as a minimum from manned
control stations/emergency control stations. It shall also be possible to activate the most
comprehensive emergency shutdown from the evacuation stations.
472
31
Automatic emergency shutdown system
1. Automatic emergency shutdown shall be in accordance with the Norwegian Maritime Direc-
torates currently applicable regulations concerning precautionary measures against fire and
explosion.
2. Automatic emergency shutdown of the production plant and cargo oil pump system shall be
activated by gas and/or fire detection in areas with production systems/equipment. Automat-
ic emergency shutdown of the production plant shall also be activated by abnormal events,
such as:
loss of flaring (roundflare)
high level in flare knock-out drum
loss of instrument air
fire in machinery spaces
other relevant critical events disclosed in a risk analysis.
3. In the event of fire detection and automatic emergency shutdown of the production plant,
pressure relief valves shall open automatically. Depressurisation with depressurisation times
shall as a minimum comply with API-RP 520 and 521. It shall be possible to depressurise
high-pressure and low-pressure systems simultaneously. Any hydrate formation during such
depressurisation shall be taken into consideration.
4. An indication shall be given in the control station/emergency control station of the cause of
the emergency shutdown and the equipment which has been automatically shut down. Alarm
filtration or a similar arrangement shall be provided so that the first alarm indication may be
isolated.
5. In the event of emergency shutdown of the production plant, important machinery using gas
from the process shall automatically change over to another source of fuel. Similarly, in the
event of loss of fuel gas, the flare system must automatically change over to another gas, eg
propane. The flare system shall as a minimum be designed in accordance with API-RP/520
and 521.
6. In the event of a system fault the emergency shutdown system shall go to the safest position
(fail safe). In the process and wellhead area this involves normally closed circuits for the
electrical control system.
7. In the event of emergency shutdown, block valves for the production equipment, eg wellhead
master valves, emergency shutdown valves in wellheads, manifold valves, must be closed in
the correct sequence and with a time delay, so that dangerous pressure conditions do not oc-
cur.
8. Ventilation dampers which close in the event of emergency shutdown for living quarters and
other spaces where the prevention of gas penetration is required, shall be of a type which is
tested for a particularly low leak rate, eg lower than 300 m
3
gas pr. hour pr. square m. damper
area at a differential pressure = 2000 Pa.
9. Hydraulic power systems for closing of emergency shutdown valves etc shall be arranged
with filtration equipment for continuous filtration of the hydraulic oil (pump with off-line
filter).
32
Manual emergency release system
1. It shall be possible to carry out manual emergency release of:
risers, cf. 15 subsection 16, when indicated as relevant by risk analysis anchor lines, cf.
15 subsection 16
loading system, including mechanical/hawser connection to tanker, cf. 35.
474
Chapter XII
Other special requirements and anti-pollution precautions
33
Emergency power and emergency power consumers
1. The emergency source of power shall be located on the unit in such a way that an accidental
event in the production/wellhead area will not make it necessary to shut down both main
power and emergency power simultaneously. Account shall be taken of the predominant
wind direction in relation to the unit with regard to the location of the emergency source of
power. Reference is also made to the Norwegian Maritime Directorates regulations con-
cerning the construction of mobile offshore units.
2. Exhaust pipes shall not have a temperature exceeding the ignition temperature of the relevant
gas produced or stored on the unit.
For testing of temperatures reference is made to IEC standard Publication 79-4 (1975):
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres, Part 4: Method of test for ignition tem-
perature, and supplement publication 79-4A.
3. It shall be possible to supply the bearing/lifting system of the turret machinery with emergen-
cy power. This also applies to equipment on the turret which must be capable of being dis-
connected due to rotational limitations.
4. It shall be possible to supply ventilation systems in hazardous areas from the emergency
source of power.
34
Anti-pollution precautions
The mobile offshore unit shall be designed and arranged so as to prevent acute pollution from
the vessels storage or unloading transfer system
1
. Procedures for the operation of arrangements
shall be included in the operations manual.
1
Cf the IMO Standard for vapour emission control systems for emission of oil vapours.
Chapter XIII
Loading and mooring system
35
Loading and mooring system
1. The loading and mooring system shall be operated within the constructional and operational
restrictions of the system. Instructions for cargo transfer and disconnection shall be carried
on board the unit and on board the cargo ship.
2. Normal release and emergency release of any mooring hawser shall be possible up to the
breaking load of the hawser. Procedures shall be established which ensure that the loading
hose is not exposed to unforeseen loads at normal release or emergency release of the hawser
connection or in the event of a broken hawser connection.
3. The capacities of the loading and mooring system with regard to permissible tension, pres-
sure and freedom of movement shall be calculated and specified in the operations manual.
Recognized standards shall be used for the calculation, taking into consideration the dynamic
conditions that may prevail during offshore loading.
4. Release of loading hose shall not be possible before the cargo pumps and the valves of the
loading system are shut down.
476
5. Means of communication shall be provided between all locations from where the loading op-
eration can be influenced. A visual overview shall be provided of all systems requiring con-
trol/monitoring.
6. The loading and mooring system shall have instrumentation enabling the measurement of
tension in loading hose and mooring hawser, distance between the unit and cargo ship, and
pressure in loading hose. In addition, emergency stop shall be provided for cargo oil pumps
and loading valves.
7. Miscellaneous safety requirements:
a) Arrangement for draining of cargo oil pipes shall be provided.
b) It shall be possible to fill cargo oil pipes with inert gas. Precautions shall be taken to
isolate inert gas systems from the cargo oil pipe system.
c) All ports and intakes in an area within 10 metres of the loading hoses joint part shall
be kept closed while loading is in progress.
d) The loading area shall be capable of being deluged with foam.
e) The local control station shall be fitted with a deluge system.
f) The local control station shall be ventilated to over-pressure. Ventilation intakes shall
be located in a safe area.
8. A maintenance and testing programme for the loading system shall be established. The main-
tenance and testing programme shall be included in the operations manual.
Chapter XIV
Maintenance, operation and manning
36
Spare parts and maintenance system
1. The owner shall have a maintenance and spare parts system. The maintenance system shall
include hull/tanks and all systems and components referred to in these regulations and shall
cover the conditions regarding maintenance, testing and continuous control etc laid down he-
rein.
2. The owner is responsible for ensuring that spare parts are available in order that repairs and
replacements may take place within a reasonable period of time which will not reduce the le-
vel of safety on board.
37
Operations manual/contingency manual
38
Manning/training system
478
Chapter XV
39
Penalty
Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 no 10, 339 subsection 2, ref. 48a and 48b, unless a more
40
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force 1 April 1994.
1240/93 Helideck regulations
480
1240/93 Helideck regulation
CONTENTS
1 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
6 Approval and survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Chapter IV: Location, construction, size and load . . . 488
7 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
8 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
9 Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
10 Obstacle-free take-off and approach sector . . . . . . . . . . . 488
11 Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Chapter V: Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
12 Obstacles in the take-off and approach sector . . . . . . . . . 490
13 Obstacles outside the take-off and approach sector . . . . . 490
Chapter VI: Other requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
14 Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
15 Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
16 Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
17 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
18 Mooring anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
19 Safety shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
20 Drain ditch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Chapter VII: Visual aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
21 Wind cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
22 Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
23 Name marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
24 Obstacle-free sector marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
25 Helideck size marking (D value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
26 Fixed obstacles marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
27 Accessway marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
28 Exit marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
29 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Chapter VIII: Operational equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
30 Meteorological equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
31 Equipment for the registration of movements . . . . . . . . . 500
32 General equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
33 Communication equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
34 Aeromobile radio beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
35 Fuel distribution station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
482
Chapter IX: Fire preparedness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
37 Fire-fighting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
38 Safety measures for helidecks with fuel distribution sta-
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Chapter X: Maintenance and operation . . . . . . . . . . . 506
39 Maintenance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
40 Emergency manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
41 Crew/training system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Chapter XI: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
42 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
43 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Preface
These regulations are addressed to companies wishing to build and/or operate a mobile offshore
unit with a helideck on board.
The regulations have been prepared to cover conditions which the fitting of a helideck will cause
to the structure of the mobile offshore unit, its maritime systems and the operation of these sys-
tems. The regulations are based on ICAO, Annex 14, Volume II, and have been fully harmonised
with related requirements issued by the Norwegian Civil Aviation Administration, and with the
MODU Code/IMO.
Control within the meaning of the regulations is divided between the Norwegian Maritime Di-
rectorate and the Norwegian Civil Aviation Administration, to which responsibility has been dele-
gated by the Maritime Directorate.
The Norwegian Maritime Directorates control extends to structure, accessways, tank installa-
tions, fire safety and fire-fighting, operations and emergency manual, manning and training.
The rest of the regulations, i.e. matters regarding flight operations, comes under the authority of
the Norwegian Civil Aviation Administration .
Compliance with the requirements of the regulations is a precondition for the issue of the mo-
bile offshore units maritime certificates.
Regulation requirements for the decks size, markings, etc. are illustrated with figures based on
ICAO, Annex 14, Volume II. Furthermore, a table is included, giving relevant information on the
most frequently used helicopter types. This information has been gathered at the back of the regu-
lations.
Regulations 22 December 1993 No. 1240 concerning
helicopter decks on mobile offshore units
Laid down pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7, relating to Public of the Sea-
worthiness of Ships etc. 1 third paragraph subsection 2, 9a, 41a and 42, cf. Royal Decree of 12
October 1962, 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978, 25 May 1984, and Formal Delegation of 15 Janu-
ary 1979 and 6 June 1984. Amended 11 October 1996. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended re-
gulations have been notified in accordance with Council Directive 83/189/EEC and 11 April 2003
No. 508, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
484
Chapter I
1
Applicability
1. These regulations apply to all units which have been registered or will be registered in a Nor-
wegian register of ships. The regulations are applicable when a helideck is fitted to a mobile
offshore unit, from which helicopter operations will be conducted. The regulations apply to
unrestricted trade areas.
issue.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations the following definitions apply:
1. Non-conformity: means non-conformity with the Owners Safety Management System, in-
cluding operations manuals with associated procedures etc, and non-conformity of compo-
nents and systems in relation to the normal standard.
2. D: the helicopters largest overall dimension when both rotors are turning.
3. Unit: mobile platform, including drilling ship, equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum de-
posits, and mobile platform for other purposes than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
4. Helicopterdeck: A deck on a mobile unit, intended for helicopter take-off and landing.
6. Helicopter Landing Officer: A person specially trained and appointed to supervise day-to-
day work on the helideck.
7. Aviation enterprise: Person, organisation or company engaged in aviation.
Chapter II
General provisions
3
tions
1
.
1
486
4
Deviations
4 A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Chapter III
Documentation
5
Documentation
with. The contents, scope and type of documents and the time of submission shall be decided by
a) the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, for areas such as strength, means of access, fire-fight-
ing and fire safety, tank installations, emergency preparedness, manning and training ( 8,
11, 17, 19, 20, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 and 41); or
b) the Norwegian Civil Aviation Authority, for matters related to the operation of aircraft ( 7,
9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32).
Amended by regulations 11 Oct 1996 no. 982 (in force 1 Jan 1996), 11 April 2003 no. 508 (in force 1 July 2003).
6
Approval and survey
488
Chapter IV
Location, construction, size and load
7
Location
The helideck shall be located so that the obstacle-free take-off and approach sector has the most
favourable direction in relation to the prevailing wind conditions, in order to minimise the effect
of turbulence from structures on the take-off and approach area and the touchdown area. High
temperatures from turbine exhausts and other gas discharges on board shall also be taken into con-
sideration.
If the helideck is to be located on a living quarter module, a separation shall be provided which
enables air to flow freely between the deck and the subjacent structure. The minimum distance
shall be 1 metre. In cases of doubt, it shall be possible to document turbulence conditions by tests
carried out in a wind tunnel or simulation model.
8
Construction
The helideck shall be made of an appropriate corrosion resistant material, and be designed in
such a way that the ground effect is maintained. The deck shall be constructed so that water will
not accumulate on the deck. The slope of the deck must not exceed 2 %.
9
Size
1. Helidecks for single main rotor helicopters or side-by-side twin main rotor helicopters:
The helideck shall have a minimum cross-sectional dimension corresponding to a circle of a
diameter of 1,0 D, where D is the helicopters largest overall dimension when both rotors are
turning.
2. Helidecks for tandem rotor helicopters:
a) For non-directional landing:
The helideck size shall correspond at least to the entire area within a circle of a dia-
meter of 0,9 times the length (D) of the helicopter, measured across both rotors in the
longitudinal axis of the helicopter.
b) For directional landing:
The helideck may be a rectangle with a minimum width corresponding to 0,75 D
and minimum length corresponding to 0,9 D when the landing direction is limited,
and so that landing must take place only in the longitudinal direction of the helideck.
If considered necessary for structural reasons, one or more of the corners of the rec-
tangle may be omitted, provided none of the sides of the triangles right angles ex-
ceeds a length of 0,18 D.
10
Obstacle-free take-off and approach sector
The helideck shall have a 210 obstacle-free take-off and approach sector. The sector shall ex-
tend from the level of the helideck, in its horizontal plane, except over an angle of 180 from the
centre of the deck perpendicular on the centre line of the 210 angle. This section of the obstacle-
free take-off and approach sector shall extend in a plane with a slope gradient of 5:1 from the outer
edge of the helicopter downwards to the level of the sea.
490
The centre line of the angle shall normally pass through the centre of the helideck (circle or
square). The sector may be swung up to 15, except for helidecks with directional landing.
11
Load
1. Single load
The dimensioning of the helideck shall be based on the presumption that any point on the
deck may be subjected to a single load of 75% of the total weight of the heaviest helicopter
used. The single load is considered to be evenly distributed across the c ontact area. The con-
tact area between the helicopters landing undercarriage and the helideck shall be stipulated
in accordance with specifications from the helicopter manufacturer.
2. Loadbearing structures
The loadbearing structures beneath the helideck shall be dimensioned to carry a static load
equal to 3 times the take-off weight of the heaviest helicopter used, with the weight distribu-
tion on the undercarriage which is normal for this helicopter. The helicopter is presumed to
be located in the most adverse position on the deck.
3. With the loads of the helicopter indicated in subsections 1 and 2 plus the structures specific
weight and wind forces, the stresses allowed are equal to the yield stress of the material, but
not exceeding 2/3 of the ultimate limit.
Chapter V
Obstacles
12
Obstacles in the take-off and approach sector
In the 210 take-off and approach sector there shall, on or in the immediate vicinity of the deck,
be no obstacles projecting above the helideck level (fig. 1). The following exceptions apply:
a) safety shoulder (ref. 19),
b) shoulder and flood lighting which does not project more than 25 cm above the helideck level
(ref. 29),
c) outer edge of the safety net (ref. 16),
d) single obstacles necessary to the operation of the helideck (handrails at exits, foam monitors
etc.) which do not project more than 25 cm above the helideck level.
13
Obstacles outside the take-off and approach sector
a) Single main rotor helicopters or side-by-side twin main rotor helicopters:
In a sector of 150 from the outer edge of the helideck outwards to a distance of 0,62 D
from the centre of the helideck, no obstacles higher than 0,05 D are permitted. In a sector of
150 from 0,62 D outwards to a distance of 0,83 D from the centre of the helideck, no obsta-
cles projecting above a plane with a gradient of 1 unit (vertically) to 2 units (horizontally) are
permitted (fig. 2).
b) Tandem rotor helicopters, non-directional landing:
In a sector of 150 from the outer edge of the helideck outwards to a distance of 0,62 D
from the centre of the helideck, there must be no obstacles projecting above the level of the
helideck, with the exceptions referred to in 12 a), b), c) and d) above.
In a sector of 150 from 0,62 D outwards to a distance of 0,83 D from the centre of the he-
lideck no obstacles projecting more than 0,05 D are permitted (fig. 3).
c) Tandem rotor helicopters, directional landing:
492
In a sector of 150 from the outer edge of the helideck (0,9 D side) outwards to a distance
of 0,62 D no obstacles projecting more than 1.1 m are permitted (fig. 4).
Chapter VI
Other requirements
14
Friction
1. The helideck shall have a non-skid surface. The coefficient of friction shall be at least 0.40.
2. In addition to the requirement of subsection 1, helidecks shall be equipped with a rope net.
3. The size of the rope net shall be determined by the largest helicopter used (ref. table 1). The
smallest size shall be:
Small helicopter: 6 6 metres square
Medium-sized helicopter: 12 12 metres square
Large helicopter: 15 15 metres square
4. The net mesh shall be so dimensioned as to prevent the net from being tangled in the hel-
icopters undercarriage.
5. Rope nets shall be fastened for every 1.5 metres. To ensure that the rope net is kept suffi-
ciently tight, at least 50% of the fastenings shall be fitted with tightening devices.
15
Paint
Paint used on or in connection with the helideck shall be of a type with a low flame-spreading
rate and low smoke development.
16
Safety net
The helideck shall be surrounded by a safety net of a width of 1,5 metres. The net shall be made
of corrosion resistant metal material. The mesh shall not be bigger than 10 cm square. The safety
net shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 200 kgs per square metre. The net
shall extend outwards from the same height below the helideck and have an upward slope of ap-
proximately 10, so that its outer edge is level with the helideck surface.
The outer edge of the safety net may, when justified by special structural reasons, made project
up to 25 cm above the level of the deck. Projections in the safety net for the positioning of fire
fighting equipment/emergency access may be made in a width of up to 3 metres from the outer
edge of the helideck.
17
Access
1. In addition to the main access to the helideck there shall be at least two other access routes,
preferably located at approx. 120 in relation to the main access.
2. Access to foam monitor operators stations shall be so arranged that it is not necessary to
cross parts of the helideck.
494
18
Mooring anchorages
The helideck shall be equipped with recessed mooring anchorages for the mooring of parked
helicopters (ref. fig. 9) For special helicopter types information on the location of the mooring an-
chorages may be obtained from the helicopter companies, showing the typical location of moor-
ing anchorages.
19
Safety shoulder
There shall be a safety shoulder, approximately 5 cm high, along the outer edge of the helideck
to prevent personnel or material from slipping overboard. The shoulder shall also ensure that
foam is kept on the deck for fire-fighting and to achieve cooling in the event of a fire. The safety
shoulder shall have effective drainage to a ditch.
20
Drain ditch
The helicopter deck shall be closely surrounded by a drain ditch capable of withstanding burn-
ing fuel. The dimensions of the ditch and its drains shall be according to the calculations of great-
est simultaneous water consumption on the deck. The cross section of the ditch shall be at least 20
by 20 cm. The drainage shall be effective directly to the sea at the angles of heel at which hel-
icopters can land.
Chapter VII
Visual aids
21
Wind cone
A clearly visible wind cone shall be provided in a location where it will be least affected by air-
flow disturbances caused by nearby structures. The wind cone shall have a single colour (orange)
or two colours: orange/white, red/white or black/white. The wind cone shall be tapered and suffi-
ciently large. (Standard size: inside diameter 60 cm, outside diameter 30 cm, length 2,4 m).
An additional wind cone shall be fitted where certain wind directions cause turbulence which
may affect the functions of the ordinary wind cone. Lighting of the wind cone shall be provided
for night flying.
22
Markings
1. The colour of the helideck shall be grey or green.
2. Identification marking.
The identification marking of the helideck shall consist of the letter H, white in colour, in
the centre of the reference circle. The direction of the H shall be oriented so that the cross
arm of the H is parallel to the centre line of the 210 sector. The size of the H shall be 3
metres by 4 metres (ref. fig. 5).
3. Maximum allowable mass marking.
496
A maximum allowable mass marking shall be displayed at the helideck (maximum take-
off weight of the largest helicopter for which the helideck is intended). The marking shall
have a colour contrasting with the background and be clearly visible from all approach an-
gles. The marking shall specify integral tonnes as a two-digit number, and the letter t (fig. 6).
4. Marking of the helidecks outer limits
The helidecks outer limits shall be marked with a white border 0.3 metres wide (edge
marking, ref. fig. 8).
5. Marking for touchdown guidance. Reference circle.
a) A yellow reference circle, 1 metre wide, shall be marked on the helideck for guidance
during touchdown.
b) Helidecks intended for helicopters the size of which is according to 9 subsection 1.
The inside diameter of the reference circle shall be half the D value of the helideck,
but not less than 6 metres, and not more than 12 metres (fig. 7a, 7b).
When required by special flying conditions the centre of the reference circle may be
transposed up to 0,1 D from the centre of the helideck, along the centre line of the
210 angle, towards the outer edge of the deck (fig. 7b).
c) Helidecks intended for tandem rotor helicopters, for non-directional landing ( 9 sub-
section 2a), shall have a reference circle of the same width and colour as referred to
under a) above. The inside diameter of the reference circle shall be half the diameter
of the touchdown circle, but not more than 12 metres. The centre of the reference cir-
cle shall be placed in the centre of the decks touchdown circle.
d) Helidecks intended for tandem rotor helicopters for directional landing ( 9 subsec-
tion 2b) shall have a reference circle of the same width and colour as referred to under
a) above. The inside diameter of the reference circle shall be half the maximu m trans-
verse dimension of the helideck, but not more than 12 metres. The reference circle
shall be placed in the centre of the deck. In addition to the reference circle the deck
shall have a yellow guidance line, 1 metre wide, from the periphery of the re ference
circle at right angles on the centre line of the 210 angle, outwards to the outer edges
of the helideck (fig. 7d).
The Norwegian Civil Avration Authority may permit other types of marking if the
aviation enterprise can document special needs.
23
Name marking
The name of the unit/installation shall be marked on the helideck, clearly visible from all ap-
proach directions above the level of the helideck. The marking shall preferably be located at the
side of the helideck towards the 150 sector, between the reference circle and the obstacle area.
The colour of the marking shall contrast with the background, and the height of the characters
shall be not less than 1.2 metres.
24
Obstacle-free sector marking
The 210 obstacle-free sector of the helideck shall be marked. The marking shall consist of a
black border, 10 cm wide, along each of the sector limits, so that they constitute the sectors angle
where the obstacle-free area originates. The height of the angle shall equal the width of the heli-
decks edge marking (ref. fig. 8).
498
25
Helideck size marking (D value)
The D value of the helideck, expressed in integral metres, shall be displayed in black in at least
three places (90 distance) on the outer marking of the helideck. The digits shall be approximately
60 cm high (ref. fig. 8).
26
Fixed obstacles marking
Fixed obstacles located within the 150 sector or along its borderline and/or which represent a
hazard to flying shall be marked with contrasting colours and if necessary be fitted with warning
lights of a luminous intensity of at least 10 candelas (ref. 29).
27
Accessway marking
Conspicuous signs shall be posted at the accessways to the helideck, prohibiting:
a) the presence of personnel on the deck during take-off and landing,
b) smoking or the use of open flames on the helideck while helicopter operations are in progress
or when the helicopter is parked,
c) personnel movement on the deck behind a parked helicopter with the rotor(s) turning.
28
Exit marking
Exits from the helideck shall be clearly marked EXIT and UTGANG by means of notices
which shall be sufficiently visible in the dark.
29
Lighting
1. Helidecks to be used for night flying and/or in conditions of reduced visibility shall:
a) have a sufficiently screened floodlighting arrangement so that flight crew are not daz-
zled during the approach and landing phase. Where a dual purpose lighting arrange-
ment, perimeter and floodlighting is installed, the average luminous intensity shall be
10 lux. The illumination of the deck shall be even and the contrasts not exceeding the
ratio 8 : 1.
b) be marked with perimeter lights consisting of yellow lamps uniformly spaced at in-
tervals of not more than 3 metres. The luminous intensity shall be 25 candelas. Fix-
tures shall not project more than 25 cm above the helideck level. Perimeter lights shal
l not be visible below the level of the helideck.
2. Floodlights and perimeter lights shall be connected to the emergency power system, and the
switching time in the event that the main source of power fails shall not exceed 10 seconds.
3. The highest point of the derrick, crane boom and crane cabin or other obstacles representing
a hazard to flying shall be marked with a red warning light, visible from all sides. The derrick
and crane boom shall in addition be fitted with coplanar red lights for every third of the total
length, calculated from the highest point of the derrick/crane boom. At least one light in
every plane shall be visible from all directions. The luminous intensity shall be 10 candelas
or more.
500
Chapter VIII
Operational equipment
30
Meteorological equipment
The unit shall have meteorological equipment for the determination of:
wind direction (magnetic) and velocity (knots) located where the measurements will provide
the most representative picture of the current wind conditions on the helideck
altimeter setting, including a precision aneroid barometer with digital reading (hektopascal)
open-air temperature (centigrade)
It shall be possible to monitor, operate and read the instruments from a position where the mea-
surements can be reported by radio to the pilot immediately before landing.
31
Equipment for the registration of movements
Mobile offshore units shall be equipped with instruments for the registration of longitudinal,
transverse and vertical movements. It shall be possible to report the readings to the pilot imme-
diately before landing.
32
General equipment
The following operational equipment for the helideck shall be available at all times:
chocks,
ropes for mooring of parked helicopters,
weight for weighing baggage/passengers,
equipment for removing snow and ice, where appropriate.
33
Communication equipment
Where equipment for communication with helicopters is concerned, reference is made to the
Norwegian Maritime Directorates regulations currently in force concerning the installation and
use of radio equipment on board mobile units.
If there is not an unobstructed view of the helideck from the units radio room, there shall be a
fixed or portable VHF AM radio which can be operated from a location with such a view.
34
Aeromobile radio beacon
The unit shall be equipped with an aeromobile radio beacon (NDB) in accordance with the Nor-
wegian Maritime Directorates regulations currently in force concerning the installation and use
of radio equipment on board mobile units.
35
Fuel distribution station
If the unit is equipped with a station for the distribution of fuel to helicopters, the station, oper-
ating instructions and instructions for fuel control shall be approved by the aviation enterprise
1
be-
fore fuel distribution is permitted.
502
For fire preparedness requirements in connection with such installations, ref. 36 and 37 of
these regulations.
1
Aviation enterprises currently operating on the Norwegian continental shelf accept Specifications for Offshore Refuelling
Systems prepared by Helicopter Service A/S.
Chapter IX
Fire preparedness
36
1. There shall be open airspace under the helideck so that efficient fire fighting also can be car-
ried out on the underside. Ref. also 7.
2. During take-off and landing the helideck crew shall consist of at least 2 persons. The Hel-
icopter Landing Officer (HLO) may be one of the two persons. At least one person, wearing
fire protection equipment, shall be posted at the foam monitor on the helideck which is most
appropriate under the prevailing weather conditions.
3. The Helicopter Landing Officer is responsible for the day-to-day supervision of work on the
helideck during helicopter calls, and for supplying the platform manager with weekly in-
formation in writing concerning the status of the helideck, equipment and services. He is un-
der special obligation to ensure that:
a) the necessary measures have been taken to prevent the presence of unauthorised per-
sons on the helideck prior to take-off and landing,
b) the deck has been cleared of loose objects, snow and ice, flammable substances, etc.,
c) the necessary personnel are standing by in their positions,
d) crane operations in the helideck area have ceased,
e) all equipment and instruments are available and in working order.
Prior to landing he shall communicate with the helicopter pilot, either directly or via the radio
operator, informing the pilot whether the deck has been prepared for landing.
During disembarkation and boarding he shall ensure that passengers are guided.
37
Fire-fighting equipment
1. There shall be a fire-fighting system using foam on the helicopter deck. The system may
consist of three fixed foam monitors, alternatively a branch pipe system with nozzles ensur-
ing efficient supply of foam to the whole helicopter deck. The foam monitors shall be so de-
signed and located that they are capable of directing the water jet straight down against the
surface of the deck.
2. The location of the foam monitors shall be such that under the most adverse weather condi-
tions in which helicopters can land, it will be possible to fight a critical fire anywhere on the
helideck.
The operators stations shall be situated close to one of the accessways (ref. 17), also tak-
ing into consideration the approach sector of the helicopters.
3. There shall be a panel at every foam monitor from which the necessary pumps and foam
valves can be remote-operated. These pumps and valves shall also be capable of being ma-
nually (locally) operated. In addition, it shall be possible to operate all foam monitors and
necessary pumps remotely from one place with a good view of the helicopter deck.
4. The foam system shall be capable of supplying at least 5.5 litres of foam solution (water +
foam concentrate) per min. per sq. m. of the area of a circle with a diameter D of the largest
helicopter for which the helicopter deck is designed.
The foam system shall supply foam not later than 15 seconds after being activated.
504
When foam monitors are being used, each single foam monitor shall be capable of supply-
ing at least 1,500 litres/min. If one single foam monitor is not able to comply with the capac-
ity requirement for the foam system, 2 foam monitors which is run simultaneously, at least
deliver the required amount of foam solution per minute, shall be used.
It must then be possible to operate the foam monitors, pumps and valves remotely from a
central and protected location commanding a clear and unobstructed view of the helicopter
deck.
5. The volume of the foam storage tank (foam tank) shall be calculated on the basis of:
minimum 10 minutes continuous operation of the foam system
a foam concentrate dilution percentage according to the recommendations of the supplier,
or greater.
A foam concentrate of a suitable type which is in accordance with an international recog-
nized standard shall be used.
6. There shall be at least two fire hydrants with hose reels in the vicinity of the helideck.
7. Distribution stations and areas around fuel tank(s) shall be protected by a deluge system with
a capacity of at least 10 litres per minute per sq. m.
8. The extinguishing systems referred to in subsections 4, 6 and 7 shall be connected with two
separate pump systems, one of which shall be connected with the units emergency switch-
board.
The arrangement of fire mains, valves and pump systems shall be such that every pump
system alone is capable of ensuring a sufficient water supply (capacity and pressure) when
the extinguishing systems (subsections 4, 6 and 7) are in operation simultaneously. The pres-
sure in the fire mains at the helicopterdeck shall be not less than 7 bars.
The fire mains shall be continuously water filled and pressurised up to the extinguishing
systems referred to in this section.
9. For the purpose of fighting a fire in the helicopter engines, there shall be a 10 kg CO
2
ex-
tinguisher with an extension hose and nozzle capable of reaching the engines of the helicop-
ter types which can land on the deck. Two similar CO
2
extinguishers shall be kept in reserve
in the vicinity of the helideck.
10. For the purpose of extinguishing minor fires on the helideck, there shall be an approved com-
bined foam/dry powder station with hoses and dual purpose nozzles ready for use, capable of
reaching any part of the helideck. The quantity of dry powder shall be no less than 250 kgs
and the capacity of the system shall be between 2 and 3 kgs of powder per second. The sys-
tem shall contain not less than 250 litres of foam concentrate and be capable of supplying no
less than 200 litres of foam solution per minute .
11. There shall be two sets of firemans equipment, and also two blankets made of a fire-res-
training material, to be kept in the vicinity of the helideck. Ref. regulations concerning pre-
cautionary measures against fire and explosion, 13, 14 and 15, for the extent, etc. of fire-
mans equipment.
12. The following emergency equipment shall be stored in the vicinity of the helideck, prefer-
ably in the immediate vicinity of the operators station (foam monitor) at the main access:
2 fire-axes
2 stainless knives (for cutting seatbelts)
2 hand lamps (explosion-proof)
1 crow bar
1 pair of cutting pliers
1 hack saw with spare blade
1 hammer
1 steel bar with a wedged tip
1 pair of sheet metal shears
1 bolt cutt er
1 lightweight ladder (approx. 3 metres)
1 jack for at least
1
/2 tonne
1 metal hook with a shaft approx. 3 metres long
506
The equipment shall be easily accessible, visible and stored in a safe place, preferably in a
sealed cabinet or box. The cabinet or box shall be capable of being locked with a key, and the
key shall be kept behind a window of a breakable material. The cabinet or box shall be red in
colour and marked NDUTSTYR and EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT.
38
Safety measures for helidecks with fuel distribution stations
1. Fuel with flash point below 37 C is not permitted to be used in connection with distribution
stations.
2. The area for fuel storage tanks shall be located at a safe distance from accommodation spac-
es, evacuation routes and lifeboat stations, judged by technical fire criterie. It shall be sep-
arate from areas where there are sources of ignition. Fuel storage tanks shall be protected
against a possible helicopter casualty.
3. The storage tanks shall be securely fixed and protected against mechanical damage and high
temperatures from any fire occurring in adjacent areas.
4. Transportable tanks shall be designed in accordance with the IMDG Code and equipped with
proper fittings, fixing arrangements and earthing. Inspection routines for transportable tanks
shall be included in the operations manual. These inspection routines shall be maintained for
all storage tanks.
5. Storage tanks, pump units and refuelling sites shall be arranged with a drip tray of ample di-
mensions for collecting possible leakages. The drip tray shall be effectively drained to a safe
place.
6. Vent arrangements from storage tanks with a pressure/vacuum valve shall be located at a safe
distance from accommodation spaces, etc. It shall not be possible for gas from outlets to en-
ter into ventilation systems.
7. Outlet valves shall be fitted direct to the tank and shall be capable of being closed remotely
in the event of fire.
8. Pump systems shall be connected to one tank at a time, and pipes between the tanks and the
pump unit shall be of steel or equivalent material. Short flexible connections of oil and fire
resistant material may be used. Pipes shall be protected against mechanical damage.
9. Electrical pump systems with attachments shall comply with the regulations in force con-
cerning electrical installations, maritime installations, and the electrical equipment regula-
tions laid down by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Planning.
10. All pumps and shut-off valves shall be capable of being operated from the helicopter refuell-
ing station.
11. All pump systems shall have an arrangement to prevent excess pressure in hoses.
12. Safety instructions for the filling of fuel, including i.a. No Smoking signs, shall be posted
in the vicinity of the fuel distribution station.
Chapter X
Maintenance and operation
39
Maintenance system
The owner shall have a maintenance system covering all systems and components referred to in
these regulations.
508
40
Emergency manual
1. An emergency manual shall be prepared. The instructions shall take into consideration the
relevant requirements of these regulations and also the requirements of the aviation enter-
prise and aviation authorities, as well as the relevant structural and operational restrictions
determined for the helideck with its related systems and equipment.
2. A logbook shall be kept for the operation of the helideck.
3. The emergency manual shall specify planned measures and procedures necessary to prevent
situations involving danger or damage and to restore the safe operation of the helideck, and
the necessary measures to reduce the harmful effects of a casualty on the helideck.
41
Crew/training system
1. The owner shall appoint the necessary crew for the operation of the helideck, including the
Helicopter Landing Officer. Ref. subsection 3 and 36 subsection 2.
2. The owner shall have a training system which also includes the crew responsible for the op-
eration of the helideck. Training shall cover all matters of significance to the safe operation
of the helideck, including documentation of completed training in the use of the helidecks
fire-fighting equipment.
3. Helicopter Landing Officer
In order to serve as Helicopter Landing Officer, the person concerned shall document having
received at least the following training:
training in the use of fire-fighting equipment as referred to above,
knowledge of requirements for helidecks and of the operation of the deck under normal
conditions and in emergency situations,
knowledge of helicopter types and of the refuelling of aircraft,
carriage of dangerous goods by aircraft,
loading/unloading requirements for lashing and securing of cargo in aircraft,
regulations concerning safety and communication systems on units in the petroleum in-
dustry and other relevant laws and regulations,
general information on continental shelf flying,
any such additional training as the owner may require.
4. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may impose further requirements for the personnel in-
volved in the operation of the helideck.
Chapter XI
42
Penalty
510
43
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force 1 January 1994.
As from the same date the regulations of 13 January 1986 concerning helicopter decks on drill-
ing units and other mobile offshore units, are replaced for new units.
512
TABLE 1 - Helicopter-data
D
-
v
a
l
u
e
M
a
x
i
m
u
m
R
o
p
e
R
o
t
o
r
H
e
l
i
c
o
p
t
e
r

t
y
p
e
m
e
t
r
e
s
0
,
6
2

D
0
,
8
3

D
M
T
O
W

k
g
H
e
i
g
h
t
n
e
t

s
i
z
e
d
i
a
m
e
t
e
r

(
m
)
B
l
k
o
w

1
0
5
D
1
1
,
8
1
7
,
3
2
9
,
8
0
2
.
3
0
0
3
,
8
0
S
m
a
l
l
/
S
k
i
d
s
9
,
9
0
B
l
k
o
w

1
0
5
D
1
3
,
0
0
8
,
0
6
1
0
,
7
9
3
.
2
0
0
3
,
8
4
S
m
a
l
l
/
S
k
i
d
s
1
1
,
0
0
A
g
u
s
t
a

A
1
0
9
1
3
,
0
5
8
,
0
9
1
0
,
8
3
2
.
6
0
0
3
,
3
0
S
m
a
l
l
1
1
,
0
0
D
a
u
p
h
i
n

S
A

3
6
5

N
2
1
3
,
6
8
8
,
4
8
1
1
,
3
5
4
.
2
5
0
4
,
0
1
S
m
a
l
l
1
1
,
9
3
S
i
k
o
r
s
k
y

S
7
6
1
6
,
0
0
9
,
9
2
1
3
,
2
8
4
.
6
7
6
4
,
4
1
M
e
d
i
u
m
1
3
,
4
0
B
e
l
l

2
1
2
1
7
,
4
6
1
0
,
8
3
1
4
,
5
0
5
.
0
8
0
4
,
8
0
M
e
d
i
u
m
/
S
k
i
d
s
1
4
,
6
3
S
u
p
e
r

P
u
m
a

A
S

3
3
2
L
1
8
,
7
0
1
1
,
5
9
1
5
,
5
2
8
.
5
9
9
4
,
9
2
M
e
d
i
u
m
1
5
,
0
0
B
e
l
l

2
1
4
S
T
1
8
,
9
5
1
1
,
7
5
1
5
,
7
3
7
.
9
3
6
4
,
6
8
M
e
d
i
u
m
1
5
,
8
5
S
u
p
e
r

P
u
m
a

A
S

3
3
2
L
2
1
9
,
5
0
1
2
,
0
9
1
6
,
1
9
9
.
1
5
0
4
,
9
2
M
e
d
i
u
m
1
6
,
2
0
S
i
k
o
r
s
k
y

S
-
6
1
N
2
2
,
2
0
1
3
,
7
6
1
8
,
4
3
9
.
2
9
8
5
,
6
4
L
a
r
g
e
1
8
,
9
0
E
H

1
0
1
2
2
,
8
0
1
4
,
1
4
1
8
,
9
2
1
4
.
2
9
0
6
,
6
5
L
a
r
g
e
1
8
,
6
0
B
o
e
i
n
g

B
V

2
3
4
L
R

C
h
i
n
o
o
k
3
0
,
1
8
1
8
,
7
1
2
5
,
0
5
2
1
.
3
1
5
5
,
6
9
L
a
r
g
e
1
8
,
2
9
I
n

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
i
t
h

I
C
A
O
,

A
n
n
e
x

1
4
,

V
a
l
u
e

I
I
,

t
h
e

h
e
l
i
c
o
p
t
e
r

d
e
c
k

s
i
z
e

f
o
r

t
a
n
d
e
m

r
o
t
o
r

h
e
l
i
c
o
p
t
e
r

B
V

2
3
4

w
i
l
l

b
e

b
a
s
e
d

o
n

0
,
9

D

=

2
7
,
1
6

m
.
514
Fig. 1: Obstacle-free take-off and approach sector.
516
Fig. 2: Main rotor helicopters or side-by-side twin, main rotor helicopters.
Obstacle restrictions.
518
Fig. 3: Tandem rotor helicopters, non-directional landing. Obstacle restrictions.
520
Fig. 4: Tandem rotor helicopters, directional landing. Obstacle restrictions.
522
Fig. 5: Identification marking.
Fig. 6: Maximum allowable mass marking (Measures in centimetres).
524
Fig. 7a: Reference circle for helicopters according to 9 subsection 1.
Inside diameter of circle = 0,5 D, minimum inside diameter = 6 metres).
Fig. 7b: Reference circle for helicopters according to 9 subsection 1.
(Inside diameter of circle = 0,5 D maximum inside diemeter = 12 metres).
526
Fig. 7c: Marking of helideck intended for tandem rotor helicopter
(Boeing BV 234LR), non-directional landing.
Note: Marking also applies to helicopters according to 9 subsection 1 with a D-value up to 27,16 m.
528
Fig. 7d: Marking of helideck intended for tandem rotor helicopter
(Boeing BV 234LR), directional landing.
Note: Marking also applies to helicopters according to 9 subsection 1 with a D-value up to 22,65 m.
530
Fig. 8: Obstacle-free sector marking. Marking of D-value.
532
Fig. 9: Example of location of mooring anchorages.
860/87 Potable water regulation
534
CONTENTS
Chapter I: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Chapter II: Requirements for potable water . . . . . . . 538
6 Quantity and quality requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
7 Potable water supplied from ashore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
8 Potable water produced from sea water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
9 Requirements for water treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
10 Control of potable water on board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Chapter III: Requirements for potable water sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
11 Equipment and design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
12 Cleaning of tanks, pumps and pipe systems . . . . . . . . . . 542
Chapter IV: Miscellaneous provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
13 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
14 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
15 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Regulations 4 September 1987 No. 860
concerning potable water system and potable water
supply on mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7, re-
lating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, 1, 9a, 42, and 52, cf. Royal Decrees of 5
April 1963, 1 December 1978, and 25 May 1984, and Formal Delegations of 15 January 1979 and
6 June 1984. Amended 2 March 1999 and 11 April 2003 No. 498, cf. the EEA Agreement Appen-
dix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
General
1
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations the following definitions shall apply:
536
5. Potable water: Water for cooking, dish-washing, washing of clothes, personal hygiene, and
also drinking water.
6. Potable water system: System for the reception, production, storage, treatment, and distribu-
tion of potable water.
7. Hygienically satisfactory potable water: Drinking water which does not contain components
which may pose health hazard, neither in the short nor the long term.
8. Certified:
a Notified Body,
Directorate, or
Convention.
tified by:
Directorate.
Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no.404 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 498 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
gian ship register.
issue.
3
lations
1
1.
1
538
4
Documentation
time Directorate or anyone authorized by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no.404 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no. 498 (in force 1 July 2003).
5
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no.498, in force 1 July 2003.
Chapter II
Requirements for potable water
Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 498 (in force 1 July 2003, former Chapter III).
6
Quantity and quality requirements
Potable water shall be available in sufficient quantities, be hygienically satisfactory and shall
also be clear, without smell, flavour or colour and satisfy the quality requirements of the Ministry
of Health in force at any time.
Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 498 (in force 1 July 2003, former 7).
7
Potable water supplied from ashore
1. For units on the Norwegian part of the Continental Shelf, potable water supplied from ashore
shall only be taken from filling points connected to water works which are officially aproved
and delivers water in according to valid quality requirements.
2. Potable water supplied from ashore shall be chlorinated during transfer to the units storage
tanks.
8
Potable water produced from sea water
1. Intake of sea water for production of potable water shall not take place when there is reason
to believe that the sea water is particularly polluted. All harbour areas in all parts of the world
shall be regarded as being particularly polluted.
2. From installations producing fresh water by means of distillation, a maximum salinity of 30
ppm shall be permitted, corresponding to a specific electric conductivity of 6 m S/m at 25C
at the evaporator outlet. From installations producing fresh water by means of reverse osmo-
sis, a maximum of 200 ppm chloride and 130 ppm natrium shall be permitted, corresponding
to a specific electric conductivity of 75 m S/m at 25C at the outlet of the osmosis installa-
tion.
3. Chemicals wanted for use in the desalination plant shall be certified.
540
9
Requirements for water treatment
All potable water shall be disinfected at the time of consumption. Additives (treatment chemi-
cals) for potable water shall be certified.
10
Control of potable water on board
1. At least once a day a check shall be made to verify that all parts of the potable water system
function satisfactorily, and the results shall be recorded in a special operation log.
2. Where UV lamps are used for the disinfection of potable water, burning hours of the lamps
shall also be recorded in the operation log.
3. The owner shall ensure that at least one person on board is qualified for checking the potable
water as mentioned above.
Chapter III
Requirements for potable water systems
Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 498 (in force 1 July 2003, former Chapter II).
11
Equipment and design
1. The following requirements shall apply for dimensioning and design of potable water plant:
a) Designed consumption shall be at least 200 litres potable water per person per day,
b) there shall at all time be a minimum reserve of potable water corresponding to 2 days
consumption,
c) there shall be at least two separate storage tanks for potable water,
d) it shall be separated from other systems for fluids on board by means of a discontinued
connection, double non-return valves or equivalent arrangements,
e) it shall be protected against frost and heat and capable of tolerating the potable water
quality for which the system is designed,
f) it shall include a permanently installed system for chlorination of potable water sup-
plied from supply vessels. The chlorine dosage point shall be located at the tanks fill-
ing pipe or recirculation pipe
g) it shall be possible to add and mix in extra chlorine if water analyses indicate that this
is necessary,
h) materials that come into contact with potable water shall not give off substance to the
water in such quantities as to make it hazardous to health or unsuitable as drinking wa-
ter. Protective coating (paints) shall be certified,
i) there shall be testing points making it possible to trace water quality changes through
the system,
j) at the outlet of the potable water from any desalination unit, a salinometer shall be in-
stalled, which gives alarm and shuts off water supply when the salt content is too high,
k) where UV units are used, the UV unit shall have sufficient disinfecting capacity at the
maximum water supply. The UV unit shall also have a timer, an intensitometer, signal
lamps for each UV tube, and a solenoid valve which shuts off the supply of water in
the event of an alarm or power failure,
542
l) where alkalization plants are used, means shall be provided for sufficient return flush-
ing of the filter and easy access for the filter maintenance and replacement of the filter
materials, and
m) hot water shall have a temperature of at least 65C at the heater outlet. Additives for
use in any heating medium shall be certified.
2. The following requirements apply for potable water tanks:
a) they shall have no joint walls with other tanks carrying petroleum products, liquid
chemicals etc.,
b) if pipes not carrying potable water have to be carried through a potable water tank,
they shall be carried through open ducts,
c) they shall be provided with an opening for access for inspection and cleaning. The
openings shall have a tight manhole cover and be so located that inspection and clean-
ing of the tank may take place while the unit is in operation,
d) there shall be satisfactory means for draining the tanks so that the tanks easily can be
emptied completely,
e) sounding pipes and feeding pipes for portable tanks shall have a height above deck or
tank top of at least 300 mm and have caps. The cap shall be attached to the pipe by a
chain so that the cap cannot come into contact with the floor/deck or tank top, and
f) they shall have sufficient ventilation. The ventilation pipes shall be so constructed that
seawater cannot penetrate. The openings shall be protected by a fine net of corrosion-
proof material.
3. The following requirements apply for pipes in potable water systems:
a) if pipes carrying potable water have to be carried through other tanks, they shall be
carried through open ducts,
b) the pipes shall be clearly marked Drikkevann/Potable water and be painted or
marked in blue colour,
c) the hose connections etc. located outside the living quarter shall be secured by means
of a non-return valve or an equivalent arrangement, and
d) where connected to machinery equipment (such as washing machines), the potable
water system shall be protected against back-suction/back-flow.
4. For production of potable water by evaporation of seawater, there shall as a minimum be two
alternative sea water intakes. The intakes shall be so located that the risk of influence from
discharges from the unit is as low as possible, and it shall be possible to use the intake which
at any time is most favourable in relation to conditions of current and pollution. Branch-offs
from sea water pipe that serves desalination units shall be equipped with back-flow preven-
tor.
5. Bunkering station
Bunkering stations shall be provided with a shut-off valve. Between the shut-off valve and
the hose connection there shall be a water test tap and a flush valve. The flush valve shall be
readily accessible and appropriately designed, its diameter corresponding to the capacity of
the bunkering pipe.
6. Measurement equipment
There shall be laboratory equipment for measuring electric conductivity (salinity), PH value
and chlorine content on board.
12
Cleaning of tanks, pumps and pipe systems
Thanks, pipes and pipe systems for portable water shall at all times be kept clean on the inside
all the way to the tapping points. Cleaning and disinfection of the entire potable water system
shall be carried out before the unit leaves the yard, after repairs and then at least once a year.
544
Chapter IV
13
Deviations
Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no.498, in force 1 July 2003.
13 A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
14
Penalty
Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, 339 No. 2, provided no stricter penalty is applicable
pursuant to other statutory provisions.
15
Entry into force
1. These regulations enter into force on 1 November 1987.
2. As from the same date regulations of 7 January 1985 concerning potable water system and
potable water supply on mobile drilling units and other mobile offshore units, are repealed.
2319/86 Towing regulation
546
CONTENTS
Chapter I: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Chapter II: Field moves, towing and towing system . 550
6 Towing and field moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
7 Requirements for the towing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Chapter III: Mooring of supply ships, etc. . . . . . . . . . 554
8 Mooring of supply ships, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
9 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
10 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
11 Entry into force, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Regulations 17 December 1986 No. 2319 concerning field
moves and towing of mobile offshore units and concerning
towing system and mooring of supply ships at such units
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 11, 9a, 35 and 42, cf. Royal Decrees
of 12 October 1962, 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978 and 25 May 1984, and Formal Delegations of
15 January 1979 and 6 June 1984. Amended 2 March 1999 and 11 April 2003 No. 484, cf. the
EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
General
1
Definitions
548
2
1. These regulations apply to units which are registered or which will be registered in a Norwe-
gian Register of Ships.
issue.
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Documentation
5
5A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
550
Added by regulation 2 March 1999 no.399, in force 1 Sept 1999.
Chapter II
Field moves, towing and towing system
6
Towing and field moves
1. Towing or field moves by means of a mobile offshore units own propulsion machinery shall
not take place without prior notification to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
2. Towing or field moves by means of a mobile offshore units own propulsion machinery shall
be carried out in accordance with the international and Norwegian rules and regulations in
force at the time in question
1, 2
. The towing/field moves shall take place in such a way that it
causes the least possible encumbrance in the area. Special regard shall be had to fishing and
shipping.
3. Essential personnel only may remain on board self-elevating units during towing. All necess-
ary safety measures shall be taken.
4. When making a field move (not more than 12 hours between possible jack-up locations) with
a self-elevating unit, those positions where jacking up of the unit is possible and safe, shall be
indicated in the track marked on the chart. Maximum distance between these jack-up loca-
tions shall be such that it is possible to tow and jack up in the indicated position within 12
hours. The necessary towing force shall be calculated with due regard to expected current,
wind and weather conditions. Necessary information to carry out such calculations shall be
contained in the operations manual.
5. Prior to start of each 12 hour towing period mentioned in subsection 4 above (for self-elevat-
ing units), there shall be a favourable weather forecast for the following 72 hours for the wa-
ters in question. There shall further be a weather forecast showing that the conditions for the
next 12 hours after jacking down will be within the maximum allowable environmental con-
ditions given in the operations manual. Otherwise jacking down shall not be commenced.
6. Prior to commencing an ocean tow (more than 12 hours between possible jack-up locations)
of a self-elevating unit, a special permission shall be obtained from the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
7. The operation manual shall contain instructions as to how a tow normally shall be carried out
as well as detailed check lists or similar providing the necessary information on preparations,
weathertight and watertight closing, calculations, etc. to be carried out prior to and during a
tow and a field move. In addition, the following background information shall be included in
the operations manual:
limiting data on each mode of operation during the towing/field move, such as maximum
load, wave height, wave period, wind, current, draught, temperature, etc.
complete resistance curves for wind, current and waves up to maximum environmental
conditions for calculation of the total towing resistance which the unit will be exposed to
during towing, from which it shall be possible to calculate necessary towing force and
number of towing vessels(tugs), and also speed of drifting under extreme weather condi-
tions.
1
Regulations of 6 February 1978 concerning towing assistance.
2
Reference is made to, inter alia, MSC/Circ. 884 of 21 December 1998 Guidelines for Safe Ocean Towing.
552
7
Requirements for the towing system
1. Mobile offshore units shall be provided with a main towing system, emergency towing sys-
tem and narrow water towing system. Omission of the main towing system is accepted pro-
vided one of the following conditions is met:
a) The mobile offshore unit has a ships hull, is certified for independent navigation and
complies with all provisions of 7 subsection 2; or
b) The mobile offshore unit has the Norwegian Maritime Directorates Equipment Class
3 for the dynamic positioning system on board, is certified for independent navigation
and complies with all provisions of 7 subsection 2.
2. During towing in calm weather and no current, there shall always be available at least nec-
essary towing force (or combined towing force and self propulsion) to achieve a speed of at
least 5 knots for semi-submersible units and at least 3 knots for self-elevating units. Further,
there shall be sufficient force to hold still and manoeuvre the unit safely against a wind of 20
m/sec. with associated wave and current of 2 m/sec.
3. If the unit cannot comply with the requirements in subsection 2 above by means of it own
propulsion system, it shall employ towing vessels(tugs) having the necessary towing force.
1
4. The main towing system shall be arranged for one and two towing vessels(tugs), and in spe-
cial cases for three.
5. The emergency towing system shall be arranged for two towing vessels(tugs). This may be
arranged by using the ordinary anchor line, or a similar system.
6. The narrow water towing system shall be arranged in such a manner and for such a number
of towing vessels(tugs) that safe towing and maneouvering can be carried out.
7. The loads for which the towing system is dimensioned shall be given in the operations ma-
nual.
8. If a break occurs during ocean towing, emergency towing and narrow water towing, it shall
be possible to quickly establish a new towing connection in a safe manner under all weather
conditions. Planned methods shall be given as background material in the operations manual.
9. The main towing system shall be dimensioned for at least the towing force which is necess-
ary to:
keep a speed of 5 or 3 knots (cf. subsection 2 above) in calm waters
hold the unit still against a wind speed of 20 m/sec. with associated waves and a current of
2 m/sec.
The main towing system shall, however, be dimensioned for 75 tonnes.
10. Construction of the towing system
10.1. The main towing system shall consist of at least:
Two attachments to the unit
Two chain/wire connections to the unit
One triangular plate or equivalent (if a towing vessel(tug) is used)
One weak link
Shackles for connections
10.2. The attachments to the unit shall be dimensioned with a safety factor of 3 in relation to
the yield strength of the material, taking into account a towing direction of 090, off
centerline both sides.
10.3. Where a bridle is used, the attachments for this shall be as far apart as possible.
10.4. The position, construction and arrangement of the attachments shall be such that it is
reasonably easy and quick to change the chain/wire connection in calm waters.
10.5. The towing pennants shall consist of chain or steel wire rope, or a combination of
these. Where the connection is subject to specially heavy wear and tear (e.g. hawser-
hole), a chain shall be used.
10.6. Each chain-/wire connection shall have a breaking strength of at least 3 times the stat-
ic bollard pull of the towing vessel(tug) and normally a length approximately equal to
the distance between the two towing attachments.
10.7. The towing pennants and weak link shall be fitted with hard eyes.
554
10.8. When one towing vessel(tug)) is used, a towing heart (triangular plate) or equi-
valent shall be used when connecting the chain/wire connection mentioned in sub-
section 10.1 above. Allowable bollard pull is then equal to that per tug, calculated
according to subsection 10.6. above.
10.9. The shackles in both ends of the chain/wire connection and in both ends of the weak
link shall have a breaking strength which is higher than the breaking strength of the
strongest part of the towing system.
10.10. The weak link shall be the weakest part of the complete towing system. The length
ought to be approx. 40 60 metres so that connection to the towing vessel (tug) can be
executed at a safe distance from the unit. The breaking strength should be approx. 2
3 times the maximum allowable static bollard pull. The weak link shall be placed
between the chain/wire connection (or triangular plate) and the towing line of the tug.
10.11. It shall be possible to retrieve the chain/wire connection in case one part of the towing
system should break. This retrieving system may consist of a line from each chain/
wire connection to a winch or crane on the deck of the unit and the line from it shall
have sufficient capacity to retrieve the combined load of the chain/wire connection
with shackles and weak links and 150 metres of towing wire of the heaviest type
normally used for towing the unit. (If there are water depths of more than 150 m with-
in the towing area in question, and there is a need to change towing wire, calculations
shall be based on the relevant maximum water depth). After retrieving the chain/wire
connection, it shall be possible to demount a damaged towing line under all weather
conditions, and also to change the weak link if necessary.
10.12. The following spare parts shall be on board the unit during ocean towing:
One chain/wire connection (complete)
Three shackles for the weak link
Three weak links.
11. Equipment which is part of the towing system such as wire, chain, shackles, etc. shall be sup-
plied together with a factory (test) certificate (as for components for hoisting gear).
12. Alternative systems
Alternative towing systems giving the same operational safety may be used.
1
Cf. Regulations of 6 February 1978 concerning towing assistance for drilling platforms and other mobile units of similar con-
struction when navigating in Norwegian territorial and inner waters.
Chapter III
Mooring of supply ships, etc.
8
Mooring of supply ships, etc.
1. The unit shall be so constructed and have such proper fender systems, buoyage systems or si-
milar arrangements as to make safe transfer of persons and goods to or from the unit possible
without creating hazards for platform, vessel, persons or goods. At least to alternative ways
for mooring and safe transfer of persons and goods shall exist.
2. Vessels shall not moor, be moored or remain alongside the unit if wind and weather condi-
tions create dangers for the vessel or the unit.
3. The mooring arrangement for the supply ship shall be such that the risk of the supply vessel
coming into contact with the units legs, columns, etc. is reduced to a minimum, and such
that the risk of break is as small as possible.
556
Chapter IV
9
Deviations
10
Penalty
11
Entry into force, etc.
1. These regulations enter into force on 2 February 1987.
2. As from the same date, 24 and 25 of the Norwegian Maritime Directorates Regulations
of 13 January 1986 concerning building and operation of mobile drilling platforms and other
mobile offshore units for use other than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits, which are re-
gistered or which will be registerd in a Norwegian register of ships, are repealed.
558
SECTION VI-4:
Equipment
CONTENTS
Page
Regulation of 11 April 2003 No. 492 concerning life-saving appliances and evacuation
Regulations of 13 January 1986 no. 31 concerning deck cranes, etc. on mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Regulations of 16 December 1993 no. 1200 concerning the installation and use of radio
equipment on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Regulation of 12 November 2002 no. 1314 concerning conditions for periodical main-
tenance of float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Regulation of 11 April 2003 no. 480 concerning welding equipment etc. for the weld-
ing gases acetylene and oxygen in mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Regulation of 11 April 2003 no. 491 concerning diving systems on mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
492/03 Lifesaving regulation
560
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
3 Obligations of the owner and the platform manager . . . . 564
4 Mutual acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
5 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
7 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Chapter 2: Requirements for life-saving appliances
and launching arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
9 Life-saving appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
10 Radio life-saving appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
11 Launching arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
12 Testing of life-saving appliances and launching arrange-
ments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Chapter 3: Evacuation, number and location of life-
saving appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
13 Evacuation by sea evacuation analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
14 Number and location of lifeboats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
15 Number and location of liferafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
16 Location of fast rescue boats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
17 Personal life-saving appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
18 Other life-saving appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
19 Alternative evacuation by sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Chapter 4: Drills and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
20 Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
21 Maintenance and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Chapter 5: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
22 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
23 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 492 concerning life-saving
appliances and evacuation on mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on 11 April 2003 pursuant to the Act of 9 June
No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1, 41, 42, 47, 48, and 54a,
ref. Royal Decree of 12 October 1962, Royal Decree of 5 April 1963, Royal Decree of 1 Decem-
ber 1978 and Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979. Notified in accordance with Annex II to the
EEA Agreement (Directive 98/34/EC).
562
Chapter 1
General provisions
1
(1) This regulation shall apply to mobile offshore units which are or will be registered in a Nor-
wegian ship register.
(2) Mobile offshore units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register may, until the next
certificate issue, comply with the requirements that applied at the time of the last certificate issue.
2
Definitions
(1) For the purpose of this regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
a) Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/API/DIN/NFPA/ISO/CEN/IEC or
any other standard or body of rules, as appropriate, which is recognized nationally and/
or internationally for a particular sphere of application. The Norwegian Maritime Di-
rectorate may in each individual case decide which standard is considered to be recog-
nized.
b) Design basis accident profiles: Accident profiles which according to the defined ac-
ceptance criteria pose an unacceptable risk and therefore form the basis of the design
and use of the unit and its emergency preparedness arrangements.
c) IMO: International Maritime Organization.
d) Unit: A mobile platform, including drillship, equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum
deposits, or a mobile platform used for other purposes than drilling for subsea petro-
leum deposits.
e) LSA Code: International Life-Saving Appliance Code (resolution MSC.48(66)).
f) MODU Code: IMOs Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore
Drilling Units, 1989, including 1991 amendments.
g) MSC: IMOs Maritime Safety Committee.
h) Mustering station: A meeting place for entering lifeboats and liferafts.
i) Owner: Whosoever contracts and/or is responsible for the operation of a unit.
j) Certified:
1. In respect of equipment and materials: Equipment which satisfies the requirements
specified or materials complying with a recognized standard which are certified,
approved or type-approved by:
1.1. a Notified Body,
1.2. an accredited certifying body,
1.3. a recognized classification society,
1.4. other public or private institution recognized by the Norwegian Maritime Di-
rectorate, or
1.5. the administration of a country that has ratified the Safety of Life at Sea (SO-
LAS) Convention.
2. In respect of the execution of work: Personnel who according to regulatory require-
ments are required to hold special qualifications for performing specific tasks and
certified by:
2.1. a recognized classification society,
2.2. an accredited certifying body, or
2.3. other public or private institution recognized by the Norwegian Maritime Di-
rectorate.
k) Safety Management System: All systematic efforts which the owner is required to make
to ensure that activities are planned, organized, performed and maintained in accord-
564
ance with the requirements of or pursuant to legislation referred to in 1 of Regulations
of 2 March 1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore
units.
l) SOLAS: International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, third consolidated
edition 2001.
3
Obligations of the owner and the platform manager
The owner and the platform manager are responsible for compliance with the provisions of this
regulation
1
.
1
4
Mutual acceptance
(1) Where this regulation requires that specific fittings, materials, equipment or devices, or
types of equipment, etc. shall be acquired or be found in an offshore unit or a particular measure
shall be taken or specific requirements apply to its design or construction, the Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate shall permit the arrangement or fitting of other appurtenances, materials, devices
or apparatus, or types of such, or that other measures are taken in the offshore unit, or that the off-
shore unit is constructed or designed in another way.
(2) The prerequisite for such Norwegian Maritime Directorate acceptance is as follows: It
must be documented by testing or otherwise that any appurtenances, materials, pieces of equip-
ment or devices, or types of such, or the arrangement, design or construction are at least as effec-
tive as those prescribed by this regulation.
(3) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall accept the results of tests performed at recog-
nized testing institutions, including testing institutions in other EEA countries. This acceptance
shall be subject to the tests yielding appropriate and satisfactory results of a technical, profession-
al and independent nature.
5
Exemptions
grant exemption from the requirements of this regulation. There must be special reasons that
make the deviations necessary and they must be justifiable in terms of safety. If the requirements
of the coastal state and the requirements contained in this regulation are irreconcilable, the Nor-
wegian Maritime Directorate may grant exemption from the requirements of this regulation in-
sofar as safety is not jeopardized. Exemptions can only be granted where they do not contravene
international agreements to which Norway has acceded.
6
Documentation
time Directorate.
566
7
Certification
(1) Life-saving appliances and launching arrangements brought on board after 1 July 2003
shall be certified.
(2) The certification requirement shall not apply to the deck cranes of mobile offshore units
where such cranes are used for the launching and hoisting of rescue boats, ref. 11 first and fourth
paragraphs.
Chapter 2
Requirements for life-saving appliances and launching
arrangements
8
(1) In addition to section 1.2 of the LSA Code, the following shall apply:
a) For structural components of steel and aluminium, only certified material shall be used.
b) Welding and Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) shall be carried out by personnel certifi-
cated in accordance with NS-E1-287 Part 1 or an equivalent standard.
c) Welding of hooks and hook suspensions shall comply with recognized procedures.
d) For life-saving appliances with associated launching arrangements designed for use in
areas with a daily mean temperature considerably lower than 0C, materials and equip-
ment calculated to ensure reliable performance down to the lowest specified temper-
ature shall be used.
e) Electrical installations shall comply with the regulations in force of the Directorate for
Civil Protection and Emergency Planning. Electrical equipment fitted on the outside
shall have an enclosure rating of at least IP66. For electrical equipment fitted on the in-
side, the enclosure rating shall be at least IP44. The nominal supply voltage shall not ex-
ceed 230 V.
(2) The release mechanisms of all lifeboats of the same type on the unit shall be identical.
9
Life-saving appliances
(1) Lifeboats
1
shall comply with the requirements of sections 4.4, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9 of the
LSA Code, except the last sentence of 4.4.6.11, and 4.7.3.2 in its entirety. Further, equipment for
producing drinking water cf. section 4.4.7.5 of the LSA Coode is not required
2
. The following ad-
ditional requirements shall be complied with:
a) Except for free-fall lifeboats, fenders shall be fitted on both sides of lifeboats installed
on mobile offshore units which are not of ship design.
b) The lifeboat shall be arranged for safe and efficient evacuation by helicopter. Construc-
tions which could get caught in the helicopters hoisting wires shall be avoided.
c) Except for free-fall lifeboats, the fully loaded lifeboat shall have a static pulling power
of at least (0.9 x W
E
) kN, where W
E
is the weight in tons of a fully equipped lifeboat
with nobody on board.
d) The lifeboat shall be provided with a self-contained air supply system in accordance
with section 4.8 of the LSA Code. Additionally, the air supply system shall be possible
to operate and control from the helmsmans position in the lifeboat. Air cylinders shall
be tested and marked in accordance with a recognized standard and it shall be possible
to remove the cylinders for inspection.
e) The capacity of the lifeboats ventilation arrangement shall be such that when hatches
and other openings are closed, there will be sufficient fresh air for the number of per-
568
sons for which the lifeboat is approved, as well as sufficient air for the engine when run-
ning at full power. The arrangement shall be so designed as to prevent any intake of wa-
ter when the boat is capsized.
f) The engine housing and battery casing shall be watertight at a water pressure equal to
the pressure resulting from the highest level of water flooding in accordance with
4.4.1.1 of the LSA Code.
g) Attachment of lifeboat hooks to hull shall be dimensioned for relevant side-loads.
(2) Fast rescue boats shall comply with the requirements of section 5.1 of the LSA Code, with
the exception of 4.4.1.5.3, 4.4.1.6, 4.4.6.8, 4.4.7.2, 4.4.7.4, 5.1.1.6, 5.1.1.10 and the last sentence
of 4.4.6.11
2
. Additionally, the recommendations provided in paragraph 4.1 of MSC/Circ.809 shall
be complied with. The following limitations and additions shall apply:
a) The boat shall be certified for a specific number of persons not exceeding 10.
b) The boat shall maintain stability when flooded.
c) The boat shall be equipped with a rigid one-point suspension device. There shall be a
safety factor of at least 6 against this device breaking or breaking loose from its attach-
ment to the hull.
d) If the boat is provided with an off-load hook, the hook and its attachment shall be de-
signed for side-loads. The hook shall be so designed as to be suitable for launching ar-
rangements as set out in 11 fourth paragraph, and it shall be so constructed and ar-
ranged that easy recovery of the boat is possible using cranes or davits from ships or un-
its other than the mother unit.
e) The hull of the boat shall be suitable for high speeds in heavy seas.
f) The boat shall be constructed and arranged so as to enable the bringing on board of per-
sons from the sea.
g) The boats engine fuel shall have a flash point of 43C or more.
h) The propulsion system shall be screened to avoid causing injury to persons in the water
and to prevent damage from floating debris when sailing at full speed.
(3) Liferafts
1
shall be in accordance with section 4.2 of the LSA Code. The following addition-
al requirement shall be complied with:
a) Liferafts shall be provided with a float-free arrangement in accordance with paragraph
4.1.6.3 of the LSA Code.
(4) Immersion suits shall be in accordance with section 2.3 of the LSA Code, with the excep-
tion of paragraph 2.3.2.1. The following additional requirements shall be complied with:
a) The suit shall have buoyancy as provided in paragraph 2.2.1.3 of the LSA Code and be
designed in accordance with paragraph 2.3.1.4 of the LSA Code so that it will not be
necessary to wear a lifejacket in addition to the suit.
b) The suit shall be provided with a hoisting strap with a suitable hooking and clasping
device attached. The suit and hoisting strap shall be capable of supporting a load of 3
kN without suffering damage.
c) The hoisting strap, tightening devices, zips, retro-reflectors, pockets, etc. shall be at-
tached so as not to impair the properties of the suit or interfere with the ability to use it.
d) The suit shall be provided with a lifeline (buddy-line) with a single handle. The line
shall be minimum 1 m in length with a breaking strength of minimum 1 kN.
(5) Lifejackets shall be in accordance with section 2.2 of the LSA Code. Additionally, lifejack-
ets shall comply with the following requirements:
a) They shall be provided with a light in accordance with paragraph 2.2.3.1 of the LSA
Code;
b) they shall have thermal protection which satisfies the requirements of IMO MSC/
Circ.922;
c) they shall be of an arrangement or design which makes them easy to don correctly;
d) they shall be provided with fastening straps not requiring the use of loops or similar
devices and not based on knotting; and
e) they shall be provided with crotch straps or an equivalent solution which ensures that
the jacket stays in place when used.
(6) Lifebuoys shall be in accordance with section 2.1 of the LSA Code.
1
See also Regulation of 9 March 2001 No. 439 concerning medical supplies on ships.
2
Amendments which are not laid down, but expected to be laid down shortly after printing this collection of regulations. See
www.Lovdata.no for the last version of the regulation.
570
10
Radio life-saving appliances
(1) Lifeboats shall be provided with a two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus and a radar
transponder in accordance with, respectively, paragraph 4.4.7.8 and paragraph 4.4.8.30 of the
LSA Code, and respectively the IMO Assembly resolutions A/19 Res. 802 and A19/res 809, with
the following addition:
The two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus shall be a fixed installation and shall have its own
antenna, fitted on the inside or on the outside of the lifeboat.
(2) The rescue boat shall be provided with a two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus in ac-
cordance with paragraph 4.4.7.8 of the LSA Code, paragraph 4.1.11 of MSC/Circ. 809 and IMO
Assembly resolution A19/Res. 809.
11
Launching arrangements
(1) Launching arrangements for lifeboats, rescue boats and liferafts shall comply with the re-
quirements provided in paragraphs 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.4 and 6.1.5 of the LSA Code, excepting
6.1.4.7. Rescue boats may alternatively be launched and hoisted by means of the units deck
cranes, ref. the fourth paragraph below. Additionally, the following general requirements shall ap-
ply:
a) The launching arrangement shall be fitted with a permanently installed motorized
winch.
b) The winch shall have an automatic acceleration brake which maintains the lowering
speed at 60 m/minutes 10%.
c) When not in operation, the control lever for the winch motor shall automatically move
to the stop position.
d) Hydraulic systems shall be designed, arranged and tested in accordance with a recog-
nized standard.
e) Steel wires, chains, shackles, etc. shall be certified.
f) Swivels, shackles, turnbuckles and discs shall be secured.
g) At least 3 turns of steel wire shall remain on the winch drum after the life-saving ap-
pliance has been lowered to the surface under the most unfavourable conditions of
draught and angle of heel. The attachment of the steel wire to the drum shall at least be
capable of supporting the weight of a fully loaded life-saving appliance.
The requirements given in a), b) and c) do not apply to the launching arrangements of
free-fall lifeboats.
(2) Additionally, except for free-fall lifeboats, the following special requirements relative to li-
feboat launching shall be complied with:
a) The launching arrangement shall be designed and calculations made for an angle of heel
of at least 17 in any direction
1
.
b) It shall be possible, from both the unit and the lifeboat, to halt the launching during all
stages of the operation.
c) The stop/parking brake shall be capable of preventing dynamic additional forces from
exceeding 50% of the weight of a fully loaded boat at full braking power (panic brak-
ing). If this level is exceeded, the suspension attachments and launching arrangement
must be strengthened or a shock absorbing system arranged in compensation, see also
fourth paragraph d).
d) Lifeboat securing arrangements shall be so designed that they will not cause difficulties
during lowering of the boat.
e) Lifeboats shall have a relief arrangement for hooks/release mechanisms for mainte-
nance and inspection purposes. This arrangement shall have a safety factor of 6 against
breakage.
f) The hoisting shall stop automatically when the lifeboat has reached its end position
within the launching arrangement.
572
(3) For free-fall lifeboats, the following special requirements relative to lifeboat launching
shall be complied with:
a) The requirements of the second paragraph, subparagraphs a) and b), shall apply.
b) The launching arrangement shall be such as to allow testing on board of all functions,
including the release mechanism.
(4) Special additional requirements for the launching and hoisting of rescue boats:
a) Launching against heel and trim is not required.
b) The lowering and hoisting speed shall be at least 50 m/min. with maximum weight of
the boat. It shall be possible to adjust the lowering and hoisting speed in an infinitely
variable fashion.
c) Arrangement shall be made for one-point lowering and hoisting. It is not necessary to
be able to control the launching from the rescue boat.
d) The launching arrangement shall include shock absorbing and/or motion compensating
components which ensure that neither the boat nor the launching arrangement are sub-
jected to strain from dynamic additional forces which imply maximum tension above
33% of the yield strength, in the following cases:
1. Braking at full lowering speed; and
2. hoisting of boat at maximum calculated wave height.
The calculated dynamic additional forces shall be based upon the shock-loads
from the given load cases.
e) Where a deck crane
2
is used, ref. the first paragraph above, the following shall apply in
addition to the above requirements:
1. The cranes shall be connected to an emergency power supply.
2. The cranes shall be provided with a special safety device which temporarily renders
the emergency release system unoperational.
3. The cranes shall be provided with two brake systems. One of the brakes shall affect
directly on the winch drum and be independently of the other.
4. Special procedures shall be designed to ensure that priority is given to quick launch-
ing and safe operation, and
5. the connection between the cranes hook and the rescue boat shall be a fibre rope
which is permanently arranged in the rescue boat. The fibre rope shall be of a length
which both ensures adequate shock absorption and a safe distance between the
cranes hook and the rescue boat in heavy sea.
(5) Special additional requirements for the launching of liferafts:
The launching arrangement shall be calculated for an angle of heel of at least 17 in any direc-
tion
1
.
1
Reference is made to 21 of Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and wa-
tertight/weathertight closing means on mobile offshore units.
2
Reference is made to Regulations of 13 January 1986 No. 31 concerning deck cranes, etc. on mobile offshore units.
12
Testing of life-saving appliances and launching arrangements
Life-saving appliances with associated launching arrangements shall be tested in accordance
with regulations III/4 and III/5 of the SOLAS Convention and IMO Resolution MSC.81(70) Re-
vised recommendation on testing of lifesaving appliances. The following additional require-
ments shall apply:
a) Testing of prototypes:
Deacceleration measurements shall be carried out to determine the characteristics of
brakes and any shock absorbers.
b) Testing during production (yard tests):
1. There shall be inspection and measurements of hull thickness around the hook at-
tachment points of lifeboats and rescue boats.
2. A suitable method shall be employed for NDT control of vital components in hooks,
hook attachments, bolts, etc. after test loading.
574
3. For the launching arrangement, a suitable method shall be employed for NDT con-
trol, after test-loading, of welds, axles, rings, chains, bolts, etc. which are exposed
to high levels of stress.
c) Testing during installation (tests on board):
A suitable method shall be employed for NDT control of welds between the launch-
ing arrangement and the unit which are exposed to stress.
Chapter 3
Evacuation, number and location of life-saving appliances
13
Evacuation by sea evacuation analysis
(1) An evacuation analysis
1
shall be prepared based on the units dimensioning accidental
events and requirements given in this chapter. The analysis shall show that, after any accident, es-
cape routes, temporary refuges and mustering stations are appropriately arranged so that:
a) at least one escape route is accessible from all spaces/areas to a temporary refuge.
b) all persons on board can be evacuated by lifeboats in the course of 15 minutes regard-
less of weather conditions. The time shall be measured to the point where the lifeboats
are launched and released.
c) the location of the liferafts are appropriate for alternative evacuation.
d) a sufficient number of personal life-saving appliances are suitably located for purposes
of both rescue and evacuation by sea.
(2) Temporary refuges shall be located in close proximity to the lifeboat stations.
1
Regulations of 22 December 1993 No. 1239 concerning risk analyses for mobile offshore units.
14
Number and location of lifeboats
The number and location of lifeboats shall be determined on the basis of the evacuation analy-
sis and the following considerations:
a) It shall be possible to launch the necessary number of lifeboats with sufficient aggregate
capacity to accommodate all persons on board at the least favourable angle of heel as
shown by the stability calculations
1
.
b) For mobile drilling units, the following requirements shall also be complied with:
1. For drillships, it should be possible to evacuate all persons on board by lifeboats if
all lifeboats on any side are lost or unusable.
2. For self-elevating and semi-submersible drilling units, it should be possible to eva-
cuate all persons on board by lifeboats if all lifeboats in any one location, on any
one side, any one end or any one corner are lost or unusable.
c) For units which are not of a ship design, the following shall be complied with specif-
ically:
1. Lifeboats shall be positioned with the bow pointing outwards/away from the unit.
2. For a lifeboat to be included in the lifeboat capacity after assumed damage and an
angle of heel in accordance with a) above, the lifeboat shall be capable of safe
launching at a distance of not less than 5 metres from permanent structures.
3. Positioning for launching while underway is not considered necessary.
4. On units connected by gangway to any other installation, there shall be no position-
ing of lifeboats on the side facing the other installation.
576
d) Free-fall lifeboats, with their associated launching arrangements, shall be certified for
launching at the heights and angles shown by the stability calculations, ref. a) above.
1
See 21 of Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weather-
tight closing means on mobile offshore units.
15
Number and location of liferafts
(1) There shall be sufficient liferaft capacity for the total number of persons on board. Their lo-
cation shall be based on the result of the evacuation analysis, ref. 13.
(2) For drillships, the following requirements shall also be complied with:
a) It should be possible to evacuate all persons on board by liferafts if all liferafts on any
one side are lost or unusable.
b) Where there is more than 100 metres from the stem or stern to the nearest lifeboat or lif-
eraft, an extra liferaft shall be arranged fore or aft close to the stem or the stern.
(3) The liferafts shall be located within their own launching arrangement, with no more than 3
liferafts per launching arrangement.
16
Location of fast rescue boats
(1) At least one fast rescue boat shall be arranged in a safe location on board. The location shall
be either within a separate launching arrangement or in an appropriate place where the rescue boat
is readily reached by at least two deck cranes intended for use in such launching operations, ref.
11 first paragraph and fourth paragraph, subparagraph e).
(2) Additionally, the location shall be such that:
a) the launching of the rescue boat will not delay the launching of lifeboats and liferafts;
and
b) the rescue boat may be launched safely within 5 minutes of the sounding of the alarm,
both during operation and transit.
(3) On units which are not of a ship design, and when the unit has no heel during operation or
transit, the rescue boat shall be capable of safe launching at a distance of not less than 8 metres
from the units permanent structures.
17
Personal life-saving appliances
(1) Immersion suits
a) Immersion suits for all persons on board shall be stored in a readily accessible place in
the living quarters.
b) Immersion suits equivalent in number to at least 50% of the carrying capacity stipulated
at each lifeboat station shall be kept at each lifeboat station. These suits shall be stored
in solid chests which are clearly marked and which cannot be locked.
c) Additionally, any person designated to operate a rescue boat shall have a suitable im-
mersion suit or anti-exposure suit, which is stored in an appropriate place.
(2) Lifejackets
Lifejackets shall be stowed in appropriate places as shown by the evacuation analysis, ref. 13.
The total number of lifejackets shall not be lower than the total number of persons on board.
(3) Lifebuoys
a) Lifebuoys shall be appropriately stowed in readily accessible places on the unit, and at
least 8 lifebuoys shall be carried.
b) Units of a ship design which are:
1. between 100 and 150 metres in length shall carry at least 10 lifebuoys.
2. between 150 and 200 metres in length shall carry at least 12 lifebuoys.
578
3. more than 200 metres shall carry at least 14 lifebuoys.
c) At least half the lifebuoys shall be fitted with a self-igniting light in accordance with pa-
ragraph 2.1.2 of the LSA Code.
d) At least two of the lifebuoys referred to in subparagraph c) shall also have self-activat-
ing smoke signals in accordance with paragraph 2.1.3 of the LSA Code. They shall be
capable of being remotely released from the control station or another central and easily
accessible place.
e) At least two lifebuoys, located far from each other, neither being among the lifebuoys
referred to in subparagraphs c) or d), shall be provided with a buoyant rescue line in ac-
cordance with paragraph 2.1.4 of the LSA Code. The length of the lines shall be at least
1.5 times the distance from the deck to the waterline measured when the unit is in transit
mode, and not less than 30 metres.
18
Other life-saving appliances
The following additional life-saving appliances and other equipment for evacuation shall be
carried:
a) Units which are not of a ship design shall have permanent emergency ladders extending
from the deck to the pontoon deck or equal level, and at least one such ladder on each
side. Emergency ladders shall not have safety hoops.
b) One line-throwing appliance in accordance with section 7.1 of the LSA Code.
c) 12 rocket parachute flares in accordance with section 3.1 of the LSA Code.
19
Alternative evacuation by sea
Alternative life-saving appliances and equipment for evacuation may be used where it can be
documented that they represent a completely satisfactory alternative or a supplement to the ap-
pliances and equipment referred to above, ref. section 6.2 of the LSA Code.
Chapter 4
Drills and maintenance
20
Drills
(1) Mustering and evacuation drills shall be performed every week, in connection with other
emergency drills or on other occasions. The drills shall be so arranged that they train the partici-
pants in mastering realistic emergency situations, also with regard to the use of alternative escape
routes and life-saving appliances. If operations are at such a stage that drills could jeopardize the
safety of the unit or the operations, the drill may be postponed, however such postponement shall
not prevent the whole crew from completing one drill per working period.
(2) In addition, any such drill shall at least encompass the following:
a) The functions and use of the life-saving appliances.
b) Start of engines and lowering of at least one lifeboat and, when conditions permit,
launching and test-sailing. Moreover, when conditions permit, different lifeboats shall
be lowered and tested at successive drills. For free-fall lifeboats, all important functions
shall be checked at the drill.
c) Start of engines and lowering of rescue boat and, when conditions permit, launching
and test-sailing.
d) Any standby vessel stationed by the unit shall be included in the drills.
580
(3) On completion of the drills, all equipment used during the drill shall be inspected and
cleaned.
(4) Any person assigned special responsibilities with respect to evacuation and life-saving
shall be given the necessary instruction and training.
(5) Free-fall lifeboats shall be launched and test-sailed at least once every five years. In addi-
tion, at least one simulated launch of the free-fall lifeboats shall be carried out annually.
(6) It shall be possible to document that drills, instruction, training and any corrective mea-
sures have been carried out.
21
Maintenance and control
(1) Life-saving appliances and equipment for evacuation shall be kept in good working order
and be ready for use at all times.
(2) Maintenance and control shall be carried out in accordance with an updated maintenance
programme which complies with applicable regulatory requirements and the recommendations of
the supplier.
(3) The maintenance programme shall be in accordance with regulations III/20 and III/36 of
the SOLAS Convention, with the following additions:
a) Every five years, the launching arrangement, hooks, attachments, etc. shall be subject to
NDT control in accordance with 12, subparagraphs 2 and 3 of b), and c).
b) Maintenance and conversions, etc. requiring knowledge of the construction and outfit-
ting of the lifeboats and rescue boats shall be carried out according to the manufactur-
ers instructions.
c) All inspections, tests, replacements and repairs shall be recorded in the maintenance
system.
Chapter 5
22
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of this regulation is punishable by fines pursuant to the General
23
Entry into force
(1) This regulation enters into force on 1 July 2003.
(2) For mobile offshore units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register, the regulation
enters into force at the first certificate expiry, ref. 1.
(3) Regulations of 9 September 1991 No. 702 concerning evacuation and lifesaving appliances
on mobile offshore units are repealed as from 1 July 2008.
31/86 Crane regulations
582
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
2A The obligations of the owner and the platform manager . 586
3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
3A Approval system audit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
4 Methods of calculation, design criteria/construction re-
quirements and materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
5 Special safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
6 Loose crane gear/crane accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
7 Installation of cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
8 Crane Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
9 Signs and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
10 Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
11 Testing, examination and certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
12 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
13 Qualification requirements for crane handling/operation 612
14 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
15 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
16 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Regulations 13 January 1986 No. 31 concerning deck
cranes, etc. on mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to Act of 9 June, No. 7, relating to
public control of the seaworthiness of ships, etc., 1, 35 subsection 4, 41, 41a subsection 1 first
and second paragraphs, 42, 97 and 100, cf. Royal Decree of 12 October 1962 and 5 April 1963 and
Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979. Amended 15 April 1986, 4 September 1987 and 12 May
1989. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended regulations have been notified in accordance with
Council Directive 83/189/EEC and 11 April 2003 No. 494, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II
Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC).
1
Definitions
In these regulations, the following definitions shall apply:
3. Deck crane: A fixed lifting appliance for the handling of cargo on the open deck and be-
tween the mobile offshore unit and a supply vessel.
584
4. Loose crane gear/crane accessories: Chains, shackles, rings, hooks, swivels, drum fasten-
ers, steelplate clips, blocks, loading pallets, wire, rope slings, etc. which are not part of the
permanent crane gear/crane accessories.
5. Competent person: A person qualified to calculate, design/construct, control, test, and certi-
ficate hoisting gear and cranes with accessories to be used on board mobile offshore units.
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall determine whether a person shall be considered
sufficiently qualified to be charcterized as a competent person, cf. the regulations at all times
currently in force on loading and discharging gear in ships.
6. Thorough examination: An examination giving a reliable basis for assessing the safety of
whatever is examined. If necessary, a thorough examination shall be supplemented with test-
ing and dismantling.
9. Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/ISO/API/CEN/IEC or any other standard
or body of rules, as appropriate, which is recognized nationally and/or internationally for a
particular sphere of application. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in each indivi-
dual case decide which standard is considered to be recognized.
10. Certified:
a Notified Body,
Directorate, or
Convention.
tified by:
Directorate.
586
2
1. These regulations apply to all deck cranes with appurtenant loose gear for use on mobile off-
shore units which are or will be registered in a Norwegian ship register.
2. Deck cranes on units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register may, until the next
issue.
3. These regulations are not applicable to cranes and lifting appliances forming part of the drill-
ing installations and equipment which are subject to control pursuant to 22 of Regulations
of 4 September 1987 No. 856 concerning construction of mobile offshore units.
4. Transportable lifting appliances, work winches and similar gear shall be certified in accord-
ance with the regulations concerning cargo-handling appliances in ships. Reference is also
made to Regulations of 4 September 1987 No. 859 concerning protective, environmental,
and safety measures on mobile offshore units.
2A
The obligations of the owner and the platform manager
The owner and platfor manager shall ensure compliance with the provisions of these regula-
tions
1
.
1
3
Documentation
3A
Repealed by regulation 2 March 1999 no.398, in force 1 Sept 1999.
4
Methods of calculation, design criteria/construction requirements and
materials.
1. Calculations.
1.1. In addition to the special requirements laid down in these regulations, cranes shall be
calculated and dimensioned according to a recognized national or international crane
standard paying due regard to the special conditions (temperature, wind force, dynam-
ic forces, etc.) under which these cranes are to work. In addition, the crane shall be
calculated for operation under dynamic conditions, due regard being paid to relative
movements that will occur between the crane and the places to and from which the
crane lifts and lowers. When, during construction and calculation of cranes, a larger
dynamic factor than 1.3 is used, due regard shall be paid to this dynamic load when us-
588
ing standard hooks, blocks, swivels, shackles, wire straps and similar equipment, by
calculating the said components for a correspondingly larger safe working load
(SWL), but with the cranes SWL stamped on them.
1.2. Cranes used for loading and discharging of supply ships shall be so designed and con-
structed that the crane, if exposed to destructive/extreme overload, will fail in such a
way as to reduce to a minimum the risk of injuries of personnel and damage of mate-
rials. The crane operators cabin with supporting structures and the emergency exits/
escapes shall be so arranged and constructed as not to fall overboard by destructive
overload of the crane, and also so as to protect the crane operator in the best possible
way.
1.3. The standard for which the crane has been calculated shall be stated in the Crane Ma-
nual. The most highly stressed components of the crane shall be listed in the Crane
Manual together with a representative selection of loading conditions, so that appro-
priate inspection and non-destructive testing shall be carried out if overload or dam-
age should be suspected.
1
How the manufacturer designed the crane, within the total crane load and moment
spectrum, to comply with the requirement in subsection 1.2. above, shall be docu-
mented in the Crane Manual.
2. Design criteria/construction requirements.
2.1. Cranes shall be calculated for operation at maximum capacity with a list of at least 5
for units of a ship design, 3 for semi-submersibles units and 1 for self-elevating
(jack-ups) and submersible units in the most adverse directions, and simultaneously
for a constant wind speed of at least 25 m/sec. In the wind load calculations, a hanging
cargo corresponding to a 10 feet (3 m) standard container shall be assumed. For spe-
cial cranes, other representative cargo shall be assumed.
2.2. With the boom in stowed position, cranes on board semi-submersibles units shall be
calculated for a list of minimum 10 and a single amplitude roll or pitch of 10 seconds.
For self-elevating (jack-ups) and submersible units, the cranes with the boom in
stowed position shall be calculated for a list of minimum 20 and a single amplitude
roll or pitch of 10 seconds.
Cranes on board units of a ship design shall, in stowed position, be calculated for a
list of minimum 35 and a period in seconds of:
T = 0.8 B/GM
B = Ships breadth in metres
GM = Metacentric height in metres for the loading conditions in question.
Unless more favourable motion characteristics are documented, all cranes which in
stowed position are exposed to wind shall, in addition, be calculated for a constant
wind speed of 50 m/sec.
2.3. Cranes used for loading and discharging supply ships shall, as a minimum require-
ment, in calm weather (significant wave height = 0) be capable of lifting 15 tons 32
metres away from the side of the platform or drilling unit, measured along the centre
line of the supply ship in moored position.
In the case of emergency operations they shall additionally be capable of lifting on
board a load of at least 2.5 tons from a 25 m radius at a constant wind speed of mini-
mum 30 m/sec. and with a list of 10 in the most adverse direction with an appurtenant
dynamic load resulting from lifting this load from the deck of a supply ship.
2.4. The crane shall as a minimum requirement be constructed to operate at a daily average
temperature from + 55 to 10. The design temperature shall not be put higher than
590
10 based on the lowest daily average temperature. A competent person shall be able
to confirm these requirements.
2.5. The hoisting and lowering speed of a whip hoist with a 5 ton load shall be minimum
100 m/min. A lower hoisting and lowering speed is neverthless accepted if the speed
is so high that a load may be lifted clear of the next wave crest with a margin, even if
the lifting is begun at the most unfavourable time, i.e. in a trough of the waves. The
maximum wave height which the crane can handle becomes one of the cranes oper-
ational limitations and shall be stated in the operation manual.
1
2.6. In determining the dimension of the crane foundation, including the pedestal and
slewing ring with bolts, the design load used shall be 1.3 times the design load used
for other parts of the crane and at least 2 times the greatest permitted working load for
which the crane is designed and for which its dimensions are determined.
1
2.7. The Crane Manual mentioned in 8, shall contain all design and construction require-
ments and limitations on the use of the crane as well as a description of normal and
emergency operations, confirmed by a competent person.
3. Materials.
3.1. Only materials certified by a recognized classification society shall be used in impor-
tant strength components (e.g. crane boom, A-frame, pedestal, etc.). Grades of steel/
steel quality shall be carefully selected, due regard being paid to fatigue, to the impor-
tance of the construction, to the design temperature, to the thickness of the material,
and to weldability. For all other constructions, the material shall be adapted to its in-
tended use under marine environmental conditions.
3.2. The Crane Manual shall contain a general arrangement drawing, giving information
on the type of the materials used in all the strength components of the crane, and on
any (design) temperature limitation above 10 C for any material, confirmed by a
competent person.
3.3. Certified wire rope* shall comply with a recognized standard, be adapted to the dia-
meter of sheaves and drums and, as far as Safe Working Load (SWL)** is concerned,
have a breaking load of not less than the maximum tension in the rope multiplied by a
factor obtained from the following table:
Safe Working Load (SWL)** on the crane hook Factor
Up to 10 tons (metric), and all ropes used in single part
Above 10 tons (metric), but not exceeding 25 tons
Above 25 tons (metric), but not exceeding 60 tons
Above 60 tons (metric)
5,0
5,0 SWL 10
30
4,5 SWL 25
70
4,0
For ropes used in connection with hooks with a S.W.L. of 20 metric tons and above,
factor down to 4 is accepted if the influence of all motions (cf. 4, subsection 1.1.) is
calculated and the S.W.L. of the crane hook, in each individual case, is reduced for the
effect of this motion. Necessary information shall then be incorporated in the Crane
Manual.
592
As an alternative to the above table steel ropes may be dimensioned according to a
recognized standard when dynamic load has been taken into consideration.
1
* Re wire rope for lifting straps cf. 6, subsection 3.
** SWL = Safe Working Load on the crane hook.
3.4. Hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical systems.
3.4.1. Each main pressure system shall be equipped with an overpressure safety
valve. The valve shall be adjusted and sealed under the supervision of a com-
petent person. If, during inspection, the seal is found to be broken, a complete
control as described in 11, subsection 1 will be required.
3.4.2. It shall be possible to install a control manometer for all pressure systems af-
fecting the crane.
3.4.3. Positioning of tubes and hoses.
Tubes and hoses shall be so placed as to be protected against heat, pinching,
vibrations, or any other adverse influences. They shall be readily accessible
for inspection and replacement. The hoses shall be protected in such a way
that the operator would not be injured if a hose should burst.
3.4.4. Pneumatic control systems shall be equipped with effective dehumidifying
devices to ensure satisfactory operation down to 10 C. Limitations of the
system shall be stated in the Crane Manual.
3.4.5. Pressure systems shall be designed and constructed according to a recognized
national or international standard. The standard used shall be stated in the
Crane Manual and be confirmed by a competent person.
3.4.6. Electrical systems for the crane and its equipment shall comply with a recog-
nized national or international standard for the zone on board where the crane
is positioned with respect to area classification. The standard shall be stated
in the Crane Manual and be confirmed by a competent person.
3.4.7. All hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical systems shall be so designed and con-
structed that failure in any of them will not result in a situation that cannot be
controlled.
3.4.8. The Crane Manual shall contain a diagram of pressure systems and electrical
systems.
3.4.9. Diesel-driven units operated on open deck shall be fitted with water-cooled
exhaust manifolds and exhaust pipes as well as with effective spark arresters.
Precautions shall be taken to conduct the exhaust gas to a suitable safe place.
4. Workmanship.
4.1. All welding of strength components shall be carried out by a certified welder, holding
a Certificate for the type of weld in question. The welding procedures shall be ap-
proved by a competent person doing the initial certification of the crane. The proce-
dures shall also include preparations for welding and repair of welded parts, and shall
be included in the crane manual.
1
4.2. All important welds shall be tested by a non-destructive method, at the request and su-
pervision of a competent person.
4.3. Radiographs shall meet the requirements to Mark 4 (blue) according to II W Collec-
tion of Reference Radiographs of Welds. However, scattered porosity according to
Mark 3 (green) may be accepted by a competent person.
4.4. A complete test report on the result of such testing, confirmed by a competent person,
shall be attached to the Crane Manual, cf. 8.
4.5. Sheaves, load hooks and hook blocks, thimbles, etc. shall be in compliance with a re-
cognized standard.
5. Winches.
5.1. The whip hoist winch on cranes used for loading and discharging supply ships shall be
594
equipped with an emergency release system with a hook capacity sufficient to keep a
constant tension in the wire rope of approximately 1.5 tons or a minimum of 10% of
the greatest permitted rope tension. The emergency release system shall work under
all conditions, including power failure, and at least 3 times in rapid succession. The
emergency release switch or handle shall be effectively secured against inadvertent
use, and the winch shall automatically, with a soft characteristic, return to normal
hoisting, braking or holding conditions when the emergency release is disconnected.
The emergency release system shall put out of action any limit switches that will stop
the whip hoist winch from unwinding completely.
5.2. The whip hoist winch on cranes used for loading and discharging supply ships shall be
capable of paying out the wire at a rate of 2.5 m/sec. without overloading the crane by
more than 10% of the calculated load (calculated load = SWL x design dynamic fac-
tor) if the hook should accidentally be hooked on to the supply ship and the control
handle is in hoisting or in neutral position.
5.3. Cranes with winches capable of hoisting considerably more than they are certified for,
may be required fitted with a safety device which, at a predetermined overload, pre-
vents the crane from hoisting or stops it in such a way that it will only be possible to
move the crane to a better position (lower the load or hoist the boom).
5.4. Drums shall be of such a size that maximum three layers of wire rope may be wound
on them, unless it can be documented that further winding up may take place without
causing any excess wear and tear. The drum shall be so designed and constructed that
the rope cannot climb off the drum flanges. The flange height shall be 2.5 rope diame-
ters higher than the uppermost wire rope layer of a fully wound drum. However, if an-
other kind of protection/a proper rope guard has been provided to prevent the wire
rope from climbing over the drum flanges, it is accepted that this height may be re-
duced. Drums without grooves shall not have a fleet angle exceeding 3. For grooved
drums the angle shall not exceed 5.
5.5. The ratio between the drum diameter and the wire rope diameter shall be the greatest
possible and not less than 18:1.
5.6. The capacity of the main hoist drum shall be such that at least 3 turns of wire rope are
left on the drum with the hook at normal transit draught or at the lowest astronomical
tide with the boom in the highest operable position.
5.7. The capacity of the whip hoist drum shall be such that 4 turns of wire rope are left on
the drum with the hook at normal transit draught or at the lowest astronomical tide
with the boom in the highest operable position.
5.8. The capacity of the drum for the boom hoist shall be such that at least 3 turns of wire
rope are left on the drum with the boom in the most adverse position, including stowed
position.
5.9. The crane shall be so designed and constructed that the crane operator cannot permit
free fall for any load (see subsection 5.1 above).
5.10. All brakes shall be so arranged that they will automatically apply their full braking
force as rapidly as possible in case of power failure or failure in the control system,
without any critical shock loads occuring. This braking force shall be strong enough to
stop and hold the S.W.L. of the crane hooks under all conditions.
5.11. The brakes shall be designed and constructed in such a way that it, within the shortest
possible time, will be possible to lower and stop the full hook capacity manually under
full control in case of power failure or failure in the control system.
5.12. Large cranes shall have an emergency power system which is independent of the main
power system.
596
5.13. If braking moment and motor moment can be applied simultaneously and in the same
direction, this shall be included in the calculations.
5.14. All braking systems shall be described in the Crane Manual with information on how
braking devices shall be controlled and calibrated/adjusted and how they shall be op-
erated in the event of power failure.
6. Wire rope attachment to the drum.
6.1. For the whip hoist, the wire rope attachment to the drum shall be so constructed as to
be released (to break) before the fully turned out boom (the boom in its lowest permit-
ted position) breaks.
6.2. The wire rope attachment for the boom hoist shall be capable of withstanding at least
the breaking load of the boom hoist wire rope.
6.3. All wire rope attachment shall be easy to inspect and tighten up.
7. Sheaves.
7.1. The ratio between the diameter of the sheaves and the diameter of the wire rope shall
be the greatest possible and not less than 18:1.
7.2. All sheaves and blocks shall be so arranged that the wire rope cannot run off the
sheave, and shall be secured to avoid that persons may be injured.
8. Load hooks and hook blocks.
8.1. The load hook shall be so designed that the load carrying slings cannot fall out, and so
as to prevent it from being inadvertently hooked on to any obstructions.
8.2. The ratio between the diameter of the hook block sheaves and the diameter of the wire
rope shall be the greatest possible and not less than 16:1.
8.3. The whip hoist on cranes used for loading and discharging supply ships, shall be pro-
vided with a forerunner of wire or fibre rope of sufficient length and breaking load.
8.4. Hook and strength components in swivels shall be made of material of quality
RST 42-2 (killed) NS 12132 or equivalent material. Welding on the hooks is not per-
mitted.
8.5. Hook blocks shall be fitted with protective plates and be easy to handle from both
sides.
9. Wire/wire rope.
9.1. Only wire rope with non-rotating properties shall be used on the whip hoist.
9.2. The dimensions, length and construction of the wire rope used for the crane shall be
given in the Crane Manual.
10. Wire rope locks and wire rope clamps.
10.1. Properly designed wedge sleeves or self-locking wedge sockets with one wire rope
clamp shall preferably be used for wire rope connections. Where wire rope clamps are
used, mutual distance between the clamps shall be at least 6 times the wire rope dia-
meter, the free length of the wire rope shall be at least 5 times the rope diameter, and
the end shall be prevented from unravelling. Only wire rope clamps with two gripping
areas shall be used. The U bolt type is not permitted. The number of clamps in relation
to the wire rope diameter shall be in accordance with the makers specifications and
never less than three.
11. Operators cabin.
11.1. Cranes used for loading and discharging supply ships, shall be fitted with an oper-
ators cabin. Cabins shall be of adequate size, and shall give the operator and unob-
structed all-round view at any boom position.
11.2. The operators cabin shall be solid and protect him from falling objects/components.
It shall be made of non-combustible material and have an interior free height of at
least two metres.
11.3. The windows shall be of a solid construction, and of tempered or laminated safety
glass. It shall be possible to clean the windows in a safe manner, preferably from the
inside. Cranes shall have motorized windscreen wipers. The operators cabin shall be
heated and ventilated. The noise level in the cabin shall not exceed 80 db (A).
11.4. Engine exhaust gas shall be conducted away in such a manner as not to inconvenience
the operator.
598
11.5. Operating controls, seats, windows and other installations shall be designed according
to erometric principles.
12. Operating position.
For cranes having no operators cabin, the general operating position shall be secured and fit-
ted with necessary railing. If the crane is operated from a portable control box, the cable shall
be long enough to enable the operator to choose a safe working position that gives him the
best possible general view.
13. Access to and exit from the crane.
13.1. The crane shall be provided with safe means of access to the operating position, to the
engine room, and to every location where inspection/control, repair or maintenance
work will be required.
13.2. By fixed means off access it shall be possible to enter or leave the crane in any posi-
tion. If practicable, fixed access shall be arranged for inspection and control of all im-
portant parts such as swing circle bearing, brakes, safety valves, sheaves, wire ropes
etc.
13.3. An operators cabin and operating positions shall be so located that the operator can
make a quick escape if the crane, or part of it, should collapse as a result of unforeseen
overloading or any other form of failure.
13.4. Ladders, railings, etc. shall comply with the requirements in the regulations in force at
any time.
2
13.5. There shall be a clear passage of at least 600 mm between the fixed and movable parts
of the crane regularly frequented by persons. Wherever necessary, guards shall be pro-
vided to protect persons against movable parts and hot surfaces.
14. Securing of the crane in stowed position.
Stowing and securing of the crane shall not take more than 20 minutes. The method shall
be described in the Crane Manual.
15. Control handles.
15.1. Control handles shall move in the same direction as the load movement or the crane
movement. Control handles shall be clearly marked and lit to show their respective
functions. The marking shall be legible and durable, preferably in symbols.
15.2. Hand controls and pedals shall be within easy reach of the operators position. The
force required to operate the crane shall be less than 5 kg for hand controls and less
than 10 kg for pedals.
15.3. Control handles shall automatically return to neutral position when released, and shall
remain there until activated by the operator.
15.4. Provisions shall be made to ensure that no control handle, adjusting button or similar
can inadvertently be activated.
Amended by regulations 4 Sept 1987, 28 Jan 1997 no. 121 (in force 1 Jan 1998), 2 March 1999 no. 398 (in force 1 Sept 1999),
11 April 2003 no. 494 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Added by regulations 4 September 1987
2
Cf. Regulations 4 September 1987 no. 856 concerning construction of mobile offshore units and Regulations 4 September
1987 no. 859 concerning protective, environmental, and safety measures on mobile offshore units.
5
Special safety equipment
1. Limit switches.
1.1. Limit switches shall be provided where there are limitations of the movement of the
crane, of any part of the crane, or of the hooks. Limit switches shall be so arranged that
a warning signal will automatically be given in case of failure of the power supply.
1.2. Limit switches shall be positioned in such a way that no damage or danger will occur,
even if the crane should be stopped by these switches from full speed and with full
load.
1.3. Only the limit switch for the lowest position of the boom is permitted with a manually
operated over ride system if such a system is necessary for stowage of the crane
600
boom. In such cases, a warning signal shall be arranged at the control panel of the
crane, stating when the control system is blocked/overriding the limit switch. A sign
shall then be posted, stating that no blocking up of the limit switch will be permitted
with load in the hook.
1.4. It shall be possible to illuminate the crane and its operational area, so that the crane
operator, during dark hours, will be able to see when the crane, boom or hook is ap-
proaching an area where limit switches will stop the movement.
1.5. If there is one crane movement that may cause the crane to over-ride a limit switch for
another movement (i.e. boom/hook movement), the first switch shall be copled to
both movements.
2. Load moment indicator.
2.1. A load and moment indicator shall be fitted on all cranes with a hoisting capacity of 5
metric tons and above, where there is a limitation of the load moment.
2.2. Inside the operators cabin, this indicator shall be fitted with an audible and visual
alarm system which shall be activated when the actual load moment is between 90 and
98 % of the permitted load moment.
2.3. When the actual load moment is between 101 and 110 % of permitted load moment,
and audible alarm outside the operators cabin shall be automatically activated to
warn personnel working on deck.
2.4. A crane which has been exposed to a load moment exceeding 110 % of the permitted
load moment (including maximum calculated addition for dynamic load), shall be
thoroughly examined by a competent person before it is again taken into use.
3. Load indicator.
3.1. A load indicator shall be fitted on all cranes with a hoisting capacity of 5 metric tons
and above, and where the hoisting motors of the crane are so powerful, or are arranged
in such a way, that a load exceeding the S.W.L. of the crane can be lifted. This is not a
requirement if the crane is fitted with a load moment indicator on the same hook.
3.2. The indicator shall be connected with an audible and a visual alarm system in the op-
erators cabin. Both alarm systems shall be activated when the actual load is between
90 % and 98 % of the permitted load.
3.3. When the actual load is between 101 % and 110 % of the permitted load, an audible
alarm outside the operators cabin shall automatically be activated to warn personnel
working on deck.
4. Slack wire stopper.
Cranes with a S.W.L. of 5 metric tons and above used for loading and discharging supply
ships, shall be equipped with a slack wire stopper which will automatically stop the
lowering if the wire should be paid out too quickly from the drum. If the crane operator has
an unobstructed view of the drums, this safety device may be omitted.
5. Boom lift safety device.
Boom lift shall be arranged in such a way that if the hoist wire should accidentally be load-
ed at an angle outwards from the vertical (e.g. owing to cargo on barge/supply ship drifting
away from the crane), and this will overload the boom hoist, the hoist winch shall automat-
ically be paid out until it is working within its design limit.
6. Boom stalling.
The crane shall be so designed and constructed that the boom will not stall/be pulled back-
wards.
7. Crane boom stopper.
The crane shall be fitted with a crane boom stopper to prevent it from going over the top
vertical position when working within the design criteria.
8. Boom sideways loading.
A slewing mechanism or equivalent shall be provided on the turning motor of the crane to
prevent overloading if the crane should be loaded with a sideways load exceeding the design
load.
9. Emergency stop switches and emergency release system.
9.1. An emergency stop or shut down switch shall be provided close to the operators seat.
602
When this emergency stop switch is activated, all brakes shall immediately be fully
engaged.
9.2. On electrically operated cranes, the emergency stop switch shall switch off the main
power supply (all phases).
9.3. Emergency stop switches shall be protected against inadvertent use.
9.4. As for emergency release of the whip hoist, see 4, subsection 5.1.
10. Warning signals.
At the operating position, all cranes shall have a manually operated sound signal device to
warn of danger. The signal shall be clearly different from all other kinds of sound signals
used on board. Cranes running on rails or conveyor belts on deck, shall be fitted with an
alarm signal activated a little before the commencement of crane movement.
11. Communication system.
The operators cabin on cranes used for loading or discharging supply ships, shall be
equipped with a communication system, enabling the crane operator to keep in continuous
contact with the supply ship and the signalman on deck. The system shall be so arranged that
the crane operator can communicate without using his hands.
12. Fire extinguishers.
There shall be at least one readily accessible fire extinguisher inside or in the immediate
vicinity of the crane operators cabin. For large cranes, additional extinguishers or a fixed ex-
tinguishing installation is required.
13. Description of safety devices.
All safety devices shall be clearly described in the Crane Manual.
Amended by regulations 4 Sept 1987, 11 April 2003 no. 494 (in force 1 July 2003).
6
Loose crane gear/crane accessories
1. Gear such as rings, shackles, chain and swivels shall be designed, constructed and certified
in accordance with a recognized standard.
2. Loose crane gear/accessories shall be of a steel quality not needing heat treatment/annealing.
3. Lifting slings.
3.1. Forerunners and lifting slings of wire rope used for hoisting and lowering of loads of
less than 10 tons shall have a safety factor of at least 6. For loads of 10 tons and up-
wards forerunners, lifting slings, rings, hooks and other crane accessories shall have at
least the same safety factor as appurtenant wire rope (ref. 4 subsection 3.3).
3.2. For well-defined loads of 100 tons and upwards, the part of the sling that is most high-
ly stressed shall have a safety factor of at least 3.
3.3. All wire rope slings shall be made of certified wire rope.
3.4. Rope slings shall be made of certified natural or synthetic fibre rope of the best quality
and with the breaking load known. The safety factor against breaking shall be at
least 7.
7
Installation of cranes
1. Cranes shall be so erected or positioned that they will not be exposed to extreme heat, or to
acid, or to specially corrosive atmosphere.
2. Wherever possible, cranes shall be positioned in such a way that operations with hanging
loads over high pressure systems will be reduced to a minimum.
3. The crane foundations shall be approved by a MOU- classification society.
604
8
Crane Manual
For each crane, a Crane Manual shall be worked out and kept on board. As a minimum require-
ment, this book shall contain full information on the design and construction standard, operation,
erection and dismantling, besides all limitations during normal and emergency operations, such as
safe working load (S.W.L.), safe working moment (S.W.M.), under static and dynamic stresses,
maximum wind force, maximum heel, design temperatures and brakes. All safety devices shall be
explained, and there shall be diagrams for electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic equipment as well
as rules for maintenance and inspection. Information on the most highly stressed components, ma-
terial control, welding inspection and certification shall also be included. The communication
system between crane operator, supply ship and deck shall be explained, and so shall all other
items previously referred to in these regulations.
9
Signs and labels
Cranes shall have legible signs or labels with the following specifications:
a) Necessary signs for safe operation of the crane.
b) Manufacturer, date of production, production number and type.
c) Supplier.
d) Safe working loads at two different radia.
10
Special tools
Special tools necessary to carry out the maintenance work required in the Crane Manual, shall
be kept on board the unit.
11
Testing, examination and certification
1. Cranes.
1.1. Test loads.
1.1.1. After a crane has been installed on board and later at least every 5 years, it
shall be examined and tested by a competent person according to the follow-
ing guidelines, laid down by ILO:
Safe working load, SWL Test load
Up to 20 tons 1.25 SWL
From 20 to 50 tons SWL + 5 tons
Above 50 tons 1.1 SWL
1.1.2. For testing as mentioned above, such crane accessories as shackles, chains,
hooks, swivels and sheaves, etc. shall be tested and certified in accordance
with subsection 2.1. below.
1.1.3. The load-testing of a new crane shall always be carried out by means of loose
scales. These shall be hoisted, lowered and swung at full speed, and the crane
arm radius shall be varied. Braking of the above-mentioned movements shall
be tested. The test shall comprise all crane movements that might occur in
practice.
606
1.1.4. If loose scales cannot possibly be used, a spring weight or a hydraulic jack
shall be used at the 5-year successive test. Several tests shall then be carried
out, with the crane turned in different directions and at different boom angles.
If a spring weight or a hydraulic weight is used, it shall be reliable and accu-
rate.
1.1.5. If limitations of pump pressure should make it impossible to hoist overload
by means of hydraulic cranes as mentioned in subsection 1.1., it is sufficient
to hoist the greatest possible load.
1.2. Examination.
Before and after the load test, the crane with accessories shall be thoroughly
examined by a competent person. Dismantling may be required.
1.3. Certificates.
After the crane has been tested and thoroughly examined with a satisfactory result
by a competent person, a Certificate shall be issued. (ILO Form No. 2). The original
Test Certificate (ILO Form No. 2) shall be filed on board together with the cargo gear
register (control book).
1.4. Alterations, etc.
If the crane has been reconstructed, considerably altered or repaired, it shall be re-
tested and re-examined by a competent person in accordance with the test loads defin-
ed subsection 1.1. above, and the result of the examination and alterations, if any, shall
be entered in the existing Certificate, or a new Certificate shall be issued.
2. Crane accessories (permanent and loose).
2.1. Test loads.
Before it is first taken into use, or after it has been lengthened, deformed, altered or re-
paired, every item of loose and permanent crane accessories shall be tested with the
following test loads:
608
Component Safe working Test loads
load - S.W.L.
1
Up to and including
Chain, ring, 25 tons 2 x S.W.L.
hook, shackle, 30 tons 55 tons
swivel, multi- 35 tons 65 tons
ple sheave 40 tons 70 tons
block, etc. 45 tons 75 tons
50 tons 85 tons
55 tons 90 tons
60 tons 95 tons
65 tons 100 tons
70 tons 110 tons
75 tons 115 tons
80 tons 120 tons
85 tons 125 tons
90 tons 130 tons
100 tons 145 tons
110 tons 155 tons
120 tons 165 tons
130 tons 175 tons
140 tons 190 tons
150 tons 200 tons
160 tons 215 tons
170 tons 230 tons
180 tons 240 tons
Above
180 tons 1.33 x S.W.L.
Single sheave block
2
4 x S.W.L.
5
Single sheave block with becket
2
4 x S.W.L.
5
Steel wire rope
3
Breaking load
Yoke or similar
4
2.0 x S.W. L.
1
For multiple sheave blocks, safe working load (S.W.L.) equal to resultant load in the heat fitting is permitted.
Cf. also 12, subsection 2.
2
For single sheave block with or without becket, the test load may be reduced in accordance with the above
table when the resultant load in the head fitting exceeds 25 tons.
3
Every length and dimension produced shall be tested. If there is no possibility of testing a complete piece,
threads or parts may be tested till breakage and the strength be calculated.
4
Yokes and similar with a safe working load (S.W.L.) of more than 20 tons, may be tested together with the
cargo handling gear.
5
S.W.L. = the maximum permitted load in the steel rope when the sheave is used as single loading block with-
out becket.
2.2. Examination
After having been tested, the components shall be thoroughly examined.
2.3. Certificates
2.3.1. Loose and permanent crane accessories shall have a Certificate (ILO Forms
Nos. 3 and 4). The original of the Test Certificate (ILO Forms Nos. 3 and 4)
shall be filed on board together with the control book. The Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate may request a copy of this Certificate.
3. Annual thorough examination.
3.1. Cranes shall undergo a thorough examination at least every 12 months by a competent
person, or more frequently if required by the manufacturer or the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
3.2. The annual thorough examination shall comprise control and function testing of the
crane as well as visual control of elongation, wear and tear, corrosion, cracking and
610
formation of fractures, etc. This examination shall be carried out in such a way that it,
as far as possible, will give a reliable knowledge of the safety of the examined compo-
nents.
4. Control book and Certificate.
The results of initial testing, tests and examinations every 5 years as well as the annual ex-
aminations and all kinds of tests and examinations after repairs or alterations of the crane or
hoisting gear, shall be entered in the control book (ILO Form No. 1). The entry shall be writ-
ten by the competent person who carried out the inspection and the examination. Control
book and Certificate shall both be kept on board. The control book and Certificates shall be
available to the surveyor.
5. Survey and approval.
5.1. Before a crane is, or crane accessories are, first taken into use, and later every 5 years,
a competent person shall have controlled constructions and calculations, carried out
testing and examination of strength, quality of materials, workmanship and structural
design as well as certification in connection with this in compliance with the require-
ments in these regulations. Cf. subsection 1 above.
5.2. In addition, every crane shall undergo a thorough annual inspection by a competent
person. Cf. subsection 3 above.
Amended by regulations 4 Sept 1987, 12 May 1989, 11 April 2003 no. 494 (in force 1 July 2003).
12
Marking
1. Cranes.
Cranes shall be marked with crane number and maximum permitted safe working load
(S.W.L.). Cranes with a variable/adjustable boom shall be marked with maximum permitted
safe working load at two or more boom positions, including extreme boom positions.
2. Blocks.
2.1. Safe working load (S.W.L.) for a single sheave block is equal to the wire load in (i.e.
half the force on the suspension link) when the block is used as a single loading block.
For a single sheave block with becket, S.W.L. is also equal to the wire load, which in
this case is one third of the force on the suspension link. In both cases the block shall
be marked with S.W.L. = the wire load as single loading block without becket.
2.2. For a multiple sheave block, S.W.L. is equal to the force on the suspension link, and
equal to the S.W.L. with which the block shall be marked.
2.3. In addition, blocks shall be marked with an identification number or mark, corre-
sponding to the identification number or mark in the Certificate.
3. Permanent crane accessories.
Loose parts such as shackles, swivels, etc. shall be marked with the maximum permitted
safe working load, and an identification number corresponding to the identification number
in the Certificate.
4. Hoisting gear.
Hoisting gear shall be marked with maximum permitted safe working load (S.W.L.) in
numbers or letters, and with an identification number corresponding to the identification
number in the Certificate. This marking shall be done on the gear itself, or on a plate or ring
made of a lasting material and securely fastened to the gear. Wire slings shall be marked with
a label giving S.W.L. between 0 for single slings and 90 spread for other slings. Alterna-
tively it is accepted that information on this is posted in readily visible places. The slings
shall be easily identified by means of the posted information.
5. All marking shall be carried out in such a way as to be easily legible and durable.
612
13
Qualification requirements for crane handling/operation
1. General.
A crane operator shall be at least 20 years of age, and his health, hearing and eyesight must
be good. A crane operator shall have successfully passed a recognized practical and theoret-
ical training course concerning cranes and hoisting equipment/accessories. A crane operator
shall be given the necessary instructions concerning crane operation and crane maintenance,
as well as necessary introduction to (instruction in) the regulations currently in force.
2. Daily operation special precautions.
2.1. If the crane operator should temporarily be physically or psychically unfit, he shall
not operate cranes.
2.2. The crane operator shall not be preoccupied with anything that might disturb him
while operating the crane.
2.3. During load-handling, the crane operator shall not start the crane before the signalman
gives a signal or the operator has an unobstructed view of the whole load.
2.4. The crane operator shall only comply with the signals given by the designated signal-
man. He shall at any time respond to a request for emergency stop, no matter from
what source the request might come.
2.5. The crane operator is responsible for all crane-handling, and also for the crane-hand-
ling being carried out in a safe and reliable way. If safety in any way might be ques-
tioned, the crane operator shall have authority to stop the crane, and he may refuse
handling loads till load-handling may be carried out in a safe and reliable way.
2.6. Every day before the cranes are taken into use, the crane operator shall carry out all
the necessary movements with the crane, and also carry out such maintenance work as
is necessary to be that the machinery functions satisfactorily. He shall make sure that
all safety devices are in their right places and are functioning properly, and also that
the wire ropes are in a reliable condition.
2.7. Cranes shall not be used if any of the limit switches or other safety equipment should
be defective.
2.8. No hoisting gear/equipment shall be used for cargo that is so heavy as to exceed its
maximum permitted workingload, SWL. Whenever several wire slings or chains are
used, due regard shall be paid to mutual angles. The crane operator shall be informed
of the correct weight of the loads he is to hoist.
2.9. Equipment shall be protected against the weather. The storage shall be divided into
certain marked areas for the various types of equipment and groups of hoisting gear of
similar capacity. The crane operator shall keep the storage space in order. When in
use, slings with fasteners and fittings shall be inspected daily to ascertain whether
they have suffered any overloading, excessive wear and tear, or damage. Slings found
to be defective, shall not be used. A survey chart giving maximum permitted workin-
gload, SWL, for all types and sizes of equipment used on the installation, shall be
posted in the storage space.
2.10. The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or other devices. Adequate
protection shall be provided between the sling and sharp surfaces on the load hoisted.
2.11. Cranes shall only be used for vertical hoisting and lowering of cargo.
2.12. Limit switches shall not be used to stop the crane during normal use.
2.13. The crane operator shall not leave the operators seat/position while load is hanging in
the hook.
2.14. A suitable container or basket shall be used for transportation of smaller cargo.
2.15. The main hoisting arrangement on cranes used for loading and discharging supply
ships, shall be used only when the hoisting and lowering speed substantially exceeds
the ships vertical movements.
614
14
Deviations
14A
1
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Added by regulation 2 March 1999 no.398, in force 1 Sept 1999.
15
Penalty
16
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 15 February 1986.
1200/93 Radio regulation
616
CONTENTS
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
4 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Chapter III: Documentation, survey and certifica-
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
7 Survey and certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Chapter IV: Equipment and watchkeeping . . . . . . . . . 624
8 International provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
9 Requirements for equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
10 Requirements for personnel and watchkeeping . . . . . . . . 626
11 Existing units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
12 Maintenance of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Chapter V: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
13 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
14 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Preface
The regulations lay down binding rules for the installation and use of radio equipment on board
mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in a Norwegian register of ships,
and which are used in connection with drilling for subsea petroleum deposits. The regulations
material requirements for the range of equipment are largely identical to the requirements of the
IMOs MODU Code, as revised in 1991. This revision introduced provisions based on the new
distress radio system Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). This system was
established by the IMO with the 1988 revision of Chapter IV of the SOLAS Convention, and the
revised provisions entered into force on 1 February 1992.
The provisions of the MODU Code concerning the radio station, referred to in the regulations,
have been included as an annex to these regulations.
1
However, the provisions of 8 subsection 1
of the regulations state that the provisions of the MODU Code are binding. Consequently the
word should in the annex must be taken to mean shall.
The revised SOLAS provisions referred to in the MODU Code have not been included in the re-
gulations.
The requirements regarding GMDSS is mandatory for new mobile offshore units from the date
of entry into force of the regulations. The GMDSS requirements are not mandatory for existing
units, however, became mandatory 1 February 1999.
The regulations contain provisions concerning all types of radio equipment, except:
618
1. Radio equipment for use in survival craft. Requirements for such equipment have been given
in the regulations concerning lifesaving appliances and evacuation on mobile offshore units
( 11).
2. Radio equipment for use in addition to firemans equipment. Requirements for this equip-
ment have been given in the regulations concerning precautionary measures against fire on
mobile offshore units ( 14 subsection 2).
3. Communication systems for use from the operators cabins of deck cranes. Requirements for
this equipment have been given in the regulations concerning deck cranes etc. on mobile off-
shore units ( 5 subsection 11).
In connection with the provisions of the regulations reference is also made to the Regulations
concerning the licence to establish and operate radio installations on board Norwegian ships, laid
down by the Ministry of Transport and Communications. According to these regulations applica-
tions for such licences shall be submitted to Telenor A/S. The licence regulations also require all
units of equipment forming part of the radio installation to be type-approved or permitted for use
by the Norwegian Telecommunications Regulatory Authority.
Reference is also made to Guidelines for the installation of GMDSS radio equipment on board
ships issued by Telenor A/S.
Furthermore, it is also pointed out that radio equipment to be located or used in hazardous areas
shall be approved in accordance with the current regulations concerning electrical plants in mari-
time installations, issued by the Norwegian Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency Plan-
ning.
1
In the English version the annexed text is the original IMO text.
Regulations 16 December 1993 No. 1200 concerning the
installation and use of radio equipment on mobile offshore
units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 no. 7, relat-
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships etc., 1, 41a, 42, and 100, cf. Royal Decrees
of 5 April 1963 and 1 December 1978, and Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979. Amended 2
March 1999 and 11 April 2003 No. 500, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1
(Directive 98/34/EC).
Chapter I
1
Application
1. These regulations apply to units which are or will be registered in a Norwegian register of
ships.
issue.
620
2
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations
1. Unit means a mobile platform, including drilling ship, equipped for drilling for subsea petro-
leum deposits, and mobile platform for use other than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
2. The MODU Code as revised in 1991 means the IMOs Code for the Construction and
Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units; 1989, as amended in accordance with MSC/
Circ. 561 of 3 July 1991.
3. Sea area A1 means an area within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one VHF coast sta-
tion in which continuous DSC (Digital Selective Calling) alerting is available, as may be de-
fined by the authorities of a country.
4. Sea area A2 means an area, excluding sea area A1, within the radio telephone coverage of at
least one MF coast station in which continuous DSC alerting is available, as may be defined
by the authorities of a country.
5. Sea area A3 means an area, excluding sea areas A1 and A2, within the coverage of an IN-
MARSAT geostationary satellite.
6. Sea area A4 means an area outside sea areas A1, A2 and A3.
7. GOC Certificate means the General Operators Certificate as defined in Article 55 of the Ra-
dio Regulations issued by the International Telecommunication Union (ITU).
8. ROC Certificate means the Restricted Operators Certificate as defined in Article 55 of the
Radio Regulations issued by the International Telecommunication Union (ITU).
9. Owner means whosoever contracts and/or is responsible for the operation of a unit.
11. SOLAS 74/88 means the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SO-
LAS 74), with amendments adopted in 1988 (the GMDSS amendments).
Chapter II
General provisions
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Deviations
622
4 A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Added by regulation 2 March 1999 no. 408, in force 1 Sept 1999.
Chapter III
Documentation, survey and certification
5
Documentation
with. Documentation shall be sent to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or anyone authorized
1
by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on request. The contents, scope and type of documents
and the time of submission shall be decided by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or anyone au-
thorized by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
Amended by regulations 18 Feb 1997 no. 140 (in force 1 Jan 1998), 11 April 2003 no. 500 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
According to the agreement in force concerning assistance, this is Telenor A/S.
6
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 500, in force1 July 2003.
7
Survey and certification
1. Survey and certification
1
of radio installations shall be carried out in accordance with the re-
gulations at any time currently in force concerning notification of newbuilding, survey, and
certification etc. of mobile offshore units.
2. Any radio survey
1
shall include both the equipment required by these regulations, and the ra-
dio equipment required by the following regulations:
a) Regulations 11 April 2003 No. 492 concerning lifesaving appliances and evacuation
on mobile offshore units ( 10)
b) Regulations 31 January 1984 No. 227 concerning precautionary measures against fire
and explosion on mobile offshore units ( 14 subsection 2)
624
c) Regulations 13 January 1986 No. 31 concerning deck cranes etc. on mobile offshore
units ( 5 subsection 11).
1
According to the agreement in force concerning assistance between Telenor A/S and the Norwegian Maritime Directorate,
Telenor A/S is authorized to carry out surveys and issue Mobile Unit Safety Radio Installation Certificates.
Chapter IV
Equipment and watchkeeping
8
International provisions
1. The provisions of the MODU Code
1
are binding, and apply with the amendments, interpreta-
tions and modifications referred to in 9 and 10.
2. Mobile offshore units for purposes other than drilling need not to comply with the provisions
of regulation 11.5.2 of the MODU Code.
1
Ref. the annex to these regulations.
9
Requirements for equipment
1
1. Units which will navigate or operate in sea area A3 or A4 shall comply with the provisions of
IMO Assembly Res. A.702(17) Radio Maintenance Guidelines for the Global Maritime
Distress and Safety System related to Sea Areas A3 and A4.
1.1. Units using the equipment duplication alternative as one of the two methods of
maintenance required shall thus comply with the provisions of paragraph 2 of Res.
A.702(17).
1.2. For drilling vessels the requirement for duplication referred to in subsection 1.1 is
considered to have been satisfied if the radio installation complies with regulation
11.5.2 of the MODU Code.
2. It shall be possible to effectuate radio communication from a room sufficiently screened
from noise so that communication is not disturbed, ref. Recommendations concerning
Noise Levels etc., issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate
2
3. Units equipped with a helideck shall be provided with the following radio equipment:
3.1. Two fixed and one portable aeromobile VHF/AM radio telephony station for com-
munication with helicopters, within frequency range 118 137 MHz. One of the fixed
stations shall be connected to batteries having a capacity of at least 6 hours operation.
Alternatively, this VHF/AM station may be connected to the power supply for the
GMDSS equipment, provided that the batteries have sufficient capacity. Units com-
plying with these provisions are considered to comply with regulation 11.6 of the
MODU Code.
3.2. An aeromobile radio beacon for the transmission of direction-finding signals as navi-
gational aid during helicopter transport. The radio beacon shall satisfy the ICAO pro-
visions concerning the operation and service of Non-Directional Radio Beacon
(NDB), and the provisions and guidelines of the Norwegian Civil Aviation Authority
concerning the use of NDB. The on/off switch for the radio beacon shall be located in
the room required by subsection 2.
1
Reference is also made to Regulations concerning licence to establish and operate radio installations on board Norwegian
ships, laid down by the Ministry of Communications and Transport
2
This recommendation is printed in the publication Excerpts from the Norwegian Passenger and Cargo Ship Legislation, etc.
626
10
Requirements for personnel
1
and watchkeeping
1. Units which will navigate or operate in sea area A2, A3 or A4 shall have on board at all times
at least two persons holding the GOC Certificate. Units which will navigate or operate only
in sea area A1 shall have on board at all times at least two persons holding the GOC or the
ROC Certificate, depending on the type of radio equipment on board.
2. One of the persons holding a certificate as required by subsection 1 shall be designated to
have primary responsibility for radio communication in the event of an emergency. This per-
son shall not have other assignments or obligations in the event of an emergency.
3. One of the persons holding a certificate as required by subsection 1 shall be designated to
have primary responsibility at all times for safety radio communication to and from the unit,
and watchkeeping on all relevant distress and safety frequencies in accordance with the pro-
visions of the MODU Code (cf. the provisions of SOLAS 74/78 Chapter IV, Regulation 12).
All operation of the radio equipment required by these regulations shall be carried out by a
person holding a radio operators certificate as referred to in subsection 1.
1
In connection with the requirements for radio operators ref. also 16 of the Regulations concerning risk analysis for mobile
offshore units.
11
Existing units
12
Maintenance of equipment
1. All radio equipment required by these regulations shall be kept in proper working order at all
times.
2. All maintenance, testing, repairs and replacement of radio equipment shall be recorded in a
maintenance system.
Chapter V
13
Penalty
Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, 339 subsection 2. ref. 48a and 48b, unless a more
14
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 January 1994. As from the same date the regulations of
13 January 1986 concerning the installation and use of maritime and aeromobile radio equipment
on board drilling units and other mobile units which are registered or will be registered in a Nor-
wegian Register of Ships, are repealed for new units. The same regulations are repealed in their
entirety as from 1 February 1999.
628
ANNEX
Chapter 11 of the MODU-code
Radiocommunications installations
The text of chapter 11 should be replaced by:
1. Application
1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to provide minimum requirements for distress and safe-
ty radiocommunications between mobile offshore drilling units and coast stations,
ships and supporting aircraft in the maritime mobile service.
1.2. The requirements are applicable to the following modes of operation of mobile off-
shore drilling units:
1.2.1. when underway self-propelled;
1.2.2. when towed, or self-propelled and accompanied by escort ships; and
1.2.3. when stationary at the site or engaged in drilling operations.
2. General
Coastal States in common areas of interest should, to the extent possible, establish similar ra-
diocommunication requirements to avoid confusion in case any ancillary craft have to divert
to another coastal State i an emergency.
3. Self-propelled units under way
Each unit, while under way at sea, should comply with the applicable provisions concerning
radiocommunications for ships prescribed in chapter IV of the 1988 SOLAS amendments.
1
4. Units when towed, or self propelled and accompanied by escort ships
4.1. The requirements for non-self-propelled units under tow when manned depend upon
radio installations fitted in the towing ship, as set out in paragraphs 11.4.2 and 11.4.3.
4.2. In cases where the towing ship complies fully with all applicable requirements con-
cerning radiocommunications for ships prescribed in chapter IV of the 1988 SOLAS
amendments, the non-self-propelled unit under tow when manned should:
1
All requirements of chapter IV of the 1988 SOLAS amendments referring to from the position the ship is normally navigat-
ed should be applied as meaning from the position the MODU is normally navigated.
4.2.1. be fitted with VHF facilities as required by regulations IV/7.1.1
1
and 7.1.2 of
the 1988 SOLAS amendments and with MF facilities as required by regula-
tions IV/9.1.1 and 9.1.2;
4.2.2. be fitted with the satellite EPIRB or EPIRB required by regulation IV/7.1.6,
as appropriate, for the area in which the MODU is being towed; and
4.2.3. be fitted with equipment for automatic reception of navigational and mete-
orological warnings in accordance with regulations IV/7.1.4 and iv/7.1.5, as
appropriate, of the 1988 SOLAS amendments.
4.3. In cases where the towing ship does not comply fully with the applicable requirements
concerning radiocommunications for ships prescribed in chapter IV of the 1988 SO-
LAS amendments, the MODU under tow when manned should comply with all the
applicable provisions concerning radiocommunications prescribed in chapter IV of
the 1988 SOLAS amendments.
1
4.4. Each self-propelled unit accompanied by one or more escort vessels should comply
with the provisions of 11.3.
5. Units stationary at the site or engaged in drilling operations
5.1. Each unit while stationary at the site, including when engaged in drilling operations,
should comply with all requirements prescribed in chapter IV of the 1988 SOLAS
amendments that are applicable to a ship sailing trough the same area.
2
5.2. Taking into account the different types of accident which may occur on the MODU,
additional radio equipment should be installed in a room or position, which could be
the bridge or an emergency control room, situated as far as practicable from the radio
630
equipment fitted in compliance with section 11.5.1, so that no single accident in any
part of the MODU could deprive the MODU of all facilities for radiocommunications.
The additional radio equipment should comply with the following regulations of the
1988 SOLAS amendment for MODUs drilling in:
5.2.1. sea area A1, the equipment prescribed by regulation IV/7.1.1;
5.2.2. sea area A2, the equipment prescribed by regulations VI/7.1.1 and VI/9.1.1;
5.2.3. sea area A3, the equipment prescribed by regulations IV/7.1.1 and IV/10.1.1,
plus 10.2; or alternatively, as required by regulations IV/7.1.1 and 10.2.1;
5.2.4. sea area A4, the equipment prescribed by regulations IV/7.1.1 and IV/10.2.1.
5.3. If the acoustic noise level in a room fitted with operating controls for radio equipment
is so high or could be so high, during particular operating conditions, that it may dis-
turb or prevent proper use of the radio equipment, then adequate noise protection
should be provided by mechanical or other means, in association with the operating
controls for the radio equipment.
1
All requirements for chapter IV of the 1988 SOLAS amendments referring to from the position the ship is normally navi-
gated should be applied as meaning from a position which is continuously manned and which is controlling the MODU
while under tow.
2
All requirements of chapter IV of the 1988 SOLAS amendments referring to from the position at which the ship is normally
navigated, should be applied as meaning from a position (or from the positions), which is continuously manned and which
is controlling the MODU while stationary at the site including its drilling operations (i.e. normally the control room).
6. Helicopter communications
In order to ensure communication with helicopters, MODUs serviced by helicopters should
carry an aeromobile VHF radiotelephone station complying with the relevant requirements
of ICAO..
7. Internal communications
All types of MODUs should be fitted with efficient means of communication between the
control room, the bridge (if provided) and any position or positions fitted with facilities for
operation of radio equipment.
8. Performance standards
8.1. All radio equipment should be of a type approved by the Administration issuing the li-
cence. Subject to section 11.8.2, such equipment should conform to appropriate per-
formance standards not inferior to those adopted by the Organization.
1
8.2. Equipment installed prior to 1 February 1992 may be exempted from full compliance
with the appropriate performance standards at the discretion of the Administration,
provided that the equipment is compatible with equipment complying with the per-
formance standards, having due regard to the criteria which the Organization may
adopt in connection with such standards.
1
Reference is made to the following performance standards adopted by the Organization by the resolutions indicated or to be
developed by the Organization:
8.1.1. Narrow-band direct-printing equipment for the reception of navigational and meteorological warnings and urgent in-
formation to ships (Assembly resolution A.525(13)).
8.1.2. General requirements for shipborne radio equipment forming part of the global maritime distress and safety system
and for electronic navigational aids (Assembly resolution (A.694(17))
8.1.3. Ship earth stations capable of two-way communications (Assembly resolution A.698(17))
8.1.4. VHF radio installations capable of voice communications and digital selective calling (Assembly resolution A.609
(15)).
8.1.5. Shipborne MF radio installations capable of voice communications and digital selective calling (Assembly resolution
A.610(15))
8.1.6. Shipborne MF/HF radio installations capable of voice communication, narrow-band direct-printing and digital selec-
tive calling (Assembly resolution A.613(15))
8.1.7. Float-free satellite emergency position-indicating radio beacons operating on 406 MHz (Assembly resolution A.695
(17))
8.1.8. Survival craft radar transponders for use in search and rescue operations (Assembly resolution A.697(17))
8.1.9. Float-Free VHF emergency position-indicating radio beacons (Assembly resolution A.612(15))
8.1.10. INMARSAT Standard-C ship earth stations capable of transmitting and receiving direct-printing communications
(Assembly resolution A.663(16))
8.1.11. Enhanced group call equipment (Assembly resolution A.664(16))
8.1.12. Float-free satellite emergency position-indicating radio beacons operating through the geostationary INMARSAT sa-
tellite system on 1.6 GHz (Assembly resolution A.661(16))
8.1.13. Float-free release and activation arrangements for emergency radio equipment (Assembly resolution A.662(16))
632
9. Gas explosion danger
Any radio equipment installed in a zone as defined in section 6.1 should comply with regula-
tion IV/14 of the 1988 SOLAS amendments.
10. Survey of the radio station
10.1. The radio station of a unit should be subject to survey as specified below:
10.1.1. by the Administration which issues the licence or its authorized representa-
tive before the radio station is put into service;
10.1.2. when the unit is moved and comes under the administrative control of another
coastal State a survey may be carried out by that State or its authorized repre-
sentative.
10.1.3. once every 12 month, carried out by an officer of the Administration and/or
the coastal State or their respective authorized representative.
10.2. The Administration may recognize the coastal State as its authorized representative.
10.3. In every case when an authorized representative of the coastal State carries out an in-
spection, a report should be issued and kept with the radio documents, and a copy, if
requested, should be forwarded to the Administration.
1314/02 Emergency positioning indicator regulation
634
1314/02 Emergency positioning indicator
regulation
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
3 The obligations of the owner and the master . . . . . . . . . . 636
4 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
6 Dispatching of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
7 Marking of the float-free emergency position-indicating
radio beacon after periodical maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 638
8 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
9 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Regulation 12 November 2002 No. 1314 concerning
conditions for periodical maintenance of float-free
emergency position-indicating radio beacons
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on 12 November 2002 pursuant to the Act of 9
June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1, 41a, 42,
50, 100, and 106, ref. Royal Decree of 5 April 1963 and Royal Decree of 1 December 1978
authorizing the Norwegian Maritime Directorate to lay down regulations pursuant to the Seawor-
thiness Act.
1
This Regulation shall apply to all types of float-free emergency position-indicating radio bea-
cons which are fitted on Norwegian vessels subject to control and mobile offshore units.
For float-free position-indicating radio beacons which are fitted on Norwegian vessels not sub-
ject to control, the provisions laid down by the organization
1
granting the licence shall apply.
1
The Norwegian Post and Telecommunications Authority is the public authority granting licences in Norway. The performing
of the tasks, however, is delegated to the licence department of Telenor Networks.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
a) Float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacon: An emergency position-indi-
cating radio beacon with automatic release and activation which either operates in the
406 MHz band in the COSPAS-SARSAT system or in the 1.6 GHz band in the Inmarsat
system.
636
b) Duration of battery: The period of time for which the equipment vendor is satisfied that
the float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacon will function satisfactorily
with one and the same battery.
c) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillship, equipped for drilling for
subsea petroleum deposits, or a mobile platform used for other purposes than drilling
for subsea petroleum deposits.
d) Vessel subject to control: A passenger or cargo ship for which safety certificates, a pas-
senger certificate or a trade certificate is required.
3
The obligations of the owner and the master
The owner and the master of Norwegian-registered vessels shall ensure compliance with the
provisions of this Regulation.
4
Exemptions
grant exemptions from the requirements of these regulations. There must be special reasons that
make the exemptions necessary and they must be justifiable in terms of safety. Exemptions may
only be granted where this does not contravene any international agreement to which Norway has
acceded.
5
Maintenance
Any float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacon shall undergo such inspection and
maintenance as is necessary to consider it to be new equipment after the overhaul.
Maintenance and any battery replacement shall be performed by the equipment manufacturer
or anyone acting on the manufacturers behalf.
Maintenance shall comprise all such repairs and improvements, including any battery replace-
ment, as are necessary to make the emergency position-indicating radio beacon comply with ap-
plicable regulations.
The battery of the emergency position-indicating radio beacon shall be replaced in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions. The maintenance shall also include any replacable parts of
the release mechanism, as indicated by the manufacturer.
When mounted, the float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacon shall undergo pe-
riodical maintenance at intervals not exceeding two years.
6
Dispatching of equipment
If the vessel departs from a port while the float-free emergency position-indicating radio bea-
con is being kept onshore for periodical maintenance in accordance with this Regulation, another
float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacon shall be mounted in replacement of the one
undergoing maintenance.
The battery of the emergency position-indicating radio beacon which is to undergo mainte-
nance shall be disconnected before the equipment is dispatched onshore. The disconnection shall
be performed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions for the equipment.
638
7
Marking of the float-free emergency position-indicating radio beacon
after periodical maintenance
In addition to the provisions on marking of float-free emergency position-indicating radio bea-
cons contained in the type-approval requirements, a float-free emergency position-indicating ra-
dio beacon shall be marked with the date of the last shore-based periodical maintenance.
8
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of this Regulation is punishable by fines pursuant to the General
Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, 339 subsection 2, unless a more severe penalty is ap-
plicable under another statutory provision.
9
Entry into force
This Regulation enters into force immediately.
480/03 Welding regulation
640
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
5 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
7 Qualified person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
8 Central plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
9 Gas cylinder central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
10 Gas cylinders, accessories, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
11 Piping installations, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
12 Requirements for equipment and installations . . . . . . . . 648
13 Installation, testing and checks of central plants . . . . . . . 650
14 Installation Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
15 Portable welding equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
16 Directions for use, signs/notices and marking . . . . . . . . . 652
17 The carriage and handling of gas cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . 654
18 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
19 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
20 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 480 concerning welding
equipment, etc. for the welding gases acetylene and
oxygen in mobile offshore units
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1 third paragraph, subparagraph 2, and
42, ref. Royal Decree of 5 April 1963, Royal Decree of 1 December 1978.
1
(1) This regulation shall apply to offshore units which either are entered or are to be entered in
a Norwegian ship register.
(2) Offshore units entered in a Norwegian ship register may, until the next certificate issue,
comply with the requirements in force at the time of the latest certificate issue.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of this regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
a) Acetylene: C2H2 for storage in special gas cylinders (15 to 19 bar at 15C).
642
b) Recognized classification society: Any classification society with which the Ministry
has entered into an agreement pursuant to 9 of the Seaworthiness Act:
c) Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/API/DIN/NFPA/ISO/CEN/IEC or
any other standard or body of rules, as appropriate, which is recognized nationally and/
or internationally for a particular sphere of application.
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in each individual case decide which stan-
dard is considered to be recognized.
d) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillship, equipped for drilling for
e) Qualified person: Person with qualifications to install, test and check a central plant and
issue an Installation Certificate, ref. 7.
f) MOU classification society: A recognized classification society with which there is an
additional agreement on its carrying out inspections and surveys, etc. on mobile off-
shore units. The following societies are MOU classification societies:
In each individual case, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may, upon request, use
other classification societies for control tasks on mobile offshore units.
g) Oxygen: O2 for storage in special gas cylinders (150 or 200 bar at 15C).
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Mutual acceptance
tive as those prescribed by the regulations.
644
5
Exemptions
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may, on the basis of any proposal for an equivalent solu-
tion or upon a safety assessment, grant an exemption from the requirements of this regulation
upon application from the company. If the requirements of the coastal state and the requirement
contained in this regulation are irreconcilable, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may grant ex-
emptions from the requirements of this regulation insofar as safety is not jeopardized. Exemptions
can only be granted when they do not contravene international agreements to which Norway has
acceded.
6
Documentation
The company shall be able to document that the requirements of this regulation are complied
7
Qualified person
The qualified person shall:
a) possess all necessary qualifications for the installation of piping and equipment in mo-
bile offshore units,
b) have special knowledge about the problems and safety precautions associated with in-
stalling, testing, checking and using central plants and practical experience in this area,
and
c) use, during the installation, the accessories, drawings and directions of the equipment
vendor.
8
Central plant
(1) Central plants shall be installed where the number of gas cylinders on board containing
acetylene and/or oxygen exceeds 4. This requirement applies regardless of cylinder size.
(2) Central plants shall consist of a gas cylinder central fitted with a non-return valve for each
gas cylinder, high-pressure hoses, manifold, stop valves, regulators, and pipes with outlet stations.
All parts of the plant shall comply with the provisions of this regulation.
(3) Any plant with permanently fitted pipes for acetylene and oxygen shall be considered a
central plant, even if the number of gas cylinders is 4 or lower. All parts of such plants shall also
comply with the provisions of this regulation.
9
Gas cylinder central
(1) In deciding the location and protection of gas cylinder centrals, consideration shall be giv-
en to possible fire and explosion hazards in adjacent spaces. An assessment shall be made of the
consequences of an explosion in the gas cylinder central itself for the offshore units structural in-
tegrity and areas where personnel are normally found.
(2) The gas cylinder central shall be a separate room for the storage and connection of acety-
lene and oxygen cylinders. The room shall have a bulkhead, deck and ceiling made of steel and be
gas-tightly separated from adjacent spaces. The gas cylinder central shall have direct access to the
open deck.
646
(3) The gas cylinder central shall be so insulated, ventilated and arranged that the temperature
will not normally exceed 40C. Where the location of the room and the temperature allow, natural
ventilation may be used. Materials used in connection with insulation, etc. shall be of an incom-
bustible type. The ventilation arrangement shall not be connected to other ventilation systems on
board. In addition, the room shall be ventilated in such a way that there is no risk of gas accum-
ulation. Safety valves and similar devices shall have a vent point in a safe place on the open deck,
see 11 first paragraph, c).
(4) The room shall not be used for other purposes than gas cylinder storage. Pipelines for com-
bustible liquids and gases shall not penetrate the gas cylinder central.
(5) When the total number of acetylene and oxygen cylinders (regardless of size) including
spare cylinders does not exceed 8, both gases may be kept in the same room.
(6) When the total number of acetylene and oxygen cylinders (regardless of size) including
spare cylinders exceeds 8, the gas cylinder central shall consist of two gas-tight separated rooms,
one for acetylene and the other for oxygen.
(7) Gas cylinder centrals shall be clearly marked with signs showing that oxygen and acetylene
cylinders are stored there. The text of the sign shall be as prescribed by 16 first paragraph.
(8) Electrical installations shall satisfy the regulations in force at any time concerning the in-
stallation of electrical components in spaces with a gas hazard.
(9) In mobile offshore units not used for exploration for or exploitation (production) or storage
of petroleum products, open gas cylinder centrals may be accepted if there is an appropriate and
reasonable explanation for such an arrangement. For such installations, the following provisions
shall apply:
a) Gas cylinders in a central shall be placed in separate and solid racks within a marked
zone on the open deck. The gas cylinders, accessories and piping, etc. shall be effective-
ly protected against mechanical damage, direct sunlight, and weather and wind expo-
sure. The central shall be protected by a tight and solid roof or a steel cover, a solid
mesh/grille or similar protection which can be easily opened or removed.
b) There shall be a marked division between the acetylene and oxygen bottles of the gas
cylinder central.
c) Pipelines on the open deck shall have a wall thickness of at least 2.5 mm.
10
Gas cylinders, accessories, etc.
(1) Gas cylinders for acetylene and oxygen shall be of types certified by a recognized classifi-
cation society or public authority. Cylinders of greater volume than 50 litres are not permitted.
(2) Gas cylinders, including spare cylinders, shall be placed in erect position and securely fas-
tened. The fastening arrangement shall be so designed that a rapid disconnection of cylinders may
be carried out.
(3) Storage of acetylene and oxygen cylinders in the engine-room is not permitted.
(4) Burners, stop valves, regulators, non-return devices, high-pressure pipes and other acces-
sories in connection with the welding equipment shall be of makes that comply with relevant stan-
dards, ref. 12.
(5) When the central plant is not in use the gas cylinder valves and the other valves shall be
kept closed.
11
Piping installations, etc.
(1) High-pressure side. Piping and accessories between gas cylinders and regulator.
a) Acetylene pipes.
1. Pipes shall be of stainless steel. All pipes shall be seamless. Piping and accessories
shall have a 300-bar certificate.
648
2. Copper or copper alloys containing more than 65% of copper shall not be used in
connection with acetylene.
3. In central plants where two or more cylinders of acetylene are connected to a mani-
fold, the supply pipes between the cylinders and the manifold shall be fitted with
non-return valves that comply with relevant standards, ref. 12.
b) Oxygen pipes.
1. Pipes shall be of stainless steel. All pipes shall be seamless. Piping and accessories
shall have a 300-bar certificate.
2. In central plants where two or more cylinders of oxygen are connected to a mani-
fold, the supply pipes between the cylinders and the manifold shall be fitted with
non-return valves that comply with relevant standards, ref. 12.
c). Safety valves and similar devices.
Safety valves and similar devices fitted in a gas cylinder central shall have a vent point
on the open deck. The vent point shall be in a safe place at a height of minimum 3
metres above deck. The location of the vent point shall be marked as prescribed by 16
fourth paragraph.
See also 9 third paragraph.
(2) Low-pressure side.
a) Pipes shall be seamless, made of ST 35 material or equivalent material with a wall
thickness of minimum 2.0 mm and/or in conformity with the requirements of a recog-
nized classification society. Pipes on the open deck shall have a thickness of at least 2.5
mm.
b) Pipelines shall be laid freely and be so arranged that they are protected against damage.
They shall not penetrate unventilated rooms, lockers, etc. or be laid in crew or passen-
ger accommodation.
c) Expansion loops shall be placed where necessary and piping that penetrates a deck or
bulkhead shall be sheathed in protection tubes of hard plastics or fibre material. All
pipes shall be securely fastened so as to be protected against damage. The distance be-
tween fastening clamps shall not exceed 2.5 metres.
d) Pipelines shall be laid with as few joints as possible. Joints shall be expertly welded
with a TIG or acetylene/oxygen unit. Joints shall be fitted in places readily accessible
for inspection.
e) Disconnectable couplings are not accepted as a substitute for welded joints.
(3) Outlet stations.
a) An outlet station is a bracket with stop valves, regulators, manometer, and non-return
devices for acetylene and oxygen located in a cabinet or otherwise satisfactorily pro-
tected.
b) Outlet stations shall be located in a well ventilated place and in such a way as to be pro-
tected against mechanical load.
c) The stop valves of outlet stations shall be closed when the system is not in use.
12
Requirements for equipment and installations
Equipment and installations shall conform to the following standards:
a) NS-EN 730 Gas welding equipment. Equipment used in gas welding, cutting and allied
processes, safety devices for fuel gases and oxygen or compressed air. General specif-
ications, requirements and tests.
b) NS-EN 961 Gas welding equipment. Manifold regulators used in welding, cutting and
allied processes up to 200 bar.
c) NS-EN ISO 14113 Gas welding equipment. Rubber and plastic hoses assemblied for
compressed or liquefied gases up to a maximum design pressure of 450 bar (ISO
14113:1997).
650
d) NS-EN ISO 2503 Gas welding equipment. Pressure regulators for gas cylinders used in
welding, cutting and allied processes up to 300 bar (ISO 2503:1998).
e) NS-ISO 9090 Gas tightness of equipment for gas welding and allied processes (=
29090:1992).
f) NS-ISO 9539 Materials for equipment used in gas welding, cutting and allied processes
(= EN 29539:1992).
g) prEN ISO 14114 Gas welding equipment. Acetylene manifold systems for welding,
cutting and allied processes. General requirements (ISO/DIS 14114:1997).
13
Installation, testing and checks of central plants
(1) Installation of a central plant.
Prior to the installation of acetylene and oxygen pipelines, piping as well as connections shall
be thoroughly cleansed to remove all grease, oil and other combustible substances. No combus-
tible or organic solvent may be used for this purpose. After the degreasing, pipelines and connec-
tions shall be blown clean with fat-free nitrogen, both prior to and after the installation. Com-
pressed air from an oil-lubricated compressor or oxygen shall not be used.
(2) Blow-through and non-leakage testing after the installation, etc.
a) After completed installation or repairs of the central plant and otherwise at 5-year in-
tervals, ref. 14, all pipelines shall be blown through and be non-leakage tested. The
testing shall be carried out by a qualified person.
b) Blow-through of acetylene and oxygen piping shall be carried out with fat-free nitro-
gen. Nitrogen shall be blown in from the high-pressure side and be carried off at the out-
let station. The outlet station(s) shall be removed during the blow-through process. At
blow-through, the pressure shall be gradually increased to approximately 12 bar and the
blow-through process shall continue till dirt no longer escapes from the pipe. High-
pressure pipes shall be blown through separately.
1. Low-pressure side
Fat-free nitrogen shall be used for non-leakage testing of acetylene and oxygen pip-
ing and the test pressure shall be 12 bar. After 8 hours, the pressure drop shall not
exceed 0.4 bar.
2. High-pressure side.
Acetylene piping shall be non-leakage tested with fat-free nitrogen at 25 bar. Oxy-
gen piping shall be non-leakage tested with 200-bar oxygen or fat-free nitrogen.
3. Common provision.
As part of the non-leakage test, all valves, joints and other connections shall be
checked for leakage by appropriate means.
(3) Annual checks.
Non-leakage tests of piping shall be performed at least once a year using the ordinary operating
pressures for oxygen and acetylene respectively. The gas supply to the pipelines is stopped by the
central regulator being closed and the pressure in the pipelines shall then remain constant for at
least 8 hours. If pressure drop should occur in oxygen and/or acetylene pipelines the central plant
shall be checked and repaired by a qualified person and a new Installation Certificate shall be is-
sued. The annual test shall be entered on the Installation Certificate in the gas cylinder central.
14
Installation Certificate
(1) After a central plant has been installed, tested and checked by a qualified person, an In-
stallation Certificate shall be issued by a qualified person. The person who issues the Installation
Certificate shall sign it to certify that the plant is checked and tested as prescribed and that the
plant also complies with the other provisions of this regulation.
652
(2) The Installation Certificate shall be issued for a period of maximum 5 years. The certificate
is invalidated if the plant is altered or has suffered such damage as may affect its functionality or
safety.
(3) Before the 5-year period expires, the plant shall be re-tested and re-inspected by a qualified
person and a new Installation Certificate shall be issued. A recognized MOU classification socie-
ty may issue the certificate when the shipping company and the classification society concerned
have jointly inspected the plant. The Installation Certificate shall be clearly marked: Renewal of
Installation Certificate.
(4) Following damage, alterations or renewals affecting important parts of the plant, it shall be
re-tested and re-inspected by a qualified person and a new Installation Certificate shall be issued.
The Installation Certificate shall be clearly marked: Renewal of Installation Certificate.
(5) The Installation Certificate (original) shall be posted in the gas cylinder central and be so
framed as to allow it to be removed for entries of annual checks.
(6) A copy of the Installation Certificate shall be kept for at least 6 years by the person who is-
sued it and the shipping company.
15
Portable welding equipment
(1) Portable welding equipment consists of 1 cylinder for oxygen and acetylene respectively,
regulators, non-return devices, hoses, burners, etc. placed in a suitable portable appliance. The
volume of the cylinders shall not exceed 50 litres.
(2) In mobile offshore units provided with a central plant, portable welding equipment shall,
when not in use, be stored in a rack in the gas cylinder central. The total number of acetylene and
oxygen bottles in one room shall not exceed 8, including cylinders used for portable welding
equipment.
(3) In mobile offshore units not provided with a central plant, portable welding equipment
shall, when not in use, be kept in a fixed position in a separate and well ventilated room on the
open deck. This room shall be gas-tightly separated from other rooms.
16
Directions for use, signs/notices and marking
(1) Entrance doors in gas cylinder centrals or rooms where acetylene and oxygen cylinders are
stored shall be fitted with warning notices in accordance with the NS 6033 which in writing and
illustrations clearly express:
GASS UNDER TRYKK
Beholderne skal bringes i sikkerhet under eventuell brann.
GAS UNDER PRESSURE
Remove cylinders to a safe place in case of fire.
(2) The door shall also be fitted with prohibition signs in accordance with NS 6033 with a text
clearly indicating:
GASSFARE GAS DANGER
pen ild og ryking forbudt. Fire, open light and smoking prohibited.
ADGANG FORBUDT NO ADMITTANCE
(3) In the immediate vicinity of gas central accessories, regulator and cylinders, etc., a sign
shall be posted with directions for use and clearly worded text giving the necessary detailed in-
structions for the use of the gas cylinder central. The directions for use shall be in English and
Norwegian.
654
(4) In the immediate vicinity of the regulators, notices shall be posted, clearly stating the maxi-
mum pressures in the pipelines permitted between the regulators and the outlet stations.
(5) Venting from safety valves and similar devices shall be marked with prohibition notice NS
6033 with the following text:
GASSFARE GAS DANGER
pen ild og ryking forbudt. Fire, open light and smoking prohibited.
(6) In the outlet stations, notices indicating the operating pressure shall be posted. Signs shall
also be posted clearly stating that the valves shall be closed when the installation is not in use.
(7) Low-pressure pipes between regulators and outlet stations shall be painted or marked in
such a way that there will nowhere be any doubt as to which gases are conveyed by the pipes.
a) Acetylene pipes shall be painted/marked in: Red.
b) Oxygen pipes shall be painted/marked in: Blue.
(8) Directions for use for the central plant and portable welding equipment as mentioned in the
second paragraph shall be supplied by the equipment vendor.
17
The carriage and handling of gas cylinders
(1) During the carriage of acetylene and oxygen cylinders on board mobile offshore units and
during the transportation of such cylinders to and from mobile offshore units a means of con-
veyance suited for the purpose shall be used.
(2) A protecting cover shall always be screwed on the gas cylinders during carriage or other
transportation and also at all times when the gas cylinders are not in use.
(3) The gas cylinders shall not be exposed to bumps and jolts during transportation and other
handling.
18
Maintenance
Welding equipment shall be part of the offshore units maintenance system. Users shall have
prepared set routines for the necessary checking of the equipment (hoses, etc.) before and after
use.
19
Penalty
severe penalty is applicable pursuant to other legislation.
20
Entry into force
(1) This regulation enters into force on 1 July 2003.
(2) For mobile offshore units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register, this regulation
enters into force at the first expiry of the certificate, ref. 1.
(3) Regulations 17 December 1986 No. 2317 concerning welding equipement, etc. for the
welding gases acetylene and oxygen on mobile offshore units are repealed from 1 July 2008.
491/03 Diving regulation
656
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
5 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
6 Notification and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
7 Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
8 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
9 Design and construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
10 Operating manual/instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
11 Special provisions on diving system location . . . . . . . . . 662
12 Emergency power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
13 Evacuation systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
14 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
15 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Regulation 11 April 2003 no. 491 concerning diving
systems on mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to 1 third paragraph, subparagraph
2, 41, 41a, 42, 46, 47, 48, and 54a of the Act of 9 June 1903 relating to Public Control
of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., ref. Royal Decree of 5 April 1963 authorizing the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate to lay down regulations pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act and Royal De-
cree of 1 December 1978 concerning delegation of authority to the Ministry of Trade pursuant to
the Seaworthiness Act, and Formal Delegation of 15 January 1979.
1
(1) This regulation applies to diving systems, etc. located on board mobile offshore units
which are registered, or will be registered, in a Norwegian ship register.
(2) Mobile offshore units which are registered in a Norwegian ship register may, until the next
issue of certificate, comply with the requirements in force at the time of the last issue of certifi-
cate.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of this regulation, the following definitions apply:
a) Recognized classification society: Any classification society with which the Ministry
has entered into an agreement pursuant to 9 of the Seaworthiness Act:
658
b) Recognized standard: Standard issued by NS/BS/ISO/API/CEN/IEC or any other stan-
dard or body of rules, as appropriate, which is recognized nationally or internationally
for a particular sphere of application. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in each
individual case decide which standard is considered to be recognized.
c) Diving system: The plant and equipment necessary for performing diving operations in
which a diving bell is used to transport divers under pressure between the work location
and a surface compression chamber.
d) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillship, equipped for drilling for
e) MOU classification society: A recognized classification society with which there is an
additional agreement on its carrying out inspections and surveys, etc. on mobile off-
shore units. The following societies are MOU classification societies:
Upon request, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may in each individual case use
other recognized classification societies for the carrying out of inspections and surveys,
etc. on mobile offshore units.
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Mutual acceptance
tive as those prescribed by the regulations.
5
Exemptions
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may, on the basis of any proposal for an equivalent solu-
tion or upon a safety assessment, grant an exemption from the requirements of this regulation
upon application from the company. If the requirements of the coastal state and the requirement
contained in this regulation are irreconcilable, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may grant ex-
660
emptions from the requirements of this regulation insofar as safety is not jeopardized. Exemptions
can only be granted when they do not contravene international agreements to which Norway has
acceded.
6
Notification and documentation
(1) Before a diving system is installed on board or substantial repairs or alterations are carried
out, the company shall send a notification to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate in good time, at
least 1 month before the work is commenced.
(2) The owner shall be able to document that the requirements of this regulation are complied
7
Surveys
(1) The diving system and the diving-technical part of the evacuation system shall be surveyed
by a MOU classification society. The evacuation arrangement shall be surveyed by the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate or anyone authorized by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
(2) Each diving system shall be surveyed during construction and before it is put into use. The
survey shall include an inspection of the diving system with associated components and equip-
ment, etc.
(3) The diving system shall be subject to an annual survey to ensure that the diving system with
associated components and equipment is kept in proper condition. The time of the performed sur-
vey shall be entered in the certificate.
(4) The diving system shall be subject to a periodic survey at least every five years for renewal
of its certificate. The survey shall include an inspection of the diving system with associated com-
ponents and equipment.
8
Certification
(1) A diving system that is in full compliance with the requirements of this regulation shall be
provided with an IMO Diving Systems Safety Certificate.
(2) The certificate shall be issued for a period of up to five years. The validity of the certificate
may be extended for a period of up to five months.
(3) The certificate shall cease to be valid if the diving system undergoes substantial modifica-
tions or conversions.
9
Design and construction
Diving systems shall be designed and constructed to a standard which satisfies the IMOs
Code of Safety for Diving Systems
1
, Chapter 2 Design and Construction.
1
Res. A.831(19)
10
Operating manual/instructions
A standard operating manual or operational instructions shall be found on every mobile off-
shore unit from which commercial diving is performed. The manual shall describe all activities
662
and procedures necessary to operate and maintain the diving system including appurtenant in-
stallations in accordance with this regulation.
11
Special provisions on diving system location
(1) Diving systems with associated gas cylinders shall not be installed in engine-rooms or in
hazardous areas
1
.
(2) Where the diving system is located on an open deck, the system shall be satisfactorily pro-
tected from the sea, ice, and damage which might arise from other activities on board.
(3) The diving system with associated equipment shall be securely fastened to the structure of
the offshore unit. Proper regard must be paid to the relative movements of the components. Diving
system fastenings shall withstand stresses resulting from the maximum and least favourable heel
and trim of the offshore unit in the damage condition in accordance with 21 of the stability regu-
lations
2
.
(4) Oxygen cylinders shall be installed in well-ventilated rooms or on the open deck. Oxygen
cylinders shall not be located near combustibles.
1
Ref. Regulations of 31 January 1984 no. 227 concerning pracautionary measures against fire and explosion on mobile off-
shore units.
2
Ref. Regulations of 20 December 1991 No. 878 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight
closing means on mobile offshore units.
12
Emergency power
If the ordinary power source of the offshore unit also supplies the power for the diving system,
the emergency power source shall be dimensioned for this extra load.
13
Evacuation systems
(1) On the offshore unit an evacuation system
1
shall be arranged which is suitable for the safe
evacuation of all divers under compression to a location where the unit represents no danger to the
divers.
(2) The evacuation system shall include a hyperbaric lifeboat or an evacuation unit which pro-
vides a corresponding standard of safety.
(3) If a hyperbaric lifeboat is used, it shall be designed, constructed and equipped in accord-
ance with the requirements for lifeboats on mobile offshore units
2
in force at the time in question
as far as this is practicable considering the lifeboats special function as an evacuation unit for di-
vers under compression.
(4) The launching arrangement shall as far as practicable comply with the requirements in
force at the time in question regarding launching arrangements, etc. on mobile offshore units
2
.
(5) The time from the last diver enters the evacuation unit to it is 100 metres from the mobile
offshore unit shall not exceed 15 minutes.
(6) The evacuation unit shall be capable of supplying vital life-support functions until the di-
vers have been brought into safety and shall be so equipped that its atmosphere can be monitored
and regulated.
(7) The evacuation unit shall have a medicine lock and shall be so equipped that the divers can
breathe independently of its atmosphere.
1
See also IMO Res. A.692(17) of 6 November 1991.
2
Regulations of 11 April 2003 No. 492 concerning lifesaving appliances and evacuation on mobile offshore units.
664
14
Penalty
severe penalty is applicable pursuant to other statutory provision.
15
Entry into force
(1) This regulation enters into force on 1 July 2003 for all mobile offshore units which are re-
gistered or will be registered in a Norwegian ship register.
(2) As from the same date, Regulations of 10 April No. 940 concerning the control of diving
systems, etc. shall no longer be applicable to mobile offshore units.
666
SECTION VI-5:
Operation
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 858 concerning the operation of mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Regulations of 15 September 1992 no. 693 concerning the form and keeping of ships
log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Regulations of 1 April 1996 no. 319 concerning the manning of mobile offshore units 704
Regulations of 6 February 1978 no. 9131 concerning towing assistance for drilling
platforms and other mobile units of similar construction when navigating in Norwegian
territorial and inner waters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Regulations of 13 January 1986 no. 32 for the use of radioactive sources on board mo-
bile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Regulations of 1 December 1975 no. 5 for preventing collisions at sea . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
858/87 Operation regulation
668
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
3 Obligations of the owner and platform manager . . . . . . . 670
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
6 Anchor buoys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
7 Muster lists, musters and drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
8 General emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
9 Maintenance of life-saving appliances and emergency
equipment, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
10 Operation manual, maintenance records for life-saving
appliances and emergency equipment, etc. Reporting of
accidents and non-conformities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
11 Safety personnel and training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
12 Specification of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
13 Transport, storage and use of explosives, explosive gas-
es, inflammable liquids and noxious substances . . . . . . . 678
14 Raising and lowering of self-elevating units . . . . . . . . . . 678
15 Transfer of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
16 Deviations from the regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
17 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
18 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
the operation of mobile offshore units
to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships 1, 9a, 35, 42, 47, 48, 68, and 69. Cf. Royal De-
crees of 5 April 1963, 1 December 1978, and 25 May 1984, and also Formal Delegations of 15 Ja-
nuary and 6 June 1984. Amended 12 May 1989. Amended 2 March 1999, the amended regula-
tions have been notified in accordance with Council Directive 83/189/EEC and 11 April 2003 No.
1
Definitions
2. Emergency station: A meeting place for personnel who are assigned special duties in an
emergency situation.
3. Mustering station: A meeting place for entering lifeboats and liferafts.
670
the requirements of or pursuant to legislation referred to in 1 of Regulations of 2 March
1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore units.
Added be regulation 12 May 1989. Amended by regulations 2 March 1999 no. 412 (in force 1 Sept 1999), 11 April 2003 no.
507 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
gian register of ships.
issue.
3. For operations outside the Norwegian continental shelf the regulations apply only to the ex-
tent that this will not involve a violation of the coastal states provisions concerning the ac-
tual drilling for petroleum resources.
3
Obligations of the owner and platform manager
lations
1
.
1
4
Documentation
5
6
Anchor buoys
Repealed by regulation 11 April 2003 no. 507, in force 1July 2003.
7
Muster lists, musters and drills
1. Muster lists.
1.1. A muster list shall be provided and kept up-to-date at all times.
672
1.2. The muster list shall show all special duties for all current job classifications and shall
indicate, in particular, the station to which each member must go, and the duties he has
to perform in the event of an emergency.
1.3. The muster list and any alteration to it shall be dated and signed by the person in
charge on board.
1.4. The muster list shall specify the different signals to be given on the general alarm sys-
tem for calling all persons to their emergency stations and the mustering stations.
1.5. The muster list shall show the duties assigned to the different members of the person-
nel in connection with:
1.5.1. closing of watertight doors, fire doors, vents, valves, and any similar open-
ings on the unit,
1.5.2. stop of machinery,
1.5.3. equipping of life boats and other life-saving appliances,
1.5.4. ensuring that life boats and other life-saving equipment are ready for use,
1.5.5. launching of life boats,
1.5.6. general preparation of other life-saving applicanes,
1.5.7. fire extinction,
1.5.8. emergency situations on the helicopter deck,
1.5.9. the safety of any visitors on board during an emergency.
1.6. The muster list shall show what duties are assigned to the different members of the
personnel in the event of an emergency situation.
1.7. Muster list plans containing the most essential parts of the muster list shall be posted
at suitable locations in the accomodation and the most important working areas.
2. Muster.
Practice musters to emergency stations and mustering stations shall take place
at least every week, unless the current operation is in a critical phase.
3. Drills.
3.1. Drills which are as realistic as possible shall take place at least every week. If the op-
eration of the rig is in such a critical phase that drills may endanger the unit or the op-
eration, drills may be postponed, provided that such postponement does not prevent
the whole crew from performing one drill per work period.
3.2. The drills shall comprise the following:
3.2.1. the use, handling and correct operation of life-saving appliances and safety
equipment, as well as instructions and drills according to precautions de-
scribed in the emergency procedure manual.
3.2.2. test starting of the engine in man-overboard-boat, lowering the boat and
launching and sea trials when conditions permit.
3.2.3. starting of the emergency power generator and testing with the services on.
Testing of emergency generators in the load condition, including test of auto-
matic starter, may be modified to take into consideration the operation of the
rig, but such testing shall be done as often as possible during drills, and at
least once every six months. A simulated autostart shall be done at least every
month.
3.2.4. lowering of at least one lifeboat, and launching and sea trials when conditions
permit. Different lifeboats shall be tested for consecutive drills when condi-
tions permit. For free-fall lifeboats, the weekly test shall comprise checking
of important functions.
3.2.5. Free-fall lifeboats shall be launched and tried at sea at least once every 5 year.
Additionally, at least one simulated launch of the free-fall lifeboats shall be
carried out annually.
3.2.6. if a stand-by vessel is located in the vicinity of the unit, use of this in emer-
gency situations shall be included in the drill.
674
3.3. After the drill has taken place all equipment used during the drill shall be examined,
cleaned and if necessary re-charged or replaced. The equipment shall thereafter be re-
turned to its location.
3.4. Musters and drills shall be recorded in the log book.
8
General emergency procedures
1. The unit shall be equipped with an emergency procedure manual setting out the action to be
taken in the event of:
1.1. Primary situations:
Fire/explosion
Gas flow-out
Lack of buoyancy
Loss of well control
Helicopter crash on board
1.2. Evacuation.
1.3. Marine situations:
Vessel adrift/vessel on collision course
Helicopter crash in the vicinity of the unit
Man-over-board
1.4. Administrative situations:
Medical aid in the event of serious accidents
Handling of deceased persons
Acts of crime
Occupation/bomb threats
2. The manual shall include procedures as follows for the emergency situations mentioned in
subsecion 1, and adjusted to the conditions when the unit is on operational draught, in posi-
tion, in transit, being jacked up, etc.:
2.1. clearly defined alarm signals to be given on the general alarm system,
2.2. definite instructions on the location and use of fire-fighting and life-saving equip-
ment,
2.3. procedures to ensure the safety of any work in progress or equipment in use when an
emergency occurs,
2.4. general procedures for evacuation including the use of the helicopter winch hoist.
3. An extract of the manual, covering action to be taken in case of emergency by the person in
question, shall be delivered to new personnel on arrival on board.
4. At every normal working area on board there shall be posted an extract of procedures con-
tained in the manual corresponding to action to be taken in that area in the event of an emer-
gency.
5. Specially appointed persons shall be given definite instructions as to:
5.1. use of the emergency radio equipment,
5.2. action by the stand-by vessel for effective and speedy evacuation, recovery of persons
in the water and transmission of emergency signals.
5.3. action by the shore base to provide assistance,
5.4. provision and operation of stand-by helicopters,
5.5. liaison with the rescue coordination centre.
676
9
Maintenance of life-saving appliances and emergency equipment, etc.
1. All life-saving appliances and emergency equipment shall be maintained in good order and
kept available for immediate use at all times.
2. Maintenance shall be carried out according to an updated maintenance programme which
covers relevant regulatory requirements. The content of the maintenance programme shall
also give due consideration to international regulations and the recommendations of equip-
ment vendors.
3. The following equipment and installations shall be examined and tested by a competent per-
son:
3.1. Alarm and public address system.
3.2. Emergency radio equipment.
3.3. Fire detection and extinguishing systems and portable fire extinguishers.
3.4. Emergency power system.
4. Defects of the equipment found during the examination shall be brought in order or replace-
ment carried out where appropriate.
5. All maintenance and any repairs or replacements of life-saving appliances, emergency
equipment or other safety installations shall be entered in the maintenance records with the
date specified.
10
Operation manual, maintenance records for life-saving appliances and
emergency equipment, etc. Reporting of accidents and non-
conformities.
1. The unit shall be equipped with an operation manual containing necessary practical informa-
tion for the personnel on board to operate the unit in a safe manner, including information
mentioned in these regulations where reference is made to the operation manual.
2. Forms shall be kept on board for continuous checking of the total deck load on board in rela-
tion to the maximum allowable deck load according to strength and stability calculations. Si-
milar forms shall be used to check the total weight and weight distribution of all variable
weights in relation to stability requirements, freeboard requirements and limitations with re-
spect to distribution of weights on the legs of the unit.
3. On every unit there shall be kept an equipment maintenance record.
3.1. The maintenance record shall contain particulars as follows:
3.1.1. Type of equipment, installations, e.g. alarm and public address systems, fire-
fighting equipment, life-saving applicanes.
3.1.2. Specification and marking of each type of equipment, e.g. fire extinguishers,
life-rafts.
3.1.3. Safety meetings and conferences.
3.1.4. Details of periodic maintenance as follows:
3.1.4.1. Specification of the required interval for examination and testing.
3.1.4.2. Date when examination and testing were carried out.
3.1.4.3. Remarks on the condition of the equipment.
3.1.4.4. A description of any alteration, repair or replacement.
3.2. The maintenance record shall be signed by the person in charge on board.
4. Accidents and casualties involving damage to the unit or injured personnel shall immediately
be reported to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
5. Non-conformities which may significantly influence safety shall immediately be reported to
the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
678
11
Safety personnel and training
The platform manager or the qualified person designated by him shall have the responsibility
for training personnel in the use, handling and correct operation of all life-saving and emergency
equipment on board, including procedures to be followed in the various emergency situations
according to the emergency procedure manual, cf. 8. This person shall be responsible for ensur-
ing that equipment and installations are examined and tested as prescribed in 9. He shall further
complete the necessary details in the maintenance record, cf. 10. As regards units used for acco-
modation purposes, the safety officer shall carry out the above-mentioned functions, cf. above-
mentioned functions, ref. Regulations of 1 April 1996 concerning the manning of mobile offshore
units.
12
Specification of personnel
1. The platform manager and the shore base shall at all time keep a record of all persons on
board or in transit to or from the unit.
2. The record shall contain the names, nationalities, and employers of the persons in question.
3. The record shall be available to Norwegian authorities.
4. Unauthorized persons do not have access to the unit without permission from the platform
manager or persons authorized by him.
13
Transport, storage and use of explosives, explosive gases, inflammable
liquids and noxious substances
1. Transport, storage and use of explosives, explosive gases and inflammable liquids shall
comply with guidelines stipulated by the Directorate for Civil Protection and Emergency
Planning. The owner shall see to it that drawings showing the design of storage containers
and their location on the unit are submitted to the Directorate for Civil Protection and Emer-
gency Planning prior to being put into service.
2. The platform manager shall see to it that transport, storage and use of noxious substances are
carried out in a safe manner. For transport to and from the unit reference is made to Regula-
tions of 21 May 1987 concerning carriage by ship of special or dangerous cargoes in bulk or
as packaged goods.
14
Raising and lowering of self-elevating units
1. During raising and lowering of self-elevating units only essential personnel shall remain on
the unit. Personnel remaining on board shall, as far as possible, be stationed on deck and be
equipped with certified life jackets. Necessary evacuation equipment and life-saving ap-
pliances for immediate removal of personnel on board shall remain in readiness during the
entire operation. In addition, a stand-by vessel with sufficient capacity and equipment shall
be kept ready in the immediate vicinity of the unit. Raising and lowering shall, as far as prac-
ticable, be undertaken in daylight and only when considered safe by wind and weather condi-
tions. During the operations the radio station shall be ready for immediate use and manned
by a radio operator.
680
15
Transfer of personnel
1. The unit shall have a transport system of transport at its disposal, consisting of a helicopter
and a vessel that sufficiently can handle the safe running and maintenance of the unit. The
system of transport shall be constructed in such a way as to function quickly and effectively
in any emergency that may arise.
2. Transfer of personnel to and from the unit may be carried out in special circumstances by us-
ing a personnel basket:
2.1. When such transfer is needed for the safety of the personnel or the unit.
2.2. In the case of transfer of towing master with crew for taking charge of towing oper-
ations, and also transfer of personnel for supervising or taking part in necessary work
with the anchors.
2.3. In the case of crew change on board stand-by vessel.
2.4. Otherwise the platform manager may, on careful consideration of each individual
case, authorize transfer by a personnel basket when special reasons make this necess-
ary or reasonable. Transfer shall take place on a voluntary basis and in agreement with
the shop stewards.
3. Precautions etc. when using the personnel basket.
3.1. Transfer of personnel from a supply ship to the unit and vice versa shall only be car-
ried out in good visibility and full daylight and only when weather conditions permit a
safe transfer, unless such transfer is needed for the safety of the personnel or the unit,
cf. subsection 2.1.
3.2. The licensee shall prepare directions for transfer operations, including rescue proce-
dures in the event of an accident during transfer.
3.3. The personnel basket shall be so constructed that it can serve as a provisional raft cap-
able of accomodating the total number of persons it has been constructed for when
used as a basket.
3.4. The personnel basket shall not be used by more than 4 persons at a time. This shall be
clearly marked on the basket.
3.5. The personnel basket shall be tested every 6 months with a test load of twice the maxi-
mum working load. The result of the load test shall be noted in the maintenance re-
cord, and shall be signed by the person in charge on board, who shall also be in charge
of the load tests, or it shall be signed by a person specially appointed by the person in
charge to supervise the tests.
3.6. The crane to be used shall have valid certificates and be in good mechanical working
order.
3.7. In order to ensure that the crane hook does not endanger persons using the personnel
basket (when the basket is landed on the unit or is lowered on to the deck of a supply
ship), a loop of sufficient length and strength provided with a shock absorber shall be
used, unless special equipment is used to eliminate this danger.
4. Prior to the personnel basket being taken into use, the following precautions shall be taken:
4.1. The personnel basket shall be thoroughly examined by the platform manager or the
qualified person from the management designated by him. The personnel basket shall
always be kept in good condition.
4.2. The personnel basket shall be equipped with certified life jackets. The number of
jackets shall correspond to the number of people for which the basket has been con-
structed.
4.3. On units where the deck is used as starting and landing place for the personnel basket,
the deck shall be cleared so that there is sufficient space for safe operation of the per-
sonnel basket.
4.4. On the deck of the supply ship a square area with sides not less than the breadth of the
deck shall be cleared as a start and landing area for the personnel basket. The start and
landing area shall be free from obstructions. Container tops, stacks of drilling pipes or
682
casings shall not be used as a place for starting and landing. During start and landing
the stern port shall always be closed.
4.5. The master of the supply ship, the crane driver, and the person in charge of the transfer
operation shall be in direct radio contact with each other from before the personnel
basket is lowered until the transfer is completed.
5. During the transfer a stand-by vessel shall be located in the immediate vicinity of the unit.
The stand-by vessels man-over-board boat shall be ready for use.
6. If the persons to be transferred have not previously been transferred by a personnel basket, a
person who is familiar with the use of the personnel basket shall join each transfer, if possible
also when transfer is needed for the safety of the personnel or the platform, cf. subsection 2.1.
7. The personnel being transferred shall stand only on the ring outside the ropes of the person-
nel basket, and shall grip the ropes firmly with both hands. The centre of the basket is in-
tended for light hand luggage only. Every person being transferred by basket shall wear a life
jacket or life-saving suit during transfer.
8. The platform manager or the qualified person from the managment designated by him, shall
supervise the transfer operation.
9. The supply ship shall be ready to stop her propellers during transfer operation.
10. Raising and lowering of the personnel basket shall be carried out above sea and not above
ships.
11. After use the personnel basket shall be stowed together with life jackets in a separate locked
room, where the equipment will not be subject to damage of mechanical or chemical nature.
12. Use of the personnel basket in the instances mentioned in subsections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 above
shall be entered in the maintenance record, cf. 10.
16
Deviations from the regulations
16 A
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
684
17
Penalty
18
Entry into force
693/92 Log Books Regulation
686
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
3 Obligations of the master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
4 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Chapter 2: Form, publication and inspection, etc. of
log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
5 Publication of log books, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
6 Keeping of log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
7 Safe-keeping of log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
8 Inspection of log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Chapter 3: Log books to be kept on board Norwe-
gian ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
9 Deck log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
10 Engine-room log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
11 Oil record book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
12 Cargo record book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
13 Garbage record book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
14 Radio records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Chapter 4: Details regarding entries to be made in
log books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
15 Deck log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
16 Engine-room log book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
17 Oil record book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
18 Cargo record book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
19 Radio records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
20 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
21 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Regulation 15 September 1992 No. 693 concerning the
Form and Keeping of Log Books for Ships and Mobile
Offshore Units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on 15 September 1992 pursuant to the Norwe-
gian Maritime Code of 24 June 1994 No. 39, 471, ref. the Crown Prince Regents Decree of 5
May 1967. Amended 14 December 1995, 14 November 2000 (including amended legal basis), 4
June 2002, and 30 June 2003 (including amended title).
688
Chapter 1
General provisions
1
This regulation on the form and keeping of log books applies to ships entered in a Norwegian
register of ships, including fishing vessels, and mobile offshore units as specified in the individual
provisions of Chapters 2 and 3.
Amended by Regulation of 30 June No. 937 (effective from 1 July 2003).
2
Definitions
a) Gross tonnage: The numeric value indicated as gross tonnage in the Tonnage Certifi-
cate. If safety tonnage is entered in the Remarks column of the Tonnage Certificate,
the numeric value for such tonnage shall apply as gross tonnage.
b) Fishing vessel: A vessel used commercially for catching fish, whales, seals or other liv-
ing resources of the sea, including seaweed and sea tangle.
c) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillships, equipped for drilling for
subsea petroleum deposits, and mobile platforms for use other than drilling for subsea
petroleum deposits.
d) Domestic voyages: See Chapter 2 of Regulations of 4 November 1981 no. 3793 con-
cerning Trade Areas.
e) Chemical tanker: A ship constructed or arranged primarily for the carriage of noxious
liquid substances in bulk, including oil tankers carrying noxious liquid substances in
bulk as a cargo or part of a cargo.
f) MARPOL 73/78: International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships,
1973, as amended by the 1978 Protocol, with subsequent amendments.
g) Oil tanker: A ship constructed or arranged primarily to carry oil in bulk in the cargo
holds, including combination carriers and any chemical tanker when carrying a cargo,
or part of a cargo, of oil in bulk.
h) SOLAS Convention: International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as
amended.
i) STCW Convention: International Convention on Standards of Training, Certification
and Watchkeeping for Seafarers, 1978, as revised in 1995 and with subsequent amend-
ments.
j) Foreign voyages: See Chapter 3 of Regulations of 4 November 1981 no. 3793 concern-
ing Trade Areas.
Amended by Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 937 (effective from 1 July 2003).
3
Obligations of the master
The master is responsible for ensuring that log books required to be kept on board in accord-
ance with the individual provisions of this regulation are kept and safe-kept as prescribed by 7.
Additionally, the shipmaster is responsible for ensuring that new log books are procured well in
advance of the completion of those in use.
690
4
Exemptions
grant exemption from the requirements of this regulation.
There must be special reasons that make the exemption necessary and it must be justifiable in
terms of safety. Exemptions can only be granted where they do not contravene international agree-
ments to which Norway has acceded.
Chapter 2
Form, publication and inspection, etc. of log books
Heading amended by Regulation of 30 June 2003 no. 937 (effective from 1 July 2003).
5
Publication of log books, etc.
The content and form of log books are determined by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate. Pa-
per-based log books may be used. Likewise, electronic log books may be used where their in-
stallation and system comply with international requirements and the enterprise concerned has en-
tered into an agreement with the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
6
Keeping of log books
Log books shall be kept properly and clearly. Entries made must not be erased or otherwise ren-
dered illegible. Electronic log books shall be protected against overwriting, deletion or alterations.
Where a signature is required, electronic log books may be signed electronically. If a correction is
necessary, it shall be added as a note.
Log books shall be kept under the supervision of the master, who shall sign the books as spec-
ified in the individual provisions.
The log books shall be kept by the persons prescribed in the individual provisions of Chapter 3.
Log books shall be kept in Norwegian or English as specified in the individual provisions of
Chapter 3.
Amended by Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 937 (effective from 1 July 2003, formerly 7).
7
Safe-keeping of log books
Except on unmanned ships under tow, log books shall be safe-kept on board so as to be readily
available for inspection at all reasonable times. They shall be preserved for at least three years
after the last entry has been made. If the ship is sold, the ships owner (the seller) shall retain the
log books ashore.
8
Inspection of log books
At the request of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, the Maritime Investigators, port author-
ities, the Norwegian Coastal Administration, customs authorities, the police, the Directorate of
Fisheries, the Norwegian Coast Guard, and the Public Roads Administration in the case of ferries
connecting national and county roads, or other entities authorized by the Norwegian Maritime Di-
692
rectorate, the ships master shall submit the log books, and, where necessary, produce a certified
copy or transcript of them when the ship is in a Norwegian port.
The above shall also apply outside ports where the ship is suspected to be unseaworthy or there
is just cause to suspect unlawful discharge of pollutants.
At the request of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, the Maritime Investigators, any Norwe-
gian Foreign Service station or a competent foreign authority, the master shall act as described in
the first paragraph when the ship is in a foreign port.
Chapter 3
Log books to be kept on board Norwegian ships
9
Deck log book
A deck log book shall be kept on board:
a) ships engaged on foreign voyages;
b) ships of 50 gross tonnage and upwards engaged on domestic voyages;
c) fishing vessels of 50 gross tonnage and upwards; and
d) mobile offshore units.
The bigger deck log book shall be used by vessels required to keep an engine-room log book
pursuant to 10. The smaller deck log book may be used by engine-propelled ships of 50 gross
tonnage and upwards engaged on domestic voyages, ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards in
greater coasting, and fishing vessels of 50 gross tonnage and upwards but less than 500 gross ton-
nage, where the bigger deck log book is not used.
The deck log book should be kept by the navigator of the watch. It shall be kept in English on
board ships registered in the Norwegian International Ship Register.
The deck log book shall be kept for every day in port and for every watch at sea. The events oc-
curring during each watch may be provisionally entered in a note book, but shall be entered in the
log as soon as possible and at the latest in the course of the following day.
The keeper of the log book shall certify by his signature that the watch has been entered. The
master shall sign the deck log book when the day has been entered.
10
Engine-room log book
An engine-room log book shall be kept on board:
a) engine-propelled ships engaged on foreign voyages, except ships of less than 300 gross
tonnage in great coasting;
b) fishing vessels of 500 gross tonnage and upwards; and
c) mobile offshore units.
The engine-room log book should be kept by the chief engineer officer. It shall be kept in Eng-
lish on board ships registered in the Norwegian International Ship Register.
The engine-room log book shall be kept for every day in port and for every watch at sea. The
events occurring during each watch may be provisionally entered in a note book, but shall be en-
tered in the log as soon as possible and at the latest in the course of the following day.
The keeper of the log book shall sign every page of the engine-room log book. At least once
every week the master shall make an entry to the effect that he has inspected the engine-room log
book, and enter the date of such inspection.
694
11
Oil record book
An oil record book shall be kept on board:
a) oil tankers of 150 gross tonnage and upwards;
b) ships, including fishing vessels, of 400 gross tonnage and upwards; and
The oil record book shall be kept by the officer responsible for the work operations, and shall
be signed by that officer and countersigned by the master. The oil record book shall be kept in
English on board ships required to have the International Oil Pollution Prevention Certificate
(IOPP certificate) under MARPOL 73/78, Annex I. The oil record book may be kept in Norwe-
gian on board ships engaged exclusively on domestic voyages.
The particulars to be entered in the oil record book may be provisionally entered in a note book.
If entries are first made in a note book, a book similar to the oil record book shall be used. In this
event the oil record book shall be brought up to date within one week, and in any case before the
ship arrives at its next port. The second paragraph applies correspondingly to the note book.
12
Cargo record book
A cargo record book shall be kept on board any ship carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk.
The cargo record book shall be kept by the officer responsible for the work operations, and
shall be signed by that officer and countersigned by the master. The cargo record book shall be
kept in English on board ships required to have international certificates, i.e. the certificate for the
carriage of liquid chemicals in bulk (BCH certificate) or the international certificate for the car-
riage in bulk of noxious chemicals (IBC certificate), or on board ships which are not chemical
tankers and required to have the international certificate for the prevention of pollution by the car-
riage of noxious, liquid substances in bulk (NLS certificate) under MARPOL 73/78, Annex II.
The cargo record book may be kept in Norwegian on board ships engaged exclusively on domes-
tic voyages.
The particulars to be entered in the cargo record book may be provisionally entered in a note
book. If entries are first made in a note book, a book similar to the cargo record book shall be used.
In this event the cargo record book shall be brought up to date within one week, and in any case
before the ship arrives at its next port. The second paragraph applies correspondingly to the note
book.
13
Garbage record book
A garbage record book shall be kept on board:
a) ships of 400 gross tonnage and upwards;
b) ships certified to carry 15 persons or more on voyages to the ports or offshore terminals
of other convention parties and to fixed platforms engaged in petroleum activities; and
The entries may also be made in a section of the ships official deck log book.
Added by Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 937 (effective from 1 July 2003).
696
14
Radio records
Radio records shall be kept on board:
Any vessel engaged on domestic or foreign voyages, regardless of size, for which a certificate
is required
1
and which have radio installations for which a licence is required.
The entries may be made in either a dedicated radio log book
2
or the ships deck log book.
The navigator in charge of the watch shall ensure compliance with the provisions of 19.
1
Vessels for which certificates are required pursuant to regulations laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
2
Telenor Radiodagbok, issued by Telenor Networks, Maritim Radio.
Chapter 4
Details regarding entries to be made in log books
15
Deck log book
The printed text at the top of the deck log pages indicates what is to be entered. For ships en-
gaged on foreign voyages, the first entry of the day shall be made on the 0000 hrs line. The spaces
6 to 22 of that line shall be filled in as appropriate with the conditions prevailing at 2400 hrs.
a) During the voyage, important positions and information about drift, current and the like
shall be entered. Courses steered shall be indicated in degrees from 000 to 360. Posi-
tions shall be indicated by latitude and longitude or by true bearing and distance to a
named object. Where electronic aids are used, their use shall be entered with the posi-
tion. For optical bearings, the following shall be entered: opt., and for instance where
radar is used: rdr., in connection with the line of position and the name of the bearing
object.
b) In ports or when the ship is berthed or lying at anchor, entries in the deck log book may
extend from left to right across both pages.
An accurate entry shall be made in the deck log book regarding any event and circumstance oc-
curring during the voyage, the knowledge of which may be useful to the authorities, shipowners,
cargo owners, insurance companies or others having a legal interest in the voyage. The time of the
commencement and termination of the crews service shall thus be entered, as well as any illness,
death, desertion, punishable offence or breach of discipline on the part of a crew member, and
whether foreign labour is employed.
Personnel forming part of the navigational watch on board shall record their watches in the
deck log book with times of commencement and end of watch.
An entry shall also be made when stores and water are taken on board, when loading and dis-
charging begins, is interrupted and completed, and what is loaded or discharged every day. The
ships draught forward and aft and the freeboard amidships shall be entered, as well as informa-
tion on the ships condition in other respects when it leaves port and on the nature and condition of
the cargo. If deck cargo is carried, the quantity and height of such cargo, and the way in which it is
secured, shall be noted.
Information shall be entered regarding the correction, calibration and deviation of the compass-
es, regarding the time of the ships departure from, arrival at and movements in port, regarding
weather, air and sea temperatures, barometer reading, current, course, speed, distance covered,
lights exhibited, fog signals, and regarding bilge pumping and how often this takes place, and the
water level in the holds.
Additionally, the following shall be entered:
a) The reckoning at noon for each nautical day, and similarly the supply of fuel, lubricat-
ing oil and drinking water. An entry shall also be made when the master finds it necess-
ary to reduce food rations during the voyage.
698
b) The results of the regular determinations of the chronometer reading. The results shall
be entered in the deck log books printed form for such observations.
c) Information regarding the required drills. This shall be entered in the deck log books
printed form for such information, and the keeper of the log and the master shall both
sign the information entered.
d) In the event of an accident or injury to a person, the ship or its cargo, information re-
garding the course of events for the purpose of clarifying the causes of the accident or
injury. Any damage or injury shall be accurately described, including information about
the measures taken in connection with the accident or injury.
e) Information about the reasons for any decision, in a situation where the ship had the op-
portunity to assist persons in distress, to the effect that such assistance was neither ap-
propriate nor needed. Consideration shall be given to the IMOs recommendation on
alerting the rescue co-ordination centre concerned to the situation.
f) Information about the ships working language. If the working language is not an offi-
cial language of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly, all plans, drawings and
lists posted on board shall be translated into the working language.
g) All alarms released on ships operating with an unmanned engine-room, including the
measures taken on such occasions.
h) Adjustment and inspection of alarm instruments, and change-over from engine-room
control of the machinery to bridge control, and vice versa.
i) Treatment of ships wastes. For ships required to carry a garbage record book, ref. 13,
such information shall be entered in accordance with the Appendix to Annex V of
MARPOL 73/78.
j) The reason for not observing a mandatory routing system.
k) Any other information required by regulations laid down by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
16
Engine-room log book
The title page of the engine-room log book shall be filled in according to the form in the book.
The number of propulsion engines, type of engine, whether two-stroke or four-stroke, and the
name of the manufacturer shall be noted. The total capacity of the fuel oil tanks shall be noted.
Times shall be noted as four-digit figures from 0000 hrs to 2400 hrs.
The following shall be entered in the Remarks column:
a) The time of initiating preparations for engine running and the time of starting or stop-
ping the main and auxiliary machineries.
b) The time of filling and changing fuel oil tanks, and the time of bunkering.
c) The time of filling and emptying ballast tanks.
d) Any defect, fault and breakdown of the main and auxiliary machineries and important
accessories, and the measures taken to rectify such matters.
e) All important maintenance work on the main and auxiliary machineries, cleaning of
tanks, etc. The engine-room crews maintenance work on deck machinery shall also be
noted.
f) The time of inspection of the boilers, and also any other piece of information regarding
the boilers.
g) Any abnormal condition registered by means of alarms, etc. for:
1. lubricating oil pressure and temperature;
2. cooling water pressure and temperature;
3. starting air pressure;
4. temperature of bearings;
5. boiler pressure; or
6. feed water temperature.
700
h) Any fire in the engine and boiler rooms, such as a fire in the scavenging air belt, fire in
the waste oil tray of the boiler, etc.
i) Failure of the electric power supply.
j) Observation of oil in observation tanks, etc.
k) The time of testing the emergency power supply, of running the emergency fire pump,
and of checking or replacing fire-fighting equipment.
l) In ships operating with an unmanned engine-room, all alarms communicated to the en-
gineer from the bridge or the engine-room shall be noted, including the measures taken
in this connection. Manoeuvring shall be entered in a separate manoeuvre book as far as
possible.
m) Adjustment and inspection of alarms, and the change-over from engine-room control to
bridge control, and vice versa, shall be noted.
n) The engine-room crews commencement and termination of service, and whether for-
eign labour is employed, shall also be noted in the engine-room log book, and also mat-
ters relating to accidents in the engine-room, and any irregularity regarding the engine-
room crew. (Cases of illness among the engine-room crew shall be entered in the deck
log book.)
o) Any other information required by regulations laid down by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
17
Oil record book
The oil record book shall be completed on a tank-to-tank basis in accordance with the provi-
sions of MARPOL 73/78, Annex I, Regulation 20 (2), (3) and (4).
In the case of emptying or discharge of oil or oily mixtures, or in the event of an accidental or
other exceptional discharge of oil necessary with respect to the safety of the ship, the health of
those on board or to save life, whether deliberate or accidental, the circumstances of, and the rea-
sons for, the discharge shall be explained in the oil record book, Part I item G, or Part II item N.
The same applies to discharges resulting from damage to the ship or equipment, when all reason-
able precautions have been taken both before and after the accident to prevent or reduce the dis-
charge.
18
Cargo record book
The cargo record book shall be completed on a tank-to-tank basis in accordance with the provi-
sions of MARPOL 73/78, Annex II, Regulation 9 (2), (3) and (5).
In any case of discharge of any noxious liquid substance or mixture containing such substance,
necessary with respect to the safety of the ship, the health of those on board or to save life, wheth-
er deliberate or accidental, the circumstances of, and the reasons for, the discharge shall be ex-
plained in the cargo record book. The same applies to discharges resulting from damage to the
ship or equipment, when all reasonable precautions have been taken both before and after the ac-
cident to prevent or reduce the discharge.
702
19
Radio records
The provisions of SOLAS 74, Regulation IV/17 and the STCW Code, Part A, Chapter VIII,
section VIII/2, paragraphs 87 to 89 shall be observed.
1
1
Ref. Regulations of 27 April 1999 No. 537 concerning watchkeeping on passenger ships and cargo ships.
Chapter 5
20
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of this regulation shall be punished by fines pursuant to the Gener-
al Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 no. 10, 339 subsection 2, ref. 48a and 48b, unless a more
severe penalty is applicable under another statutory provision.
21
Entry into force
This regulation enters into force on 1 November 1992.
As from the same date, the Regulation of 1 July 1968 no. 7 concerning Keeping of a Compass
and Radio Direction Finding Log, the Regulation of 1 July 1969 no. 1 concerning the Arrange
ment and Keeping of an Engine-Room Log on Motor-Propelled Vessels, and the Regulation of 27
November 1979 no. 2 concerning the Arrangement and Keeping of a Deck Log Book, are re-
pealed.
319/96 Manning regulation
704
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
3 Council of Manning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
5 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Chapter III: Manning during operation . . . . . . . . . . . 708
6 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
7 Manning certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
8 Safe manning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
9 Organization plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Chapter IV: Manning during time in port, at repair
yard, and lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
10 Time in port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
11 Time at repair yard, or lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Chapter V: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
12 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
PREFACE
These regulations relate to individual minimum safe manning based on the units operations
and fields of operation.
The owner is responsible for proposing, documenting and maintaining the safe manning re-
quired to cover all aspects of the safe operation of the unit.
Prescribed certificates of competency and qualification requirements relative to the posts shall
comply with the regulations in force at the time in question concerning certificates of competency
and qualification requirements for the manning of mobile offshore units.
Regulations 1 April 1996 No. 319 concerning the manning
of mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to 1, 2, 48, 82, 93, and 106 of the
Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, cf. Royal De-
cree of 5 April 1963 authorizing the Norwegian Maritime Directorate to lay down regulations pur-
suant to the Seaworthiness Act, cf. Royal Decree of 1 December 1978. Amended 2 March 1999
and 11 April 2003 No. 545, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1 (Directive 98/
34/EC).
706
Chapter I
1
1. These regulations apply to the manning of mobile offshore units registered in a Norwegian
ship register.
issue.
3. These regulations comprise minimum safe manning during operation, industrial disputes,
time at repair yard, in port, or lay-up.
2
Definitions
1. Operation: Operation of unit, including operations and moves with emergency preparedness.
2. Time in port: A state in which the unit is firmly moored to the quay or lies at anchor in the
harbour area.
4. Unit: Mobile platform, including drillship having equipment for drilling for subsea petro-
leum deposits on board and mobile platform for any use other than drilling for subsea petro-
leum deposits.
5. Lay-up: State in which the unit is firmly moored/anchored and the operation has ceased.
6. Platform manager: The capacity with the highest authority on board.
7. Owner: The contracting party and/or the party in charge of the operation of a unit.
8. Safety and emergency system: System with a designated safety and emergency function
which shall be activated in the event of an abnormal incident, the failure of which can cause
serious escalation of the incident.
9. Safe manning: The minimum safe manning considered necessary to ensure the safety of
those on board, the unit, and the marine environment.
10. Vital operating system: System used in normal operating situations, the failure of which may
cause a major accidental event.
11. Time at repair yard: A state in which the unit is firmly moored/anchored at yard.
12. Transit: When the unit changes its position either by towing or by its own means of pro-
pulsion.
Chapter II
General provisions
3
Council of Manning
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may decide that cases of fundamental interest are sub-
mitted to the Council of Manning of Norwegian Mobile Platforms in accordance with the provi-
708
sions laid down by the Ministry of Trade and Industry concerning the terms of reference of the
Council, etc.
4
lations
1
.
1
5
Deviations
Chapter III
Manning during operation
6
Documentation
1. The owner shall submit one copy of the following documentation to the Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate:
1.1. an organization plan;
1.2. job instructions for each post in the organization plan;
1.3. a proposal, the rationale of which is stated and explained, for minimum safe manning
during operation, ref. 8, and industrial disputes. Proposals shall be submitted in tab-
ular form, including areas of application and waters. The table shall indicate the job
titles of the posts with their associated certificates and qualification documents in ac-
cordance with the regulations in force at any time concerning certificates of compe-
tency and qualification requirements for the manning of mobile offshore units.
1.4. Information on any other matter of relevance to the safe operation of the unit.
2. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may require additional documentation within the areas
listed in subsection 1.
7
Manning certificate
1. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate issues the manning certificate with specified job titles,
certificates of competency and qualification requirements. The manning certificate is not va-
lid for manning during time in port and at repair yard or during lay-up, ref. 10 and 11.
710
2. The specifications of manning and the manning certificate issued by the Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate prior to the entry into force of these regulations shall remain in force until a
new manning certificate is issued.
3. The manning certificate shall be posted on board in such a manner that all persons on board
are able to acquaint themselves with the contents.
8
Safe manning
1. The owner shall, in consultation with the platform manager, propose the safe manning nec-
essary to ensure the safety of the unit and the persons on board and prevent pollution of the
marine environment.
2. The proposed safe manning shall be based on the units:
risk analysis
emergency preparedness analysis
Safety Management System
organization plan
job instructions for each post in the organization plan
propulsion machinery output
trade area
3. The proposed safe manning shall cover all relevant operations, tasks and functions for the
safe operation of the unit, including:
3.1. watchkeeping and drills, as well as emergency preparedness;
3.2. operation and maintenance of vital operating system, including propulsion machinery
and safety and emergency system;
3.3. operation and maintenance of navigational bridge, stability control room, engine con-
trol room and helideck;
3.4. internal and external communications;
3.5. anchoring and/or dynamic positioning;
3.6. operations connected with supply vessels, standby rescue vessels and/or tugs;
3.7. control of anchor operations;
3.8. maritime operations such as navigation, manoeuvring, loading conditions, stability,
etc.;
3.9. catering and services for the total number of persons on board;
3.10. first aid, treatment of injuries, and medical assistance;
3.11. safety training and other safety work; and
3.12. any other operation of relevance to the safe manning.
4. Each unit used for accommodation purposes shall have a safety officer of its own.
5. When moving jackup units the number and composition of the safe manning personnel shall
be limited to personnel who are assigned safety-related tasks.
712
9
Organization plan
1. For units the following organization plan shall form the basis of the stipulation of crew:
Chapter IV
Manning during time in port, at repair yard, and lay-up
10
Time in port
Manning during time in port shall be determined by the owner in consultation with the platform
manager on the basis of a list of those safety-related tasks that cease to be performed during time
in port, cf. 8 subsection 3.
In determining the manning due consideration shall be given to safety in connection with work
operations, visits, etc. on board involving persons other than the units crew which are the respon-
sibility of the platform manager as provided above.
The manning thus determined shall be entered in the deck logbook.
11
Time at repair yard, or lay-up
Manning during time at repair yard and lay-up shall be determined by the owner in consultation
with the platform manager on the basis of:
1. a list of those safety-related tasks that cease to be performed during time at repair yard or
when laid up, cf. 8 subsection 3, and
2. a list of safety-related tasks for which a transfer of responsibility has taken place.
Safety-related tasks that are transferred to others shall be entered in the deck logbook and
signed by a person so authorized by the person to whom responsibility has been transferred.
In determining the manning due consideration shall be given to safety in connection with work
operations, visits, etc. involving persons other than the units crew.
714
Chapter V
12
Penalty
13
These regulations enter into force on 15 May 1996.
The Regulations of 23 March 1982 no. 576 concerning the manning of Norwegian drilling units
and other mobile offshore units are repealed as from the same date.
The provisions set out in a letter of 14 May 1982 concerning minimum manning on board Nor-
wegian drilling vessels and other mobile offshore units during an industrial dispute are also re-
pealed as from the same date.
9131/78 Tow assist regulation
716
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
3 Drilling platforms and other mobile units with pro-
pulsion machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
4 Drilling platforms and other mobile units without pro-
pulsion machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
5 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
6 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Regulation 6 February 1978 No. 9131 concerning towing
assistance for drilling platforms and other mobile units of
similar construction when navigating in Norwegian
territorial and inner waters
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Norwegian Maritime Code of
24 June 1994 No. 39, 506 subsection 1, ref. the Crown Prince Regents resolution of 5 May
1967. Amended 11 April 2003 No. 481, cf. the EEA Agreement Appendix II Chapter XIX No. 1
(Directive 98/34/EC).
1
Definitions
In these regulations the following definitions shall apply:
1. Drilling platform: Any mobile unit equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum deposits, with
the exception of drilling ships.
2. Drilling ship: Any ship equipped for drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
3. Other mobile unit: Any unit of a construction similar to a drilling platform, which does not
have drilling as its primary function.
4. Self-propelled: Any drilling platform or other mobile offshore unit which can document the
following:
capability to maintain a speed of 5 knots in calm weather and without current forces acting
on the unit;
capability to keep its position at wind speeds of 20 m/s, including present waves and a cur-
rent of 2m/s;
that the dynamic positioning system has the redundancy required to obtain the NMDs
equipment (DP) class 3; and
that the unit is certified for independent navigation.
718
2
These regulations apply to Norwegian and foreign drilling platforms and other mobile units,
with or without propulsion machinery.
3
Drilling platforms and other mobile units with propulsion machinery
1. Coastal navigation, etc.
1.1. Any drilling platform or other mobile unit equipped with propulsion machinery, shall
in Norwegian territorial and inner waters be accompanied by one or more tugs the pro-
pulsive power of which, together with the propulsion machinery of the platform, pro-
vides sufficient power to manoeuvre or keep the drilling platform/mobile unit in posi-
tion under the maximum sea, wind and weather conditions which may be expected in
the area during the period in question. The towing arrangement shall be ready for im-
mediate connection of the towing line. The platform manager shall decide if and when
towing connection shall be established.
1.2. For drilling platforms or other mobile offshore units which are self-propelled, towing
assistance shall not be required.
2. Entering and leaving port.
2.1. Any drilling platform or other mobile unit equipped with propulsion machinery shall,
when entering or leaving a Norwegian port and also in narrow waters, have esta-
blished towing connection with one or more tugs the propulsive power of which, to-
gether with the propulsion machinery of the platform, provides sufficient power to
manoeuvre and keep the platform or mobile unit in position under the maximum sea,
wind and weather conditions which may be expected in the area during the period in
question.
2.2. Any drilling platform or other mobile offshore unit which is self-propelled shall have
towing assistance available, but a towing connection does not need to be established.
The towing arrangement shall be prepared for immediate connection if the platform
manager decides that connection shall be made.
4
Drilling platforms and other mobile units without propulsion machinery
Any drilling platform or other mobile unit without propulsion machinery shall in Norwegian
territorial and inner waters, including entering and leaving a Norwegian port and in narrow waters
have established towing connection with one or more tugs the propulsive power of which is suf-
ficient to manoeuvre and keep the platform in position under the maximum sea, wind and current
conditions which may be expected in the area during the period in question.
5
Penalty
Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, 339, subsection 2, ref. 48a and 48b, unless a more
720
6
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force at once.
32/86 Radioactive sources
722
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
4 Application for permission concerning the transporta-
tion, storage and use of radioactive sources on board
mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
5 Transportation, storage and use of radioactive sources . . 724
6 Training and protection of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
7 Individual dosimetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
8 Contamination control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
9 Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
10 Withdrawal of permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
11 Shutdown of activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
12 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
13 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
14 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Regulations 13 January 1986 No. 32 for the use of
radioactive sources on board mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 9 June 1903 No 7 relat-
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc. 1 and 42. Amended 11 April 2003 No.
1
Definitions
1. For the purpose of these regulations, the following definitions shall apply:
1.1. Mobile offshore unit: Mobile platform, including drilling ships, carrying equipment
for drilling for subsea petroleum deposits, and mobile platforms used for purposes
other than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
1.2. Platform manager: The senior person in command on board a mobile offshore unit.
1.3. The Directorate: The Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whosoever the Directorate
authorizes.
Amended by regulation 11 April 2003 no.483 (in force 1 July 2003).
2
gian ship register.
724
issue.
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Application for permission concerning the transportation, storage and
use of radioactive sources on board mobile offshore units
1. The owner shall obtain a written permission from the Directorate before the transportation,
storage and use of radioactive sources on board mobile offshore units. The application for
permission shall reach the Directorate well in advance, and at the latest 4 weeks before the
date when the transportation, storage and use of radioactive sources is expected to take place
for the first time.
2. The following drawings, specifications etc. are to be enclosed with the application:
2.1. A general plan showing the location of the storage room for radioactive sources.
2.2. A complete plan for the transportation, storage and use of the radioactive equipment
with a full description of the safety measures which will be taken.
5
Transportation, storage and use of radioactive sources
1. General.
1.1. The transportation, storage and use of radioactive equipment shall be carried out with
due care and attention in order to avoid harmful effects on human life, animal life and
plant life.
2. Transportation.
2.1. Transportation to and from a mobile offshore unit shall normally be effected by ship.
1
2.2. Transportation containers shall satisfy the IAEA (International Atomic and Energy
Agency) requirements.
2.3. During transfer of transportation containers from supply vessels to mobile offshore
units or vice versa, special precautions shall be made in order to prevent the loss of
containers. The platform manager shall make certain that the transfer is carried out un-
der special supervision.
2.4. If transportation has to be effected by helicopter,
2
the sources shall be placed as decid-
ed by the Civil Aviation Authority in order to make landing or take off possible.
3. Storage.
3.1. The storage of radioactive equipment, as well as the design of rooms for such storage,
shall be according to guidelines issued by the Norwegian Radiation Protection Au-
thority
3
.
3.2. Radioactive sources for subsea measurement are not allowed to be stored on board for
longer periods than necessary to carry out the measurement programme.
3.3. The storage room shall be kept locked and marked with the standard warning sign
against ionizing radiation with appropriate text. Workplaces or off-duty quarters shall
726
not be exposed to radiation levels exceeding the maximum levels given in the guide-
lines of the Norwegian Radiation Protection Authority
3
.
3.4. The platform manager shall be informed by the person in charge of use of radioactive
equipment on board, see subsection 4.1 below, about storage and use of radioactive
equipment on board. It is also his duty to keep informed about such storage and use.
4. Use.
4.1. A person representing the owner or the sub-contractor shall be appointed to supervise
all use of radioactive sources. He must have the necessary knowledge of radiation pro-
tection. The Directorate will stipulate what is further to be required of the person in
charge.
4.2. Before the sources are removed from the transportation containers, the person in
charge, cf. subsection 4.1. above, shall assure himself that no unauthorized person is in
the area susceptible to radiation hazard. There shall be a guard on duty and some form
of barrier, as well as signs and warning lamps to the extent necessary to keep unau-
thorized persons away from the radiation area.
4.3. The mounting of the sources on the measurement sonde shall be effected speedily and
accurately, and only with the aid of longhandled instruments. It must be ascertained
that the sources are securely fastened to the measurement sonde before it is lowered
into the well.
4.4. After use, a special radiation monitor shall be employed to check that the sources are
in place in the containers.
1
Transport of dangerous materials on supply vessels to and from installations on the Norwegian continental shelf is regulated
by Regulations of 21 May 1987 No. 406 concerning carriage by ship of special or dangerous cargoes in bulk or as packaged
goods, part IV.
2
With regard to helicopter transportation, regulations concerning the conveyance of goods in aircraft, laid down by the Civil
Aviation Administration (now the Civil Aviation Authority) on 15 May 1979 (latest amendment: 1 April 1997) shall apply.
Special reference is made to subsection 8 concerning dangerous goods. Reference is otherwise made to ICAO doc. 9284 -
AN/905: Technical instructions for the safe transport of dangerous goods by air:
3
Reference is made to guidelines (Strlevernheftene) issued by the Norwegian Radiation Protection Authority, e.g. guide-
line no. 13b; Vilkr for strlevern ved brnnlogging (1997) and guideline no. 20 Vilkr om strlevern ved industriell ra-
diografi (1999).
6
Training and protection of personnel
The personnel used in connection with the transportation, storage and use of radioactive equip-
ment shall be specially trained for this work. The number of persons who participate in this work
or who may otherwise be exposed to radiation hazard shall be restricted to a minimum. All nec-
essary protective measures shall be taken to prevent harmful effects for the above-mentioned per-
sons and for the crew in general on board the platform.
7
Individual dosimetry
When work including use of radioactive sources is carried out, anyone participating in the mea-
surement work shall wear his own individual dosimeter.
8
Contamination control
At regular intervals contamination samples (smear-tests) shall be taken of isotope containers
and measurement sondes.
728
9
Accidents
1. If a radioactive source is mislaid, or if a dispersion of radioactive elements may be expected
as a result of fire, explosion or a similar occurence, the Directorate shall be informed imme-
diately.
2. It is the duty of the person in charge, cf. 5, subsection 4.1., to take steps which aim at pre-
venting further damage as a result of dispersed radioactivity (blocking off the area, monitor-
ing etc.).
10
Withdrawal of permission
1. In the event of serious or repeated violations of the provisions in these regulations, the Direc-
torate may decide to withdraw the permission to use radioactive sources on board.
2. It may also be decided to withdraw permission if the owner, cf. 3, obstructs an inspector
from the Directorate or denies him access to check installations.
3. Where violations are of a less serious nature, the decision to withdraw permission may be
made if the circumstances complained of are not put right within a reasonable time limit
stipulated by the Directorate.
11
Shutdown of activities
Where the continuation of operations might entail serious risk to life or health, for example in
the event of contamination of larger areas on the platform, orders may be given by an inspector
from the Directorate direct to the platform manager for a complete or partial shutdown until the
necessary control-measurements are made and, where appropriate, decontamination is effected.
12
Deviations
13
Penalty
14
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 15 February 1986.
5/75 Rules of the Road at Sea
730
5/75 Rules of the Road at Sea
Regulations 1 December 1965 No. 5 for Preventing
Collisions at Sea
An English version of this regulation, most likely as amended in 2003, will be included in the
forthcoming 2003 edition of the English-language publication Excerpts from the Norwegian Pas-
senger and Cargo Ship Legislation, etc.
For the text in Norwegian of the regulation in force at any time, see www.lovdata.no, or the
Norwegian Maritime Directorates web site, www.sjofartsdir.dep.no.
732
SECTION VI-6:
Environment
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 22 July 1983 no. 1331 concerning the prevention of pollution from the
maritime operation of mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Regulations of 16 June 1983 no. 1122 concerning the prevention of pollution from
ships, etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Regulation of 28 November 2000 No. 1194 concerning environmental declaration in
connection with environmental differentiation for ships and mobile offshore units . . . . 802
Regulation of 2 April 1987 no. 231 concerning the reporting of accidents at sea . . . . 810
Regulation of 9 July 1992 no. 1269 concerning notification of acute pollution or dan-
ger of acute pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Regulations of 12 June 1998 no. 663 concerning a ban on the discharge of sewage, etc.
from ships to watercourses or near-coastal waters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
1331/83 Pollution regulations
734
CONTENTS
1-1 The duty to exercise due care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
1-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
1-3 Scope of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
1-4 Units in transit conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Chapter II: Provisions for the prevention of oil pollu-
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
2-1 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
2-2 Surveys and inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
2-3 Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
2-4 Control of discharge of oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
2-5 Measures for the prevention of oil pollution when bun-
kering from a supply vessel takes place . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
2-6 Oil record book, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
2-7 Discharge of chemicals or other noxious substances . . . 740
2-8 Oil filtering equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
2-9 Tanks for oil residues, pumping and piping arrange-
ments, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
2-10 Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Chapter III: Provisions concerning the disposal of
garbage from ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
3-1 Prohibition of disposal of garbage into the sea . . . . . . . . 742
3-2 Keeping of a record book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4-1 Coercive fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4-2 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4-3 Complaints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4-4 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4-5 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Regulations 22 July 1983 No. 1331 concerning the
prevention of pollution from the maritime operation of
mobile offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7, relating
to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1, 114, 117, 118, 119 and 124, cf. Royal
Decree of 12 October 1979 and Formal Delegation of 8 January 1980. Amended 18 March, 11
November 1985 and 15 March 1989, 2 March 1999, 11 April 2003 No. 482 (ch. the EEA Agree-
ment Appendix II Chapter XIV No. 1 (Directive 98/34/EC)) and 30 June 2003 No. 915.
736
Chapter I
General provisions
1-1
The duty to exercise due care
Each and every person shall exercise due care and take adequate measures so as to prevent the
occurrence of pollution from the maritime operation of mobile offshore units and to reduce the ef-
fects from such pollution.
1-2
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations:
1. Mobile offshore unit or unit means a mobile platform which is equipped for drilling for
subsea petroleum resources including drilling ships and also a mobile platform for uses
other than drilling for subsea petroleum deposits.
2. IMO: International Maritime Organization.
3. IOPP: International Oil Pollution Prevention.
4. ppm means parts per million.
5. Discharge means any release or discharge howsoever caused being part of the maritime op-
eration of the unit. The term includes escape, disposal, spilling, leaking, pumping, emitting
or emptying.
6. Maritime operation means every aspect of the operation of the unit except those connected
with drilling for and exploitation of subsea mineral deposits and associated production pro-
cesses.
1
7. Oil means petroleum in any form including crude oil, fuel oil, sludge, oil refuse and refined
products.
8. Oily mixture means a mixture with any oil content.
9. Garbage means all kinds of victual, domestic and operational waste excluding fresh fish and
parts thereof, generated during the normal operation of the unit and liable to be disposed of
continuously or periodically.
Amended by regulations 29 Dec 1998 No. 1468 (in force 1 Jan 1999) and 11 April 2003 No. 482 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Operational functions connected with drilling for and exploitation of subsea mineral deposits and associated production pro-
cesses, are regulated by Norwegian Petroleum Directorate, from 1 Jan 2004 Norwegian Petroleum Safety Authority.
1-3
1. These regulations, with the exception of 1-4, apply to the maritime operation of mobile off-
shore units.
issue.
3. Mobile offshore units in transit are covered by 1-4 and 4-5 of these regulations.
Amended 20 November 1985 and by Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 482 (in force 1 July 2003).
1-4
Units in transit conditions
For units during transit Regulations of 16 June 1983 No 1122 concerning the prevention of pol-
lution from ships etc. shall apply.
Amended by regulations 11 April 2003 No. 482 (in force 1 July 2003).
738
Chapter II
Provisions for the prevention of oil pollution
2-1
Documentation
2-2
1
Surveys and inspections
Units shall undergo surveys and inspections according to regulation 4 in Appendix I to MAR-
POL
2
:
1. An initial survey before the unit is put into operation or before an IOPP certificate
1
is issued
for the first time. The survey shall be such as to ensure that the structure, equipment, fittings,
arrangements and materials fully comply with the provisions of this chapter.
2. Periodical surveys at intervals not exceeding 5 years. The surveys shall be such as to ensure
that the structure, equipment, fittings, arrangements and materials fully comply with the pro-
visions of this chapter.
3. At least one intermediate survey during the period of validity of the certificate which shall be
such as to ensure that the equipment and associated pump and piping systems and oil filter-
ing systems fully comply with the provisions of this chapter. In those cases where only one
intermediate survey is undertaken during the period of validity of the certificate, this shall
take place not earlier than 6 months before a date which is midway in the period of validity,
and not later than 6 months after that date. Such intermediate surveys shall be endorsed on
the IOPP certificate.
1
Reference is made to Regulations of 4 September 1987 No. 855 concerning notification of newbuilding, survey, and certifi-
cation etc. of mobile offshore units, 5 and 6.
2
The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships 73/78.
2-3
Certificate
The unit shall have a IOPP-certificate in accordance with provisions under the certification re-
gulation
1
.
1
Reference is made to Regulations of 4 September 1987 No. 855 concerning notification of newbuilding, survey and certifi-
cation etc. of mobile offshore units.
2-4
Control of discharge of oil
1. Oil or oily mixtures generated as a result of the maritime operation of the unit may be dis-
charged provided that the oil content of the discharge without dilution does not exceed 15
ppm.
2. Oil residues which cannot be discharged into the sea in compliance with subsection 1 of this
section shall be retained on board or discharged to reception facilities in supply vessels or the
like.
3. The provisions of subsections 1 and 2 shall not apply to:
3.1. discharges necessary for the purpose of securing the safety of the unit, the health of
those on board or saving life
740
3.2. discharges resulting from damage to unit or equipment, provided all reasonable pre-
cautions have been taken both before and after the accident for the purpose of prevent-
ing or minimizing the accident.
Amended 20 November 1985 and 3 June 1993.
2-5
Measures for the prevention of oil pollution when bunkering from a
supply vessel takes place
When transfer of oil from a supply vessel to a unit takes place, the hoses being used shall be
equipped with a non-return valve at the end connected to the supply vessel in order to prevent oil
pollution when the hose is disconnected.
Alternatively, the transfer system of the unit may be provided with a draining valve so that oil is
drained back to the tank on the supply vessel before the hose is disconnected.
2-6
Oil record book, etc.
An oil record book
1
shall be kept as provided in the regulation concerning the form and keeping
of log books for ships and mobile offshore units.
Amended by Regulation 30 June 2003 No. 915 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
See Regulation of 15 September 1992 No. 693 concerning the form and keeping of log books for ships and mobile offshore
units, 11 and 17.
2-7
Discharge of chemicals or other noxious substances
No discharge into the sea shall contain chemicals or other substances in such quantities or con-
centrations as to present a hazard to the marine environment, or contain chemicals or other sub-
stances which have been added in order to evade the requirements for discharges specified in this
chapter.
2-8
Oil filtering equipment
1. Units shall be provided with oil filtering equipment. The equipment shall be type-approved
by a Notified Body and labelled according to the Marine Equipment Regulations
1
.
2. The oil filtering equipment shall be such as to will ensure that any oily mixture discharged
into the sea after passing through the system or systems has an oil content not exceeding 15
ppm. It shall be provided with an alarm which indicates when this level can no longer be
maintained. The equipment shall also be provided with arrangements which ensure that any
discharge of oil mixtures is automatically stopped when the oil content of discharge exceeds
15 ppm.
3. The equipment shall have a capacity of not less than 1.0 ton per hour.
Amended 20 November 1985, 3 June 1993 and 2 March 1999.
1
Regulations of 29 December 1998 No. 1455 concerning marine equipment.
2-9
Tanks for oil residues, pumping and piping arrangements, etc.
1. Reception tank, etc.
1.1. Where the supervising authority finds this practicable, every unit shall be provided
with a tank or tanks of adequate capacity, having regard to the type of machinery and
length of voyage, to receive the oily residue (sludges) which cannot be dealt with
742
otherwise in accordance with the requirements of this chapter, such as those resulting
from the purification of fuel and lubricating oils and oil leakages in the machinery
spaces.
1.2. The tanks shall be designed and constructed so as to facilitate their cleaning and the
discharge of residues to reception facilities.
2. A pump attached to the oil/water separators or filters shall have the same capacity as such
separators and filters.
3. There shall be a piping system leading to a deck for the discharge of oil and oily water to a re-
ception facility in a supply vessel, etc. There shall be on board a standard discharge connec-
tion in accordance with the following specifications:
Outside diameter 215 mm (8 1/2)
Inner diameter According to pipe outside diameter
Bolt circle diameter 183 mm (7 3/16)
Slots in flange 6 holes 22 mm (7/8) in diameter equidistantly placed on a
bolt circle of the above diameter, slotted to the flange peri-
phery. The slot width to be 22 mm.
Flange thickness 20 mm
Bolts and nuts 6, each of 20 mm (3/4) in diameter and of suitable length
Packing Oil resistant material
The flange shall be of steel and have a flat face.
Amended 18 March 1985.
2-10
Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan
1. Mobile units shall have a Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan.
2. Such a plan shall be in compliance with guidelines
1
developed by the IMO and written in the
language of the platform manager and officers on board. The plan must at least include the
following:
2.1. Procedures to be followed by the platform manager or any other responsible person
with obligations to report oil pollution incidents according to Regulations of 2 April
1987 No. 231 concerning the Reporting of Incidents.
2.2. A list of authorities or persons to be contacted immediately in the event of oil pollu-
tion.
2.3. A detailed description of immediate action to be taken by personnel on board in order
to reduce or control oil pollution caused by the event.
2.4. Procedures and locations on board the unit for the co-ordination of measures taken on
board with national and local authorities in order to prevent or mitigate pollution.
Added by Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 482 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
Reference is made to resolution MEPC54(32).
Chapter III
Provisions concerning the disposal of garbage from ships
3-1
Prohibition of disposal of garbage into the sea
Disposal into the sea of garbage is prohibited. Disposal of food wastes only may nevertheless
be permitted when the distance form the nearest land is more than 12 nautical miles and the gar-
bage has passed through a comminuter or grinder. Such comminuted or ground garbage shall be
capable of passing through a screen with openings no greater than 25 mm.
744
3-2
Keeping of a record book
A garbage record book
1
shall be kept as provided in the regulation concerning the form and
keeping of log books for ships and mobile offshore units.
1
units, 11 and 17.
Chapter IV
4-1
Coercive fine
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may impose an open fine on those who do not comply
with recommendations given pursuant to these regulations.
An imposed open fine may be waived when this is considered reasonable. The amount of the
open fine shall be stipulated with due consideration to the importance of having the recommenda-
tion complied with and the estimated costs involved.
The open fine shall be collected by distraint.
Amended by Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 482 (in force 1 July 2003).
4-2
Deviations
4-3
Complaints
Decisions made pursuant to these regulations may be appealed to the Ministry of Environment.
4-4
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of these regulations or decisions made pursuant to these regula-
tions is punishable pursuant to 427 ref. 48a and 48b of the General Civil Penal Code of 22
May 1902 No. 10, by fine or by imprisonment for any term not exceeding 4 months or by both,
provided no stricter penalty is applicable pursuant to any other statutory provision.
746
4-5
Entry into force
1. Entry into force.
1.1. Chapters I and II with the exception of 2-1 and 2-2 enter into force on 2 October
1983.
1.2. Chapter IV and 2-1 and 2-2 enter into force at once.
1.3. Chapter III of the regulations enters into force 1 March 1989.
2. As from 2 October 1983, 25a of Regulations of 10 September 1973 for mobile drilling plat-
forms with installations and equipment used for drilling for petroleum in Norwegian internal
waters, in Norwegian territorial waters and in that part of the Continental Shelf which is un-
der Norwegian Sovereignty, is repealed.
1122/83 Prevention of Pollution from Ships
748
CONTENTS
1-2 The duty to exercise due care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
1-3 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
1-4 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
1-5 Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Chapter 2: Provisions for the prevention of pollution
by oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Part 1 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
2-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
2-3 Drawings, surveys and inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
2-4 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Part 2 Control of operational pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
2-5 Control of the discharge of oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
2-6 Segregated ballast tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
2-7 Arrangement for crude oil washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
2-8 Existing product carriers of 40,000 tons deadweight and
above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
2-9 Requirements for tankers with dedicated clean ballast
tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
2-10 Retention of oil residue on board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
2-11 Oil discharge monitoring and control system and oily
water filtering equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
2-12 Tanks for oil residues, pumps, piping arrangement, etc. . 764
2-13 Pumping, piping and discharge arrangements in oil
tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Part 3 Requirements for minimizing oil pollution
from oil tankers due to side and bottom damage . . . . 768
2-14 Limitation of size and arrangement of cargo tanks . . . . . 768
2-15 Watertight subdivision and stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
2-17 Double hull etc. of tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Part 4 Prevention of pollution resulting from an oil
pollution incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
2-18 Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
from noxious liquid substances in bulk . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
by harmful substances carried in packaged form . . . 776
4-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
4-3 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
4-4 Marking and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
4-5 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
4-6 Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
4-7 Quantity limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
4-8 Discharge of pollutants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
750
Chapter 5: Provisions concerning the Prevention of
Pollution by Garbage from Ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
5-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
5-3 Disposal of garbage outside special areas . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
5-4 Special requirements for disposal of garbage . . . . . . . . . 782
5-5 Disposal of garbage within special areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
5-6 Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
6-1 The right to sail under the Norwegian flag . . . . . . . . . . . 786
6-2 Detention, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
6-3 Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
6-4 Investigation of violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
6-5 Temporary action to guarantee the execution of penal-
ties in assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
6-6 Lien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
6-7 Coercive fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
6-8 Complaints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
6-9 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
6-10 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Appendix A Specifications for the design, installation
and operation of a part flow system for control of over-
board discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Appendix B Requirements relating to tank arrange-
ments and to the limitation of tank size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Regulations 16 June 1983 No. 1122 concerning the
Prevention of Pollution from Ships, etc.
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to 1, 114, 117, 118 and 119 of the
Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., cf. Royal
Decree of 12 October 1979 and Formal Delegation of 8 January 1980. Amended on 28 December
1983, 8 June 1984, 11 November 1985, 2 October 1986, 2 April 1987, 2 March 1989, 12 May
1989, 13 March 1990, 21 January 1991, 15 September 1992, 16 September 1992, 23 February
1993, 3 June 1993, 14 March 1995, 12 May 1998, 29 December 1998, ref. the EEA Agreement,
Annex II and Annex XIII paragraph 119 (Council Directive 96/981/EEC), 28 July 1999, 26 Janu-
ary 2000, 27 June 2000, 4 June 2002, and 30 June 2003 No. 913.
Chapter 1
General provisions
1-1
Unless otherwise provided by 1-5, these regulations shall apply to all Norwegian ships and al-
so to foreign ships in Norwegian territorial waters or in the Norwegian economic zone.
Amended by Regulation of 12 May 1998 no. 552 (effective from 1 Jan 1999).
752
1-2
The duty to exercise due care
Each and every person shall exercise due care and take adequate measures so as to prevent the
occurrence of pollution from ships and to reduce the effects from pollution.
1-3
Exemptions
grant exemption from the requirements of these regulations. There must be special reasons that
make the exemption necessary and it must be justifiable in terms of safety. Exemptions can only
be granted where they do not contravene international agreements to which Norway has acceded.
1-4
Definitions
a) Administration: The Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
b) Accepted: Equipment accepted by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on the basis of
approval or type-approval of the equipment by:
1. a recognized classification society,
2. a Notified Body,
3. another public/private institution specified by name, or
4. the Administration in a country which has ratified the Safety of Life at Sea Conven-
tion.
c) Approved:
1. In respect of equipment covered by the Regulations of 29 December 1998 No. 1455
concerning marine equipment: Type-approved by a Notified Body and marked in
accordance with the said Regulations.
2. In respect of other equipment: Approved or accepted by the Norwegian Maritime
Directorate.
3. In respect of drawings: Approved by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
d) The Convention: means the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution
from Ships, 1973, as amended by the Protocol of 1978 and subsequent additions and
amendments, including agreed interpretations appendices, other appendices, and sup-
plements (MARPOL 73/78).
e) The Organization: means the International Maritime Organization (IMO).
f) ppm means parts per million.
g) The Seaworthiness Act: means the Act of 7 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control
of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc.
h) Ship: means any vessel, including lighters/barges and also mobile offshore platforms
during a transfer. Mobile platforms engaged in exploration, exploitation and associated
production processes of mineral deposits on the Norwegian continental shelf are cov-
ered by Regulations of 22 July 1983 concerning the prevention of pollution from the
maritime operation of mobile offshore units.
i) The supervising authority: means the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whosoever
the Directorate authorizes.
j) Discharge: means any release or discharge, regardless of cause, which is part of the op-
eration of the ship. The term includes any escape, disposal, spilling, leaking, pumping,
emitting or emptying.
Amended by Regulation of 29 December 1998 No. 1462 (effective as from 1 January 1999).
754
1-5
Exceptions
These regulations shall not apply to:
a) a ship belonging to or operated by a state and being engaged in public non-commercial
service, which shall as far as seems reasonable and practicable, comply with the provi-
sions of the present regulations when this does not hinder or impede the operation or op-
eration ability of the ship;
b) naval vessels, and other ships while being used as naval auxiliaries;
c) a discharge which is essential to the safety of the ship, the health of those on board or in
order to save human life; or
d) a discharge resulting from damage to a ship or equipment, if all reasonable precautions
have been taken both prior to and after the occurrence for preventing or minimizing the
discharge.
Chapter 2
Provisions for the prevention of pollution by oil
Part 1 General provisions
2-1
(1) Unless expressly provided otherwise, the provisions of this chapter shall apply to all ships.
(2) In ships other than oil tankers fitted with cargo spaces constructed and utilized to carry oil
in bulk of an aggregate capacity of 200 cubic metres or more, the requirements of regulations 9,
10, 14, 15(1), (2) and (3), 18, 20 and 24(4) of Annex I to the Convention for oil tankers shall also
apply to the construction and operation of those spaces, except that where such aggregate capacity
is less than 1,000 cubic metres, the requirements of regulation 15(4) of Annex I to the Convention
may apply in lieu of regulation 15(1), (2) and (3).
(3) Where a cargo subject to the provisions of Annex II to the Convention is carried in the
cargo space of an oil tanker, the appropriate requirements of Annex II to the Convention shall also
apply.
(4) Any hydrofoil, air-cushion vehicle and other new type of vessel (nearsurface craft, sub-
marine craft, etc.) whose constructional features are such as to render the application of any of the
provisions of Chapters II and III of Annex I to the Convention relating to construction and equip-
ment unreasonable or impracticable may be exempted by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate
from such provisions, provided that the construction and equipment of that ship provides equi-
valent protection against pollution by oil, having regard to the service for which it is intended.
Particulars of any such exemption shall be indicated in the certificate referred to in 2-4.
(5) In the case of existing tankers engaged in a special trade or existing oil tankers with special
ballast arrangements, the provisions of regulation 13 C and 13 D respectively of Annex I to the
Convention shall apply.
2-2
Definitions
(1) For the purpose of this chapter, the following definitions shall apply:
a) Existing oil tanker: (for the purpose of 2-6, 2-7, 2-9, 2-13 fifth paragraph and 2-13
sixth paragraph, subparagraph c, and regulations 13 C and 13 D in Annex I to the Con-
vention) means an oil tanker which is not a new oil tanker as defined in this section.
756
b) Existing ship: means a ship which is not a new ship.
c) A new oil tanker: (for the purpose of 2-6, 2-7 and 2-13 fourth paragraph) means:
1. an oil tanker for which the building contract is placed after 1 June 1979; or
2. in the absence of a building contract, the keel of which is laid, or which is at a simi-
lar stage of construction, after 1 January 1980; or
3. the delivery of which is after 1 June 1982; or
4. which has undergone a major conversion:
4.1. for which the contract is placed after 1 June 1979; or
4.2. in the absence of a contract, the construction is begun after 1 January 1980; or
4.3. which is completed after 1 June 1982, except that for an oil tanker of 70,000
tons deadweight and above, the definition in subparagraph a) of this section
shall apply for the purpose of regulation 13(1) of Annex I to the Convention.
d) New ship: means a ship:
1. for which the building contract is placed after 31 December 1975; or
2. in the absence of a building contract, the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar
stage of construction after 30 June 1976; or
3. the delivery of which is after 31 December 1979; or
4. which has undergone a major conversion:
4.1. for which the contract is placed after 31 December 1975; or
4.2. in the absence of a contract, the construction work of which is begun after 30
June 1976; or
4.3. which is completed after 31 December 1979.
e) Special areas: mean the Mediterranean Sea, the Baltic Sea area, the Black Sea area, the
Red Sea area and the Gulf area, the Gulf of Aden, the Antarctic and northwest European
waters, defined as follows:
1. The Mediterranean Sea means the Mediterranean Sea proper including the gulfs and
seas therein with the boundary between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea con-
stituted by the 41N parallel and bounded to the west by the Straits of Gibraltar at
the meridian of 536W.
2. The Baltic Sea area means the Baltic Sea proper with the Gulf of Bothnia, the Gulf
of Finland and the entrance to the Baltic Sea bounded by the parallel of the Skaw in
the Skagerrak at 5844.8N.
3. The Black Sea area means the Black Sea proper with the boundary between the Me-
diterranean and the Black Sea constituted by the 41N parallel.
4. The Red Sea area means the Red Sea proper including the Gulfs of Suez and Aqaba
bounded to the south by a straight line between Ras si Ane (1228.5N, 4319.6E)
and Husn Murad (1240.4N, 4330.2E).
5. The Gulf area means the sea area northwest of a straight line between Ras al Hadd
(2230N, 5948E) and Ras al Fasteh (2504N, 6125E).
6. The Gulf of Aden means that part of the Gulf of Aden between the Red Sea and the
Arabian Sea bounded in the west by a straight line between Ras si Ane (1228.5N,
4319.6E) and Husn Murad (1240.4N, 4330.2E) and in the east by a straight
line between Ras Asir (1150N, 5116.9E) and Ras Fartak (1535N, 5213.8E).
7. The Antarctic means the sea area south of latitude 60S.
8. The northwest European waters comprise the North Sea and its approaches, the Ir-
ish Sea and its approaches, the Celtic Sea, the English Channel and its approaches,
and the northeast Atlantic right west of Ireland. The sea area is defined by lines
drawn between the following positions: 4827N on the French coast; 4827N,
625W; 4952N, 744W; 5030N, 12W; 5630N, 12W; 62N, 3W; 62N on
the Norwegian coast; and 5744.8N on the Danish and Swedish coasts.
(2) The definitions included in regulation 1 of Annex I to the Convention shall otherwise ap-
ply.
Amended by Regulation of 28 July 1999 No. 873 (effective from 1 August 1999).
758
2-3
Drawings, surveys and inspections
(1) Drawings of systems, equipment, etc. for the prevention of oil pollution of the sea, shall be
submitted for approval in triplicate for each ship. The drawings shall indicate clearly the proposed
installations with segregated ballast tanks, slop tanks, piping, pumps, oil monitoring instruments,
equipment, etc.; necessary information as to the capacity and type, etc. of separators and pumps,
and also information as to instruments and equipment, the volume of tanks, etc., in accordance
with the requirements of this chapter shall further be submitted.
(2) Surveys and inspections to ensure compliance with the requirements laid down in this
chapter shall be made by the supervising authority in accordance with regulation 4 of Annex I to
the Convention.
2-4
Certificates
The provisions of regulations 5, 6, 7 and 8 of Annex I to the Convention shall be complied with.
Part 2 Control of operational pollution
2-5
Control of the discharge of oil
The provisions of regulations 9 and 10 of Annex I to the Convention shall be complied with. An
oil record book
1
shall be kept as provided in the regulation conserning the form and keeping of log
books for ships and mobile offshore units.
Amended by Regulation 30 June 2003 No 913 (in force 1 July 2003).
1
units, 11 and 17.
2-6
Segregated ballast tanks
(1) Every new oil tanker of 20,000 tons deadweight and above, and every new product carrier
of 30,000 tons deadweight and above shall be provided with tanks for segregated ballast.
(2) The capacity of segregated ballast tanks shall be so determined that compliance with the
provisions of regulation 13(2), (4) and (5) of Annex I to the Convention is ensured.
(3) In no case shall water ballast be carried in cargo tanks except:
a) on those rare voyages where the weather conditions are so severe that, in the opinion of
the master, it is necessary to carry additional ballast water in cargo tanks for the safety
of the ship;
b) in exceptional cases, where the particular character of the operation of a ship renders it
necessary to carry ballast water in excess of the quantity prescribed by the first para-
graph of this section, provided that such operation of the oil tanker falls within the cate-
gory exceptional cases, as determined by the Organization.
c) Such additional ballast water shall be processed and discharged in compliance with re-
gulations 9 and 10 of Annex I to the Convention and 2-10, and an entry shall be made
in the oil record book as referred to in part 4 of chapter 2 of the present regulations.
(4) The location of segregated ballast tanks shall be in compliance with regulation 13 E of An-
nex I to the Convention.
760
2-7
Arrangement for crude oil washing
(1) Every new crude oil tanker of 20,000 tons deadweight and above shall be equipped with an
arrangement for crude oil washing.
(2) Existing crude oil tankers of 40,000 tons deadweight and above which are not provided
with segregated ballast tanks, shall, except as provided by regulation 13(9) of Annex I to the Con-
vention, be equipped with an arrangement for crude oil washing.
(3) The arrangement for crude oil washing shall be in accordance with the provisions of Reso-
lution A.446(XI) Revised Specifications for the Design, Operation and Control of Crude Oil
Washing Systems. The provisions contained in regulation 13 B of Annex I to the Convention
shall otherwise be complied with.
2-8
Existing product carriers of 40,000 tons deadweight and above
Existing product carriers of 40,000 tons deadweight and above shall be equipped with segregat-
ed ballast tanks in compliance with 2-6, or shall operate with dedicated clean ballast tanks in
compliance with 2-9.
2-9
Requirements for tankers with dedicated clean ballast tanks
Tankers operating with dedicated clean ballast tanks, shall be in compliance with regulation 13
A of Annex I to the Convention.
2-10
Retention of oil residue on board
(1) Oil tankers of 150 tons gross tonnage and above shall be provided with arrangements for
cleaning the cargo tanks and transferring the dirty ballast residue and tank washings from the
cargo tanks into a slop tank. In existing oil tankers, any cargo tank may be designated as a slop
tank.
(2) Existing oil tankers shall comply with the requirements in respect of slop tank arrange-
ments not later than 2 October 1986.
(3) Slop tank arrangements
a) In this system arrangements shall be provided to transfer the oily waste into a slop tank
or combination of slop tanks in such a way that any effluent discharged into the sea will
be in accordance with the provisions of regulations 9 and 10 of Annex I to the Conven-
tion.
b) The arrangements of the slop tank or combination of slop tanks shall have a capacity
necessary to retain the slops generated by tank washing, oil residues and dirty ballast re-
sidues. The total capacity of the slop tank(s) shall be not less than 3 per cent of the oil
carrying capacity of the ship, except that the Administration may accept:
1. 2 per cent for such oil tankers where the tank washing arrangements are such that
once the slop tank or tanks are charged with washing water, this water is sufficient
for tank washing and, where applicable, for providing the driving fluid for eductors
without the introduction of additional water into the system;
2. 2 per cent where segregated ballast tanks or dedicated clean ballast tanks are provid-
ed in accordance with regulation 13 of Annex I to the Convention, or where a cargo
tank cleaning system using crude oil washing is fitted in compliance with regulation
13 B of Annex I to the Convention. This capacity may be further reduced to 1.5 per
cent for such oil tankers where the tank washing arrangements are such that once
the slop tanks or tanks are charged with washing water, this water is sufficient for
762
tank washing and, where applicable, for providing the driving fluid for eductors,
without the introduction of additional water into the system;
3. 1 per cent for combination carriers where oil cargo is only carried in tanks with
smooth walls. This capacity may be further reduced to 0.8 per cent where the tank
washing arrangements are such that once the slop tank or tanks are charged with
washing water, this water is sufficient for tank washing and, where applicable, for
providing the driving fluid for eductors, without the introduction of additional water
into the system.
c) Slop tanks shall be so designed particularly in respect of the position of inlets, outlets,
baffles or weirs where fitted, so as to avoid excessive turbulence and entrainment of oil
or emulsion with the water.
d) New oil tankers of 70,000 tons deadweight and above shall be provided with at least
two slop tanks.
(4) Oil discharge monitoring and control system
a) Oil tankers referred to in the first and second paragraphs shall be equipped with an ap-
proved oil discharge monitoring and control system. The system shall be in compliance
with the provisions of resolution A.393(X) Recommendation on International Per-
formance and Test Specifications for Oily Water Separating Equipment and Oil Content
Meters, and otherwise satisfy the requirements made by the IMO for such equipment.
1
Existing oil tankers shall be fitted with such equipment no later than 2 October 1986.
b) Any failure of this monitoring and control system shall result in the discharge being
stopped and the failure shall be noted in the oil record book. It shall be possible to use a
manual, alternative method in the event of a failure, but the defective unit shall be made
operative as soon as possible.
c) The port state authority may permit one ballasted voyage before the ship proceeds to the
port of repair.
(5) Oil tankers as referred to in the first and second paragraphs shall be provided with ap-
proved oil/water interface detectors for determination of the oil/water interface in slop tanks and
for other tanks from which slop is discharged direct to the sea.
(6) For tankers of less than 150 tons gross tonnage, control of discharge of oil in accordance
with the provisions of regulations 9 and 10 in Annex I to the Convention shall be effected by the
retention of oil on board with subsequent discharge to reception facilities.
(7) The requirements of the first, second, third and fourth paragraphs of this section shall not
apply to oil tankers carrying asphalt or other products subject to the provisions of Annex I to the
Convention, and which through their physical properties inhibit effective product/water separa-
tion and monitoring, for which the control of discharge under the provisions of regulations 9 and
10 of Annex I to the Convention shall be effected by the retention of residues on board with dis-
charge of all contaminated washings to reception facilities.
(8) Furthermore, the provisions of regulation 15 of Annex I to the Convention shall apply.
1
The latest issue of Guidelines and Specifications for Oil Discharge Monitoring and Control Systems for Oil Tankers is in-
cluded in IMO Document Res. A.586(14).
2-11
Oil discharge monitoring and control system and oily water filtering
equipment
(1) For ships of 400 gross tonnage and above, the provisions of regulation 16 of Annex I to the
Convention shall be complied with.
(2) For ships of less than 400 gross tonnage:
a) The provisions of regulation 16(3)(b) of Annex I to the Convention shall be complied
with. Ships shall be provided with equipment for the retention on board of oily bilge
water, as follows:
764
1. Ships of 200 gross tonnage and above, but less than 400 gross tonnage shall have a
permanently fitted holding tank below deck with piping for the discharge of oily
bilge water to reception facilities.
2. Ships of 100 gross tonnage and above, but less than 200 gross tonnage shall have a
permanently fitted holding tank below or on the deck with piping for the discharge
of oily bilge water to reception facilities.
3. Ships of 15 m in length and above, but of less than 100 gross tonnage shall have a
permanently fitted holding tank or a properly fixed holding drum with piping for
the discharge of oily bilge water to reception facilities.
Amended by regulations of 14 March 1995 and 25 January 2000 (effective as from 1 April 2000).
2-12
Tanks for oil residues, pumps, piping arrangement, etc.
(1) Reception tank, etc.
a) Every ship of 400 gross tonnage and above shall be provided with a tank or tanks of
adequate capacity, having regard to the type of machinery and length of voyage, to re-
ceive the oily residue (sludges) which cannot be dealt with otherwise in accordance
with the requirements of this chapter, such as those resulting from the purification of
fuel and lubricating oils and oil leakages in the machinery spaces.
b) In new ships, such tanks shall be designed and constructed so as to facilitate their clean-
ing and the discharge of residues to reception facilities. Existing ships shall comply
with this requirement as far as is reasonable and practicable.
c) Piping arrangements to and from tanks for oil residues shall have no direct overboard
connection other than standard overboard discharge arrangements, as referred to in 2-
12 third paragraph.
(2) Pumps
a) Pumps connected to the bilge water separator shall have the same capacity as this sep-
arator.
b) Where a separator of a capacity which exceeds that which is required is used, the pump
may, however, comply with the requirements for a separator in accordance with the size
of the ship.
c) Pumps the capacity of which must be adjusted in order to fit the bilge water separator,
are not permitted.
d) Pumps used for the discharge of oil and oily mixtures to reception facilities on shore
shall be capable of being stopped from deck, either by means of a stop button or a com-
munication system.
(3) Piping
a) The piping system for the separator, collecting tank and pumps shall be laid as simply as
possible and be so arranged that any wrong pumping is prevented. The deck-wash pipes
and fire main are not permitted to be used for this purpose.
b) Permanent pipe connections between the piping arrangements mentioned above and
cargo tanks intended for the carriage of oil are not permitted.
c) There shall be a separate piping system leading to a deck for the discharge of oil and oi-
ly water from machinery spaces to reception facilities ashore.
d) The piping system shall be fitted with a standard discharge connection as referred to in
subparagraph e).
e) The standard discharge connection shall be in accordance with the following specif-
ications:
1. Outside diameter: 215 mm (8 1/2).
2. Inner diameter: According to pipe outside diameter.
3. Bolt circle diameter: 183 mm (7 3/16).
766
4. Slots in flange: 6 holes 22 mm (7/8) in diameter equidistantly placed on a bolt cir-
cle of the above diameter, slotted to the flange periphery. The slot width to be 22
mm.
5. Flange thickness: 20 mm.
6. Bolts: 6 in number, each of 20 mm (3/4) in diameter.
7. Packing: oil-resistant material.
8. The flange shall be of steel and have a flat face.
(4) Combined water tanks and fuel oil tanks
a) In new tankers of 150 gross tonnage and above and in new ships other than tankers of
4,000 gross tonnage and above, double bottom tanks or other tanks for alternate use of
oil fuel and water ballast are not permitted. Where abnormal conditions or the need to
carry large quantities of oil fuel render it necessary to carry ballast water which is not
clean ballast in any oil fuel tank, such ballast water shall be discharged to reception fa-
cilities, or an instrument for monitoring the oil content of the ballast water which is
pumped over board shall be provided. The arrangement shall be approved.
1. All other ships shall comply with the requirements of subparagraph a) as far as is
reasonable and practicable.
b) In any ship of 400 gross tonnage or above, for which the building contract is placed
after 1 January 1982, or, in the absence of a building contract, the keel of which is laid
or which is at a similar stage of construction after 1 July 1982, oil shall not be carried in
an forpeak tank or in any tank forward of the collision bulkhead.
1. All other ships shall comply with the requirements of subparagraph b) as far as is
reasonable and practicable.
(5) Arrangements other than those referred to in this Section, such as an arrangement in con-
nection with a combustion plant may be approved in individual cases.
2-13
Pumping, piping and discharge arrangements in oil tankers
(1) In every oil tanker, a discharge manifold for connection to reception facilities for the dis-
charge of dirty ballast water or oil contaminated water shall be located on the open deck on both
sides of the ship.
(2) In every oil tanker, pipelines for the discharge to the sea of ballast water or oil contaminat-
ed water from cargo tank areas which may be permitted under the provisions of regulations 9 and
10 in Annex I to the Convention shall be led to the open deck or to the ships side above the water-
line in the deepest ballast condition. Different piping arrangements to permit operation in the
manner permitted in the sixth paragraph of this section, subparagraphs a)-e), may be accepted.
(3) In new oil tankers, means shall be provided for stopping the discharge into the sea of ballast
water or oil contaminated water from cargo tank areas, other than those discharges below the wa-
terline permitted under the sixth paragraph of this section, from a position on the upper deck or
above, located so that the manifold in use referred to in the first paragraph of this section and the
discharge to the sea from the pipelines referred to in the second paragraph of this section may be
visually observed. Means for stopping the discharge need not be provided at the observation posi-
tion if a positive communication system such as telephone or radio system is provided between
the observation position and the discharge control position.
(4) Every new oil tanker required to be provided with segregated ballast tanks or fitted with a
crude oil washing system shall comply with the following requirements:
a) It shall be equipped with oil piping so designed and installed that oil retention in the
lines is minimized; and
b) means shall be provided to drain all cargo pumps and all oil lines at the completion of
cargo discharge, where necessary by connection to a stripping device. The line and
pump drainings shall be capable of being discharged both ashore and to a cargo tank or
a slop tank. For discharge ashore a special small diameter line shall be provided and
shall be connected outboard of the ships manifold valves.
768
(5) Every existing oil tanker required to be provided with segregated ballast tanks, or to be fit-
ted with a crude oil washing system, or to operate with dedicated clean ballast tanks, shall comply
with the provisions of the fourth paragraph subparagraph b) of this section.
(6) Operational discharges of oil or oily mixtures from oil tankers are covered by the provi-
sions of regulations 9 and 10 of Annex I to the Convention. On every oil tanker the discharge of
ballast water or oil contaminated water from cargo tank areas shall take place above the waterline,
except as follows:
a) Segregated ballast and clean ballast may be discharged below the waterline:
1. in ports or at offshore terminals, or
2. at sea without the use of a pump, provided that the surface of the ballast water has
been examined immediately before the discharge to ensure that no contamination
with oil has taken place.
b) Existing oil tankers which, without modification, are not capable of discharging segre-
gated ballast above the waterline may discharge segregated ballast below the waterline
at sea, provided that the surface of the ballast water has been examined immediately be-
fore the discharge to ensure that no contamination with oil has taken place.
c) Existing oil tankers operating with dedicated clean ballast tanks, which without mod-
ification are not capable of discharging ballast water from dedicated clean ballast tanks
above the waterline, may discharge this ballast below the waterline provided that the
discharge of the ballast water is supervised in accordance with regulation 13A (3) of
Annex I to the Convention.
d) On every oil tanker at sea, dirty ballast water or oil contaminated water from tanks in
the cargo area, other than slop tanks, may be discharged without the use of a pump be-
low the waterline, provided that sufficient time has elapsed in order to allow oil/water
separation to have taken place and the ballast water has been examined immediately be-
fore the discharge with an oil/water interface detector referred to in 2-10, fifth pa-
ragraph, in order to ensure that the height of the interface is such that the discharge does
not involve any increased risk of harm to the marine environment.
e) On existing oil tankers at sea, dirty ballast water or oil contaminated water from cargo
tank areas may be discharged below the waterline, subsequent to or in lieu of the dis-
charge by the method referred to in subparagraph d) above, provided that:
1. a part of the flow of such water is led through permanent piping to a readily acces-
sible location on the upper deck or above where it may be visually observed during
the discharge operation; and
2. such part flow arrangements comply with the requirements established by the Ad-
ministration, which shall contain at least all the provisions of the Specifications for
the Design, Installation and Operation of a Part Flow System for Control of Over-
board Discharges adopted by the Organization, and reproduced in Appendix A to
these regulations.
Part 3 Requirements for minimizing oil pollution from oil tankers
due to side and bottom damage
2-14
Limitation of size and arrangement of cargo tanks
(1) Every new oil tanker shall comply with the provisions of regulations 22, 23 and 24 of An-
nex I to the Convention, in respect of damage assumptions, hypothetical outflow of oil and lim-
itation of size and arrangement of cargo tanks.
(2) Every existing oil tanker of 150 gross tonnage and above shall comply with the provisions
of Appendix B to these regulations, if
a) the delivery of the ship is after 1 January 1977; or
770
b) delivery is not later than 1 January 1977, and the building contract is placed after 1 Ja-
nuary 1974, or in cases where no building contract has previously been placed, the keel
is laid or the tanker is at a similar stage of construction after 30 June 1974.
Amended by Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 913 (in force 1 July 2003, previously 2-15).
2-15
Watertight subdivision and stability
(1) Every new oil tanker shall comply with the subdivision and damage stability criteria as
specified in the third paragraph of this section, after the assumed side or bottom damage as spec-
ified in the second paragraph of this section, for any operating draught reflecting actual partial or
full load conditions consistent with trim and strength of the ship as well as specific gravities of the
cargo. Such damage shall be applied to all conceivable locations along the length of the ship as
follows:
a) in tankers of more than 225 metres in length, anywhere in the ships length;
b) in tankers of more than 150 metres, but not exceeding 225 metres in length, anywhere in
the ships length except involving either after or forward bulkhead bounding the ma-
chinery space located aft. The machinery space shall be treated as a single floodable
compartment;
c) in tankers not exceeding 150 metres in length, anywhere in the ships length between
adjacent transverse bulkheads with the exception of the machinery space. For tankers of
100 metres or less in length where all requirements of the third paragraph of this section
cannot be fulfilled without materially impairing the operational qualities of the ship, the
Administration may allow relaxations from these requirements. Ballast conditions
where the tanker is not carrying oil in cargo tanks excluding any oil residue, shall not be
considered.
(2) The following provisions regarding the extent and the character of the assumed damage
shall apply:
a) Side damage:
1. Longitudinal extent 1/3(L
2/3
) or 14,5 metres,
whichever is less
2. Transverse extent
(inboard from the ships
side at right angles to the
centreline at the level of the
summer load line)
B/5 or 11.5 metres,
whichever is less
3. Vertical extent From the moulded line of the bottom shell plating at
centreline, upwards without limit
b) Bottom damage For 0.3 L from the
forward perpendicular of
the ship
Any other part of the ship
1. Longitudinal extent 1/3(L
2/3
) or 1/3(L
2/3
) or 5
14,5 metres, whichever is
less metres, whichever is less
2. Transverse extent B/6 or 10 metres,
whichever is less B/6 or 5 metres,
whichever is less
3. Vertical extent B/15 or 6 metres,
whichever is less,
measured from the
moulded line of the
bottom shell plating at
centreline
B/15 or 6 metres,
whichever is less,
measured from the
moulded line of the
bottom shell plating at
centreline
c) If any damage of a lesser extent than the maximum extent of damage specified in the
772
second paragraph, subparagraphs a) and b) would result in a more severe conditon, such
damage shall be considered.
d) Where the damage involving transverse bulkheads is envisaged as specified in the sec-
ond paragraph, subparagraphs a) and b) of this section, transverse watertight bulkheads
shall be spaced at least at a distance equal to the longitudinal extent of assumed damage
specified in the second paragraph, subparagraph a) in order to be considered effective.
Where transverse bulkheads are spaced at a lesser distance, one or more of these bulk-
heads within such extent of damage shall be assumed as nonexistent for the purpose of
determining flooded compartments.
e) Where the damage between adjacent transverse watertight bulkheads is envisaged as
specified in the first paragraph, subparagraph c) of this section, no main transverse
bulkhead or a transverse bulkhead bounding side tanks or double bottom tanks shall be
assumed damaged, unless:
1. the spacing of the adjacent bulkheads is less than the longitudinal extent of assumed
damage specified in the second paragraph, subparagraph a); or
2. there is a step or a recess in a transverse bulkhead of more than 3.05 metres in
length, located within the extent of penetration of assumed damage. The step
formed by the after peak bulkhead and after peak tank top shall not be regarded as a
step for the purpose of this section.
f) If pipes, ducts or tunnels are situated within the assumed extent of damage, arrange-
ments shall be made so that progressive flooding cannot thereby extend to compart-
ments other than those assumed to be floodable for each case of damage.
(3) Oil tankers shall be regarded as complying with the damage stability criteria if the follow-
ing requirements are met:
a) The final waterline, taking into account sinkage, heel and trim, shall be below the lower
edge of any opening through which progressive flooding may take place. Such openings
shall include air pipes and those which are closed by means of weathertight doors or
hatch covers and may exclude those openings closed by means of watertight manhole
covers and flush scuttles, small watertight cargo tank hatch covers which maintain the
high integrity of the deck, remotely operated watertight sliding doors, and side scuttles
of the non-opening type.
b) In the final stage of flooding, the angle of heel due to unsymmetrical flooding shall not
exceed 25 degrees, provided that this angle may be increased up to 30 degrees if no
deck edge immersion occurs.
c) The stability in the final stage of flooding shall be investigated and may be regarded as
sufficient if the righting lever curve has at least a range of 20 degrees beyond the posi-
tion of equilibrium in association with a maximum residual righting lever of at least 0.1
metre within the 20 degrees range; the area under the curve within this range shall not
be less than 0.0175 metre radians. Unprotected openings shall not be immersed within
this range unless the space concerned is assumed to be flooded. Within this range, the
immersion of any of the openings listed in subparagraph a) above and other openings
capable of being closed weathertight may be permitted.
d) The Administration shall be satisfied that the stability is sufficient during intermediate
stages of flooding.
e) Equalization arrangements requiring mechanical aids such as valves or cross-levelling
pipes, if fitted, shall not be considered for the purpose of reducing an angle of heel or at-
taining the minimum range of residual stability to meet the requirements of subpara-
graphs a), b) and c) above and sufficient residual stability shall be maintained during all
stages where equalization is used. Spaces which are linked by ducts of a large cross-
sectional area may be considered to be common.
(4) The requirements of the first paragraph of this section shall be confirmed by calculations
which take into consideration the design characteristics of the ship, the arrangements, configura-
tion and contents of the damaged compartments; and the distribution, specific gravities and the
free surface effect of liquids. The calculations shall be based on the following:
774
a) Account shall be taken of any empty or partially filled tank, the specific gravity of
cargoes carried, as well as any outflow of liquids from damaged compartments.
b) The permeabilities assumed for spaces flooded as a result of damage shall be as follows:
Spaces Permeabilities
Appropriated to stores 0.60
Occupied by accommodation 0.95
Occupied by machinery 0.85
Voids 0.95
Intended for consumable liquids 0 to 0.95
Intended for other liquids 0 to 0.95
The permeability of partially filled compartments shall be consistent with the amount of
liquid carried in the compartment. Whenever damage penetrates a tank containing liqui-
d, it shall be assumed that the contents are completely lost from that compartment and
replaced by salt water up to the level of the final plane of equilibrium.
c) The buoyancy of any superstructure directly above the side damage shall be disregard-
ed. The unflooded parts of superstructures beyond the extent of damage, however, may
be taken into consideration provided that they are separated from the damaged space by
watertight bulkheads and the requirements of the third paragraph, subparagraph a)
above in respect of these intact spaces are complied with. Hinged watertight doors may
be acceptable in watertight bulkheads in the superstructure.
d) The free surface effect shall be calculated at an angle of heel of 5 degrees for each in-
dividual compartment. The Administration may require or allow the free surface cor-
rections to be calculated at an angle of heel greater than 5 degrees for partially filled
tanks.
e) In calculating the effect of free surfaces of consumable liquids it shall be assumed that,
for each type of liquid at least one transverse pair or a single centreline tank has a free
surface and the tank or combination of tanks to be taken into account shall be those
where the effect of free surfaces is the greatest.
(5) The master of every oil tanker and the person in charge of a new nonself-propelled oil tank-
er to which Annex I to the Convention applies shall be supplied in an approved form with:
a) information relative to loading and distribution of cargo necessary to ensure compliance
with the provisions of this section; and
b) data on the ability of the ship to comply with damage stability criteria as determined by
this section, including the effect of relaxations that may have been allowed under the
first paragraph, subparagraph c) of this section.
Amended by Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 913 (in force 1 July 2003, previously 2-16).
2-16
The provisions of regulation 25 A of Annex I to the Convention, which contain requirements
relating to intact stability for certain oil tankers, shall be complied with.
Added by Regulation of 26 January 2000 No. 63. Amended by Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 913 (in force 1 July 2003, pre-
viously 2-16a).
2-17
Double hull etc. of tankers
The provisions of regulation 13F and 13G of Annex I to the Convention shall be complied with.
Amended by Regulation of 26 January 2000 No. 63 (previously 2-16a), and Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 913 (in force 1
July 2003, previously 2-16b).
776
Part 4 Prevention of pollution resulting from an oil pollution
incident
2-18
Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan
(1) Oil tankers of 150 gross tonnage and above, and other ships of 400 gross tonnage and
above, shall carry on board a Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan approved by the Norwe-
gian Maritime Directorate or by a survey institution recognized by the Directorate. Ships deli-
vered before 4 April 1993 shall have this plan after 4 April 1995.
(2) This plan shall be in accordance with guidelines
1
developed by the Organization and be
written in the working language of the shipmaster and officers on board. The plan shall contain at
least:
a) Procedures to be followed by the person responsible for reporting the oil pollution in-
cident (i.e. the shipmaster or other person responsible for the ship) under the Regula-
tions of 2 April 1987 no. 231 concerning the Reporting of Incidents at Sea.
b) A list of authorities or persons to be contacted in the event of oil polution incidents.
c) A detailed description of immediate prcautions to be taken by persons on board to re-
duce or control the oil discharge resulting from the incident.
d) Procedures and points of contact on board the ship for the co-ordination of shipboard
measures with national and local authorities to combat the pollution.
Amended by Regulation of 27 June 2000 No. 687 (effective as from 1 July 2000) and Regulation of 30 June 2003 No. 913 (in
force 1 July 2003, previously 2-17).
1
Ref. Resolution MEPC. 54 (32).
Chapter 3
Provisions for the prevention of pollution from noxious liquid
substances in bulk
1
1
Repealed by Regulations of 2 April 1987 No. 230, effective as from 6 April 1987.
Chapter 4
Provisions for the prevention of pollution by harmful
substances carried in packaged form
4-1
(1) Unless otherwise expressly stated, this chapter shall apply to all ships carrying pollutants in
packaged form. In addition, empty containers/packages previously used for the carriage of pollu-
tants shall themselves be treated as pollutants unless adequate safety precautions have been taken
to ensure that they contain no residue representing a hazard to the marine environment.
(2) The requirements in this chapter do not apply to provisions and equipment on board ships.
4-2
Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter, the following definitions shall apply:
a) SOLAS 74: The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea 1974, including
subsequent amendments and additions.
778
b) IMDG Code: The IMOs code for dangerous goods in packaged form (International
Maritime Dangerous Goods Code).
c) Pollutants: Harmful substances marked as MARINE POLLUTANTS in the IMDG
Code. Substances are regarded as marine pollutants if they:
are bioaccumulated to a significant extent and known to produce a hazard to aquatic
life or human
health; or
are bioaccumulated and involve a hazard to aquatic organisms or to human health
with a short retention of one week or less; or
are liable to produce tainting of sea food; or
are highly toxic to aquatic life (defined as LC50/96 hours less than 1 ppm). A con-
centration of the substance smaller than 1 part per million parts water will withion 96
hours kill 50% of the organisms exposed to the substance.
d) Packaged form: Packages specially designed for harmful substances in the IMDG
Code.
e) Document: Document as referred to in 4-5 including electronic data supporting paper
documentation.
4-3
Packaging
Packaging shall be such as to minimize the hazard to the marine environment having regard to
the specific contents of the package. The requirements for each substance in the IMDG Code shall
be satisfied.
4-4
Marking and labels
(1) Packages containing a pollutant shall be durably marked with the correct technical name
(not just the trade name), and shall also be marked or labelled to indicate that the substance is a
marine pollutant. Where possible, such identification shall be supplemented by other means, for
example, by use of the appropriate United Nations (UN) number.
(2) On packages containing a pollutant, marking showing the correct technical name and the
label shall be such as to allow the above information to be identifiable on packages surviving at
least three months immersion in the sea. Marking shall be appropriate to the durability of the ma-
terials used for packing and the surface of the package.
(3) Packages containing small amounts of pollutants may be exempted from the marking re-
quirements if they are exempted in the IMDG Code.
4-5
Documentation
(1) In all documents relating to the carriage of pollutants be sea where such substances are
named, the correct technical name of each such substance shall be used (trade names alone shall
not be used) and the substance further identified by the addition of the words MARINE POLLU-
TANT.
(2) The shipping documents supplied by the shipper shall include, or be accompanied by, a
signed certificate or declaration that the shipment offered for carriage is properly packaged and
marked or labelled and in proper condition for carriage to minimize the hazard to the marine envi-
ronment.
(3) Each ship carrying pollutants shall have a special list or manifest setting forth the pollutants
on board and the location thereof. A detailed stowage plan, which sets out the location of the pol-
lutants on board, may be used in place of such special list or manifest. Copies of such documents
shall also be retained on shore by the owner of the ship or his representative until the pollutants are
780
unloaded. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the per-
son or organization designated by the port State authority.
(4) When the ship carries a special list or manifest or a detailed stowage plan, required for the
carriage of dagerous goods by the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974
1
,
the documents required by this section may be combined with those for dangerous goods. Where
documents are combined, a clear distinction shall be made between dangerous goods and pollu-
tants covered by this chapter.
1
Chapter VII in Regulations of 21 May 1987 No. 406 concerning Carriage by Ship of Special or Dangerous Cargoes in Bulk
or as Packaged Goods.
4-6
Stowage
Pollutants shall be properly stowed and secured so as to minimize the hazards to the marine en-
vironment without impairing the safety of the ship and persons on board.
4-7
Quantity limitations
Certain pollutants may, for sound scientific and technical reasons, need to be prohibited for car-
riage or be limited as to the quantity which may be carried aboard any one ship. In limiting the
quantity, due consideration shall be given to the size, construction an equipment of the ship, as
well as the packaging and the inherent nature of the substances.
4-8
Discharge of pollutants
(1) Jettisoning of pollutants carried in packaged form is prohibited, except where necessary for
the purpose of securing the safety of the ship or saving life at sea.
(2) In the event of leakages from pollutants carried on board in packaged form, appropriate
lawful measures shall be taken to regulate the washing of leakages overboard, provided that com-
pliance with such measures would not impair the safety of the ship or persons on board. The mea-
sures shall be based on the physical, chemical and biological properties of pollutants.
Chapter 5
Provisions concerning the Prevention of Pollution by Garbage
from Ships
5-1
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all ships.
5-2
Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter, the following definitions shall apply:
a) Garbage: means all kinds of victual, domestic and operational waste excluding fresh
fish and parts thereof, generated during the normal operation of the ship and liable to be
disposed of continuously or periodically except those substances which are defined or
listed in other Annexes to MARPOL 73/78.
782
b) Nearest land: the term from the nearest land means from the base line from which the
territorial sea of the territory in question is established in accordance with international
law except that, for the purposes of the present convention from the nearest land off
the northeastern coast of Australia shall mean from a line drawn from a point on the
coast of Australia in latitude 1100 South, longitude 14208 East to a point in latitude
1035 South, longitude 14155 East,
thence to a point latitude 1000 South, longitude 14200 East,
thence to a point latitude 2100 South, longitude 15300 East
thence to a point on the coast of Australia in latitude 2442 South, longitude 15315
East.
c) Special area: means a sea area where for recognized technical reason in relations to its
oceanographical and ecological conditions and to the particular character of its traffic
the adoption of special mandatory methods for the prevention of sea pollution by gar-
bage is required. Special areas shall include those listed in 5-5 of this chapter.
5-3
Disposal of garbage outside special areas
(1) Unless otherwise provided in 5-4, 5-5, and 5-6 of this chapter:, the following shall ap-
ply:
a) The disposal into the sea of all plastics, including but not limited to synthetic ropes, syn-
thetic fishing nets and plastic garbage bags is prohibited.
b) The disposal into the sea of garbage as mentioned above shall be made as far as practic-
able from the nearest land but in any case is prohibited if the distance from the nearest
land is less than:
1. 25 nautical miles for dunnage, lining and packing materials which will float,
2. 12 nautical miles for food wastes and all other garbage including paper products,
rags, glass, metal, bottles, crockery and similar refuse.
c) Disposal into the sea of garbage specified in subparagraph b)2 above may be permitted
when it has passed through a comminuter of grinder and made as far as practicable from
the nearest land but in any case is prohibited if the distance from the nearest land is less
than 3 nautical miles. Such comminuted or ground garbage shall be capable of passing
through a screen with openings no greater than 25 millimetres.
(2) When the garbage is mixed with other discharges having different disposal or discharge re-
quirements the more stringent requirements shall apply.
(3) A garbage record book
1
shall be kept as provided in the regulation concerning the form and
keeping og log books for ships and mobile offshore units.
1
units, 13 and 15, sixth paragraph, subparagraph i).
5-4
Special requirements for disposal of garbage
(1) Subject to the provisions of the second paragraph, the disposal of any material regulated by
this chapter is prohibited from ships when alongside or within 500 metres of fixed or mobile plat-
forms engaged in the exploration, exploitation and associated offshore processing of seabed min-
eral resources.
(2) The disposal into the sea of food wastes may be permitted when they have been passed
through a comminuter or grinder from ships alongside or within 500 metres of fixed or mobile
784
platforms located more than 12 nautical miles from land. Such comminuted or ground food
wastes shall be capable of passing through a screen with openings no greater than 25 millimetres.
5-5
Disposal of garbage within special areas
(1) For the purpose of this chapter the special areas are the Mediterranean Sea area, the Baltic
Sea area, the Black Sea, the Red Sea area, and the Gulfs area the North Sea area, the Antartic
area, and Greater Caribbean Region, including the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Ocean,
which are defined as follows:
a) The Mediterranean Sea area means the Mediterranean Sea proper including the gulfs
and seas therein with the boundary between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea con-
stituted by the 41 N parallel and bounded to the west by the Straits of Gibraltar at the
meridian of 536 W.
b) The Baltic Sea area means the Baltic Sea proper with the Gulf of Bothnia and the Gulf
of Finland and the entrance to the Baltic Sea bounded by the parallel of the Skaw in the
Skagerrak at 5744.8 N.
c) The Black Sea area means the Black Sea proper with the boundary between the Medi-
terranean and the Black Sea constituted by the parallel 41 N.
d) The Red Sea area means the Red Sea proper including the Gulfs of Suez and Aqaba
bounded at the south by the rhumb line between Ras si Ane (128.5 N, 4319.6 E) and
Husn Murad (1240.4 N, 4330.2 E).
e) The Gulf area means the sea area located north-west of the rhumb line between Ras al
Hadd (2230 N, 5948 E) and Ras al Faseth (2504 N, 6125 E).
f) The North Sea area encompasses the North Sea proper within the boundaries for this sea
area south of 62N and east of 4W, Skagerrak, the southern boundary east of Skagerrak
at 57 44,8 and the English Channel east of 5W and north of 48 30 N.
g) The Antartic area means the area south of latitude 60S.
h) The Greater Caribbean Region means the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Ocean
proper, including its gulfs and seas and the part of the Atlantic Ocean that comes within
the boundaries of 30N from Florida eastward to 7730 W, thence a rhumb line to the
point of intersection between 20N and 59W, thence a rhumb line to the point of in-
tersection between 720 N and 59W, thence a rhumb line south-west to the eastern-
most border of French Guyana.
(2) Disposal into the sea of the following is prohibited:
a) all plastics, including synthetic ropes, synthetic fishing nets and plastic garbage bags,
and
b) all other garbage except food wastes.
(3) Disposal into the sea of food wastes shall be made as far as practicable from land, but in
any case not less than 12 nautical miles from the nearest land.
(4) In the Greater Caribbean Region the disposal of food wastes having passed through a com-
minuter or grinder may be made within 12 nautical miles, if the distance to the nearest land is at
least 3 nautical miles. Such comminuted or ground food wastes shall be capable of passing
through a screen with openings no greater than 25 millimetres.
(5) All ships entering the Antarctic area shall have sufficient capacity on board for the reten-
tion of garbage produced on board while operating in the area and have concluded arrangements
to discharge such garbage at a reception facility.
(6) When the garbage is mixed with other discharges having different disposal or discharge re-
quirements, the more stringent requirements shall apply.
786
5-6
Exceptions
The provisions of 5-3, 5-4 and 5-5 of this chapter shall not apply to:
a) the disposal of garbage from a ship necessary for the purpose of securing the safety of a
ship and those on board or saving life at sea, or
b) the escape of garbage resulting from damage to a ship or its equipment provided all rea-
sonable precautions have been taken before and after the occurrence of the damage, for
the purpose of preventing or minimizing the escape, or
c) the accidental loss of synthetic fishing nets, provided that all reasonable precautions
have been taken to prevent such losses.
5-7
Repealed by Regulation 39 June 2003 No. 913, in force 1 July 2003.
Chapter 6
6-1
The right to sail under the Norwegian flag
A ship which does not have on board any certificate which it is required to have on board under
these regulations, is not permitted to sail under the Norwegian flag.
6-2
Detention, etc.
(1) In connection with the control to ensure that these regulations are complied with, the super-
vising authority may decide that ships which:
a) do not have a valid certificate on board as required by these regulations, or
b) have made a discharge in defiance of these regulations, or
c) do not satisfy the requirements regarding construction and equipment laid down in
these regulations and where there are clear grounds to suspect that the ship represents an
unreasonable threat of harm to the marine environment, shall be detained, moved,
turned away, shall go into port, use a special shipping lane, shall be unloaded, etc. until
such time as it is established that the ship no longer presents such a threat of harm.
(2) 24-33 of the Seaworthiness Act shall apply correspondingly to decisions made pursuant
to the first paragraph of this section.
(3) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall be informed immediately of descisions made
pursuant to this section. The master and the owner of the ship shall be notified immediately of the
decision in writing, and about the reason for the decision. If the decision refers to a foreign ship,
the Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall give a written notification of the decision and of the
reason why the decision was considered necessary, to the consul or the diplomatic representative
of the State whose flag the ship is flying. The police, the customs authorities and the pilotage au-
thorities shall also be notified of the decision.
6-3
Investigation
The provisions of the third chapter of the Seaworthiness Act shall apply correspondingly to the
investigation of violations of these regulations.
788
6-4
Investigation of violations
When there are clear grounds to suspect violation of the provisions of these regulations the ship
may be stopped or boarded for investigation. In the event of such an investigation, samples may
be taken, inter alia of the cargo, ballast and bunkers as well as of the contents of bilges and collect-
ing tanks.
6-5
Temporary action to guarantee the execution of penalties in assets
(1) In case of violation of these regulations or of individual decisions given in pursuance of the
same, the prosecuting authority may decide that the ship shall be detained in order to guarantee
the execution of penalities in assets.
(2) In case of violation of the provisions of these regulations, the prosecuting authority may
decide that the ship shall be seized.
(3) The decision concerning seizure or detention pursuant to the first and second paragraphs
shall, within 24 hours, be brought before the court, which shall decide whether a lien shall be im-
posed in accordance with 6-6, or whether the ship shall be released. If the time limit falls on a
Saturday, a holiday, or a day which according to the law is equivalent to a holiday, the time limit
shall be extended until the same hour on the next following weekday.
6-6
Lien
(1) In order to ensure payment of a fine pursuant to 6-9, the imposition of which is assumed,
as well as litigation costs that will presumably be imposed, the court may at the request of the pro-
secuting authority decide to impose a lien on the ship for a specified amount, when there is reason
to suspect that the execution would otherwise be forfeited or considerably impeded. Such lien
may be imposed even if the ship does not belong to the person charged.
(2) When a lien has been imposed on a ship, the ship may not leave the place where it lies. If
the ship is not lying in port, the decision concerning lien shall contain instructions to proceed to a
specific place.
(3) The lien may be averted if other satisfactory security is given.
(4) The lien lapses when waived by the prosecuting authority, or when decided by court order
because the cause for the lien no longer exists.
(5) Otherwise, the provisions on arrest of the Act of 13 August 1915 No. 7, 253, 253a sec-
ond and third paragraphs, and 254 shall be applied correspondingly to liens under this section in
so far as they are applicable.
6-7
Coercive fine
(1) The supervising authority may impose a coercive fine on those who do not comply with in-
junctions given pursuant to these regulations.
(2) An imposed coercive fine may be waived when this is considered reasonable. The amount
of the coercive fine shall be stipulated with due consideration to the importance of having the in-
junction carried out and the estimated costs involved.
(3) The open fine shall be collected by distraint.
790
6-8
Complaints
Unless otherwise provided, decisions made pursuant to these regulations may be appealed to
the Ministry of the Environment.
6-9
Penalty
(1) Any person who wilfully or negligently violates these regulations or individual decisions
made pursuant to these regulations shall be punished in accordance with 427 of the General Ci-
vil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, by fines or by prison up to 4 months, or by both.
(2) Foreign ships shall be punished:
a) by fines in the case of a violation occurring in the sea territory or economic zone of Nor-
way,
b) in accordance with the first paragraph in the case of a wilful and serious pollution in-
cident within the sea territory of Norway.
Amended by Regulation of 12 May 1998 No. 552 (effective as from 1 January 1999).
6-10
Entry into force
(1) Chapters I, II and VI of these regulations enter into force on 2 October 1983. As from this
date, the Regulations of 26 June 1980 concerning the prohibition of the discharge of oil or oily
mixture into the sea from ships, etc., are repealed.
(2) Chapter III of these regulations enters into force on 6 April 1987.
(3) Chapters IV of these regulations enters into force on 16 October 1992.
(4) Chapter V of these regulations enters into force on 1 April 1989.
(5) Injunctions and prohibitions issued pursuant to the said regulations shall continue to apply
until they are amended or repealed, provided this is not in contravention of the present regula-
tions.
Appendix A
Specifications for the design, installation and operation of a part flow
system for control of overboard discharges
1. Purpose
The purpose of these Specifications is to provide specific design criteria and installation and
operational requirements for the part flow system referred to in 2-13, sixth paragraph, subpa-
ragraph e) of these regulations.
2. Application
(1) Existing oil tankers may, in accordance with 2-13, sixth paragraph, subparagraph e), dis-
charge dirty ballast water and oil contaminated water from cargo tank areas below the waterline,
provided that a part of the flow is led through permanent piping to a readily accessible location on
the upper deck or above where it may be visually observed during the discharge operation and
provided that the arrangements comply with the requirements established by the Administration
which shall at least contain all the provisions of these Specifications.
792
(2) The part flow concept is based on the principle that the observation of a representative part
flow of the overboard effluent is equivalent to observing the entire effluent stream. These specif-
ications provide the details of the design, installation and operation of a part flow system.
3. General provisions
(1) The part flow system shall be so fitted that it can effectively provide a representative sam-
ple of the overboard effluent for visual display under all normal operating conditions.
(2) The part flow system is in many respects similar to the sampling system for an oil discharge
monitoring and control system but shall have pumping and piping arrangements separate from
such a system, or combined equivalent arrangements acceptable to the Administration.
(3) The display of the part flow shall be arranged in a sheltered and readily accessible location
on the upper deck or above, approved by the Administration (e.g. the entrance to the pump room).
Regard should be given to effective communication between the location of the part flow display
and the discharge control position.
(4) Samples shall be taken from relevant sections of the overboard discharge piping and be
passed to the display arrangement through a permanent piping system.
(5) The part flow system shall include the following components:
a) sampling probes;
b) sample water piping system;
c) sample feed pump(s);
d) display arrangement;
e) sample discharge arrangement; and, subject to the diameter of the sample piping,
f) flushing arrangement.
(6) The part flow system shall comply with the applicable safety requirements.
4. System arrangement
(1) Sampling points
a) Sampling point location:
1. Sampling points shall be so located that relevant samples can be obtained of the ef-
fluent being discharged through outlets below the waterline which are used for op-
erational discharges.
2. Sampling points shall as far as practicable be located in pipe sections where a turbu-
lent flow is normally encountered.
3. Samling points shall as far as practicable be arranged in accessible locations in ver-
tical sections of the discharge piping.
3.1. Sampling probes:
3.1.1. Sampling probes shall be arranged to protrude into the pipe a dis-
tance of about one fourth of the pipe diameter.
3.1.2. Sampling probes shall be arranged for easy withdrawal for cleaning.
3.1.3. The part flow system shall have a stop valve fitted adjacent to each
probe, except that where the probe is mounted in a cargo line, two
stop valves shall be fitted in series, in the sample line.
3.1.4. Sampling probes should be of corrosion-resistant and oil-resistant
material, of adequate strength, properly jointed and supported.
3.1.5. Sampling probes shall have a shape that is not prone to becoming
clogged by particle contaminants and should not generate high hy-
drodynamic pressures at the sampling probe tip. (See Fig. 1).
3.1.6 Sampling probes shall have the same nominal bore as the sample pip-
ing.
(2) Sample piping
a) The sample piping shall be arranged as straight as possible between the sampling points
and the display arrangement. Sharp bends and pockets where settled oil or sediment
may accumulate should be avoided.
794
b) The sample piping shall be so arranged that sample water is conveyed to the display ar-
rangement within 20 seconds. The flow velocity in the piping should not be less than 2
metres per second.
c) The diameter of the piping shall not be less than 40 millimetres if no fixed flushing ar-
rangement is provided and shall not be less than 25 millimetres if a pressurized flushing
arrangement as detailed in the fourth paragraph below is installed.
d) The sample piping should be of corrosion-resistant and oil-resistant material, of ade-
quate strength, properly jointed and supported.
e) Where several sampling points are installed the piping shall be connected to valve chest
at the suction side of the sample feed pump.
(3) Sample feed pump. The sample feed pump capacity shall be suitable to allow the flow rate
of the sample water to comply with the second paragraph, subparagraph b).
(4) Flushing arrangement. If the diameter of sample piping is less than 40 millimetres, a fixed
connection from a pressurized sea or fresh water piping system shall be installed for flushing of
the sample piping system.
(5) Display arrangement
a) The display arrangement shall consist of a display chamber provided with a sight glass.
The chamber should be of a size that will allow a free fall stream of the sample water to
be clearly visible over a length of at least 200 millimetres. The Administration may ap-
prove equivalent arrangements.
b) The display arrangement shall incorporate valves and piping in order to allow part of
the sample flow to bypass the display chamber to obtain a laminar flow for display in
the chamber.
c) The display arrangement shall be designed to be easily opened and cleaned.
d) The interior of the display chamber shall be white except for the background wall which
shall be so coloured as to facilitate the observation of any change in the quality of the
sample water.
e) The lower part of the display chamber shall be shaped like a funnel for collection of the
sample water.
f) A test cock for taking a grab sample shall be provided in order that a sample of the water
can be examined independently of that in the display chamber.
g) The display arrangement shall be adequately lighted to facilitate visual observation of
the sample water.
(6) The sample water leaving the display chamber shall be routed to the sea or to a slop tank
through fixed piping of adequate diameter.
5. Operation
(1) When a discharge of dirty ballast water or other oil contaminated water from the cargo tank
area is taking place through an outlet below the waterline, the part flow system shall provide sam-
ple water from the relevant discharge outlet at all times.
(2) The sample water should be observed particularly during those phases of the discharge op-
eration when the greatest possibility of oil contamination occurs. The discharge shall be stopped
whenever any traces of oil are visible in the flow and when the oil content meter reading indicates
that the oil content exceeds permissible limits.
(3) On those systems that are fitted with flushing arrangements, the sample piping should be
flushed after each period of usage.
(4) The ships cargo and ballast handling manuals and, where applicable, those manuals re-
quired for crude oil washing systems or dedicated clean ballast tanks operation shall clearly de-
scribe the use of the part flow system in conjunction with the ballast discharge and the slop tank
decanting procedures.
The figure is omitted.
796
Appendix B
Requirements relating to tank arrangements and to the limitation of tank
Size
1. Damage assumptions
(1) Three dimensions of the extent of damage of a parallelpiped on the side and bottom of the
ship are assumed as stated in the following.
(2) In the case of grounding, two conditions are set forth to be applied individually to the stated
portions of the ship. These values represent the maximum assumed damage in the case of such ac-
cidents and are to be used to determine by trial at all conceivable locations the worst combination
of compartments which would be breached in the case of such damage.
a) Collision
1. Longitudinal extent (lc) 1/3(L
2/3
) or 14,5 metres,
whichever is less
2. Transverse extent (tc)
(inboard from the ships side
at right angles to the
centreline at the level of the
summer load line)
B/5 or 11.5 metres
whichever is less
3. Vertical extent (vc) From the base line upwards without limit
b) Grounding For 0.3 L from the
forward perpendicular of
the ship:
Any other part of the ship:
1. Longitudinal extent (ls) L/10 L/10 or 5 metres,
whichever is less
2. Transverse extent (ts) B/6 or 10 metres,
whichever is less, but not
less than 5 metres
5 metres
3. Vertical extent (vs) B/15 or 6 metres,
whichever is less
B/15 or 6 metres,
whichever is less
where L, B in metres and the perpendicular are as defined in Regulation 3 of the International
Convention on Load Lines, 1966.
2. Hypothetical outflow of oil from compartments assumed to be
breached by damage
The hypothetical outflow of oil in the case of collision (0c) and grounding (0s) shall be calculat-
ed by the following formulae with respect to compartments breached by damage to all conceiv-
able locations along the length of the ship to the extent as defined in 1 above:
a) Collision
0
c
= W
i
+ K
i
C
i
(1)
b) Grounding
0
s
= 1/3( Z
i
W
i
+ Z
i
C
i
) (2)
where: W
i
= volume of a wing tank in cubic metres assumed to be breached by the dam-
age as specified in 1; W
i
for a segregated ballast tank may be taken equal to zero.
C
i
= volume of a centre tank in cubic metres assumed to be breached by the damage as
specified in 1; C
i
for a segregated ballast tank may be taken equal to zero.
K
i
= 1 b
i
/ t
c
, when bi is equal to or greater than t
c
, K
i
shall be taken equal to zero.
Z
i
= 1 h
i
/ v
s
, when hi is equal to or greater than v
s
, Z
i
shall be taken equal to zero.
b
i
= width in metres of wing tank under consideration.
h
i
= minimum depth in metres of the double bottom under consideration; where no dou-
ble bottom is fitted hi shall be taken equal to zero.
798
wing tank = any tank adjacent to the side shell plating.
centre tank = any tank inboard a longtudinal bulkhead.
c) Special requirements
1. If a void space or segregated ballast tank of a length less than 1c, as defined in 1,
second paragraph, subparagraph b) is located between wing tanks for oil, 0c in for-
mula (1) may be calculated on the basis of volume Wi being the actual volume of
one such tank (where they are of equal capacity) or the smaller of the two tanks (if
they differ in capacity) adjacent to such space, multiplied by Si as defined below
and taking for all other wing tanks involved in such a collision the value of the ac-
tual full volume.
S
i
= l - l
i
/ l
c
where 1
i
= length in metres of void space or segregated ballast tank under consider-
ation.
2. Credit shall only be given in respect of double bottom tanks which are either empty
or carrying clean water when cargo is carried in the tanks above.
3. Where the double bottom does not extend for the full length and width of the tank
involved, the double bottom is considered non-existent and the volume of the tanks
above the area of the bottom damage shall be included in formula (2) even if the
tank is not considered breached because of the installation of such a partial double
bottom.
4. Suction wells may be neglected in the determination of the value hi provided such
wells are not exessive in area and extend below the tank for a minimum distance
and in no case more than half the height of the double bottom. If the depth of such a
well exceeds half the height of the double bottom, hi shall be taken equal to the dou-
ble bottom height minus the well height.
4.1. Piping serving such wells if installed within the double bottom shall be fitted
with valves or other closing arrangements located at the point of connection
to the tank served to prevent oil outflow in the event of damage to the piping.
Such piping shall be installed as high from the bottom shell as possible.
. In the case where bottom damage simultaneously involves four centre tanks, the
value of Os may be calculated according to the formula
0
s
= 1/4( Z
i
W
i
+ Z
i
C
i
) (3)
6. An Administration may credit as reducing oil outflow in case of bottom damage, an
installed cargo transfer system having an emergency high suction in each cargo oil
tank, capable of transferring from a breached tank or tanks to segregated ballast
tanks or to available cargo tankage if it can be assured that such tanks will have suf-
ficient ullage.
Credit for such a system would be governed by ability to transfer in two hours of
operation oil equal to one half of the largest of the breached tanks involved and by
availability of equivalent receiving capacity in ballast or cargo tanks.
The credit shall be confined to permitting calculation of Os according to formula
(3). The pipes for such suctions shall be installed at least at a height not less than the
vertical extent of the bottom damage Vs. The Administration shall supply the Orga-
nization (IMO) with the information concerning the arrangements accepted by it,
for circulation to other Parties to the Convention.
3. Limitation of size of cargo tanks
(1) The hypothetical outflow Oc or Os calculated in accordance with the formula in 2 shall
not exceed 30,000 cubic metres or 400 x cube root of DW, whichever is the greater, but subject to
a maximum of 40,000 cubic metres, where: DW = dead weight of the ship in metric tonnes.
(2) The volume of any wing tank shall not exceed seventy-five per cent of the limits of the hy-
pothetical oil outflow referred to in the first paragraph. The volume of any one centre cargo oil
tank shall not exceed 50,000 cubic metres.
(3) The length of each tank shall not exceed 10 metres or one of the following, whichever is the
greater:
a) where no longitudinal bulkhead is provided: 0.1 L;
b) where a longitudinal bulkhead is provided at the centreline only: 0.15 L;
c) where two or more longitudinal bulkheads are provided:
800
1. for wing tanks: 0.2 L
2. for centre tanks:
2.1. if b
i
/ B is equal to or greater than 1/5 : 0.2 L
2.2. if b
i
/ B is less than 1/5:
where no centreline longitudinal bulkhead is provided: (0.5 b
i
/ B + 0.1) L
where a centreline longitudinal bulkhead is provided: (0.25 b
i
/ B + 0.15) L.
(4) In order not to exceed the volume limits established by the first, second and third para-
graphs above and irrespective of the accepted type of cargo transfer system installed, when such
system interconnects two or more cargo tanks, valves or other similar closing devices shall be pro-
vided for separating the tanks from each other. These valves or devices shall be closed when the
tanker is at sea.
(5) Lines of piping which run through cargo tanks in a position less than tc from the ships side
or less than vc from the ships bottom shall be fitted with valves or similar closing devices at the
point at which they open into any cargo tank. These valves shall be kept closed at sea at any time
when the tanks contain cargo oil, except that they may be opened only for cargo transfer needed
for the purpose of trimming of the ship.
1194/00 Environmental declaration regulations
802
1194/00 Environmental declaration
regulations
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
3 The obligations of the company and the master . . . . . . . 804
4 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
5 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
6 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
7 Validity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
8 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
9 Nonconformities and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
10 Appeals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
11 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Regulation 28 November 2000 No. 1194 concerning
environmental declaration in connection with
environmental differentiation for ships and mobile
offshore units
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1, 114, and 117, ref. Royal Decree
of 12 October 1979 No. 1, Formal Delegation of 8 January 1980 No. 1 and the Taxation Act of 26
March 1999 No. 14, 8-16 first paragraph. Amended 4 June 2002.
1
This Regulation concerns a voluntary scheme for ships and mobile offshore units which have
prepared or are to prepare an environmental declaration in connection with environmental dif-
ferentiation.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of this Regulation and the form for calculation of environmental rating under
this Regulation, the followings definitions shall apply:
a) Fishing vessel: Any vessel used commercially for catching fish, whales, seals, seaweed
and sea tangle or other living resources of the sea.
b) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillship, equipped for drilling for
804
c) Gas carrier: A ship built or converted for and used for the carriage in bulk of any of the
liquefied gases or other products referred to in Chapter 19 of the International Code for
the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC
Code).
d) Chemical tanker: A ship built or converted for and used for the carriage in bulk of any
of the liquid products referred to in Chapter 17 of the International Code for the Con-
struction and Equipment of Ships carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code).
e) Combination carrier: A ship built or converted for and used for the carriage of petro-
leum and petroleum products or solid cargoes in bulk.
f) Cargo ship: Any ship which is not a passenger ship, fishing vessel, barge or pleasure
craft.
g) Barge: A hull or a ship without propulsion machinery, which is towed or pushed when-
ever moved, and which is used for the carriage of cargo.
h) Environmental declaration: A declaration which describes the specific environmental
characteristics of a ship and the environmental impact significance of the operational
conditions of that ship, and which shows the calculated environmental rating of the ship
or mobile offshore unit.
i) Environmental rating: A numerical value calculated in the ships environmental decla-
ration, representing the totality of the environmental characteristics of a ship or mobile
offshore unit according to the established criteria. The numerical value lies between 0
and 10, the latter representing the highest environmental standard.
j) Oil tanker: A ship built or converted for and used for the carriage in bulk of petroleum
and petroleum products covered by Annex I to the International Convention for the Pre-
vention of Pollution from Ships.
k) Passenger ship: A ship for which a certificate is required as provided in Chapter VIII of
the Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships,
etc.
l) Company: The owner or any other organization or person responsible for the operation
of a ship or a mobile offshore unit, who on the owners behalf has expressly assumed
the responsibility for the environmental declaration.
3
The obligations of the company and the master
The company shall ensure compliance with the provisions of this Regulation.
The necessary information and documentation shall be produced by the company which shall
issue and ensure compliance with the environmental declaration. The company is under an obliga-
tion to comply with the stated environmental criteria which form the basis of the environmental
declaration.
The master and the company shall ensure that the necessary arrangements are made for ver-
ification, ref. 8.
4
Exemptions
grant exemptions from the requirements of this regulation. There must be special reasons that
make the exemptions necessary and they must be justifiable in terms of safety. Exemptions may
only be granted where this does not contravene any international agreement to which Norway has
acceded.
806
5
Calculation
The calculation of the environmental rating according to ship type or for a mobile offshore unit
shall be performed in accordance with the calculation form prescribed by the Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate. The form is obtainable from the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
For a barge, ref. 2 g, used for the carriage of oil, gas or chemicals, the environmental rating
shall be calculated as for a tanker. For any other barge, the environmental rating shall be calculat-
ed as for a cargo ship.
6
Registration
The completed environmental declaration, in duplicate, shall be sent together with the necess-
ary supporting documents to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate for registration.
Upon registration, one copy of the environmental declaration will be returned with acknowl-
edgement of registration to the company and shall be kept on board. Copies of the supporting
documents shall be kept on board.
The environmental declaration takes effect from the time it is stamped by an archivist at the
When submitting documents for registration, the forms which are prescribed by the Norwegian
Maritime Directorate at any time shall be used and the supporting documents shall be in accord-
ance with the requirements specified in the form.
7
Validity
The environmental declaration shall be considered to be valid upon registration and shall conti-
nue to be valid for up to five years, provided that the basis for the declaration remains unchanged.
The basis for the declaration shall be considered to be changed if the authorities change the cri-
teria or the terms of the declaration. Such change will be communicated to the holders of declara-
tions with six months notice concerning the establishment of a new environmental declaration.
An environmental declaration shall be considered to be invalid independently of the above if:
a) the ship or mobile offshore unit changes company;
b) equipment, arrangements or fuel types which are necessary or form part of the basis for
the declaration are not maintained as prescribed in the regulations or are not used;
c) equipment or arrangements which form part of the basis for the declaration are sub-
stantially modified so that this influences the degree of compliance with the criteria
forming part of the declaration;
d) the environmental declaration submitted contains incorrect information; or
e) in the event of any other major reason for considering the declaration invalid.
8
Verification
Verification is performed to the extent deemed necessary by the Norwegian Maritime Directo-
rate or other Norwegian authority which bases an individual decision on the environmental decla-
ration. Other parties may be authorized to perform such verification on behalf of Norwegian au-
thorities. Verification may be performed by checking documents or by inspection of systems and
components related to the criteria stated in the environmental declaration. Verification may also
include sampling and physical measurements.
808
9
Nonconformities and correction
The verification of the environmental declaration on board the ship may reveal any of the fol-
lowing nonconformities:
a) Where compliance on board with environmental criteria does not conform to the stated
criteria, the declaration shall be considered invalid; ref. 7.
b) Where the documents actually available on board do not conform to the documentation
requirements, or where there is a deficient operational follow-up of the criteria, this
may be corrected by the ship within two months.
Correction of reported nonconformities within such time-limit shall be reported to the Norwe-
gian Maritime Directorate for registration, ref. 6. If a nonconformity is not corrected by the
time-limit, the declaration shall be considered invalid.
10
Appeals
Individual decisions may be appealed under the provisions of 28 of the Act of 10 February
1967 relating to Procedure in Cases concerning the Public Administration (Public Administration
Act), with the Ministry of the Environment as the administrative appeal body.
11
Entry into force
This Regulation enters into force immediately.
231/87 Incidents reporting
810
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
3 The duty to report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
4 When to make reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
5 Contents of the report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
6 Supplementary report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
7 Reporting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
8 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
9 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Regulation 2 April 1987 No. 231 concerning the Reporting
of Incidents at Sea
ing to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, 1, 68, 69, 114, 117, 118, and
119, ref. Royal Decree of 12 October 1979 No. 1 and Formal Delegation of Authority of 8 Janu-
ary 1980 No. 1. Ref. Annex XIII to the EEA Agreement, para. 55a (Directive 93/75/EEC as
amended by Directive 96/39/EC, Directive 97/34/EC, Directive 98/55/EC, and Directive 98/74/
EC). Amended 2 September 1993, 2 May 1995, 27 June 2000 and 4 June 2002.
1
(1) These regulations shall apply to all Norwegian ships and to foreign ships in Norwegian ter-
ritorial waters.
(2) These regulations do not apply to:
a) ships owned or operated by a state and used in government, non-commercial service;
b) warships or other ships used as naval auxiliary vessels;
c) pleasure craft less than 15 metres in length.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations, the following definitions apply:
a) Dangerous substances:
1. Dangerous liquefied gases: Any substance falling within the scope of chapter 19 of
the IGC Code.
2. Dangerous chemicals: Substances identified as dangerous in chapter 17 of the IBC
Code.
812
3. Dangerous substances in packaged form: Substances which in the IMDG Code are
identified as dangerous, including radioactive materials as described in the INF
Code.
b) Pollutants:
1. Oil: Any substance falling within the scope of Annex I to MARPOL 73/78.
2. Harmful substances in packaged form: Any substance falling within the scope of
Annex III to MARPOL 73/78, i.e. substances which in the IMDG Code are identi-
fied as marine pollutants.
3. Noxious liquid substances: Any substance falling within the scope of Annex II to
MARPOL 73/78.
c) Pleasure craft: Any floating device intended for use and capable of movement on the
water and used for non-commercial purposes.
d) IBC Code: International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying
Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk, adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee by resolu-
tion MSC.4(48), as amended.
e) IGC Code: International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships carrying
Liquefied Gases in Bulk, adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee by resolution
MSC.5(48), as amended.
f) IMDG Code: International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code, adopted by resolution
A.716(17), as amended.
g) INF Code: International Code for the Safe Carriage of Packaged Irradiated Nuclear
Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes on Board Ships.
h) MARPOL 73/78: International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships,
1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto, as amended.
i) Ship: All vessels, including lighters/barges.
j) Discharge: Any release or emptying from a ship irrespective of cause, including sub-
stances stemming from any outflow, removal, spill, leak or pumping, freeing or bilge
operation.
Amended by Regulations 2 May 1995 No. 545 (in force 1 July 1995), 27 June 2000 No. 686 (in force 1 July 2000).
3
The duty to report
(1) The master or other person having charge of any ship involved in an incident as referred to
in 4 shall report the particulars of such incident without delay in accordance with the require-
ments of these regulations.
(2) In the event of the ship referred to in paragraph 1 above being abandoned, or in the event of
a report from a ship as mentioned in paragraph 1 above being incomplete or unobtainable, the
owner, charterer, manager or operator of the ship, or their agent shall, to the fullest extent possible,
assume the obligations placed on the master of the ship under these regulations.
(3) The master of a ship which is engaged in or requested to engage in an operation to render
assistance to or undertake salvage of a ship involved in an incident referred to in 4 shall report
without delay the particulars of the action undertaken or planned. In addition, the report shall con-
tain, as far as practicable, information as referred to in 5 and 6. Reports shall be made in ac-
cordance with the requirements in 7 and the coastal state shall be kept informed regarding devel-
opments.
4
When to make reports
(1) A report in accordance with 5 shall be made when an incident causes:
a) discharge or probable discharge of oil or noxious liquid substances in excess of the
quantity or instantaneous rate permitted by MARPOL 73/78 at any time and irrespec-
814
tive of the cause of the discharge, including discharge for the purpose of securing the sa-
fety of the ship or saving life at sea; or
b) loss/discharge or probable loss/discharge of dangerous or harmful substances in pack-
aged form, including substances in portable tanks or tank vehicles, and where vehicles,
freight containers or other cargo transport units contain packaged goods; or
c) discharge or probable discharge of dangerous chemicals or dangerous liquefied gases;
or
d) damage to, failure or breakdown of a ship over 15 metres in length which
1. affects the safety of the ship, including, but not limited to, collision, grounding, fire,
explosion, structural failure, flooding or shifting of the cargo; or
2. results in an impairment of the safety of navigation, including, but not limited to,
failure or breakdown of the steering system, propulsion machinery, electrical gener-
ating system or essential shipborne navigational aids.
(2) In considering whether an incident may cause discharge or probable discharge, the factors
to be taken into consideration should include the following:
a) The nature of the damage, i.e. failure or breakdown of the ship, machinery or equip-
ment, which:
1. affects the safety of the ship, for instance collision, grounding, fire, explosion,
structural failure, flooding or shifting of the cargo; or
2. results in an impairment of the safety of navigation, for instance failure or break-
down of the steering system, propulsion machinery, electrical generating system or
essential shipborne navigational aids.
b) Sea and weather conditions and the density of traffic in the area at the time of the in-
cident.
5
Contents of the report
The report shall contain the following information, to the extent deemed relevant:
a) The identity of the ship involved; including:
1. the name of the ship, its call sign and flag;
2. for ships assigned an IMO number, such number shall be entered;
3. type of ship, gross tonnage, length, breadth and draught;
4. which coast station(s) the ship is in communication with and information about any
satellite communication equipment and Inmarsat number;
5. name, address, telex and telephone number of the ships owner and representative
(charterer, manager or operator of the ship or their agent);
b) the time, location and nature of the incident; including position, course and speed at the
time of the incident;
c) the quantity and type of pollutant or dangerous substance concerned; including
1. the correct technical name and the concentration of the pollutant or dangerous sub-
stance, its UN number, IMO hazard class(es) according to the IMDG, IBC and IGC
Codes, pollutant category A, B, C, or D;
2. information about the surface radiation level as indicated in the transport index;
3. type and quantity of cargo carried and its location on board the vessel;
4. type of packaging, including identification marks. Specify any portable tanks or
tank vehicles and where vehicles, freight containers or other cargo transport units
contain packaged goods. The units official registration mark and number shall be
indicated;
d) other information considered essential, including information on other ships involved in
the incident, assistance or salvage.
Amended by Regulations 2 May 1995 No. 545 (in force 1 July 1995), 27 June 2000 No. 686 (in force 1 July 2000).
816
6
Supplementary report
(1) Any person who is obliged under the provisions of these regulations to send a report shall,
to the extent possible:
a) supplement the initial report and provide information concerning further developments;
and
b) comply as fully as possible with requests from affected states for additional informa-
tion.
(2) The supplementary report should contain the following information, to the extent deemed
relevant:
a) condition of the ship;
b) ability to transfer cargo/ballast;
c) cause of the discharge;
d) whether the discharge is continuing, and the approximate quantity discharged;
e) weather on scene, sea, current and wind conditions;
f) estimate of spill movement, and where possible an estimate of the surface area of the
spill;
g) actions being taken with regard to the discharge and the movement of the ship;
h) whether assistance has been requested from others, and whether this has been provided;
i) manufacturer, or sender/recipient where the manufacturer is unknown, of the pollutant
or dangerous substance;
j) whether the lost packaged harmful substances floated or sank; and
k) estimate of the quantity and likely condition of the packaged harmful substance.
7
Reporting procedures
(1) Reports shall be sent with the highest priority to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or the
Norwegian Pollution Control Authority.
(2) For incidents occurring beyond Norwegian waters, reports shall be sent with the highest
priority to the nearest coastal state.
(3) Reports should preferably be sent through maritime satellite communication systems, with
such priority as is provided in the ITU Radio Regulations, depending on the content of the report.
(4) Reports may be sent through a non-maritime radio communication system, provided that
the system allows a priority which is not lower than that referred to in paragraph 2 above.
(5) If the ship is within the sea area of an established ship reporting system, the report shall be
sent through this system.
(6) The reporting shall be according to IMO Resolution 851(20) General principles for ship
reporting systems and ship reporting requirements, including guidelines for reporting incidents
involving dangerous goods, harmful substances and/or marine pollutants.
8
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of these regulations or of an individual decision pursuant to these re-
gulations shall be punishable pursuant to 427 of the General Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902
No. 10 by fines or imprisonment up to 4 months, or both.
Amended by Regulation 27 June 2000 No. 686 (in force 1 July 2000, previously 9).
818
9
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 6 April 1987.
Amended by Regulation 27 June 2000 No. 686 (in force 1 July 2000, previously 10).
1269/92 Acute pollution notification
820
CONTENTS
1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
2 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
3 Obligation to notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
4 Agencies to be notified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
5 Notification from aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
6 Supervisory authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
7 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Regulation 9 July 1992 No. 1269 concerning Notification
of Acute Pollution or Danger of Acute Pollution
Laid down by the Ministry of the Environment on 9 July 1992 pursuant to 39 of the Act of 13
March 1981 No. 6 concerning protection against pollution and concerning waste (Pollution Con-
trol Act). Amended by Regulation of 31 August 2001 No. 1016 (to the effect that the Norwegian
continental shelf is no longer included in the scope).
1
Definition
Acute pollution means a major pollution incident which occurs suddenly and which is not per-
mitted under the provisions of or pursuant to the Pollution Control Act.
2
Scope
These regulations apply to major pollution
within Norways national boundaries.
in Norways economic zone or in danger of occurring in Norways economic zone where the
source of pollution is a Norwegian vessel or installation.
Amended by Regulation of 31 August 2001 No. 1016 (in force on 1 January 2002)
3
Obligation to notify
The party responsible for acute pollution is under an obligation to give immediate notification
of the incident in accordance with these regulations. This obligation to notify also rests with any
contractor carrrying out work on behalf of the party responsible for the pollution.
Other persons apart from the party responsible for the pollution are also under an obligation to
give such notification unless this is obviously unnecessary.
822
The obligation to notify also applies to acute pollution from operations for which a permit has
been granted pursuant to 11 of the Act of 13 March No. 6 concerning Protection against Pollu-
tion and concerning Waste (Concession).
The obligation to notify also applies when there is a danger of acute pollution.
4
Agencies to be notified
The Fire Services shall be notified of acute pollution or a danger of acute pollution from shore-
based operations.
The nearest coast radio station shall be notified of acute pollution or the danger of acute pollu-
tion from vessels.
The main Rescue Coordination Centre and the Petroleum Directorate shall be notified of acute
pollution or the danger of acute pollution from operations on the continental shelf.
The Norwegian Pollution Control Authority may set up a system for further notification.
5
Notification from aircraft
When acute pollution is discovered from an aircraft, the unit of the air traffic service with
which the aircraft is in contact shall be notified.
6
Supervisory authority
The Norwegian Pollution Control Authority, or whoever is authorized by the Ministry of the
Environment, shall ensure that these regulations are complied with.
7
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 January 1993. As from the same date, the Regulations of
10 August 1977 concerning Notification of Discharges of Oil or Oily Mixtures into the Sea, into
Watercourses or on Land are revoked.
663/98 Discharge of sewege regulations
824
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
3 Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
4 Ban on discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
5 Stricter or easier provisions laid down by regulation . . . 826
6 Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
7 Pollution fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
8 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
9 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Regulation 12 June 1998 No. 663 concerning a ban on the
discharge of sewage, etc. from ships to watercourses or
near-coastal waters
Laid down by the Ministry of the Environment on 12 June 1998 pursuant to Act No. 6 of 13
March 1981 concerning protection against pollution and concerning waste 9 subsection 1, and
Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1 and
114 subsection 4, ref. Royal Decree of 12 October 1979. Amended by the Ministry of the Envi-
ronment by its decision of 9 July 1998 No. 712 and 21 April 1999 No. 531.
1
The Regulation applies to all ships navigating in Norwegian watercourses and territorial wa-
ters.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of this Regulation, the following definitions apply:
1. Ship: Any vessel, including barges, mobile offshore units under way, and pleasure craft.
2. Existing ship: Any ship which is not a new ship. For the purpose of this Regulation, imported
ships shall be considered to be existing ships.
3. New ship: Any ship the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction on
or after the date of entry into force of this Regulation.
4. Sewage:
4.1. Discharge from any kind of toilet.
4.2. Discharge from spaces used for medical purposes (ships dispensary, sick-room, etc.)
5. Grey water: Discharge of washing water, etc.
6. Sewage holding tank: Tank used for the collection and storage of sewage.
826
3
Responsibility
The ships master is responsible for ensuring compliance with the provisions of this Regula-
tion.
4
Ban on discharge
It is illegal to discharge sewage and grey water from ships to watercourses.
It is illegal to discharge sewage from new ships and existing ships with a sewage holding tank
in coastal areas within a distance of 300 metres from the nearest land (mainland and islands). The
same applies to existing ships without a sewage holding tank after a transitional period of three
years starting from the date of entry into force of this Regulation.
5
Stricter or easier provisions laid down by regulation
Municipalities are hereby granted the authority to lay down regulations containing stricter or
easier provisions than those of 4 herein in respect of the discharge of sewage and grey water.
Any stricter provision shall be considered in the light of the availability of satisfactory sewage
reception facilities.
Where easier provisions are concerned, a thorough environmental impact study shall be con-
ducted prior to making a decision.
Each municipality shall, as a part of the preparation of a local regulation, take contact with oth-
er municipalities with a view to cooperating on common solutions for larger discharge areas as re-
ferred to in 4. The municipality shall inform the County Governor before any such regulation is
laid down.
6
Exception
In exceptional cases, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or anyone authorized by the Ministry
of the Environment may except a vessel from the provisions of this Regulation.
Added by regulation of 21 April 1999 No. 531.
7
Pollution fee
To ensure that the provisions of this Regulation or decisions pursuant to the Regulation are im-
plemented, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or anyone authorized by the Ministry of the En-
vironment may impose a pollution fee for the Treasury pursuant to 73 of the Pollution Control
Act, or a coercive fine pursuant to 124 of the Seaworthiness Act.
Added by regulation of 21 April 1999 No. 531.
8
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of this Regulation is punishable by fines or imprisonment up to
four months or both pursuant to 427 of the General Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10.
Amended by Regulation 21 April 1999 No. 531 (previously 6).
828
9
Entry into force
This Regulation enters into force on 1 July 1998.
For ships navigating watercourses without a sewage holding tank, the provision of 4 first pa-
ragraph enters into force on 1 June 1999.
Amended by Regulations 16 June 1998 No. 712 and 21 April 1999 No. 531 (previously 7).
830
SECTION VI-7:
Protective measures, working
condidions, health etc.
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 4 September 1987 no. 859 concerning protective, environmental, and
safety measures on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Regulation of 9 March 2001 No. 439 concerning medical supplies on ships . . . . . . . . 858
Regulations of 25 November 1988 no. 940 concerning supervision of maritime ser-
vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Regulations of 31 January 1986 no. 222 concerning the scope of the Seamens Act . . 884
859/87 PES-regulations
832
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
4 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
6 Environmental conditions in working areas . . . . . . . . . . 836
6 a Prohibition on use of asbestos and other materials haz-
ardous to health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
7 Shielding of machinery and movable equipment . . . . . . 836
8 Precautions during special work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
9 Lifting and hoisting gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
10 Trucks and other mobile implements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
11 Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
12 Order and good housekeeping, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
13 Personal protective clothing/equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
14 Rescue line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
15 Marking, warning signs and notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
16 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
16 a Mutual recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
17 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
18 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
protective, environmental, and safety measures on mobile
offshore units
to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships 1, 9a, and 42, cf. Royal Decrees of 5 April
1963, 1 December 1978, and 25 May 1984, and also Formal Delegations of 15 January 1979 and 6
June 1984. Amended 6 July 1993, 9 May 1995, 28 January 1997 and 2 March 1999.
1
Definitions
the requirements applicable to areas regulated by the legislation mentioned in 1 of Regula-
tions of 2 March 1999 No. 394 concerning a Safety Management System for mobile offshore
units.
834
tered into an additional agreement pursuant to 9 of the Seaworthiness Act:
5. Certified:
a Notified Body,
Directorate, or
Convention.
tified by:
Directorate.
2
1. These regulations apply to mobile offshore units which are registered or will be registered in
a Norwegian register of ships.
issue.
3
tions
1
.
1
4
Documentation
836
5
Repealed by Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 497 (in force 1 July 2003).
6
Environmental conditions in working areas
1. The units working areas shall be protected, and possibilities of heating shall be arranged so
that all regular working assignments may be carried out by persons wearing ordinary work-
ing clothes and safety equipment.
2. The working conditions on board shall as far as possible be so arranged that persons are not
unnecessarily exposed to dust and gases from chemicals, etc.
3. Precautions against noise shall comply with the regulations currently in force concerning
protection against noise, laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
6a
Prohibition on use of asbestos and other materials hazardous to health
1. Materials containing asbestos or other substances which are injurious to human health must
not be used on board.
2. Materials containing asbestos or other substances injurious to health which require repairs
shall be replaced by materials which are not injurious to human health.
Added by Regulation 28 January 1997 No. 123 (in force 1 July 1997). Amended by Regulation 11 April 2003 No. 497 (in
force 1 July 2003).
7
Shielding of machinery and movable equipment
1. Projecting movable parts, such as motors, wire rope drums, toothed wheels, belts, flywheels,
couplings, chain and friction transmissions, shafts and other machinery gear not adequately
shielded by its positioning or construction, shall be provided with adequate protective ar-
rangements.
2. Machinery or pipes having a high surface temperature (80 C or more), and which are placed
so that there is danger of someone touching them, must be encapsuled, insulated, or other-
wise protected in a fully satisfactory manner.
3. All wire rope sheaves shall be equipped with a guard, where necessary.
4. Stationary grinding machines shall have fixed eye protection.
5. It shall be possible to see motors, etc. from the place at which they are started. If this is not
practically possible, necessary warning signs shall be posted at the starting place. The warn-
ing signs shall say that the motor must not be started until it has been checked that this can be
done without any risk.
8
Precautions during special work
1. Safety permit for dangerous work.
1.1. A risk analysis and classification of tasks related to planned and routine maintenance
and inspections on board shall be conducted.
Hot work, maintenance work carried out in dangerous areas on board and inspec-
tion of tanks, columns and pontoons are examples of work which as a minimum pre-
caution requires a work permit.
838
1.2. Special types of non-routine work, where the risk is significant, will in each individual
case require a risk analysis/safe-job analysis in order to be able to plan safe conduct of
work and identify necessary precautionary or other safety measures. The employees
carrying out the work, shall participate in preparation of the analysis.
1.3. Routines and procedures for issuing work permits and use of safe-job analyses shall
be established. Such procedures shall describe, inter alia, the responsibilities, duties,
conditions and follow-up activities relating to the work performed.
2. Welding.
2.1. On board units there shall be written instructions for the use of the welding equip-
ment. The instructions shall indicate who is responsible for the inspection of the weld-
ing equipment, who can give permission to weld and who is allowed to weld on board.
2.2. Welding equipment etc. for the welding gases acetylene and oxygen shall comply with
the regulations laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, in force at the time
in question.
3. Use of high pressure spraying gear, hose-down gear etc.
3.1. During work where dangerous dust or gases may occur, the respiratory organs, eyes,
hands, etc. shall be protected.
3.2. Adequate ventilation shall be provided during spraying in enclosed rooms.
3.3. An extra person shall keep the man using the spraying pistol and hose-down gear un-
der constant surveillance. A safety belt shall be used when working in places where
there is a risk of falling down.
3.4. Locking of the spraying pistol trigger is forbidden, and the trigger shall be secured
against inadvertent release, e.g. by means of a hoop.
3.5. Persons under 18 years of age must not operate high pressure sprays or hose-down
gear.
3.6. During high pressure spraying and hose-down, static electricity will build up. Such
electricity shall be removed by earthing of the spraying pistol or nozzle.
3.7. Instructions shall be given to the operators of high pressure spraying and hose-down
gear, emphasizing i.e. the elements of risk during use of this equipment. It is the res-
ponsibility of the platform manager to make the instructions known on board, by post-
ing.
4. Work in tanks, rooms, tunnels, etc. where there may be an insufficiency of oxygen, poi-
sonous or explosive gases.
4.1. Before anyone without certified respiratory protection enters a tank or narrow, en-
closed spaces, or the like, where there may be gas or an insufficiency of oxygen, it
shall be ascertained that the air inside is not dangerous by performing the necessary
measurements.
4.2. To perform such measurements, the following instruments must be carried on board,
as a minimum:
2 instruments for measuring hydrocarbons (HC).
2 instruments for measuring any gas concentrations injurious to health that may be
present, including hydrogen sulphide (H2S).
2 instruments for measuring the oxygen content of the air.
The above instruments shall be certified and comply with the standards of CENE-
LEC (European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization) or IEC (Internation-
al Electrotechnical Commission). Anybody performing the measurements shall have
the necessary training in using the instruments.
4.3. All doors, hatches, manhole covers, etc. in access openings to such spaces shall be
clearly marked with signs or adhesive notices indicating the danger of gas poisoning
and/or lack of oxygen to which a person may be exposed in the individual rooms. In
locations where signs and notices may easily be destroyed or dirtied, the actual hatch-
es, manhole covers, etc. shall also be painted in the same colour code as the signs. The
colours of the warning signs and stickers shall be in accordance with Norwegian Stan-
840
dard NS 6033, and have Norwegian and English texts clearly expressing the follow-
ing:
FARE DANGER
OKSYGEN MANGEL LACK OF OXYGEN
(Symbol)
FARE DANGER
GIFTIG GASS POISON GAS
(Symbol)
FARE DANGER
EKSPLOSIV ATMOSFRE EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE
(Symbol)
4.4. All units shall have on board a danger chart on which all tanks, unventilated rooms,
etc. are indicated by a colour code, stating the danger of which to beware in these
spaces as far as gases and/or lack of oxygen is concerned. The danger chart shall be
easily legible and shall be posted on board in suitable locations.
The following colours shall be used to indicate the danger in the individual spaces:
Signal yellow For poison gas/lack of oxygen
Signal red For fire/explosive gases.
Spaces in which both poison gas/lack of oxygen and fire/explosive gases may oc-
cur, shall be marked with the colours stated above.
4.5. When work is necessary in tanks, holds, etc. where there may be a danger of poisoning
or lack of oxygen, this work is permitted only on condition that an certified breathing
apparatus or fresh-air apparatus is used. Prior to commencement of work in tanks, in
narrow, confined spaces or the like, a thorough ventilation by means of portable fans,
windmen or the like, shall be carried out. There shall be continuous ventilation as long
as work is in progress.
4.6. Prior to inspections of, or anyone staying in or commencing work in tanks or holds in
which there may be gas or insufficient oxygen, as well as when removing rust etc.
from tanks or holds, the responsible superior shall be notified and the oxygen content
and gas concentration in the hold/tank shall be checked.
As long as the inspection and the work is in progress, the oxygen content and gas
concentration in the hold/tank shall be checked at short intervals. The work shall be
supervised by at least two persons, one of whom shall be equipped with a breathing
apparatus and shall be specially trained in the use of this, and the other shall be
equipped with radio communication equipment certified for use in explosion- haz-
ardous areas, in order to be able to raise the alarm as quickly as possible in the event
that anything unforeseen should occur.
5. Cleaning and repair of containers which have been used for inflammable, explosive, or poi-
sonous substances.
5.1. Before starting work on such containers, they shall be properly emptied, cleaned and
ventilated.
5.2. Containers which cannot be completely cleaned shall be filled with water so that only
a small area, where repairs are to be carried out, is free of water.
5.3. Persons who are going to open and clean containers shall wear suitable safety equip-
ment.
842
9
Lifting and hoisting gear
1. Winches, air-tuggers, etc.
1.1. The winches with appurtenant loose and fixed accessories shall satisfy the same re-
quirements concerning strength as stipulated for the corresponding components in the
regulations currently in force concerning cargo-handling appliances in ships.
1.2. Winches shall be clearly marked with the safe work load (capacity (SWL). When
determining the allowable capacity, the dynamic conditions in which the winch will
be operated, shall be taken into consideration. The air supply to air- powered winches
shall not exceed the pressure which is sufficient to reach safe work load. Manufactur-
ers certificate showing the SWL and the corresponding air pressure shall be enclosed
in or attached to the Control Book for lifting appliances.
1.3. The winches shall have an automatic brake which comes into operation if the power
supply fails. The brake shall be able to stop the winch at full speed when lowering a
maximum load.
1.4. The operating handle shall automatically return to the stop position when it is not op-
erated. The stop position shall be clearly marked.
1.5. The length of wire rope shall be such that the drum flanges are at least one wire rope
diameter larger than the outer rope layer.
1.6. Shackles, wire rope sheaves, and other implements shall be certified and have a safe
work load (SWL) of at least the maximum pull of the winch. Wire ropes, straps, etc.
shall have a safety factor of at least 5 compared to the maximum pull of the winch.
2. Hoisting of persons
2.1. The hoisting of persons by winch (tugger, etc.) shall only take place as a part of the
maintenance routines when other means of work are not practical. Prior to the hoisting
of persons by which the arrangement shall be inspected by the person in charge and
safe-job analysis shall be carried out. The winch operator shall be instructed and ap-
pointed by the person in charge.
2.2. The hoisting of persons shall only take place with a winch and with an installation
which is specially arranged and marked for such use, and shall only take place with a
winch with fixed operation up and down (no free fall). The wire dimension must be
evaluated not only with regard to strength, but also with regard to weight in relation to
the person to be hoisted. An arrangement where the weight of the wire from the snatch
block to the winch may exceed the weight of the person and thereby create uncon-
trolled situations, must not be used.
2.3. A special, certified steel basket, or an equally safe arrangement, shall be used for the
hoisting of persons by winch.
2.4. The steel basket shall have 4 points of suspension and a railing at least 1 metre high.
The floor and the railing shall be covered with steel plate or rigid grating. The basket
shall be marked with the number of persons allowed. Handholds shall be arranged in-
side the basket.
2.5. An arrangement for the hoisting of persons shall be inspected and certified according
to the directions which apply to lifting arrangements.
3. Movable platforms, inspection ladders, and platforms.
3.1. Movable platforms, frame work and the like shall be regarded as loading gear and
they shall be certified by a competent person in accordance with the regulations men-
tioned under 1.1 above.
3.2. Platforms which can be hoisted or moved shall be clearly and permanently marked
with their maximum work load.
844
10
Trucks and other mobile implements
1. Instructions.
Detailed instructions for the operation of trucks on board shall be prepared.
2. Driver.
The drivers of trucks shall be more than 18 years old and have completed training in hand-
ling and driving the type of truck in question.
3. Trucks.
3.1. Trucks shall be marked with make, type, production number and year, net weight and
lifting capacity at maximum lifting height combined with maximum distance of grav-
ity.
3.2. Trucks which will be used in explosion-hazardous areas shall be especially certified
for this and be equipped as follows:
3.2.1. Trucks shall not have electric equipment other than that which is necessary
for starting and operation.
3.2.2. The motor, brakes, and exhaust system shall be effectively insulated and, if
necessary, have a cooling system so that the surface temperatures do not ex-
ceed 200 C.
3.2.3. The exhaust system shall be equipped with components for efficient cleaning
of gas and spark extinguishing.
3.2.4. The air inlet shall be equipped with a fireguard.
3.2.5. The motor shall automatically stop when racing occurs on account of explo-
sive air mixture.
3.2.6. Trucks shall be equipped with an arrangment for diversion of electric charges.
3.2.7. Forks shall have a surface material which will not generate sparks when
struck.
3.3. In addition all trucks shall be equipped with:
3.3.1. effective foot and parking brakes.
3.3.2. horn and mirror.
3.3.3. at least one 2-kg powder apparatus for fire extinguishing.
3.3.4. The drivers seat shall be effectively shielded against falling cargo.
3.4. With regard to the weight and hoisting rings of the truck it shall be possible to lift it
with the cranes available on board.
4. Work with trucks.
4.1. Around hatches and other openings which are flush with the deck, ramps and the like,
there shall be placed coamings or other equally effective arrangements to prevent
trucks, pallets, cargo and the like from being shoved or from falling down to a lower
level. Coamings or corresponding arrangements may be fixed or removable and shall
be at least 120 mm high. Removable arrangements shall be just as strong as fixed ar-
rangements and fastened in such a way that the truck forks cannot life or shift them.
Trucks shall be used only within marked areas.
4.2. This deck area shall bear the axle pressure of the truck at maximum load. Maximum
allowable axle pressure shall be indicated on posters (signs).
11
Chemicals
1. All types of dangerous chemicals which are taken on board, such as e.g. trichloretylene
(TRI), caustic soda, liquid lye, hydrochloric acid, etc. shall be recorded in a special list, stat-
ing the accurate technical designation, chemical and physical properties, and also where
placed on board. The necessary information regarding danger to health, measures in case of
accidents, transport and storage shall be on board.
846
2. Chemicals shall not be mixed with other substances without knowledge of the reaction.
3. Necessary precautions shall be taken when dangerous chemicals are transported, stored or
used in daily work. Containers with dangerous chemicals shall be properly marked according
to the International Code of Dangerous Goods.
4. The personnel shall use suitable personal safety equipment when handling dangerous chemi-
cals. The personnel shall receive instructions regarding the risks involved and the proper use
of safety equipment during different operations. The safety equipment shall be placed in spe-
cial dust- and watertight lockers in areas where chemicals are often used.
5. An adequate supply of neutralizing substance shall be easily accessible for the neutralization
of spilt acid.
6. The medical warden or person having first aid training shall have a copy of the list of danger-
ous chemicals. He shall receive information regarding poisonous and other harmful effects,
and shall be qualified to give first aid in the event of injuries/poisonings. The necessary med-
icines and equipment for this purpose shall be a part of the first aid equipment of board.
12
Order and good housekeeping, etc.
1. Order.
1.1. All refuse, rubbish and the like shall be kept in suitable containers.
1.2. All hoses, wires, lines, etc. shall be stored in appointed places.
1.3. All protective and safety equipment must be kept in an appointed place when not in
use.
1.4. All tools shall be kept in tool boxes, lockers, or racks when not in use.
2. Good housekeeping.
2.1. Spilling of oil or chemicals shall be removed immediately. Sawdust or the like shall be
on board for use when oil, etc. is spilt.
2.2. The units decks shall be kept free of accumulation of water, snow and ice. Drainage
shall be led overboard.
2.3. For a combination of subsections 2.1 and 2.2 there shall be closed drainage.
2.4. One shall not stay in mess rooms, recreation rooms or cabins wearing work-clothes
and boots.
3. Shielding.
Work places which are especially exposed to weather and wind shall be shielded.
4. Storage.
4.1. All pipes, bits, spare parts, steel plates and profiles, etc. shall be stored in a suitable
and proper manner, and it shall be possible to secure them to withstand a heeling cor-
responding to the maximum heeling angle which the unit may have at the assumed
damage as defined in the stability regulations.
1
4.2. All gas bottles shall be stored in special containers or be secrued by steel hoops.
4.3. Barrels, sacks, and other packages shall be stacked in a safe manner. If necessary, suit-
able pallets shall be used.
4.4. For decks etc. which are used for storage of cargo the maximum amount of cargo and
the allowable load per sq.m. shall be given. The necessary information shall be given
on posters.
1
21 Regulations of 20 December 1991 concerning stability, watertight subdivision and watertight/weathertight closing
848
13
Personal protective clothing/equipment
1. General.
1.1. The necessary protective equipment to guard the personnel against injuries and occu-
pational diseases shall be kept on board all units.
1.2. All protective equipment shall be kept in good condition at all times, and shall be
stored in a separate locker or room on board. The room shall be of such a size or the
locker so positioned as to allow dressing and undressing indoors.
1.3. The platform manager shall see to it that the necessary protective equipment is on
board, that this is used as prescribed and that the required protective measures are tak-
en.
1.4. Personal protective equipment procured shall carry the CE mark
1
. This does not apply
when the mobile offshore unit is outside the European Economic Area and it is diffi-
cult to obtain equipment carrying the CE mark. In such cases the equipment must be
of a quality equivalent to that of CE-marked equipment.
2. Head protection.
2.1. Head protection shall always be used outside the accomodation.
2.2. If necessary, hair protection shall be used.
3. Hearing protection.
3.1. Hearing protection shall be used where the sound intensity level exceeds 90 dB(A)
and shall protect against immediate and delayed permanent hearing injuries. A higher
level of sound intensity without the use of hearing protection may, however, be ac-
cepted if measurements show that the sound intensity at the respective frequencies is
below the limit curve shown in the figure.
850
4. Eye protection.
During use of tools, machinery, power sprayers, caustic liquids or welding lights etc.
which present a risk of injury to the eyes, protective glasses (goggles) shall be used if no oth-
er protective measures offer sufficient protection against eye injuries.
5. Respiratory protection.
5.1. Dust or gas masks with filter shall always be used when there is a risk of injury to
health due to inhaling air polluted by dust, smoke, gases or fumes.
5.2. Respiratory apparatus which is a part of fire fighting equipment shall not be used for
other purposes.
5.3. Persons with a beard should not use a face mask for breathing apparatus, smoke diving
equipment or other protective masks for breathing, unless the equipment is so con-
structed that there is over-pressure inside the masks.
6. Hand protection.
6.1. Strong gloves shall always be used when there is a risk of being injured by sharp or
hot objects.
6.2. Rubber or plastic gloves shall always be used when working with caustic liquids or
other chemicals.
7. Safety footwear.
7.1. Safety footwear shall always be worn outside the accomodation.
7.2. Rubber or plastic boots shall always be worn when there is a risk of being injured by
chemicals.
8. Work clothes.
8.1. The fabric of ordinary work clothes shall be fire-resistant also after having been
washed and shall be made of fibres which do not melt when subjected to high temper-
atures.
8.2. When working with chemicals, work clothes which afford protection against the
chemicals in question shall be worn.
8.3. All work clothes shall be in such a condition that they do not hamper work or entail
danger to the persons wearing them.
9. Work floating-vests and survival suits.
9.1. A work floating-vest or work survival suit of approved type shall be worn when work-
ing on framework or at an unguarded opening toward the sea.
9.2. Work floating-vests and survival suits shall undergo regular control according to di-
rections from the manufacturer. There shall be confirmation in writing on board that
such control has been carried out.
10. Safety harness and belt.
When working aloft or in exposed places where there is a risk of falling down, either over-
board or onto the deck, a safety harness or belt with appurtenant life line shall be used. A
suitable number of safety harnesses and belt with appurtenant lines shall be on board and so
placed that they are easily accessible.
1
13 no. 1.5 are entering into force 1 July 1995. Cf. regulations in force from the Ministry of Local Government and Labor
concerning personel protective equipment, incorporating the EEA agreement, annex XXII paragraph 1 (Council Directive 89/
686/EEC), chapter III on procedures for approval, 15 subsection 3 (protection classes), 18 (information from the manufac-
turer), 22 (personal protective equipment exposed to ageing), 31 (visual marking), 35 (fall to a lower level). (Amended 9
May 1995 No. 1209.)
14
Rescue line
1. As far as possible, the derrick shall be equipped with at least one rescue line or similar ar-
rangement, installed in such a manner that the personnel can escape in an emergency.
2. The rescue line shall be kept taut and free of hindrances.
3. At least one mechanical slide with brake shall always be kept ready at the upper end of the
rescue line.
4. The personnel shall receive instruction in the use of the rescue line.
852
5. The rescue line shall be certified non-combustible and have a safety factor of at least 10
against breaking when loaded with 150 kp in the most unfavourable way.
6. Function test of the rescue line with brake shall be carried out at least once every three
months.
7. A rescue line is not required for unmanned drilling-towers.
15
Marking, warning signs and notices
1. There shall be an easily understandable and visible marking system on board.
There shall be a distinction between the following types of marking: warning signs, prohi-
bition signs, rescue signs, first aid signs, fire protection signs, information signs and direc-
tion signs, cf. Norwegian Standard NS 6033.
2. The signs shall be luminescent or be made visible by other means in the event that the normal
lighting fails. The colours and writing of the signs shall be in accordance with Norwegian
Standard NS 6033. All signs and notices shall be in Norwegian and English.
16
Deviations
16 a
Mutual recognition
way.
gulations.
Laid down 2 March 1999 No. 413 (in force 1 September 1999).
854
17
Penalty
18
Entry into force
1. These regulations enter into force on 1 November 1987.
2. As from the same date the regulations of 13 January 1986 concerning arrangements on and
below deck and for safety measures on Norwegian drilling units and other mobile units, are
repealed.
3. 6a enter into force 1 July 1997
1
.
439/01 Medical supplies on ships
856
CONTENTS
Chapter I: Scope of application and definitions . . . . . 858
1 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
3 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
4 Categories of vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Chapter II: Responsibility and control . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
5 Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
6 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Chapter III: Requirements for ships medical sup-
plies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
7 General medical supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
8 Special medical supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
9 Ships medicine storage unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
10 Additional requirements for ships above 500 GT . . . . . . 862
11 Additional requirements for passenger ships . . . . . . . . . . 862
12 Ships carrying dangerous cargoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
13 Medical supplies on board life-saving appliances . . . . . . 864
Chapter IV: Sick-room, doctor on board . . . . . . . . . . 864
14 Sick-room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
15 Doctor on board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Chapter V: Requisitioning of medical supplies to
ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
16 Requisitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
17 Withdrawal of right to requisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Chapter VI: Storage of medical supplies on ships . . . 866
18 Storage of medical supplies on ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
19 Medical supplies on board life-saving appliances . . . . . . 868
20 First-aid equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
Chapter VII: Dispensing and checking of medical
supplies on ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
21 Dispensing of medical supplies on board . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
22 Inspection and discarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
23 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Chapter VIII: Medical advice, education, training,
handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
24 Medical advice and evacuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
25 Handbooks, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
26 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Chapter IX: Miscellaneous provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
27 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
28 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
29 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
30 Transitional provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
858
Regulation 9 March 2001 No. 439 concerning medical
supplies on ships
Laid down by the Ministry of Health and Social Affairs on 9 March 2001 pursuant to 6-8 of the
Act of 2 June 2000 No. 39 relating to the Operation of Pharmacies, and 47 and 52 of the Act of
9 June 1903 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., with subsequent
amendments, ref. Royal Decree of 13 June 1969 authorizing the Ministry of Social Affairs to issue
regulations pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act, ref. Appendix XVIII paragraph 16a of the EEA
Agreement (Council Directive 92/29/EEC). Amended 10 June 2002 No. 530 and 13 December
2002 No. 1638.
Chapter I
Scope of application and definitions
1
Object
The object of the present regulation is to ensure the availability of such medical supplies on
ships as required for safeguarding the health and safety of employees and passengers. The regula-
tion is intended as a contribution towards the proper procurement, storage, dispensing and check-
ing of medical supplies on ships.
2
This regulation applies to all Norwegian ships. It also applies to life-saving appliances on Nor-
wegian ships, ref. 13.
Unless otherwise provided in any Section () of this regulation, the following categories are ex-
cepted from the regulation:
a) pleasure craft used for non-commercial purposes and not manned by a professional
crew;
b) tugboats operating in harbour areas;
c) mobile offshore units used in the petroleum activities on the Norwegian Continental
Shelf and documented to be covered by an emergency preparedness established pur-
suant to 9-2 of the Petroleum Act
1
which is at least equivalent to the requirements of
this regulation; and
d) vessels of the Naval Defence not holding civilian certificates.
1
Act of 29 November 1996 No. 72 pertaining to petroleum activities.
3
Definitions
a) Passenger ship: any ship for which a passenger certificate, passenger ship safety certi-
ficate, high-speed craft safety certificate or permit for limited passenger carriage is re-
quired pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act
1
;
b) Life-saving appliance: any lifeboat, rescue boat, liferaft or workboat;
c) Company: the registered owner of a vessel, except when the vessel is bareboat chartered
or wholly or partly operated by any natural or legal person other than the owner on the
basis of an agreement on the operation of the vessel, in which case the bareboat charter-
er or the natural or legal person, as appropriate, shall be considered to be the company;
860
d) Master: the person having command of a ship;
e) Employee: anyone who takes up service on a Norwegian ship, including trainees and
apprentices, except harbour pilots and shore-based personnel carrying out work on
board berthed ships;
f) Medical supplies on ships: drugs, medicines and medical equipment, etc., see non-ex-
haustive lists in Appendix 1 and Appendix 2;
g) Narcotics, etc.: drugs referred to in the Norwegian list of narcotic drugs
2
, see Appendix
3;
h) Dispensing: the issue of medical supplies on ships by an authorized person to the requi-
sitioner or patient and the direct use on a patient of medical supplies by an authorized
person;
i) Dangerous cargo: cargo described as dangerous in the International Maritime Danger-
ous Goods (IMDG) Code, issued by the International Maritime Organization (IMO).
1
Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc.
2
Pursuant to the Regulation concerning Narcotic Drugs and the like of 30 June 1978 No. 8.
4
Categories of vessels
For the purpose of this regulation, the following categories of vessels are established:
Category A: Ocean-going vessels, including vessels engaged in fishing on the high seas with no
trade area restrictions and ocean-going vessels not falling within the scope of category B.
Category B: Ocean-going vessels, including vessels engaged in fishing on the high seas in waters
less than 150 nautical miles from the nearest port offering medical assistance by qualified person-
nel or 175 nautical miles from the nearest port offering medical assistance by qualified personnel
if the vessel continuously stays within the reach of a helicopter service.
Category C: Vessels operating in harbours and vessels which either stay within 20 nautical miles
of the Base Line or have no cabin facilities other than the wheelhouse.
Chapter II
Responsibility and control
5
Responsibility
The general responsibility for compliance with the requirements of this regulation at all times
lies within the company. Employees shall not bear any of the costs of procuring and renewing
medical supplies on ships.
The master is responsible for ensuring that the duties prescribed by this regulation are per-
formed.
The master may delegate the dispensing and checking of medical supplies to one or more em-
ployees specially designated on the basis of their qualifications, ref. 18, 21, and 22.
6
Control
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate, or whoever is authorized by the Directorate, is respon-
sible for the control of the companys and masters compliance with the provisions of this regula-
tion.
862
Chapter III
Requirements for ships medical supplies
7
General medical supply requirements
Medical supplies on board shall at the time of procurement be of a quality in respect of their
properties, packaging and marking which is equivalent to that of such articles marketed in Nor-
way.
The marking shall be in Norwegian and English. The requirement for marking in Norwegian or
English may be waived where it can be documented that those who are to dispense medical sup-
plies on ships fully understand the marking.
8
Special medical supply requirements
Medical supplies shall be contained in solid and suitable packaging which clearly indicates the
generic name of the drug or medicine.
Medical supplies shall be marked with the name of the place where they were purchased and
the manufacturer, production number, the date by which they must be used, storage conditions,
and users instructions. The nature and amounts of active ingredients shall appear from the mark-
ing.
9
Ships medicine storage unit
Ships shall be provided with a medicine storage unit containing medical supplies which are at
least in accordance with Appendix 1 and Appendix 2 for the category to which the ship belongs,
ref. 4.
Fishing vessels operating within the trade area bank fishing II, ref. 21 of the regulations on
trade areas
1
, may be considered to be in category B for the provision of medical supplies, ref. first
paragraph.
Vessels less than 15 metres in length belonging to category C and vessels to which a permit for
limited passenger carriage is issued may, in lieu of the medicine storage unit prescribed by the
first paragraph, be provided with necessary first-aid equipment.
The ships medicine storage unit shall at all times contain sufficient quantities of medical sup-
plies. In considering this, regard shall be had, inter alia, to the number of employees, duration of
voyage, final destination and ports of call, types of work to be carried out in the course of the
voyage, nature of cargo, and actual trade area.
1
Regulations of 4 November 1981 No. 3793 concerning trade areas.
10
Additional requirements for ships above 500 GT
Ships above 500 GT shall, in addition to the other requirements contained in this regulation,
carry necessary first-aid equipment in the engine-room and galley.
11
Additional requirements for passenger ships
The company shall, in cooperation with a doctor or pharmacist, ensure that the ship is provided
with the necessary medical supplies at all times. In considering what supplies are necessary, re-
864
gard shall be had, inter alia, to the number of passengers and their needs, duration of voyage, and
actual trade area.
Passenger ships certified to carry 100 passengers or above shall carry on board a kit of medical
supplies for acute medical emergencies. The kit of medical supplies for acute medical emergen-
cies shall be a case or similar container with drugs, medicines and medical equipment which can
be used by a doctor in treating any common and acute medical condition.
12
Ships carrying dangerous cargoes
Ships carrying dangerous cargoes shall be provided with such medical supplies as are necessary
to treat cases of poisoning in accordance with the Medical First Aid Guide (MFAG), ref. 25.
Where it can be documented that other medical supplies are equivalent or better than those listed
in the MFAG, the ship may be equipped for alternative treatment of cases of poisoning. The list of
drugs, medicines and medical equipment must be drawn up in consultation with a doctor.
Drugs, medicines and medical equipment which must be carried pursuant to the first paragraph
and users instructions, ref. 25, shall be kept in a sealed case. The case shall be clearly marked
with first aid - poisoning, the date of the last inspection and a do not use after date. A list of
the contents of the container shall be kept with the supplies.
For any ferry operated under conditions where it may sometimes be impossible, within a suffi-
cient time-limit or after proper notice has been given, to know the nature of the dangerous sub-
stances carried, the sealed case shall contain drugs, medicines and medical equipment and guid-
ance for first-aid treatment in accordance with the first paragraph. Notwithstanding the above,
ferries trading on fixed routes where the scheduled duration of the voyage is less than two hours
may limit their medical supplies for first-aid treatment to those that in particularly critical sit-
uations must be administered within a period of time not exceeding the normal duration of the
voyage. The list of drugs, medicines and medical equipment must be drawn up in consultation
with a doctor.
13
Medical supplies on board life-saving appliances
Life-saving appliances shall be provided with medical supplies as indicated by Appendix 1 and
Appendix 2 and the additional information provided by chapter VI herein.
Chapter IV
Sick-room, doctor on board
14
Sick-room
Ships shall have a sick-room where necessary on grounds of size of crew, number of passen-
gers, duration of voyage, and actual trade area.
15
Doctor on board
Ships with a crew of 100 employees or more engaged on an international voyage exceeding
three days shall have a doctor on board responsible for the medical treatment of employees.
Other ships shall have a doctor on board where necessary. In considering whether a doctor is
necessary, regard shall be had to such factors as risk, trade area, etc.
866
Additionally, passenger ships shall comply with the requirements of 25 of Regulations of 2
October 1972 No. 4 concerning the calculation of number of passengers and concerning passen-
ger accommodation, etc.
Chapter V
Requisitioning of medical supplies to ships
16
Requisitioning
The master, company or the doctor associated with the company is entitled, under the provi-
sions relating to requisitioning of medical supplies from pharmacies
1
, to requisition such medical
supplies as are required on board ship. In the case of a medical emergency, it is the duty of the
master to make the necessary medical supplies available with the shortest possible delay.
The right of companies and masters to requisition narcotics, etc. is limited to those drugs and
quantities that are indicated in Appendix 3.
The Directorate for Health and Social Affairs may give shipyards and businesses supplying
life-saving appliances to ships permission to requisition medical supplies to newbuildings, ref. the
provisions relating to requisitioning of medical supplies from pharmacies
1
. Such permission may
be granted on certain conditions.
Medical supplies that are requisitioned shall be lawfully marketed in the country from which
they are supplied and be of satisfactory quality, ref. 7 and 8.
All purchases of narcotics, etc. shall be entered in the Control Record Book, ref. 25.
In purchasing medical supplies for ships, the master shall see to it that the vendor issues a spe-
cification in duplicate in Norwegian or English of the articles delivered. The specification shall be
kept on board until the next inspection by a competent person pursuant to 22.
Amended by regulation of 10 June 2002 No. 530.
1
Regulation of 27 April 1998 No. 455 concerning requisitioning and dispensing of medical supplies from pharmacies.
17
Withdrawal of right to requisition
If the Directorate for Health and Social Affairs finds that the masters or companys requisi-
tioning of prescription drugs is improper, the masters or companys right to requisition prescrip-
tion drugs under the provisions relating to requisitioning of medical supplies from pharmacies
1
may be withdrawn.
2
Regulation of 27 April 1998 No. 455 concerning requisitioning and dispensing of medical supplies from pharmacies.
Chapter VI
Storage of medical supplies on ships
18
Storage of medical supplies on ships
Medical supplies on ships shall be stored in such a way that their usability is maintained.
Medical supplies shall be kept in convenient order in a locked cupboard, chest, case or similar
container, well protected against moisture, frost or intense heat. Medical supplies which should be
kept in a cold place shall be stored in a refrigerator. Ships in categories A and B shall be provided
with a lockable medicine cupboard. In ships with a sick-room, medicine cupboards shall be locat-
868
ed in the sick-room. Only the master and persons authorized by the master shall have a key and ac-
cess to the medical supplies in the ships medicine storage unit, ref. 9. Narcotics, etc. shall al-
ways be stored in a locked container.
The medical supplies in the ships medicine storage units shall be arranged according to the use
for which they are intended, ref. Appendix 1.
Disinfectants for technical use shall be stored separately from medical supplies.
19
Medical supplies on board life-saving appliances
Medical supplies for life-saving appliances shall be kept in watertight, sealed containers clearly
marked as containing first-aid equipment, with the date of the last inspection and a do not use
after date. A list of the contents shall be found in the container.
For vessels lying unguarded in Norwegian ports, including fishing vessels, small freighters and
local ferries, narcotics, etc. shall not be stored in life-saving appliances. For these vessels, narcot-
ics, etc. for the life-saving appliances shall be packed in separate, watertight containers and stored
in a readily accessible place so that they can easily be picked up in an emergency. It is the masters
responsibility to ensure safe storage when the vessel is unattended at the quayside. The life-saving
appliances shall be clearly marked to show that their medical supplies do not contain narcotics.
20
First-aid equipment
First-aid equipment, ref. 9 and 10, shall be kept in a bag, case, cupboard or similar container
which shall be clearly marked with first-aid equipment, the date of the last inspection and a do
not use after date. A list of the contents shall be kept together with the equipment.
Chapter VII
Dispensing and checking of medical supplies on ships
21
Dispensing of medical supplies on board
Medical supplies shall be dispensed on board only by the master or persons authorized by the
master. Dispensing shall take place only for the treatment of persons staying on board. The dis-
pensing of medical supplies shall, as a main rule, take place in consultation with a doctor or be
subject to written instructions given by a doctor in advance. Any act of dispensing shall be record-
ed by the dispensing person.
If any drug or medicine is dispensed in a larger quantity than is used immediately, it shall be
dispensed in a suitable container on which is inscribed the name of the drug or medicine and di-
rections for its use.
Particular care must be exercised when dispensing narcotics, etc. Every act of dispensing of
narcotics, etc. shall be entered in the Control Record Book, ref. 25.
22
Inspection and discarding
Medical supplies shall be subject to inspection by a competent person at least once every
twelve months. In exceptional cases, the inspection may be delayed for a period of up to five
months. Any inspection carried out shall be documented, ref. fourth paragraph. The phrase in-
spection by a competent person means inspection by a pharmacist or doctor.
870
For ships provided with a Safety Management Certificate, ref. Chapter V of the Seaworthiness
Act
1
with appurtenant regulations, inspection by a competent person may be carried out every
three years, provided that the master or any person authorized by the master, ref. 5, carries out
equivalent inspection of the drugs, medicines and medical equipment, ref. first paragraph, at least
once every twelve months. The safety management system shall contain a procedure for the
checking and inspection of medical supplies on ships.
For medical supplies in life-saving appliances, the inspection pursuant to the first and second
paragraphs shall be supplemented by checks by the master or any person authorized by the master
once every month. Medical supplies in inflatable liferafts shall be inspected as part of the annual
inspection by an approved service station, ref. the International Convention for the Safety of Life
at Sea (SOLAS).
The inspection shall include checking that the medical supplies are in accordance with the re-
quirements of the regulation, that they are stored correctly, that the do not use after dates are ob-
served, and that acts of dispensing medical supplies have been recorded, ref. 21. The supplies of
narcotics, etc. must be checked to see if they are in accordance with the Control Record Book and
any discrepancies must be recorded and explained.
Medical supplies which are to be discarded shall normally be dispatched to a pharmacy or simi-
lar place.
Where medical supplies are destroyed on board ship, such destruction shall be done safely and
appropriately.
1
Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc.
23
Documentation
Documentation of inspections carried out shall indicate, for each article which the ship includ-
ing life-saving appliances is required to carry:
a) the quantities decided pursuant to this regulation;
b) the number of articles counted at inspections; and
c) any information on limited life, etc.
The documentation shall be dated and signed and in the case of an inspection by a competent
person also provided with the stamp of the business or government agency with which that person
is associated.
The documentation of inspections carried out shall be kept on board and on request shown to
representatives of the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or the Directorate for Health and Social
Affairs or to persons authorized by those agencies.
All documentation of inspections carried out, ref. 22, and dispensing of medical supplies, ref.
21, shall be kept on board for at least three years.
Chapter VIII
Medical advice, education, training, handbooks
24
Medical advice and evacuation
Ships shall be given free medical advice by a doctor in the event of messages concerning illness
or accidents which are relayed by the coast radio stations or the medical emergency reporting ser-
vice.
Evacuation of a patient by air ambulance or rescue helicopter from ships in areas for which the
Norwegian rescue service has responsibility is organized by the rescue coordination centre con-
cerned in cooperation with the medical emergency reporting service.
872
25
Handbooks, etc.
Ships shall be provided with adequate handbooks, etc. to ensure that first aid and other medical
treatment may be given in a medically competent manner.
Ships shall carry the following on board:
a) A copy of this regulation.
b) A bound and paginated Control Record Book in which to enter purchases, acts of dis-
pensing and sending in for destruction of narcotics, etc., ref. 16 and 21.
c) A suitable first-aid booklet in Norwegian and English intended for ships. The first-aid
booklet shall be kept together with the supplies of drugs and medicines, etc. The re-
quirement for a first-aid booklet in both Norwegian and English may be waived where
documented that the ships crew understand the language of the first-aid booklet carried
on board.
d) A brief guide to first aid, which shall be kept together with the medical supplies in each
life-saving appliance. The guide shall be in a suitable language and in both Norwegian
and English for ships trading in Norwegian waters.
Ships carrying dangerous cargoes, ref. 12, shall in addition have on board the English-lan-
guage booklet Medical first aid guide for use in accidents involving dangerous goods (MFAG)
or the Norwegian-language booklet Veiledning for medisinsk frstehjelp, issued by the Interna-
tional Maritime Organization.
26
Training
The master or any person authorized by the master to dispense and use drugs, medicines, etc. on
patients on board shall have undergone approved training, ref. the provisions relating to qualifica-
tion requirements, issue of certificates and certificate rights for personnel on Norwegian ships
1
.
1
Regulations of 29 April 1998 No. 398 concerning qualification requirements, issue of certificates and certificate rights for
personnel on Norwegian ships.
Chapter IX
27
Exemptions
The Directorate for Health and Social Affairs, or whoever is authorized by the Directorate for
Health and Social Affairs, may grant exemptions from this regulation on special grounds. The ex-
emption must be necessary and justifiable in terms of safety. An exemption may only be granted
where this does not contravene any international agreement to which Norway has acceded.
28
Penalty
Any violation of this regulation is punishable pursuant to 339 subsection 2 of the General Ci-
vil Penal Code
1
unless a stricter penalty is applicable under another statutory provision.
1
General Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10.
874
29
Entry into force
This regulation enters into force on 1 June 2001.
30
Transitional provision
Each ship shall be provided with medical supplies in accordance with this regulation at the first
annual inspection by a competent person, ref. 22, after 1 June 2001 and not later than 1 June
2002.
Ships which under the first paragraph are temporarily not provided with medical supplies as
prescribed by this regulation, shall be provided with medical supplies in accordance with Regula-
tions of 11 December 1981 No. 8748 concerning medical supplies, etc. on board ship until the
transitional period is over.
The Regulations of 11 December 1981 No. 8748 concerning medical supplies, etc. on board
ship are repealed as from 1 June 2002.
ANNEX
An English version of the appendices to the regulation will be included in the forthcoming 2003
edition of the English-language publication Excerpts from the Norwegian Passenger and Cargo
Ship Legislation, etc.
For the text in Norwegian of the appendices, see Lovdata, www.lovdata.no, or the Norwegian
Maritime Directorates web site, www.sjofartsdir.dep.no.
940/88 Supervision Maritime Service
876
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
2 Scope of regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
3 Supervisory authority etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
4 Scope of supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
5 Supervision obligation, personnel to be supervised etc. . 878
6 Effectuation of supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
7 Submitting of reports to a central register . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
8 Sea service book/record of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
9 Crew list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
10 Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
11 Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
12 Penal clause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
13 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Regulations 25 November 1988 No. 940 concerning
supervision of Maritime Service
Laid down 25 November 1988 by Royal Decree pursuant to Act of 18 June 1971 no. 90 relating to
enrolment of employees on board ships etc., cf. Royal Decree of 1 October 1971. Submitted by the
Ministry of Foregain Affairs.
1
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations the following definitions apply:
a) Vessel:
Ship, drilling vessel, and other mobile offshore units.
b) Employer:
Shipping company or other employer.
c) Supervisory authority:
1. Norwegian foreign service station, specifically designated employment office in Norway,
or other public institution specially authorized to carry out public supervision in pur-
suance of these regulations.
2. Employer/ship master carrying out preliminary supervision in pursuance of these regula-
tions.
d) Ship master:
Master of a vessel, including platform manager.
e) Maritime service:
Service on a vessel.
878
2
Scope of regulations
1. These regulations apply to service on vessels registered in both the Norwegian ordinary re-
gister of ships and in the Norwegian International Ship Register, cf., however, 5 subsection
4.
2. The provisions of the Act of 18 June 1971 no. 90 relating to enrolment of employees on
board ships etc., and these regulations do not apply on board foreign vessels. Norwegian em-
ployees must themselves be able to document their service on foreign vessels when required
with regard to Norwegian legislation.
3
Supervisory authority etc.
It is incumbent on the ship master, the shipping company, and the employer to ensure that the
preliminary supervision is carried out, and that conditions are arranged for the public supervision.
Public supervision of maritime service in accordance with these regulations is carried out by a
supervisory authority as referred to in 1 subsection c) 1, and which is led by the directorate con-
cerned which stipulates further guidelines for the supervision.
4
Scope of supervision
The following shall be subject to supervision:
a) That the employment relationship complies with provisions laid down in statute, regulations,
or agreements.
b) That the employee has the qualifications required for the position in question.
c) That the required medical certificate is submitted.
d) That the employees compulsory military service record does not prevent him from serving
at sea (foreign trade).
e) That sea service book or record of service has been issued.
5
Supervision obligation, personnel to be supervised etc.
1. The employer shall ensure that the supervision referred to in 4 is carried out, and that docu-
mentation for this is available at any time.
Foreign nationals not resident in Norway and employed by a foreign employer to serve
passengers on tourist ships are subject to preliminary supervision only according to 4 let-
ters and a and c. The supervision shall be carried out by the ship master.
Upon commencement of a new employment relationship, public supervision shall be car-
ried out for persons holding positions according to the vessels specifications of crew, or who
are part of the maritime additional manning. The same applies to persons employed by the
shipping company, and who do not sort under the first sentence of this paragraph. It shall be
confirmed in writing that the employment agreement has been presented to the supervisory
authority, and that the compliance with the requirements in 4 has been documented.
2. For employees referred to in subsection 1 third paragraph, supervision by a public authority
shall also be carried out when the employment agreement is altered to the effect that the
terms of employment are not in accordance with agreement previously made, or with any
wage agreement which may apply to the employment relationship.
3 When the employment relationship terminates the ship master carries out the necessary su-
pervision, including supervision to ascertain that the employee has been given what he is en-
titled to according to statute and wage agreements.
880
4. Excempt from supervision according to these regulations are:
a) Employees on vessels below 100 gross register tons.
b) Employees on fishing and catching vessels when these vessels are engaged as such.
c) Employees on vessels engaged in trade on Norwegian lakes and rivers.
d) Persons who serve on vessels belonging to the Defence Forces.
e) Persons who work on board only while the vessel is in port.
f) Persons who only carry out inspection on board.
5. The directorate concerned carries out supervision based on the specification of crew, infor-
mation from the individual employer, surveys on board, and other information which may be
available.
6
Effectuation of supervision
1. Supervision in connection with commencement of a new employment relationship, cf. 5
subsection 1, shall be carried out prior to commencement. In the event that it is not possible
to carry out public supervision prior to commencement, this shall be carried out in the first
port where such supervision is possible.
2. The employee must present satisfactory documentation so that the employer may carry out
supervision of the requirements stated in 4. For public supervision the employer must pre-
sent the employment agreement and satisfactory documentation that the items in 4 have
been checked. Such documentation shall include a certified copy of the certificate if the cer-
tificate is not presented. The supervisory authority concerned may demand the presence of
the employee in person.
7
Submitting of reports to a central register
1. For employees referred to in 5 subsection 1 third paragraph, the employment relationship
shall be registered in a central register.
2. The supervisory authority sends a report of the commencement of new employment rela-
tionship, cf. 5 subsection 1 third paragraph. The employer sends in a report when the em-
ployment relationship is terminated.
3. For employees who are not permanently employed, a report shall also be given when em-
ployees change vessels in connection with taking vacation or time off for overtime worked or
for other reasons, and with interruption of service as in the event of temporary lay-off, ill-
ness, welfare leave and similar.
4 Reports shall be sent to the institution stated. The directorate concerned will stipulate further
guidelines for the reports form and content.
8
Sea service book/record of service
1. Issue
Employees who will serve on Norwegian vessels which are under obligation to be super-
vised, and who are subject to supervision in accordance with 5 subsection 1, shall have
either a Norwegian sea service book or a record of service.
Foreign nationals receive records of service. To foreign nationals not resident in Norway,
and employed by a foreign employer to serve passengers on touristships, a record of service
is issued only when the employee demands to have such record.
Norwegian nationals receive sea service books. Sea service books may also be isued to
foreign nationals who receive a Norwegian certificate.
Records of service are issued by a public supervisory authority in Norway or abroad. Sea
service books may be issued only by a public supervisory authority in Norway.
882
When a sea service book is issued to a Norwegian national, the declaration shall also be
filled in which validates the book as proof of identy. If a sea service book is issued to a for-
eign national, this declaration shall be destroyed.
2. Endorsements
Endorsements concerning certificates and other qualifications which shall be entered in the
sea service book or record of service shall be made by a public supervisory authority. The
same applies to information concerning military records.
3. Entries of service time
a) In the sea service book and record of service, entries of service time shall be made by the
ship master. If such entry has not been made, it may be made by the supervisory authority
as referred to in 1 c) subsection 1.
b) Service time is calculated from the date of commencing service to the date of terminating
service inclusive, with deductions made for interruptions of the service due to illness,
temporary lay-off, welfare leave, and similar prolonged interruptions of service.
c) The employer shall keep documentation of the employees service time until such docu-
mentation may no longer be assumed to be significant to their accumulation or mainte-
nance of certificate rights.
4. The directorate concerned stipulates further provisions concerning the form and content of
the sea service book and record of service, and concerning the endorsements and entries
which shall be made.
9
Crew list
The shipping company and the master shall keep a record of the employees who are on board
the individual vessel at any time. The directorate concerned or other public authority may demand
to have such records handed over.
10
Fees
For public supervision of maritime service and issue of record of service carried out by a Nor-
wegian foreign service station, a fee shall be paid in accordance with the current tariff of fees laid
down pursuant to the Act of 18 July 1958 no. 1 relating to the Foreign Service.
11
Deviations
The directorate concerned may in special cases permit deviations or stipulate other require-
ments than those laid down in these regulations, insofar as this does not conflict with international
agreements ratified by Norway.
12
Penal clause
Wilful or negligent violation of these regulations is punishable by fines pursuant to the Crimi-
nal Justice Act of 22 May 1902 339 subsection 2, unless a stricter penalty may be imposed pur-
suant to other statutory provisions.
13
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 January 1989. As from the same date the regulations of
15 June 1987 concerning mustering of employees on board vessels are repealed.
222/86 Scope of the Seamens Act
884
CONTENTS
1 Scope of the Seamens Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
3 Self-employed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Chapter II: Fishing and catching vessels . . . . . . . . . . . 888
4 Fishing and catching vessels under 100 brutto gross re-
gister tons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
5 Fishing and catching vessels of 100 gross register tons
or more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
6 Exception for fishing and catching vessels . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Chapter III: Mobile Offshore Units etc. . . . . . . . . . . . 890
7 Mobile Offshore Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
8 Exception for mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
9 Foreign ships operated by Norwegian shipping compa-
nies: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
10 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Regulations 31 January 1986 No. 222 concerning the
scope of the Seamens Act
Issued by Royal Decree of 31 January 1986 in purusance of the Seamens Act of 30 May 1975 1,
third and fourth paragraph, and 2b. Submitted by the Ministry of Trade and Shipping. Amended
23 December 1988 and 27 November 1992 No. 871.
Chapter I
General provisions
1
Scope of the Seamens Act
1. Subject to the exceptions and special provisions following from these regulations, the Sea-
mens Act of 30 May 1975 No. 18 is applicable to all those in work on board Norwegian
ships, fishing and hunting vessels and mobile offshore units unless otherwise provided in the
Occupational Environment Act and the Regulations of 27 November 1992 No. 870 concern-
ing occupational safety and environment in the petroleum sector.
2. Excepted from the Act are persons who:
a) only work on board while the ship is in port,
b) only carry out inspections on board,
c) serve on Royal Norwegian Navy vessels, except for civilian personnel on board ships
chartered by the Royal Norwegian Navy,
886
d) are embraced by the Public Servants Act of 4 March 1983 (no 3) insofar as the Sea-
mens Act 3, 5, 5A, 7, 14, 15, 16, 19, 20, 20A, 20B, 21, 22 and 25 is concerned.
3. To the extent the Seamens Act pursuant to the Acts 1 or these regulations does not except
employees who are employed by persons other than the shipping company, the Seamens Act
or regulations issued in pursuance of the Act shall apply such that the employer takes the
place of the shipping company.
Amended 27 November 1992.
2
Definitions
For the purposes of these regulations, the following definitions are applicable:
1. Mobile offshore units: Mobile offshore units not regarded as ships, used in the exploration
for or exploitation, storage or transport of subsea natural deposits or to assist in such activ-
ities.
2. In the Seamens Act and regulations issued in pursuance of the Act, the following are con-
strued as being equivalent:
a) master: platform manager, master of vessel, and master of mobile offshore installa-
tion,
b) seaman: employee,
c) wages: wages or other remuneration for work performed in the service, including lots
or other percentage share of the catch,
d) port: established contact with transit base ashore except in the cases mentioned in
1, 24 and 44 of the Act.
3
Self-employed
For persons who work on board in a self-employed capasity, the following provisions of the Act
are applicable:
4 concerning minimum age etc.,
26 concerning medical examination, except fifth and seventh paragraphs,
27 concerning care of the sick and injured,
28 subsection 1 second paragraph and subsection 3 second paragraph as regards the States obli-
gation to pay the expenses of any sick care abroad which is not covered by National Insur-
ance and passage home with maintenance to the place of residence in Norway in the event of
tuberculosis, veneral disease or mental illness,
29 concerning the States obligation to refund expenses in connection with a seamans sickness
or injury,
30 concerning the masters duties in connection with death and burial,
31 as regards the States obligation to pay burial expenses etc.,
39 concerning the obligation to obey orders, and concerning the crews liability for damage
caused etc.,
40 concerning prevention on accidents and health hazards,
41 concerning food and health conditions,
43 concerning ships service regulations etc.,
45 concerning personal effects on board ship etc.,
46 as regards the duty of the master to take care of effects abandoned on board,
48 concerning the use of force,
49 concerning the masters duties if felonies are committed on board,
51 concerning loans from a norwegian foreign service station and,
52 concerning rules which must be made available to the crew.
888
Chapter II
Fishing and catching vessels
4
Fishing and catching vessels under 100 brutto gross register tons
Persons employed on board fishing and catching vessels of less than 100 gross register tons,
when the vessel is used as such or for the carriage of its own catch or in connection with other
catches, are subject only to the following provisions of Act:
3 subsection 1 first paragraph and subsection 3 concerning engagement for a limited period
etc.,
5 concerning period of notice of termination, except subsection 4,
5A concerning the form, issue and content of the notice of termination,
11 concerning compassionate leave,
12 subsection 1 concerning the right to leave service on board for special reasons, except sub-
section 1, litra f and subsection 2, first paragraph as regards the right of free passage home
with maintenance,
13 concerning pregnancy and childbirth etc.,
14 concerning protection from notice of termination in the event of sickness or injury,
15 concerning dismissal due to service circumstances etc.,
16 concerning procedure for dismissal,
18 concerning rights and duties if the ship is lost, except subsection 1 second paragraph as re-
gards to service on board another ship,
19 concerning protection from undue notice of termination except subsection 1 second para-
graph,
20 except where dispute concerning undue notice of terminations is regulated by collective
wages agreement,
20A concerning the effects of undue notice of termination,
20B concerning a testimonial,
21 concerning calculation of wages,
23 concerning the limitation of the right to make deductions in wages,
25 concerning wages in the event of death,
26 second paragraph concerning the duty when so demanded by the master to submit to medical
examination,
28 concerning wages and care etc in the event or sickness or injury,
29 concerning the States obligation to refund the shipping companys expenses in the event of
a seamans illness or injury,
30 concerning death and burial,
40 concerning prevention of accidents and health hazards,
47 concerning compensation for lost effects,
51 concerning loans from a Norwegian foreign service station,
52 concerning rules which must be made available to the crew.
890
5
Fishing and catching vessels of 100 gross register tons or more
Persons employed on fishing and catching vessels of 100 gross register tons or more, when the
vessel is used as such or for the carriage of its own catch or in connection with other catches, come
under the provisons of the Act subject to the following restrictions:
a) In relation to 3, the following shall apply:
1. Subsection 1, first paragraph concerning engagement in the service of the shipping
company. A written contract need only be made if one of the parties so demands.
2. Subsection 3 concerning engagement for a limited period etc.,
b) 5 subsection 4 shall not apply,
c) 20 shall apply unless the dispute regarding undue notice of termination is regulated
by collective wages agreement,
d) 27 A concerning occupationally disabled seamen shall not apply.
6
Exception for fishing and catching vessels
When special circumstances so indicate, the Directorate for Seamen
1
may decide that groups of
persons on fishing and catching vessels shall be wholly or partially excepted from the provisions
of the Act.
1
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate according to regulation of 23 December 1988 No. 1081.
Chapter III
Mobile Offshore Units etc.
Heading amended 27 Nov 1992.
7
Mobile Offshore Units
1. The Seamens Act applies to persons who are in work on board mobile offshore units and
who are employed by the shipping company or are included under the units Safe Manning
document, with the following restrictions:
7 concerning the right to leave after six months of service on board and,
8 concerning the right of free passage home following an extended period of service, shall
not apply.
The provisions of 21, 22 and 28 subsection 2 concerning the calculation and payment
of wages may be set aside by a collective wages agreement or written contract between the
parties which has been approved by the Directorate of Seamen.
1
2. For persons not included by sebsection 1 in this section, the following provisions of the Act
shall apply:
18 subsection 1, second paragraph concerning the right of free passage home etc.,
26 concerning medical examination, except the fifth and seventh paragraphs,
27 concerning care of the sick and injured,
28 subsection 1 second paragraph and subsection 3 second paragraph as regards the States
obligations to pay the expenses of sick care abroad which is not covered by National
Health Insurance, and passage home with maintenance to the place of residence in Nor-
way in the event of tuberculosis, veneral disease or mental illness,
29 concerning the States obligation to refund expenses in connection with a seamans
sickness or injury,
30 concerning the masters duties in connection with death and burial,
892
39 concerning the obligation to obey orders, and concerning the crews liability for dam-
age caused etc.,
40 concerning prevention of accidents and health hazards,
44 concerning sjmanns rett til g i land i sin fritid,
46 as regards the duty of the master to take care of effects abandoned on board,
48 concerning the use of force,
49 concerning the masters duties if felonies are committed on board and,
51 concerning loans from a Norwegian foreign service station.
1
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate according to regulation of 23 December 1988
8
Exception for mobile offshore units
1. Persons who are in work on mobile offshore units may be wholly or parly exempted from the
Act by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs if the implementation of any part of the regulations
would involve infringement of provisions laid down by another coastal state.
2. The Ministry of Foreign Affairs may similarly exempt from the Act persons mentioned in
subsection 1, and persons on special vessels as mentioned in 2, subsection 1 and 2.
Chapter IV
9
Foreign ships operated by Norwegian shipping companies:
The Ministry of Foreign Affairs may in special cases determine that the Seamens Act wholly
or in part shall apply to persons employed on foreign registered ships in Norwegian domestic wa-
ters, on Norwegian marine territory and in the Norwegian sector of the continental shelf.
10
Entry into force
1. These regulations enter into force on 3 March 1986.
2. From the same date:
a) regulations concerning the scope of the Seamens Act issued by Royal Decree of 19
December 1980 and
b) regulations concerning exemption from the minimum age provision in the Seamens
Act 4, first paragraph for certain employees on board fishing and catching vessels
issued by the Directorate on 25 January 1978 shall be repealed.
894
SECTION VI-8:
Qualification requirements
CONTENTS
Page
Regulation of 9 May 2003 no. 687 concerning qualification requirements and certifi-
cate rights for personnel on board Norwegian ships, fishing vessels and mobile offshore
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
687/03 Qualification requirements
896
CONTENTS
1-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
1-3 Obligations of the master and the company . . . . . . . . . . 906
1-4 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
1-5 Quality system for training and educational institutions . 906
1-6 Issue and safekeeping of certificates and endorsements . 908
1-7 Calculation of seagoing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
1-8 Naval Defence examination and length of naval service . 908
Chapter 2: Basic emergency preparedness and safety
qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
2-1 Emergency preparedness and safety training . . . . . . . . . 908
2-2 Language skills and familiarity with legislation . . . . . . . 910
Chapter 3: Qualification requirements for personnel
not required to hold a certificate of competency . . . . 910
3-1 Qualification requirements for personnel not required to
hold a certificate of competency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
3-2 Qualification requirements for special functions . . . . . . 912
Chapter 4: Certificates of competency for masters
and mates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
4-1 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
4-2 Certificate requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
4-3 Seagoing service and practical training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
4-4 Certificate rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Chapter 5: Certificates of competency for engineer
officers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
5-1 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
5-2 Certificate requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
5-4 Certificate rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Chapter 6: Qualification requirements for personnel
on mobile offshore units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
6-1 Requirements relating to health, safety and emergency
preparedness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
6-2 Positions for which a certificate of competency is re-
quired on mobile offshore units with propulsion machin-
ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
6-3 Qualification requirements for personnel not required to
hold a certificate of competency and for special func-
tions on mobile offshore units with propulsion machin-
ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
6-4 Qualification requirements for personnel on mobile off-
shore units without propulsion machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Chapter 7: Certificates of competency for marine
chief cooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
7-1 Certificate requirements and certificate rights . . . . . . . . 946
7-2 Dispensation from certificate requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 948
898
Chapter 8: Approval of foreign education and train-
ing and certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
8-1 Permission to serve in a position for which a certificate
of competency is required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
8-2 Approval of certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
8-3 Temporary service in a position for which a certificate
of competency is required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
8-4 Application for endorsement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
8-5 Issue of endorsement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
8-6 Rights and validity in case of endorsement . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Chapter 9: Special training requirements for person-
nel on certain types of ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
9-1 Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
9-2 Ro-ro passenger ships and other passenger ships . . . . . . 954
9-3 High-speed craft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
9-4 Passenger ships less than 15 metres in length . . . . . . . . . 956
Chapter 10: Validity of certificates of competency . . . 956
10-1 Validity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
10-2 Renewal of certificate and issue of duplicate certificate . 956
Chapter 11: Transitional provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
11-1 Certificate rights based on previous legislation . . . . . . . . 958
11-2 Certificates based on previous education and training re-
quirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Chapter 12: Concluding provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
12-1 Dispensation from certificate requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 960
12-2 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
12-3 Entry into force, repealment, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Regulation 9 May 2003 no. 687 concerning qualification
requirements and certificate rights for personnel on
board Norwegian ships, fishing vessels and mobile
offshore units
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate pursuant to the Act of 5 June 1981 No. 42 re-
lating to Certification of Personnel on Norwegian Ships, Drilling Units and other Mobile Offshore
Installations, 1, 2, 3, and 5 (cf. Royal Decree of 11 December 1981 and the Ministry of Trades
Formal Delegation of 18 December 1981) and the Act of 9 June 1903 No. 7 relating to Public
Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., 1, 93, and 106, cf. Royal Decree of 5 April 1963
and Royal Decree of 1 December 1978 authorizing the Norwegian Maritime Directorate to issue
regulations pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act, cf. the EEA Agreement, Annex XIII para. 56j (Di-
rective 2001/25/EC), and Annex XVIII para. 16a (Directive 92/29/EEC).
Chapter 1
General provisions
1-1
(1) This regulation applies to personnel employed on board ships subject to the regulations
currently in force concerning the manning of Norwegian ships, to personnel employed on fishing
vessels, and to personnel on mobile offshore units. The regulation also applies to personnel em-
ployed by the company or other parties in connection with the carriage of passengers, sales activ-
900
ities, maintenance or other service on board insofar as this is prescribed by the provisions herein.
The provisions of 2-1 second paragraph and 2-2 third paragraph of this regulation also apply
to personnel on board foreign passenger ships in regular scheduled service between Norwegian
and foreign ports.
(2) Requirements for masters or deck officers shall apply to sailing ships or power-driven ships
of 15 metres or more in length, and on fishing vessels 10.67 metres (35 feet) or more in length, as
well as lighters of 100 gross tonnage or more in unrestricted trade, as prescribed by the provisions
herein. The regulation contains special provisions relating to requirements for masters of passen-
ger ships of less than 15 metres in length. Personnel on sailing ships and power-driven ships of
less than 25 gross register tons
1
according to tonnage certificates issued before 16 December 1983
are not subject to the requirements of this regulation even if the ships are 15 m or more in overall
length, unless otherwise provided pursuant to the fourth or fifth paragraphs.
(3) Requirements for engineer officers shall apply to power-driven ships, fishing vessels and
mobile offshore units having a propulsion machinery of 750 kW propulsion power or more, as
prescribed by the provisions herein.
(4) In individual cases, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may decide that a certificate of
competency shall be required for service as master on smaller vessels than referred to in the sec-
ond paragraph or as engineer officer on ships of less propulsion power than referred to in the third
paragraph if deemed necessary due to the type of vessel, its activity, machinery, technical equip-
ment, trade area or other special safety-related conditions. Likewise, the Norwegian Maritime Di-
rectorate may, pursuant to regulation I/3 of the STCW Convention and following a concrete as-
sessment, reduce, or grant exemption from, the certificate requirements on ships engaged on near-
coastal voyages if the conditions mentioned in the previous sentence are such as to justify such a
decision.
(5) Service on high-speed craft, passenger ships and tankers is subject to special training as set
out in Chapter 9 of this regulation.
(6) For other exceptional ships, including sailing ships, ships of a special design or using spe-
cial machinery or equipment, or engaged in transport where an accident may have great environ-
mental or social consequences, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may require masters, deck
officers or engineer officers to have other qualifications, certificates or endorsements than those
specified in this regulation.
1
Gross register tons (GRT) in accordance with the measurement rules in force prior to the entry into force of the International
Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969.
1-2
Definitions
(1) Recognized standards for drilling and well servicing personnel: Requirements and guide-
lines developed or accepted by a shelf state authority, licencees and operators on the shelf and
field in question.
(2) Assessor: Person approved to assess competence in accordance with regulation I/6 of the
STCW Convention.
(3) Specification of crew: A specification of crew issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directo-
rate.
(4) Gross tonnage: Gross tonnage according to the International Convention on Tonnage Mea-
surement of Ships, 1969, as specified in the vessels valid Tonnage Certificate. For national gross
register tonnage according to measurement rules in force prior to the entry into force of the In-
ternational Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969, the tonnage limits laid down in
this regulation shall not apply.
(5) Certificate of Receipt of Application (CRA): A confirmation of the receipt and acceptance
of an application for endorsement. The CRA entitles the holder of a foreign certificate to serve
temporarily in a position for which a certificate of competency is required on Norwegian ships,
fishing vessels and mobile offshore units, until the application for endorsement is processed.
902
(6) Deck officer: Officer qualified to hold a deck officers certificate in accordance with the
provisions of chapter II of the STCW Convention.
(7) Seagoing service: Shipboard service providing knowledge, insight, and skills required for
the issue of a certificate or other documentary evidence as referred to in this regulation.
(8) Trade area: Trade areas are defined according to the regulation currently in force concern-
ing trade areas.
(9) Near-coastal voyages: The North Sea and Baltic Sea trade area according to the regulation
currently in force concerning trade areas.
(10) Fishing vessel: A vessel used commercially for catching fish, whales, seals or other living
resources of the sea, including seaweed and sea tangle.
(11) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillships, equipped for drilling for sub-
sea petroleum deposits, and mobile platforms for use other than drilling for subsea petroleum de-
posits.
(12) Mobile offshore unit with propulsion machinery: A mobile offshore unit as referred to in
subparagraph 11 and for which the following can be documented:
a) the ability to keep a speed of 5 knots in calm weather with no current, and
b) the ability to keep its position at 20 m/s wind, with the corresponding waves, and 2 m/s
current.
(13) Propulsion power: The total maximum continuous rated output power in kilowatts of the
ships aggregate main propulsion machinery, as indicated on the ships certificate of registry or
other official document (1kW = 1.36 hp).
(14) Pleasure craft: Any floating device intended for use and capable of movement on the water
and used for non-commercial purposes.
(15) Function: A task or a group of tasks, duties and responsibilities, as specified in the STCW
Code, necessary for ship operation, the safety of life at sea and protection of the marine environ-
ment.
(16) Second engineer officer: The engineer officer next in rank to the chief engineer officer and
upon whom the responsibility for the mechanical propulsion and the operation and maintenance
of the mechanical and electrical installations on board the ship will fall in the event of the incapac-
ity of the chief engineer officer.
(17) Gas carrier: A ship constructed or converted and used for the carriage in bulk of any of the
liquefied gases or other products referred to in Chapter 19 of the International Code for the Con-
struction and Equipment of Ships carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk (IGC Code).
(18) Approved: Approved by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
(19) High-speed craft: A craft which according to its certificate is capable of a maximum speed,
in metres per second (m/s), equal to or exceeding:
3.7
0.1667
where = displacement corresponding to the design waterline (m
3
).
(20) Passenger high-speed craft:
a) Foreign trade: High-speed craft which is certified to carry more than 12 passengers.
b) Domestic trade: High-speed craft which is certified to carry more than 12 passengers
and capable of reaching a speed of 25 knots or more.
(21) Ro-ro passenger high-speed craft: Passenger high-speed craft with ro-ro cargo spaces or
special category spaces as defined in regulation II-2/3 of the Solas Convention, or a passenger
high-speed craft with facilities to enable road or rail vehicles to roll on and off the craft.
(22) Instructor: Person appointed by the shipping company to be responsible for on-board train-
ing in accordance with regulation I/6 of the STCW Convention.
(23) Chemical tanker: A ship constructed or converted and used for the carriage in bulk of any
liquid product listed in Chapter 17 of the International Code for the Construction and Equipment
of Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk.
(24) Cargo ship: A ship used for the carriage of liquid or solid cargoes or a ship for which the
Norwegian Maritime Directorate has issued a cargo ship certificate, and which is not a passenger
ship or fishing vessel.
(25) Lighter: A vessel without propulsion machinery of its own which shall be towed or pushed
for any movement and which is used for the carriage of cargo.
(26) Rating: A member of the ships crew other than the master or officers.
904
(27) Power-driven ship: A ship having an engine as the principal means of propulsion.
(28) Engineer officer: An officer qualified to hold an engineer officers certificate in accord-
ance with the provisions of chapter III of the STCW Convention.
(29) Chief engineer officer: The senior engineer officer responsible for the mechanical propul-
sion and the operation and maintenance of the mechanical and electrical installations on board a
ship.
(30) Officer: A member of the crew, other than the master, and who is designated as officer in
this regulation.
(31) Oil tanker: A ship constructed and used for the carriage of petroleum and petroleum pro-
ducts in bulk.
(32) Comprehensive steam power plant: A plant comprising, in addition to steam boiler with au-
xiliary equipment, a steam turbine driven electrogenerator and steam turbine driven discharging
pumps.
(33) Operator: A company or other association which, by the award of production licence, is
appointed by the shelf authority to be in charge of the day-to-day management of activities per-
formed in accordance with the licence, cf. section 9 of the Petroleum Act.
(34) On-board training: Service with supervised on-board training according to an approved
training programme.
(35) Chief mate: The deck officer next in rank to the master and upon whom the command of
the ship will fall in the event of the incapacity of the master.
(36) Passenger ship: A ship for which a passenger certificate, passenger ship safety certificate
or passenger high-speed craft safety certificate is required in accordance with the Act of 9 June
1903 No. 7 relating to the Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc.
(37) Platform manager: The person having the highest authority on board a mobile offshore
unit.
(38) Endorsement: A document which, in accordance with this regulation, entitles the holder of
a foreign certificate to serve on board a Norwegian ship, fishing vessel or mobile offshore unit.
(39) Life-saving appliance: Rescue boat or survival craft (lifeboat, workboat, liferaft, etc.)
(40) Ro-ro passenger ship: A passenger ship with ro-ro or special category spaces as defined in
the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (Solas Convention), as amended.
(41) Company: The owner of the ship or any other legal or natural person, such as the manager,
or the bareboat charterer, who has assumed the responsibility for operation of the ship from the
shipowner and who on assuming such responsibility has agreed to take over all the shipowners
duties and responsibility imposed by this regulation.
(42) Sailing ship: A ship having sail(s) as the principal means of propulsion.
(43) Sea service book/record of service: A document issued by public authorities pursuant to the
regulation currently in force concerning supervision of maritime service.
(44) Seagoing ship: A ship operating in trade area 3 or greater trade.
(45) Master: The person having the highest authority on board.
(46) Minimum safe manning: The ships safety manning as prescribed by the regulation current-
ly in force concerning manning.
(47) Safety management system: All systematic measures to be taken by the shipowner to ensure
that activities are planned, organized, carried out and maintained in accordance with the require-
ments laid down in the regulations currently in force concerning a safety management system.
(48) STCW Code: Seafarers Training, Certification and Watchkeeping (STCW) Code as adopt-
ed by resolution 2 of the 1995 conference, as amended.
(49) STCW Convention: The International Convention on Standards of Training, Certification
and Watchkeeping for Seafarers, 1978, as amended in 1995 and by any subsequent amendments.
(50) Service: For the purpose of this regulation, anyone engaged to perform a function as part of
the ships complement shall be considered to be in service.
906
1-3
Obligations of the master and the company
(1) The company is responsible for ensuring that the provisions of regulation I/14 and section
A-I/14 of the STCW Convention are implemented on its ships, and compliance with those re-
quirements shall be documented. For ships where an international safety management (ISM) sys-
tem is required, compliance with the requirements shall be documented in that system.
(2) The master and the company are responsible for ensuring that personnel who are assigned
duties and responsibilities related to the cargo or with immediate responsibility for loading, un-
loading and care of the cargo are qualified in accordance with this regulation and 106 of the Sea-
worthiness Act, and that:
a) all seafarers who are to serve on board the companys ship in a capacity or function for
which a certificate of competency is required hold a certificate of competency which
complies with the provisions of applicable legislation, and
b) the ship is manned in compliance with the applicable minimum safe manning require-
ments, and
c) documentation and data relevant to all seafarers employed on board the ship are main-
tained and readily accessible, including documentation of data on the seafarers certifi-
cates, experience, training, medical fitness and competency in assigned duties, and
d) seafarers, on being assigned to a ship, are familiarized with their specific duties and
with all ship arrangements, installations, equipment, procedures and ship characteristics
that are relevant to their routine or emergency duties, and
e) the ships complement can effectively co-ordinate their activities in an emergency sit-
uation and in performing functions vital to safety or to the prevention or mitigation of
pollution.
(3) For mobile offshore units, the company and the platform manager are responsible for en-
suring compliance with the provisions of this regulation.
1-4
Exemptions
For mobile offshore units, if the requirements of the coastal state and the requirements contained
in this regulation are irreconcilable, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may grant exemption
from the requirements of this regulation insofar as safety is not jeopardized.
1-5
Quality system for training and educational institutions
(1) All activities relating to training, assessment and documentation of shipboard competence
and activities of training and educational institutions in respect of seafarers qualifications under
the STCW Convention shall be approved and continuously monitored, ref. regulation I/8 of the
STCW Convention.
(2) Such activities shall have a quality standards system in which quality policy, organizational
structure, areas of responsibility, procedures, objectives and associated quality standards are spec-
ified for different courses and training programmes. The quality standards system shall contain
systematic monitoring arrangements, including internal evaluations of the quality assurance
which is to ensure the achievement of all defined objectives, including those concerning the qual-
ifications and experience of instructors and assessors, ref. regulation I/6 of the STCW Conven-
tion. The quality standards system shall be in accordance with the provisions of regulation I/8 of
the STCW Convention.
908
(3) Operations shall be approved by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is au-
thorized by the Directorate. Documentation of the quality standards system may be required to be
submitted as the basis for approval, and serves as the basis for subsequent audits.
(4) Where an approved educational institution uses subcontractors to comply with the require-
ments of course or training programmes, this shall also be included in the quality assurance of the
system.
1-6
Issue and safekeeping of certificates and endorsements
(1) Certificates and endorsements of certificates are issued, upon written application, by the
Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate. Other documenta-
tion entitling the holder to serve in a capacity or function on a ship, fishing vessel or mobile off-
shore unit is issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Di-
rectorate.
(2) Certificates and other documentation entitling the holder to serve in a capacity or function
shall be kept on board in its original form and, if so required, be presented for inspection.
1-7
Calculation of seagoing service
The seagoing service required for the issue of a certificate or documentation of qualification re-
quirements set out in the STCW Convention is deemed to be the time actually spent in service on
board in day-to-day normal operation of the ship, fishing vessel or mobile offshore unit.
1-8
Naval Defence examination and length of naval service
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate will decide whether and to what extent examinations
from naval institutions and length of naval service shall give rights under this regulation.
Naval education or training aimed at providing qualifications under this regulation shall comp-
ly with the same provisions as other education or training referred to in this regulation.
Chapter 2
Basic emergency preparedness and safety qualifications
2-1
Emergency preparedness and safety training
(1) Before being assigned to shipboard duties, all seafarers shall receive approved familiar-
ization training in personal survival techniques or receive sufficient information and instruction
relating to safety and emergency preparedness in accordance with section A-VI/1, paragraph 1 of
the STCW Code.
(2) Any seafarer assigned emergency or safety function duties on board, including training for
a capacity with such duties, shall hold an approved document showing that the seafarer has suc-
cessfully completed approved emergency preparedness training in accordance with section A-
VI/1, paragraph 2 of the STCW Code, comprising training in personal survival techniques, fire
prevention and fire-fighting, elementary medical first aid, and personal safety and social respon-
sibilities. Personnel assigned emergency or safety function duties are those identified in the ships
muster list. All crew members on passenger high-speed craft, irrespective of their function on
board, shall have successfully completed such training.
910
(3) For subordinate personnel assigned emergency or safety function duties on passenger ves-
sels other than passenger high-speed craft, of less than 300 gross tonnage and in trade area 1, the
requirements relating to a restricted safety course (Begrenset sikkerhetskurs) approved by the
Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall apply. The requirements relating to the restricted safety
course (Begrenset sikkerhetskurs) shall only apply to subordinate personnel serving on this
type of passenger vessel in the period from 1 May to 30 September.
(4) Personnel not required to hold a certificate of competency on fishing vessels are subject to
the safety training requirements of the regulation currently in force concerning safety training for
fishermen.
(5) Documentation of training as referred to in the second and third paragraphs shall not be ol-
der than five years.
2-2
Language skills and familiarity with legislation
(1) All persons in service on a ship shall have such language skills as are necessary to be able
to communicate with each other about safety and emergency matters and to be able to understand
safety information in the form of text, symbols, and alarms.
(2) A person who is to form part of the prescribed minimum safe manning or any additional
manning pursuant to the regulation currently in force concerning the manning of Norwegian ships
engaged in greater trade than small coasting, shall have sufficient knowledge of English. This
shall include the ability to understand commands, written muster lists and emergency instructions,
and written information relating to the use and maintenance of life-saving equipment, etc.
(3) On passenger ships in regular service out of Norwegian ports, personnel designated to
guide and assist passengers in an emergency situation shall master English and a Scandinavian
language.
(4) A person for whom an endorsement is applied for must document, by a written statement
from the company, satisfactory knowledge of English and satisfactory familiarity with Norwegian
legislation relating to the responsibilities of the position in question. Anyone applying for an en-
dorsement independently of an employment relationship must document such competence by a
course certificate as mentioned in the fifth paragraph.
(5) Where a foreign national applies for dispensation as a master, the company shall document
that the person concerned is familiar with Norwegian legislation and possesses the necessary lan-
guage skills acquired through an approved course and successful completion of an approved test.
Chapter 3
Qualification requirements for personnel not required to hold
a certificate of competency
3-1
Qualification requirements for personnel not required to hold a
certificate of competency
(1) Documentation
The seagoing service and length of service required shall be documented by prescribed records in
the form of a sea service book or approved record of service. Work experience that can be used in
lieu of seagoing service shall be documented by a testimonial from the employer, authenticated by
a public body, official or educational institution. Practical and theoretical training from school
shall be documented by an approved course certificate, testimonial and training record book.
(2) Ordinary seaman
An ordinary seaman shall have a length of service of 6 months on deck or other relevant service
912
time, such as practical training, work experience in mechanical skills, maritime subjects, or rele-
vant sea service on mobile offshore units.
(3) Able-bodied seaman
An able-bodied seaman shall have a length of service of 3 years or other relevant experience as re-
ferred to in the second paragraph, including a length of service of at least 1 year as an ordinary
seaman or in a similar position which includes deck service or relevant sea service on mobile off-
shore units. An able-bodied seaman holding a certificate of apprenticeship based on vocational
training must also hold documentary evidence of at least 1 year of seagoing service.
(4) Greaser
A greaser shall have a length of service of 6 months in the engine department or other relevant ser-
vice time, such as practical training, work experience in mechanical skills, maritime subjects, or
relevant sea service on mobile offshore units.
(5) Motorman and engine-room attendant
A motorman and an engine-room attendant shall have a length of service of 3 years in the engine
department or other relevant experience as referred to in the fourth paragraph, including a length
of service of at least 6 months in the engine department or equivalent engine-room service on mo-
bile offshore units. A motorman holding a certificate of apprenticeship based on approved voca-
tional training must also hold documentary evidence of at least 6 months on-board training or
equivalent service time in the engine department or service on mobile offshore units.
(6) Stoker
A stoker shall have a length of service of 3 years in the engine department or other relevant expe-
rience as referred to in the fourth paragraph, including a length of service of at least 1 year as a
steamship greaser.
(7) Electrician
An electrician shall have either:
a) a certificate of apprenticeship for electrician with a ships electrician module and at
least 3 months experience as electrician on board ship, or
b) equivalent approved foreign education in electrical subjects and at least 3 months ex-
perience as electrician on board ship, or
c) a certificate of competency as ships electrician or marine electro-automation officer is-
sued under previous legislation.
(8) Electrician with special high-voltage qualifications
Where the voltage of the electrical system exceeds 1,000 V AC or 1,500 V DC, the certificate of
the electrician in charge of the operation of the system shall be provided with an endorsement in
accordance with previous legislation, or the electrician shall have other documentation of high-
voltage competence, such as:
a) 3 months practical training in the operation and maintenance of high-voltage systems
on board ships, drilling vessels or other mobile offshore units, and an approved course,
or
b) 3 months equivalent practical training ashore or from a production platform, and an ap-
proved course, or
c) 6 months experience from operation and maintenance of high-voltage systems ashore
or on fixed production platforms under the direction of an electrician competent in the
operation and maintenance of high-voltage systems, or
d) a certificate of apprenticeship as electric fitter group A or H or a certificate of appren-
ticeship as an energy fitter.
3-2
Qualification requirements for special functions
(1) General requirements
A person who is to form part of the prescribed minimum safe manning or any additional manning
pursuant to the regulations currently in force concerning the manning of Norwegian ships shall be
qualified to perform the safety-related tasks mentioned therein which are assigned to the function
914
concerned. Such person shall hold a certificate, an approved course certificate or an endorsement
entitling the person to perform the functions concerned.
(2) Approved course and examination
Persons applying for certificates shall have successfully completed an approved course and an ex-
amination, the level of which shall at least comply with the requirements of the STCW Code. The
Norwegian Maritime Directorate may issue guidelines for the approval, with details on subjects,
marks, and documentation.
(3) On-board training and assessment
Any person who is to conduct instruction or assessment of on-board training intended as a basis
for certification shall in accordance with regulation I/6 of the STCW Convention be qualified un-
der section A-I/6 of the Convention. Any person assessing such training must be approved. To be
approved, the person concerned must hold a management-level certificate issued under regula-
tions II/2 or III/2 of the STCW Convention. Any person conducting assessment shall also have re-
ceived approved training in assessment of competence.
(4) Navigational watch
Any person forming part of a navigational watch on a seagoing ship of 500 gross tonnage or more
and who is not a trainee rating or a rating whose watch duties do not require skill training, must
hold a certificate for watchkeeping in the deck department. To qualify for such a certificate, the
candidate must satisfy the requirements of regulation II/4 of the STCW Convention.
(5) Engineering watch
Any person forming part of an engineering watch on a seagoing ship with a propulsion machinery
of 750 kW and upwards, who is not a trainee rating and a rating whose watch duties do not require
skill training, must hold a certificate for watchkeeping in the engine department. To qualify for
such a certificate, the candidate must satisfy the requirements of regulation III/4 of the STCW
Convention.
(6) Proficiency in survival craft and rescue boats
Anyone designated to have the command of a survival craft must, in addition to complying with
the capacity-specific requirements of this regulation, have approved training and a certificate as
prescribed in regulation VI/2, paragraph 1 of the STCW Convention, ref. the regulation currently
in force concerning life-saving appliances, etc. on passenger and cargo ships.
(7) Proficiency in fast rescue boats
Anyone designated to have the command of a fast rescue boat must, in addition to complying with
the requirements of the sixth paragraph, have approved training and a certificate as prescribed by
regulation VI/2, paragraph 2 of the STCW Convention.
(8) Medical first aid
Any person designated to provide medical first aid on board ship shall be required to document
compliance with the approved training requirements of regulation VI/4, paragraph 1 of the STCW
Convention.
(9) Medical care
Any person designated to take charge of medical care on board ship shall be required to document
compliance with the approved training requirements of regulation VI/4, paragraph 2 of the STCW
Convention. In addition to the requirements of the STCW Convention, the master or any other
person who is charged with the use of the ships medical supplies and equipment shall have un-
dergone training as prescribed by Council Directive 92/29/EEC, article 5, paragraph 3, ref. article
4.
(10) Advanced fire-fighting
Any person designated to control fire-fighting operations must have documented approved train-
ing as prescribed by regulation VI/3 of the STCW Convention.
916
Chapter 4
Certificates of competency for masters and mates
4-1
Certificates
(1) The issue of certificates of competency for masters and mates shall be subject to the regula-
tions of chapter II of the STCW Convention. Masters and deck officers shall hold an appropriate
certificate which entitles them to take up service or to serve in the capacity concerned.
(2) The following certificates of competency are issued:
1. Deck Officer Class 5
6. Master Fisherman Class C
7. Master Fisherman Class B
8. Master Fisherman Class A
9. Masters Certificate for Pleasure Craft.
4-2
Certificate requirements
(1) General requirements for the issue of certificates
a) In addition to the requirements of regulation VI/4, paragraph 2 of the STCW Conven-
tion, applicants for a certificate entitling the holder to navigate a ship or serve in a ca-
pacity to which the responsibility for use of the ships medical supplies and equipment
may be transferred shall have undergone training as prescribed by Council Directive 92/
29/EEC article 5, paragraph 3, ref. article 4 of the directive.
b) Applicants may be required to submit a police certificate of good conduct. An applica-
tion for a certificate of competency may be refused with reference to information about
the applicant in the police certificate of good conduct. Such refusal shall be of limited
duration.
c) If conditions referred to in subparagraph b) cease to be met, the certificate may be with-
drawn. By analogy, a certificate incorrectly issued may be withdrawn pursuant to the
Public Administration Act, 35, first paragraph, c), and third paragraph.
d) Masters rights:
1. The master of a ship of 250 gross tonnage or upwards shall be a Norwegian national
or a national of a country to which the EEA Agreement applies.
2. The master of a passenger ship shall be not less than 20 years of age.
(2) To qualify for a Deck Officer Class 5 certificate, the candidate must:
a) be at least 18 years of age, and 20 years of age in the case of master, and
b) have an approved health certificate for employees on board ship, and
c) have completed approved education and training and passed an examination covering at
least the requirements of regulation II/3, paragraphs 3 and 5 of the STCW Convention,
and completed approved training covering at least the requirements of regulation VI/1
paragraph 2, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, and regulations VI/3 and VI/4 of the STCW
Convention, and
d) satisfy qualification requirements for radiocommunications in accordance with chapter
IV of the STCW Convention, and
e) have not less than 12 months approved seagoing service as part of an approved on-
board training programme on a seagoing ship of 15 metres in length or more, including
navigational bridge training in accordance with regulation II/4 of the STCW Conven-
918
tion, or at least 36 months approved seagoing service on a seagoing ship, of which at
least 6 months shall be in accordance with regulation II/4 under the supervision of a
qualified officer. Service on a non-seagoing ship may be approved provided that an ad-
ditional 6 months of seagoing service with assessment of performance is carried out on
a seagoing ship in trade area 3 or greater trade.
f) A person who is to have the command of a vessel of 15 metres in length or more but of
less than 500 gross tonnage must, in addition to the requirements referred to above,
have at least 12 months approved seagoing service as the officer in charge of a naviga-
tional watch on board such vessel or larger vessel.
least the requirements of regulation II/1 and regulation II/3, paragraph 5 as prescribed in
the STCW Convention, and have completed approved training covering at least regula-
tion VI/1 paragraph 2, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, and regulations VI/3 and VI/4 of the
STCW Convention, and
tion, or at least 36 months approved seagoing service on a seagoing ship, of which at
least 6 months shall be in accordance with regulation II/4 under the supervision of a
a seagoing ship in trade area 3 or greater trade, and
f) have undergone approved assessment carried out by an approved assessor in accord-
ance with the relevant tables specified in the STCW Code.
g) A person who is to have the command of a vessel of more than 15 metres in length, but
of less than 500 gross tonnage must, in addition to the requirements referred to above,
have at least 12 months seagoing service as the officer in charge of such vessel or larg-
er vessel.
least the requirements of regulation II/1 and regulation II/2 paragraph 3, regulation II/3
paragraph 5 or regulation II/2 paragraph 1, as prescribed in the STCW Convention, and
have completed approved training covering at least regulation VI/1 paragraph 2, regula-
tion VI/2 paragraph 1, and regulations VI/3 and VI/4 of the STCW Convention, and
tion, or at least 36 months approved seagoing service on a seagoing ship, at least 6
months of which shall be in accordance with regulation II/4 under the supervision of a
a seagoing ship in trade area 3 or greater trade, and
f) have undergone approved assessment carried out by an approved assessor in accord-
ance with the relevant tables specified in the STCW Code.
920
g) A person who is to have the command of a vessel of more than 15 metres in length, but
of less than 500 gross tonnage must, in addition to the requirements referred to above,
have at least 12 months seagoing service as the officer in charge of such vessel.
h) A person who is to have the command of a seagoing ship of more than 500 but less than
3000 gross tonnage shall satisfy the requirements for the officer in charge of the naviga-
tional watch on a seagoing ship of more than 500 gross tonnage and have not less than
36 months approved seagoing service in such position. This period is reduced to 24
months if at least 12 months has been served as chief mate on board a vessel of more
than 500 gross tonnage.
a) be at least 20 years of age, and
least the requirements of regulation II/1 and regulation II/2 paragraph 1, as prescribed in
tion VI/1 paragraph 2, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, regulation VI/3 and regulation VI/4
paragraph 2 of the STCW Convention, and
e) have at least 12 months approved seagoing service as the officer in charge of the navi-
gational watch on board a seagoing ship of more than 500 gross tonnage.
f) A person who is to have the command of a seagoing ship of more than 500 but less than
3000 gross tonnage shall satisfy the requirements for the officer in charge of the naviga-
tional watch on a seagoing ship of 500 gross tonnage and upwards and have not less
than 36 months approved seagoing service in such position. This period may be re-
duced to 24 months if at least 12 months has been served as chief mate.
least the requirements of regulation II/1 and regulation II/2 paragraph 1, as prescribed in
tion VI/1 paragraph 2, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, and regulations VI/3 and VI/4 of the
STCW Convention, and
e) have at least 36 months approved seagoing service as the officer in charge of the navi-
gational watch on board a seagoing ship of more than 500 gross tonnage. This period
may be reduced to 24 months if at least 12 months has been served as chief mate on a
seagoing ship of more than 500 gross tonnage.
(7) To qualify for the Master Fisherman Class C certificate the candidate must:
b) have a health certificate confirming satisfactory eyesight, colour vision and hearing ac-
cording to the requirements of 4-2, thirteenth paragraph, and
least the requirements for the Masters Certificate for Pleasure Craft, and
e) have completed approved safety training for fishermen, and
f) have at least 12 months seagoing service on a fishing vessel of 10.67 metres and up-
wards in overall length.
(8) To qualify for the Master Fisherman Class B certificate the candidate must:
922
c) have completed approved education and training and passed an examination at least co-
vering the requirements prescribed in regulation II/3, paragraphs 3 and 5 of the STCW
Convention, and have completed approved training at least covering regulation VI/1 pa-
ragraph 2, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, and regulations VI/3 and VI/4 of the STCW
Convention, and
d) satisfy qualification requirements for radiocommunications in accordance with regula-
tion IV of the STCW Convention, and
e) have at least 24 months approved seagoing service on board a seagoing ship of more
than 15 metres in length, at least 6 months of which shall have been served on board a
fishing vessel of more than 15 metres in length. Up to 12 months of this seagoing ser-
vice may have been served on a fishing vessel of more than 10.67 metres in length if the
person concerned has held the Master Fisherman Class C certificate during the same pe-
riod of time.
f) The issue of a Master Fisherman Class B certificate based on previous certificates shall
be subject to documentation of upgraded safety competence in accordance with the
STCW Convention.
(9) To qualify for the Master Fisherman Class A certificate the candidate must:
c) have completed approved education and training and passed an examination at least co-
vering the requirements prescribed in regulation II/1 and regulation II/2 paragraph 3 or
II/2 paragraph 1 of the STCW Convention, and have completed approved training at
least covering regulation VI/1 paragraph 2, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, and regulations
VI/3 and VI/4 of the STCW Convention, and
e) have at least 24 months approved seagoing service on board a seagoing ship of more
than 15 metres in length, at least 6 months of which shall have been served on board a
fishing vessel of more than 15 metres in length.
f) The right to serve as the master of a fishing vessel of more than 500 gross tonnage shall
be subject to documentation of at least 12 months seagoing service on board a fishing
vessel as the officer in charge of the navigational watch.
g) The issue of a Master Fisherman Class A certificate based on previous certificates shall
be subject to documentation of upgraded safety competence in accordance with the
STCW Convention.
(10) Certificates valid for a restricted trade area may be issued on the basis of seagoing service
adapted to their rights where this does not contravene an international agreement to which Nor-
way has acceded and provided it is also considered justifiable in terms of safety.
(11) Deck officer certificates of competency valid only for service in protected waters may be
issued on the basis of seagoing service in such trade area if sufficient seagoing service has not
been earned in trade beyond protected waters. To qualify for a Deck Officer Class 1 certificate,
the entire seagoing service referred to in the sixth paragraph must have been earned on a ship of
500 gross tonnage or upwards.
(12) Certificates valid only for service on special vessels may be issued on the basis of a passed
examination specially adapted for masters of such vessels where this does not contravene an in-
ternational agreement to which Norway has acceded. The examination may also be adapted to cer-
tificate rights for different trade areas.
(13) To qualify for a Masters Certificate for Pleasure Craft valid only for the navigation of
pleasure craft of 15 metres or more in overall length, the candidate must be at least 18 years of age
and:
a) have a health certificate confirming satisfactory eyesight, colour vision and hearing, is-
sued by a general practitioner or an approved seamens doctor, covering the following:
1. the required eyesight shall be at least 0.5 with both eyes tested simultaneously.
Where optical correction is necessary to achieve this vision, the candidate is re-
quired to use such correction during service as master. If vision in one eye is less
924
than 0.05, vision in the other eye must be at least 0.6, if necessary with optical cor-
rection. The field of vision shall be normal in at least one eye,
2. requirements for normal colour vision, examined with Ishivara charts or equivalent
test,
3. requirements for hearing with no loss of hearing greater than 40 dB at the frequen-
cies 500-2000 Hz and 60 dB at 3000-4000 Hz. Normal hearing obtained with the
use of a hearing-aid may be permitted, and
4. following a specific assessment of each individual case, the issue of a Masters Cer-
tificate for Pleasure Craft may be refused in the event of illness or other health fai-
lure if the state of health involves increased risk to the safety of the applicant or oth-
er persons.
b) have passed an examination at least equivalent to the examination referred to in the sec-
ond paragraph or have passed an approved pleasure craft skippers test, and
c) have at least 12 months seagoing service which can be approved for the issue of a deck
officer certificate of competency, or had the disposal of and regularly used a vessel of
more than 8 metres in length for at least 3 years.
d) Seagoing service shall be documented by the presentation of a sea service book, record
of service or a statement authenticated by the police or others who are considered to
have knowledge of the seagoing service for which approval is sought.
4-3
Seagoing service and practical training
(1) Seagoing service which is approved for the issue of deck officer certificates of competency
shall have been earned in a capacity with service in the deck department comprising navigational
watch, mooring, cargo-handling operations, safety-related maintenance and emergency prepared-
ness procedures. Such seagoing service can also be earned on mobile offshore units with pro-
pulsion machinery.
(2) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may lay down more detailed rules relating to approv-
al of seagoing service and other experience.
4-4
Certificate rights
(1) General provisions:
a) A deck officer holding a certificate as referred to in 4-1 is entitled to serve, subject to
the limitations entered and those contained in 1-1, fifth and sixth paragraphs, as mas-
ter or deck officer as set out in the tables below.
b) All certificates, except the Masters Certificate for Pleasure Craft, entitle the holder to
have the command of a lighter in unrestricted trade.
c) The Deck Officer Class 1 certificate gives the holder the exclusive right to the title
Master Mariner and the right to serve as master or mate of any grade on any ship, ir-
respective of size, in unrestricted trade.
d) The Masters Certificate for Pleasure Craft entitles the holder to serve as master or mate
on pleasure craft of up to 50 gross tonnage in greater coasting. Rights may be extended
on the basis of relevant additional training.
e) Certificates giving the highest rights to masters in the Classes 3, 4 or 5 are not issued
until the necessary seagoing service is earned and documented.
926
(2) Deck Officer Class 5 certificate.
Master Chief mate Officer in charge of a navigational
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
Trade area Gross tonnage
up to
up to
Trade area
500 gr.t.
1
N.B 500 gr.t. N.B 500 gr.t. N.B
N.B. = North Sea and Baltic Sea trade
1
Rights as master of a vessel of more than 15 metres in length but of less than 500 gross tonnage apply subject to compliance
with the requirements of 4-2, second paragraph, subparagraph f).
Conversion table for certificates issued under previous legislation
Designation of certificate Act/Regulations
Coastal Skipper Regulations of 1981
Deck Officer Class 5 Regulations of 1989
(3) Deck Officer Class 4 certificate
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
up to
up to
Trade area
500 gr. t.1 N.B 3000 gr. t.
2
500 gr. t.
N.B. Unrestricted Unrestricted
1
Rights as master of a vessel of more than 15 metres in length but of less than 500 gross tonnage apply subject to compliance
with the requirements of 4-2, third paragraph, subparagraph g).
2
Rights relating to vessels of up to 3000 gross tonnage apply only to those who convert in accordance with the conversion ta-
ble and who possessed such rights under previous legislation.
Mate Regulations of 1981
928
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
up to
up to
Trade area
500 gr. t.
1
3000 gr. t.
2
N.B.
Unrestricted 3000 gr. t. Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted
1
A person who is to have the command of a vessel of more than 15 metres in length but of less than 500 gross tonnage shall sa-
tisfy the requirements of 4-2, fourth paragraph, subparagraph g).
2
A person who is to have the command of a vessel of more than 500, but less than 3000 gross tonnage, shall satisfy the re-
quirements of 4-2, fourth paragraph, subparagraph h).
Skipper Regulations of 1981
Mate Class 2 Act of 1958
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
up to
up to
Trade area
500 gr. t.
3000 gr. t.
1
N.B.
Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted
1
Rights as master of vessels of up to 3000 gross tonnage apply subject to compliance with the requirements of 4-2, fifth pa-
ragraph, subparagraph f).
Mate Class 1 Act of 1936/1958
Chief Mate Regulations of 1981
930
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
up to
up to
Trade area
Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted
Shipmaster
Master Mariner
Act of 1936
Act of 1958
(7) Master Fisherman Class C certificate
Master
Tonnage limitation Trade area
Fishing vessel of more than 10.67 metres
and up to 15 metres in length, but of less
than 50 gross tonnage
Bank Fishing I
(8) Master Fisherman Class B certificate
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
up to
up to
Trade area
500 gr. t. N.B.
BF II
500 gr. t. N.B.
BF II
500 gr. t. N.B.
BF II
BF II = Bank Fishing II
Coastal Skipper Regulations of 1981
932
(9) Master Fisherman Class A certificate
watch
Gross tonnage
up to
up to
up to
Trade area
500 gr. t.
3000 gr. t.
Unrestricted
1
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
1
For unrestricted rights as master, the person concerned must document at least 12 months seagoing service as officer in
charge of the navigational watch on board a fishing vessel of more than 500 gross tonnage, ref. 4-2, ninth paragraph, sub-
paragraph f).
Shipmaster Acts of 1936 and 1958
Master Mariner Regulations of 1981
Deck Officer Class 1 Regulations of 1989 and 1998
Mate Act of 1936
Chief Mate Regulations of 1981
Deck Officer Class 2 Regulations of 1989 and 1998
Skipper Regulations of 1981
Mate Regulations of 1981
Master Fisherman Act of 1958
Master Fisherman Regulations of 1981 and 1989
Coastal Skipper 1st Class Act of 1958
Coastal Skipper 2nd Class Act of 1958
934
Chapter 5
Certificates of competency for engineer officers
5-1
Certificates
(1) The issue of certificates of competency for engineer officers shall be subject to the regula-
tions in chapter III of the STCW Convention. Engineer officers shall hold an appropriate certifi-
cate which entitles them to take up service or to serve in the capacity concerned.
(2) The following certificates are issued:
a) Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate (restricted)
b) Engineer Officer Class 4A certificate
c) Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate
d) Engineer Officer Class 3 certificate
e) Engineer Officer Class 2 certificate
f) Engineer Officer Class 1 certificate
(3) Certificates under subparagraphs a) and b) above apply only to the renewal of certificates
issued under previous legislation.
5-2
Certificate requirements
(1) General provisions for the issue of certificates:
a) A police certificate of good conduct may be required. An application for a certificate of
competency may be refused with reference to information about the applicant in the po-
lice certificate of good conduct. Such refusal shall be of limited duration.
b) If the conditions referred to in subparagraph a) cease to be met, the certificate may be
withdrawn. By analogy, a certificate incorrectly issued may be withdrawn pursuant to
the Public Administration Act, 35, first paragraph, subsection 1, and third paragraph.
c) For a certificate to be valid for both steamships and motor vessels, at least 6 months of
the seagoing service required to obtain such a certificate must have been earned on
either type of ship.
d) To obtain an Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate, Steam, 1 year of seagoing service as
engineer officer on a motor vessel with a comprehensive steam plant may be accepted
in lieu of seagoing service on a steamship.
(2) To qualify for an Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate, the candidate must:
a) be at least 18 years of age,
b) have an approved health certificate for employees on board ship,
c) have passed an approved examination covering at least the requirements of regulation
III/1 of the STCW Convention,
d) have completed approved safety training covering at least the requirements of regula-
tion VI/1, regulation VI/2 paragraph 1, regulation VI/3 and regulation VI/4 paragraph 1,
and
e) have at least 30 months approved education and training, including 24 months of train-
ing in workshop skills and, in addition, at least 6 months seagoing service in the engine
department as part of an approved training programme which complies with the re-
quirements of section A-III/1 of the STCW Code and is documented in an approved
training record book by an approved assessor.
(3) To qualify for an Engineer Officer Class 3 certificate, the candidate must satisfy the re-
quirements of the second paragraph and have:
a) completed approved education and training and passed an approved examination cover-
ing at least the requirements of regulation III/3 of the STCW Convention, and
b) not less than 12 months approved seagoing service as engineer officer.
936
b) not less than 12 months approved seagoing service as engineer officer.
b) not less than 36 months approved seagoing service as engineer officer, including not
less than 12 months seagoing service in a capacity for which an Engineer Officer Class
2 certificate is required.
5-3
(1) Seagoing service that may be approved for certification as engineer officer on a motor ves-
sel is seagoing service from an equivalent or higher capacity for which a certificate is required, on
a mobile offshore unit with propulsion machinery.
(2) Training in workshop skills shall be taken to mean education and training in accordance
with approved curriculums developed to cover the requirements for training in workshop skills for
the officer in charge of an engineering watch under section A-III/1 of the STCW Code. Work ex-
perience from a shipyard/workshop in connection with the building, repair and maintenance of ro-
tating machinery for ships and offshore industry may be approved, partly or wholly, as training in
workshop skills, subject to a special assessment.
(3) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may lay down more detailed rules relating to approv-
al of seagoing service and other experience.
5-4
Certificate rights
(1) An engineer officer holding a certificate as mentioned in 5-1 is entitled to serve, with the
limitations specified and those laid down in 1-1, fifth and sixth paragraphs, as engineer officer
as set out in the individual tables and footnotes below.
(2) Certificates giving the highest rights to chief engineers in the Classes 2 and 3 are not issued
until the necessary seagoing service is earned and documented.
(3) The Engineer Officer Class 1 certificate gives the holder the right to serve in any engineer
officer capacity on any ship, irrespective of the ships propulsion power.
938
Certificate STCW 95
reference
Position or
capacity
Seagoing
service
required
kW limitation
Passenger ships,
cargo ships and
other ships
Fishing
vessels
Engineer Officer
Class 1
Regulation
III/2
Chief Engineer
Officer
36 months sea-
going service as
engineer officer,
including at least
12 months in a
capacity requir-
ing an Engineer
Officer Class 2
certificate
Unlimited Unlimited
Engineer Officer
Class 2
Regulation
III/2
Chief Engineer
Officer
Second Engineer
Officer
Officer in charge
of engineering
watch
24 months as en-
gineer officer
12 months as en-
gineer officer
Up to 3000 kW
1
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
2
Unlimited
Unlimited
Engineer Officer
Class 3
Regulation
III/3
Chief Engineer
Officer
Second Engineer
Officer
Officer in charge
of engineering
watch
24 months as en-
gineer officer
12 months as en-
gineer officer
Up to 3000 kW
2
Up to 3000 kW
Unlimited
Up to 3000 kW
Unlimited
Unlimited
Engineer Officer
Class 4
Regulation
III/1
Chief Engineer
Officer
Second Engineer
Officer
Officer in charge
of engineering
watch
6 months ap-
proved seagoing
service
Up to 750 kW
Up to 750 kW
Unlimited
Up to 1000 kW
Unlimited
Unlimited
1
Rights are acquired after 24 months seagoing service as engineer officer.
2
Rights as Chief Engineer Officer 3000 kW or more are acquired after 24 months seagoing service as engineer officer.
3
Rights are acquired after 24 months seagoing service as engineer officer.
Footnotes apply to service as Chief Engineer Officer.
940
Certificate STCW 95
reference
Position or
capacity
Seagoing
service
required
kW limitation
Passenger ships,
cargo ships and
other ships
Fishing
vessels
Engineer Officer
Class 4A
Regulation
III/3
Regulation
III/1
Chief Engineer
Officer
Second Engineer
Officer
Officer in charge
of engineering
watch
Based on pre-
vious certificates/
education and
training
Up to 1000 kW
Up to 2000 kW
Unlimited
Up to 1000 kW
Unlimited
Unlimited
Engineer Officer
Class 4
(limited)
Regulation
III/3
Regulation
III/1
Chief Engineer
Officer
Second Engineer
Officer
Officer in charge
of engineering
watch
Based on pre-
vious certificates/
education and
training
Up to 750 kW
Up to 1000 kW
Up to 2000 kW
Up to 1000 kW
Unlimited
Unlimited
Chapter 6
Qualification requirements for personnel on mobile offshore
units
6-1
Requirements relating to health, safety and emergency preparedness
(1) Personnel in positions for which a certificate of competency is required as referred to in
6-2 shall have an approved health certificate for employees on board ship. All other personnel
on board shall have either a health certificate for employees on board ship or a health certificate
for persons employed in the petroleum industry.
(2) All personnel on board shall have a valid course certificate confirming completion of basic
safety and emergency preparedness training at an approved training institution.
6-2
Positions for which a certificate of competency is required on mobile
offshore units with propulsion machinery
The following qualification requirements apply to positions for which a certificate of compe-
tency is required on mobile offshore units with propulsion machinery:
a) Platform manager:
1. Deck Officer Class 1 certificate; and
2. successful completion of an approved Platform Manager course with operative sim-
ulator training; and
3. at least 2 years experience as Stability Section Leader on a mobile offshore unit.
b) Stability Section Leader:
1. Deck Officer Class 2 certificate; and
2. successful completion of an approved Stability Section Leader course; and
3. at least 1 years experience as Control Room Operator on a mobile offshore unit.
942
c) Control Room Operator:
1. Deck Officer Class 4 certificate, or Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate; and
2. successful completion of an approved Stability Section Leader course or internal
training adapted to the position concerned.
d) Technical Section Leader:
1. Engineer Officer Class 1 certificate (for motor vessels); and
2. successful completion of an approved Technical Section Leader course; and
3. at least 1 years experience as Technical Assistant on a mobile offshore unit.
e) Technical Assistant:
2. successful completion of an approved Technical Section Leader course; and
3. at least 1 years experience as Engine Room Operator or Engineer Officer on a mo-
bile offshore unit.
f) Engine Room Operator:
2. successful completion of an approved Technical Section Leader course or internal
training adapted to the position concerned.
6-3
Qualification requirements for personnel not required to hold a
certificate of competency and for special functions on mobile offshore
units with propulsion machinery
Personnel not required to hold a certificate of competency are subject to the following qual-
ification requirements:
a) Control Room Assistant
A Control Room Assistant shall have undergone an approved Stability Section Leader
course or special on-board training with regard to the units stability, transfer of ballast
and draught, anchor-handling and control room operation.
In addition, the following qualifications are required:
1. Deck Officer Class 4 certificate or Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate; or
2. theoretical education as in subparagraph 1, and 2 years of systematic training rele-
vant to service as marine engineer on board ship or mobile offshore unit; or
3. education from a two-year technical vocational school or college of engineering,
engineering or motor subjects branch, and 2 years of systematic training relevant to
service as deck officer or marine engineer on board ship or mobile offshore unit.
b) Crane Operator
A Crane Operator shall have successfully passed an examination comprising theoretical
and practical training in accordance with the current syllabus plan for the operation of
offshore industry cranes, approved by other public authorities.
c) Electrician and electrician with special high-voltage qualifications
An electrician and, where relevant, an electrician with special high-voltage qualifica-
tions shall be qualified in accordance with 3-1, seventh and eight paragraphs.
d) Drilling and well section
Personnel shall have undergone theoretical and practical training and experience in ac-
cordance with applicable recognized standards for drilling and well servicing person-
nel.
e) Radio Operator
A Radio Operator shall hold a valid certificate in accordance with the regulation cur-
rently in force concerning the installation and use of radio equipment on board mobile
offshore units.
f) Proficiency in survival craft, rescue boats and fast rescue boats
Operators of survival craft, rescue boats and fast rescue boats shall hold a special certi-
ficate in accordance with 3-2, sixth and seventh paragraphs.
944
g) DP operator
Operators of dynamic positioning systems shall be qualified in accordance with the
training requirements set out in MSC/Circ. 738 or equivalent requirements.
h) Medical first aid and medical care
Personnel designated to provide medical first aid and medical care shall be a certified
public nurse.
i) Other qualification requirements
Other personnel shall be sufficiently qualified for the position concerned and shall have
completed a training programme. The company is responsible for developing such
qualification requirements and training programmes for the positions. The company
shall issue qualification documents upon completion of training. Qualification require-
ments and training shall be of clear relevance to the technical and maritime duties and
responsibilities associated with the various positions.
6-4
Qualification requirements for personnel on mobile offshore units
without propulsion machinery
Personnel on mobile offshore units without propulsion machinery are subject to the following
qualification requirements:
a) Platform Manager
1. Theoretical training as for the Deck Officer Class 1 certificate or other equivalent
theoretical and practical training; and
2. successful completion of a Platform Manager course with operative simulator train-
ing; and
3. not less than 2 years experience as Stability Section Leader on a mobile offshore
unit.
b) Stability Section Leader
1. Theoretical training as for the Deck Officer Class 2 certificate or other equivalent
theoretical and practical training; and
2. successful completion of a Stability Section Leader course; and
3. not less than 2 years experience as Control Room Operator on a mobile offshore
unit.
c) Control Room Operator
1. Theoretical training as for the Deck Officer Class 4 certificate or Engineer Officer
Class 4 certificate, or other equivalent theoretical and practical training; and
2. successful completion of a Stability Section Leader course or completed internal
training adapted to the position.
d) Technical Section Leader
1. Theoretical training as for the Engineer Officer Class 1 certificate (for motor ves-
sel) or other equivalent theoretical and practical training; and
2. successful completion of a Technical Section Leader course; and
3. not less than 1 years experience as Technical Assistant on a mobile offshore unit.
e) Technical Assistant:
1. Theoretical training as for the Engineer Officer Class 2 certificate (for motor ves-
sel) or other equivalent theoretical and practical training; and
2. successful completion of a Technical Section Leader course; and
3. not less than 1 years experience as Engine-room Operator on a mobile offshore un-
it.
f) Engine-room Operator
1. Theoretical training as for the Engineer Officer Class 4 certificate (motor vessel) or
other equivalent theoretical and practical training; and
2. successful completion of a Technical Section Leader course or completed internal
training adapted to the position
946
g) Other personnel
All other positions on mobile offshore units without propulsion machinery are subject
to the requirements set out in 6-3 of this regulation.
6-5
(1) The holder a certificate of competency as engineer officer or deck officer with service in a
position for which a certificate of competency is required on a mobile offshore unit with pro-
pulsion machinery will earn seagoing service as set out in 4-3 and 5-3 of this regulation.
(2) The holder of a certificate of competency as engineer officer or deck officer on a mobile
offshore unit without propulsion machinery will maintain seagoing service only for the certificate
class held by the person concerned.
(3) When calculating seagoing service for obtaining the right to serve in the positions of plat-
form manager, stability section leader, technical section leader and technical assistant on mobile
offshore units, the calendar year counted from the first day of service on board is used as the basis
for calculation. When calculating seagoing service required for the issue of deck officer and engi-
neer officer certificates, 1-7 of this regulation shall apply.
Chapter 7
Certificates of competency for marine chief cooks
7-1
Certificate requirements and certificate rights
(1) A certificate of competency as marine chief cook shall be required for service as cook on
board Norwegian ships.
(2) To qualify for a certificate of competency as marine chief cook, the candidate must:
a) have successfully passed an examination as referred to in the third paragraph below;
and
b) have not less than 3 years practical and theoretical training in catering subjects, includ-
ing at least 3 months seagoing service on board a ship, fishing vessel or mobile off-
shore unit.
(3) The following examinations are approved as falling within the scope of the second para-
graph, subparagraph a) of this regulation:
a) upper secondary course I, cookery subjects (marine/shore) with a completed and suc-
cessfully passed practical test; or
b) one-year course in cookery subjects on the basis of work experience; or
c) complete apprentice school, cookery subjects; or
d) apprenticeship examination in cookery subjects; or
e) apprenticeship examination in institutional cookery subjects; or
f) other examination including at least the approved tests under article 4 paragraph 3 of
ILO Convention no. 69 (1946).
(4) The following is approved as practical training within the meaning of the second para-
graph, subparagraph b) of this section: practical training in cookery subjects on board ship, mobile
offshore units and installations at sea, traineeship or practical cookery training in the hotel and
restaurant industry, period of education in cookery subjects at upper secondary school assessed
according to rules for trainees in the hotel and restaurant industry, or other relevant practical train-
ing and work experience assessed by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate in each individual case.
(5) If systematic training has been acquired, the requirements for practical training in accord-
ance with the fourth paragraph above may be derogated from according to rules issued by the Nor-
wegian Maritime Directorate, provided that a complete training programme has been followed.
948
(6) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may specify more detailed rules for the approval of
practical training.
(7) In order to be issued with a certificate of competency as marine chief cook, documentation
of satisfactory health must also be submitted in accordance with the regulation currently in force
concerning the medical examination of employees on ships. Issue of the certificate may be re-
fused on the basis of information in a police certificate of good conduct or information from sea-
mens employment supervision authorities about disciplinary matters etc. A refusal to issue a cer-
tificate shall apply for a limited period of time and shall be in accordance with the guidelines for
the assessment of good conduct specified by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
7-2
Dispensation from certificate requirements
(1) If a marine chief cook holding the prescribed certificate cannot be obtained without undue
difficulty, the Ministry may permit the appointment of a person who does not hold the required
certificate of competency as marine chief cook. Such dispensation shall apply only to one specific
person serving in one specific position on one specific ship and shall not be granted for a period
exceeding 6 months. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may also in other exceptional cases
permit the appointment of a person who does not hold the prescribed certificate.
(2) A dispensation may be granted only where the applicant has professional qualifications
which, collectively, may be assessed against the certificate requirements, cf. 7-1.
(3) Applicants holding foreign certificates must hold a certificate which is found to be equi-
valent to the required Norwegian certificate of competency as marine chief cook.
(4) When it is necessary or reasonable, out of consideration for foreign crew members, to em-
ploy catering personnel with a knowledge of foreign cooking, the Norwegian Maritime Directo-
rate may permit departures from the provisions of 7-1, first paragraph.
(5) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may permit the appointment of a cook who has com-
pleted shore-based vocational training where that training is included as part of the supplementary
education to qualify for a certificate of competency as marine chief cook or to take further educa-
tion for the teaching profession. Such permission may not be renewed for a period of time exceed-
ing 6 months.
(6) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may lay down more detailed instructions for use by
the seamens employment supervisory authority in case of appointment of persons who do not
hold the required certificate.
Chapter 8
Approval of foreign education and training and certificates
8-1
Permission to serve in a position for which a certificate of competency
is required
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate may permit
the holder of a foreign certificate to serve in a position for which a certificate of competency is re-
quired and for which the person concerned is qualified under this regulation.
8-2
Approval of certificates
(1) Applications for approval of foreign certificates for service as master, officer or radio oper-
ator on Norwegian ships shall be subject to regulation I/10 of the STCW Convention. Approval of
950
such certificate may be granted provided that the certificate has been issued by or on the authority
of a state for which the STCW Convention has entered into force. In addition, full compliance
with the requirements for competency, issue and endorsement of certificates, and registration,
must be documented.
(2) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may take measures which may also include inspec-
tion and evaluation in order to ensure that seamen applying for approval of certificates issued un-
der the provisions of regulations II/1, II/2, II/3, III/1, III/2, III/3, or V/1 paragraph 2, or issued in
accordance with regulation VII/1, satisfy the requirements for competency as defined in the
STCW Code.
(3) Certificates issued by or on the authority of a state for which the STCW Convention has not
entered into force shall not be approved.
8-3
Temporary service in a position for which a certificate of competency is
required
(1) The holder of a foreign certificate satisfying the requirements of 8-2 and having submit-
ted a complete application for endorsement under 8-4, may be issued with a Certificate of Re-
ceipt of Application (CRA). The CRA, together with the foreign certificate, permits the applicant
to serve on board, for a period not exceeding 3 months from the date of issue, in the position spec-
ified in the certificate with reference to the STCW Convention, until a decision has been reached
on the application. The CRA shall not be issued to a master who is not an EEA national, except
upon special approval by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate in each individual case.
(2) A CRA may also be issued for a person who does not hold a certificate of competency as
marine cook in accordance with subsection 2, but who has submitted an application for dispensa-
tion from the certificate requirement for cooks, provided that the person concerned has at least 3
years of documented professional cooking experience.
8-4
Application for endorsement
(1) Applications for endorsement shall be submitted to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on
the prescribed form. Applications may also be submitted to a Norwegian employment office or
foreign service station for the issue of a CRA in accordance with 8-3. Applications and all sup-
porting documents shall be written in Norwegian or English. A valid certificate and documenta-
tion regarding which classes and grades under the STCW Convention are covered by the certifi-
cate, with any limitations, shall be submitted.
(2) In cases where the holder of a foreign certificate from a country outside the European Eco-
nomic Area applies for an endorsement, that person shall be employed or shall be assured employ-
ment on board a Norwegian ship or on board a ship for which registration in a Norwegian ship re-
gister is requested.
(3) The person for whom an endorsement is applied for shall have satisfactory knowledge of
the English language and be sufficiently familiar with the Norwegian legislation relating to the
responsibilities of the position concerned.
(4) In cases where a foreign national applies for dispensation as master, the company shall
document that the person concerned is familiar with Norwegian legislation and has the necessary
language qualifications acquired through participation in an approved course and has successfully
passed an approved test.
(5) Applications for endorsement for radiotelegraph and radiotelephone operators shall be sub-
mitted to Telenor Networks. A navigator who is to serve as radio operator as part of his or her du-
ties shall, in addition to having an endorsement as navigator, also have an endorsement as radio
operator.
(6) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may require documentation of all education, train-
ing, experience and seagoing service from the preceding five years.
952
8-5
Issue of endorsement
(1) Any person who is granted permission as referred to in 8-4 shall have an endorsement is-
sued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate.
(2) A certificate issued by an authority of a state for which the STCW Convention has entered
into force shall be approved in accordance with 8-2 and shall carry an endorsement by the com-
petent authority regarding which classes and grades under the STCW Convention are covered by
the certificate issued, including any limitations. An endorsement is issued with the rights in rela-
tion to Norwegian certificates as set out in chapters 4 and 5 of this regulation.
(3) When it is necessary, due to considerations for foreign crew members diet, to employ a
cook from a state which has not ratified ILO Convention no. 69, and the person concerned has
documented practice and training which can be assessed against the requirements of that conven-
tion, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate may grant
dispensation from the certificate requirement for a limited period of time.
8-6
Rights and validity in case of endorsement
(1) An endorsement issued under the provisions of this regulation is valid only when accompa-
nied by the foreign certificate forming the basis for the issue of the endorsement document.
(2) An endorsement may be given a period of validity of up to five years from the date of issue.
An endorsement may be renewed for up to five years at a time on the basis of a valid certificate.
The validity of the endorsement shall not be extended beyond the validity of the foreign certificate
in question.
(3) An endorsement issued to a national of a country outside the European Economic Area
shall not normally entitle the holder to serve as master on a ship of 250 gross tonnage and up-
wards. The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may grant dispensation from this provision for ships
registered in the Norwegian International Ship Register and may take emergency preparedness in-
to consideration when considering applications for such dispensation.
(4) An endorsement may be withdrawn in accordance with the provisions of 5 of the Certifi-
cation Act, ref. 4 subsection 3.
Chapter 9
Special training requirements for personnel on certain types
of ship
9-1
Tankers
(1) Mandatory minimum standards of training and qualifications for tanker personnel shall be
as set out in regulation V/1 of the STCW Convention. In addition, the following provisions shall
apply:
a) the approved seagoing service referred to in regulation V/1, paragraph 1.1, shall be
documented by the ships master; and
b) the appropriate experience referred to in regulation V/1, paragraph 2.1, shall be the time
deemed necessary by the master and the company for the issue of documentation of suf-
ficient knowledge of safe operational practices to obtain a certificate of the highest
grade for tanker personnel; and
c) the relevant capacity referred to in regulation V/1, paragraph 3, shall be documented as
the capacity with immediate responsibility for loading, unloading and care of the cargo
on the type of tanker concerned.
954
(2) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may, for all persons who meet the minimum stan-
dards set out in regulation V/1 of the STCW Convention, issue a certificate for tanker personnel
with indication of the tanker category for which the certificate is valid, i.e. oil tankers, gas carriers
or chemical tankers respectively. The following certificates are issued:
a) a certificate of the highest grade for tanker personnel satisfying the requirements of the
first paragraph, subparagraphs a), b) and c); and
b) a certificate of the lowest grade for tanker personnel satisfying the requirements of the
first paragraph, subparagraphs a) and c).
(3) Personnel holding a foreign tankerman certificate of the highest grade must apply for a
Norwegian endorsement in accordance with the provisions of chapter 8 of this regulation. A for-
eign tankerman certificate of the lowest grade is not subject to endorsement.
9-2
Ro-ro passenger ships and other passenger ships
(1) Masters, officers, ratings and other personnel on board ro-ro passenger ships shall have ap-
proved training in crowd and crisis management as prescribed by regulation V/2 of the STCW
Convention.
(2) Masters, officers, ratings and other personnel on board passenger ships other than ro-ro
passenger ships shall have approved training in crowd and crisis management as prescribed by re-
gulation V/3 of the STCW Convention.
9-3
High-speed craft
(1) Masters and deck officers on board high-speed craft shall have the following qualifica-
tions:
a) Vessels more than 15 metres in length, but of less than 50 gross tonnage:
1. The master shall as a minimum hold the Deck Officer Class 5 certificate; and
2. have successfully completed an approved high-speed craft course; and
3. have completed a practical test in accordance with guidelines issued by the Norwe-
gian Maritime Directorate on board the craft in question and in the relevant waters
during daytime and night-time navigation.
b) Vessels of 50 to 500 gross tonnage:
1. The master and the mate shall as a minimum hold the Deck Officer Class 4 certifi-
cate. Masters shall in addition have 12 months seagoing service as the officer in
charge of the navigational watch on board such craft, 6 months of which shall have
been served in such position on a high-speed craft; and
c) Vessels of 500 to 3000 gross tonnage:
1. The master and the chief or only mate shall as a minimum hold the Deck Officer
Class 3 certificate. The master shall in addition have not less than 36 months ap-
proved seagoing service as the officer in charge of the navigational watch on a sea-
going craft of more than 500 gross tonnage. This service time may be reduced to 24
months provided that not less than 12 months has been served as chief mate. Both
alternatives are subject to a requirement for at least 6 months service as the officer
in charge of the navigational watch or chief mate on board a high-speed craft; and
956
d) Vessels of 3000 gross tonnage and upwards:
1. The master shall as a minimum hold the Deck Officer Class 1 certificate and have
not less than 36 months approved seagoing service as the officer in charge of the
navigational watch on a seagoing craft of more than 500 gross tonnage. This service
time may be reduced to 24 months provided that not less than 12 months has been
served as chief mate. Both alternatives are subject to a requirement for at least 6
months service as the officer in charge of the navigational watch or chief mate on
board a high-speed craft. Chief or only mates shall as a minimum hold the Deck Of-
ficer Class 2 certificate; and
9-4
Passenger ships less than 15 metres in length
(1) Masters of passenger ships less than 15 metres in length which are approved to carry more
than 12 passengers are required to hold the Deck Officer Class 5 certificate. For service on board
passenger high-speed craft the person concerned is also required to have successfully completed
an approved high-speed craft course.
(2) Masters of passenger ships less than 15 metres in length which are approved to carry less
than 12 passengers are required to hold the Masters Certificate for Pleasure Craft and an ap-
proved health certificate for employees on board ship, and shall have completed familiarization
training. For service on board passenger high-speed craft the person concerned is also required to
have successfully completed an approved high-speed craft course.
Chapter 10
Validity of certificates of competency
10-1
Validity
A certificate or an endorsement of certificate issued under this regulation is valid for up to five
years from the date of issue. The validity of a duplicate certificate replacing a lost or stolen certifi-
cate will be identical to that of the certificate it replaces.
10-2
Renewal of certificate and issue of duplicate certificate
(1) Renewal of certificate shall be subject to the provisions of regulation I/11 of the STCW
Convention.
(2) A certificate or an endorsement issued under this regulation will be renewed for up to five
years at a time provided that the holder satisfies the requirements relating to medical fitness and is
able to document completion of a refresher safety course as prescribed by the Norwegian Mari-
time Directorate, and has either:
a) approved seagoing service in a relevant capacity for a total of at least one year during
the preceding five years; or
958
b) performed functions considered to be equivalent to seagoing service as referred to in
subparagraph a) above; or
c) satisfactorily completed an approved course; or
d) passed an approved examination; or
e) performed approved service in a relevant capacity on board, either in a supernumerary
capacity or in a capacity which is lower than that for which the holder is certificated, for
at least three months immediately prior to taking up service in the capacity to which the
holder is entitled by his or her certificate.
(3) To ensure the continued validity of certificates after 1 February 2002, a candidate who ap-
plies for renewal of a certificate issued prior to this date must document compliance with all qual-
ification requirements under the STCW Convention and part A of the STCW Code, where necess-
ary by approved additional training or by assessment by a qualified assessor. Certificate holders
who are to serve on board fishing vessels must provide documentary evidence that the safety
training requirements under the STCW Convention are satisfied in order to ensure continued va-
lidity of the certificates after 31 December 2005. In order to ensure continued validity of the certi-
ficates in the period from 1 February 2002 to 31 December 2005, the certificates must be stamped
to this effect by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate or whoever is authorized by the Directorate.
(4) The Norwegian Maritime Directorate may, upon written application, issue a duplicate cer-
tificate when a certificate is lost or stolen. The loss must be documented by an authenticated loss
report issued by the police. No duplicate will be issued to replace an expired certificate.
Chapter 11
Transitional provisions
11-1
Certificate rights based on previous legislation
A person who, at the time of entry into force of this regulation, holds a certificate issued pur-
suant to previous legislation shall keep the certificate rights in accordance with the legislation
concerned.
11-2
Certificates based on previous education and training requirements
(1) Holders of certificates issued pursuant to previous legislation and 7 of the Certification
Act may have a certificate issued under this regulation provided that the conditions for issuing
such certificate under this regulation are met. Applicants having completed education and training
prior to 1 August 1998 in accordance with the 1978 STCW Convention may have their certificates
renewed until 31 December 2004. Applicants must produce documentary evidence from an ap-
proved educational institution that they satisfy the applicable requirements for theoretical compe-
tence for the type of certificate applied for.
(2) Any limitations indicated in the older certificate shall be entered in the new certificate.
Limitations shall be revoked if the seafarer has undergone the required approved additional train-
ing and examination.
960
Chapter 12
12-1
Dispensation from certificate requirements
(1) In exceptional cases, and provided that life, property or the environment is not thereby en-
dangered, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate may grant a dispensation which permits a spec-
ified person to serve on a specified ship for a specific period not exceeding six months, in a capac-
ity for which the person concerned does not hold the required certificate.
(2) Dispensations for the capacities of master, platform manager or chief engineer officer shall
not be granted, except in cases referred to in the fourth paragraph and cases of force majeure, and
then only for the shortest possible period.
(3) Dispensation for a capacity shall be granted only for persons who are duly certificated for
the capacity immediately subordinate to the capacity for which a dispensation is sought. Where a
certificate of competency is not required for the subordinate capacity, dispensation may be grant-
ed for a person with qualifications and experience which the Norwegian Maritime Directorate
considers to be equivalent to the requirements for the capacity for which a dispensation is sought.
The seafarer concerned, if not holding the appropriate certificate, may be required to pass a test
accepted by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate which shows that a dispensation can safely be
granted. The capacity in question shall be filled as soon as possible by a seafarer holding the certi-
ficate required for that capacity.
(4) The provisions of the second paragraph concerning dispensation for master, platform man-
ager or chief engineer officer shall not apply to:
a) the master, platform manager or chief engineer officer of a ship engaged exclusively on
voyages in completely sheltered waters, including waters bordering such waters beyond
Swedens international boundary; or
b) the master of a ship 15 m or more in overall length, but not exceeding 50 gross tons; or
c) the master or engineer officer of a fishing vessel.
(5) In the event that a ships tonnage is increased due to re-measurement, conversion without
increased length or by enclosing an open space, with the result that the previous master or mate of
that ship no longer holds the appropriate certificate for his capacity, the Norwegian Maritime Di-
rectorate may permit the person concerned to continue to serve in the same capacity when this
does not contravene an international agreement to which Norway has acceded and if this is other-
wise justifiable in terms of safety.
12-2
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of this regulation is punishable by fines pursuant to 339 para-
graph 2 of the General Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 no. 10, unless a more severe penalty is
applicable pursuant to any other statutory provision.
12-3
Entry into force, repealment, etc.
(1) This regulation shall enter into force on 1 July 2003.
(2) For subordinate personnel in service before 1 July 2003, the provisions on safety training
and emergency preparedness in 2-1 enter into force on 1 January 2004.
(3) From the same date the following regulations are repealed:
a) Regulations of 29 April 1998 No. 398 concerning qualification requirements, issue of
certificates and certificate rights for personnel on Norwegian ships.
962
b) Regulations of 29 April 1998 No. 397 concerning permission for the holder of a foreign
certificate of competency to serve in posts for which a certificate of competency is re-
quired, on Norwegian ships, drilling vessels or other mobile offshore units.
c) Regulations of 11 December 1981 No. 3809 concerning certificates of competency for
marine chief cooks.
d) Regulations of 11 December 1981 No. 3808 concerning qualifications required for
masters of passenger ships of less than 25 gross register tons.
e) Regulations of 1 April 1996 No. 320 concerning certificates and qualification require-
ments for personnel on mobile offshore units.
964
SECTION VI-9:
Tonnage measurement, registration,
name
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 26 July 1994 no. 749 concerning tonnage measurements of ships . . . . 966
Regulation of 27 June 2002 no. 754 concerning names of ships, signal letters, home
port, certificate of nationality, etc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Regulation of 30 July 1992 no. 592 relating to the registration of ships in the Norwe-
gian International Ship register (NIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Regulation of 30 July 1992 no. 593 relating to the registration of ships in the Norwe-
gian Ordinary Ship register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
749/94 Tonnage measurement of ships
966
Regulations 26 July 1994 no. 749 concerning
tonnage measurements of ships
754/02 Names of ships
968
Regulation 27 June 2002 no. 754 concerning
names of ships, signal letters, home port,
certificate of nationality, etc.
592/92 Registration of ships (NIS)
970
Regulation 30 July 1992 no. 592 relating to
the registration of ships in the Norwegian
International Ship register (NIS)
593/92 Registration of ships (NOR)
972
Regulation 30 July 1992 no. 593 relating to
the registration of ships in the Norwegian
Ordinary Ship register (NOR)
974
SECTION VI-10:
Trade areas
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 30 June 1987 no. 579 concerning special trade areas for vessels and
mobile offshore units engaged in the petroleum activity and registered in the Norwegian
International Ship Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
579/87 Special trade NIS
976
CONTENTS
1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
3 Trade area. Trade permit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
4 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
5 Entry into force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Regulations 30 June 1987 no. 579 concerning special trade
areas for vessels and mobile offshore units engaged in the
petroleum activity and registered in the Norwegian
International Ship Register
Laid down on 30 June 1987 by the Ministry of Trade pursuant to 4 third paragraph of Act of 12
June 1987 No. 48 relating to a Norwegian International Ship Register, cf. Royal Decree of 12 June
1987 concerning delegation of the Kings authority to lay down regulations pursuant to 4 third
paragraph of the Act. Amended 20 June 1989 and 6 November 2002.
1
Definitions
For the purpose of these regulations, ship means vessels and mobile offshore units engaged in
the petroleum activity, such as supply vessels, standby vessels, drilling platforms and other mo-
2
Application
These regulations shall apply to vessels and mobile offshore units engaged in the petroleum ac-
tivity as referred to in 1. These regulations do not apply to seismic vessels.
Regulations of 4 November 1981 concerning trade areas shall not apply to ships to which the
present regulations are applicable.
Amended 20 June 1989.
3
Trade area. Trade permit
Ships to which these regulations apply, shall be assigned a trade area which excludes trade be-
tween Norwegian ports. For the purpose of these regulations, the expression Norwegian port shall
include any installation for oil and/or gas activities on the Norwegian Continental Shelf. Applica-
tions for trade areas shall be submitted to the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
978
A permit to engage in trade on the Norwegian Continental Shelf may in exceptional cases be
granted to special types of vessel for special voyages upon submission of the application to the
Ministry of Trade and Industry.
The trade area shall be inserted in the ships trade certificate or specification of crew as un-
restricted trade, with the exception of the Norwegian Continental Shelf and trade between Norwe-
gian ports. The limitation of trade area shall not apply to regular transit.
Amended by regulation of 6 November 2002 no. 1262 (in force 1 December 2002).
4
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of these regulations or decisions made in pursuance of these regu-
lations will be punished by fines in accordance with 339 subsection 2 of the General Civil Penal
Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, provided no stricter penalty is applicable pursuant to any other stat-
utory provision.
In the case of violations, the Ministry may decide that the ship shall be deleted from the Regis-
ter, cf. 12 second paragraph of the Act relating to the Norwegian International Ship Register.
5
Entry into force
These regulations enter into force on 1 July 1987.
980
SECTION VI-11:
Control of foreign mobile offshore units
CONTENTS
Page
Regulation of 1 July 2003 No. 969 concerning the control of foreign ships and mobile
offshore units in Norwegian ports, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
969/03 Control of Foreign Ships
982
CONTENTS
2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
3 Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
4 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Chapter 2: Procedure, extent etc. of inspections . . . . . 988
5 Procedure of inspections by supervising authority . . . . . 988
6 Investigation by supervising authority of incident at the
request of another State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
7 Selection of ships for inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
8 Priority for inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
9 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
10 More detailed inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
11 Expanded inspection and mandatory expanded in-
spection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
12 Information to be notified for expanded inspection pur-
poses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
13 Procedure in case certain ships cannot be inspected . . . . 994
14 Supervision of provisions relating to hours of work and
rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Chapter 3: Reporting, detention and other measures 996
15 Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
16 Detention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
17 Procedure of detention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
18 Notification of measures taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
19 Follow-up to inspection and detention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
20 Refusal of access to ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
21 Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
22 Cooperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
23 Publication of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
24 Reporting by police, port and customs authorities, pilot
service and coastguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
25 Penalty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Appendix 1 List of certificates and documents . . . . . . . 1004
Appendix 2 Procedures relating to expanded inspection
of certain categories of ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Appendix 3 Inspection report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
Appendix 4 Procedures relating to refusal of access to
Community ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
984
Regulation 1 July 2003 No. 969 concerning the Control of
Foreign Ships and Mobile Offshore Units in Norwegian
Ports, etc.
Laid down by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate on 1 July 2003 pursuant to the Act of 9 June
1903 no. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthiness of Ships, etc., (Section) 1 fourth pa-
ragraph, 3a, 41a, 82 and 117, ref. Royal Decree of 1 December 1978, Royal Decree of 12
October 1979, and Formal Delegations of 15 January 1979 and 8 January 1980 authorizing the
Norwegian Maritime Directorate to issue regulations pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act. Ref. pa-
ragraph 56b of Annex XIII to the EEA Agreement (Directive 95/21/EC as amended by Directive
98/25/EC, Directive 98/42/EC, Directive 1999/97/EC, and Directive 2001/106/EC), and Annex II
Ch. XXXII para.1 and Annex XIII, para. 55b (Directive 94/57/EC as amended by Directive 2001/
105/EC), para. 56d (Directive 96/98/EC), para. 56f (Directive 98/18/EC), para. 56g (Directive 97/
70/EC), and para. 56h of the EEA Agreement (Directive 1999/95/EC).
Chapter 1
General provisions
1
Substantive scope of application:
Subject to limitations resulting from rules recognized by international law or from an agree-
ment with a foreign State, this regulation applies to the control of foreign ships and mobile off-
shore units and their crews.
All ships and mobile offshore units are subject to control:
a) Ships and mobile offshore units falling within the scope of conventions and of 500
gross tonnage and upwards shall be subject to control, but ships of lesser size may be
subject to control if the relevant conventions apply to ships or mobile offshore units be-
low this tonnage.
b) Ships and mobile offshore units falling outside the scope of conventions shall be subject
to controls which shall normally be limited to a verification that matters of importance
to safety, health and the environment are of an acceptable standard. If a more thorough
inspection or measures are considered necessary, such inspection or measures shall be
based on the relevant regulations issued in pursuance of the Seaworthiness Act, insofar
as this is considered justified.
Ships or mobile offshore units from States which are not parties to the conventions shall be sub-
ject to the same control which shall not be more favourable than for ships or mobile offshore units
from States that are parties to the conventions.
Geographical scope of application:
Controls shall be carried out on ships or mobile offshore units calling at or anchored in Norwe-
gian ports. Where the supervising authority so wishes, controls can also be carried out at offshore
loading and unloading installations under Norwegian jurisdiction.
2
Definitions
For the purpose of this regulation, the following definitions apply:
a) The Administration: The Government of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly.
986
b) ECSA Agreement: European agreement on the organization of working time of seafar-
ers, concluded on 30 September 1998 by the European Community Shipowners Asso-
ciation (ECSA) and the Federation of Transport Workers Unions in the European Un-
ion, representing employers and employees respectively within the maritime sector
(FST), annexed to Directive 1999/63/EC of 21 June 1999.
c) Mobile offshore unit: A mobile platform, including drillships, equipped for drilling for
subsea petroleum deposits, and mobile platforms for use other than drilling for subsea
petroleum deposits.
d) ILO: International Labour Organization.
e) IMO: International Maritime Organization.
f) International Safety Management (ISM) Code: International Management Code for the
Safe Operation of Ships and for Pollution Prevention, adopted by the International Ma-
ritime Organization by resolution A.741(18) and incorporated into chapter IX of the
SOLAS Convention (SOLAS 74).
g) Conventions:
1. International Convention on Load Lines, 1966 (LL66);
2. International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS 74);
3. International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as
amended by the 1978 Protocol relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78);
4. International Convention on Standards of Training, Certification and Watchkeeping
for Seafarers, 1978 (STCW 78);
5. Convention on the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972
(Colreg 72);
6. International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969;
7. The Merchant Shipping (Minimum Standards) Convention, 1976 (ILO No. 147);
8. International Convention on Civil Liability for Oil Pollution Damage (CLC 92);
with Protocols and as amended. Conventions of an earlier date within the fields re-
ferred to above are also included.
h) MOU: The Paris Memorandum of Understanding on Port State Control, signed on 26
January 1982.
i) Passenger ship: Any ship for which a certificate is required in accordance with the pro-
visions of Chapter VIII of the Act of 9 June 1903 no. 7 relating to Public Control of the
Seaworthiness of Ships, etc.
j) Seaworthiness Act: Act of 9 June 1903 no. 7 relating to Public Control of the Seaworthi-
ness of Ships, etc.
k) Target factor: The value (number) assigned to the ship in accordance with the terms of
Annex I to Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June 1995 and entered in the Sirenac information
system.
l) Detention: A formal prohibition of a ship or mobile offshore unit to proceed to sea, due
to established deficiencies which, individually or together, make the ship or unit un-
seaworthy.
m) Supervising authority: The Norwegian Maritime Directorate and its officials, institu-
tions and authorities referred to in section () 4 of the Seaworthiness Act, insofar as they
exercise supervision under the Act, ref. section () 10 of the Act.
n) Type-approved:
1. In respect of equipment covered by the Regulations of 29 December 1998 No. 1455
concerning marine equipment: Type-approved by a Notified Body and marked in
accordance with the said Regulations.
2. In respect of other equipment: Approved by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.
o) Clear grounds: Instances in which the supervising authority, in accordance with guide-
lines (Annex III to Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June 1995) and its professional judgement,
finds evidence that warrants a more detailed inspection of a ship or mobile offshore un-
it, its equipment or crew.
988
3
Responsibility
Foreign ships and mobile offshore units calling at or anchored or berthed in a Norwegian port or
at a Norwegian offshore loading and unloading installation shall satisfy Norwegian and interna-
tional requirements relating to the safety of ships, protection of the marine environment, and
health and working conditions on board.
Ships and mobile offshore units which, under the port State control of another State, are found
not to comply with the above requirements, shall report such noncompliance to the supervising
authority. Where such reports are not forthcoming, the ship may be refused access to any Norwe-
gian port.
As documentation of compliance with international requirements applicable to ships and mo-
bile offshore units and relating to the safety of ships, protection of the marine environment, and
health and working conditions on board, foreign ships shall carry on board the relevant certifi-
cates in accordance with the conventions. Where such documents are not produced, the ship may
be refused access to any Norwegian port.
The responsible persons on board shall make the necessary arrangements for an inspection to
be carried out in accordance with this regulation.
4
Exemptions
Chapter 2
Procedure, extent etc. of inspections
5
Procedure of inspections by supervising authority
The supervising authority, which shall consist of a suitable number of qualified inspectors,
shall inspect at least 25 per cent of the average annual number of individual vessels calling at Nor-
wegian ports, calculated on the basis of the three most recent calendar years for which statistics
are available.
In order to be able to carry out an inspection in accordance with this regulation, the supervising
authority is authorized to go on board foreign ships or mobile offshore units. For inspections car-
ried out in this connection, 12 of the Seaworthiness Act shall apply insofar as this is considered
necessary to ensure compliance with the requirements laid down in this regulation.
The procedure of inspections shall be such that all appropriate measures are taken to avoid un-
necessary inconvenience or delay of the ship. In the event of such inconvenience or delay the
owner or operator shall be entitled to compensation for any loss suffered.
6
Investigation by supervising authority of incident at the request of
another State
If unlawful discharge, in violation of the conventions, is suspected to have occurred in the in-
ternal waters, territorial waters or economic zone of another State, or there is a risk that such an in-
990
cident may occur there, an investigation shall be carried out when such action is requested by the
State concerned. The same applies to cases where such investigation is requested by the flag State,
regardless of where the violation occurred.
7
Selection of ships for inspection
Any ship or mobile platform not subject to an expanded inspection with a target factor greater
than 50 in the Sirenac information system shall be inspected in accordance with 9, provided that
a period of at least one month has elapsed since the last inspection carried out in a port in the
MOU region. This does not, however, apply to cases where the supervising authority is not able to
carry out such inspection as set out in 13.
With the exception of operational control, other ships and mobile offshore units shall not be
subject to any control if they have been inspected within the EEA in the course of the preceding
six months, provided that the ship does not belong to any of the following groups, namely vessels
a) falling within the scope of 8; or
b) which have been reported from an earlier inspection as having deficiencies; or
c) for which there are clear grounds for performing an inspection.
8
Priority for inspection
Overriding priority for inspection:
Regardless of the value of the target factor, the following ships or mobile platforms shall be the
first to be selected for inspection:
a) Ships which have been reported by pilots or port authorities because they are likely to
have deficiencies which may prejudice their safe navigation (pursuant to Directive 93/
75/EC of 13 September 1993 and Article 13 of the Directive).
b) Ships which do not comply with the obligations laid down in Directive 93/75/EC of 13
September 1993
1
.
c) Ships which have been reported by another State within the EEA.
d) Ships which have been reported by the master, a crew member, or any person or organi-
zation with a legitimate interest in the safe operation of the ship, shipboard living and
working conditions or protection of the marine environment, unless the member State
concerned deems the report to be manifestly unfounded. The identity of the reporting
person must not be revealed to the master or the owner of the ship concerned.
e) Ships which have been involved in a collision, grounding or stranding on their way to
the port and maneouvred in an erratic or unsafe manner whereby routeing measures,
adopted by the IMO, or other safe navigation practices and procedures have not been
followed.
f) Ships which have otherwise operated in such a manner as to pose a danger to persons,
property or the environment.
g) Ships which for safety reasons have been temporarily suspended or deleted from class
in the course of the preceding six months.
Priority for inspection:
Ships other than those mentioned above shall be considered as priority for inspection in relation
to the target factor of the ship concerned, i.e. a higher target factor means a higher priority for in-
spection:
a) Ships visiting a port of a State which is party to the MOU for the first time after an ab-
sence of 12 months or more. Member States shall also take into account other inspec-
tions which have been carried out within the MOU. In the absence of appropriate data,
Member States shall rely upon the relevant Sirenac data and if such data are not avail-
able the ship shall be inspected.
992
b) Ships not inspected within the previous six months.
c) Ships provided with certificates issued by an organization which is not recognized un-
der the terms of Directive 94/57/EC of 22 November 1994 as amended by Directive
2001/105/EC
2
.
d) Ships flying the flag of a State appearing in the black list contained in the annual IMO
report.
e) Ships which have been permitted to leave the port of a Member State on certain condi-
tions, such as
defects and deficiencies to be rectified before departure;
defects and deficiencies to be rectified at the next port of call;
defects and deficiencies to be rectified within 14 days;
defects and deficiencies for which other conditions have been specified.
If ship-related action has been taken and all defects and deficiencies have been recti-
fied, this shall be taken into account.
f) Ships for which deficiencies have been recorded during a previous inspection, accord-
ing to the number of deficiencies.
g) Ships which have been detained in a previous port.
h) Ships flying the flag of a country which has not ratified the conventions referred to in
1 second paragraph, subparagraph b), ref. 2 subparagraph g.
i) Ships classed with classification society with deficiency ratio above average.
j) Ships which are in a category for which expanded inspection has been decided (see
11)
k) Other ships more than 13 years old.
Subparagraphs e), f) and g) shall only apply to inspections carried out in the last 12 months. The
overall target factor shall not be less than the sum of the values established for subparagraphs b),
c), h), i), j), and k).
Inspections shall be carried out in accordance with the guidelines currently in force regarding
the procedure for control of ships and mobile offshore units, issued by the IMO, ILO and MOU.
3
1
The Directive lays down minimum requirements for ships calling at or departing from ports with dangerous or polluting sub-
stances. In such cases the pilot is required to report any deficiencies which may influence the safety of navigation.
2
The Directive lays down common rules and standards for organizations carrying out inspection on behalf of maritime admi-
nistrations. A list of the organizations has been prepared.
3
Res. A.481 (XII) and Annexes International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code ILO publication 147 Inspection of La-
bour Conditions on Board Ship Guidelines for Procedure MOU Annex I Port State Control Procedures.
9
Inspection
The supervising authority shall
a) inspect certificates and documents subject to requirements under the conventions and
Appendix 1 to this regulation;
b) assess the general standard of the ship or mobile offshore unit, its type-approved equip-
ment, the size and qualifications of the crew, and working conditions;
c) comply with the requests of States pursuant to 6 herein and section 121 second pa-
ragraph of the Seaworthiness Act; and
d) follow standard procedures for the inspection of ships
1
in accordance with Directive 95/
21/EC of 19 June 1995, Annex IV.
1
See Principles of safe manning (IMO res. A.481 (XII) and Annexes which are contents of Minimum Safe manning Docu-
ment (Annex 1) and Guidelines for the Application of Principles of Safe Manning (Annex 2). The provisions of the In-
ternational Maritime Dangerous Code. International Labour Organization (ILO) publication Inspection of Labour Condi-
tions on Board Ship: Guidelines for procedures . Annex I, Port State Control Procedures to the Paris MOU.
994
10
1
More detailed inspection
A more detailed inspection shall be carried out when there are clear grounds
2
to assume that the
ship or mobile offshore unit, its type-approved equipment, crew or working conditions do not
comply with the relevant requirements of the conventions.
1
See MOU Annex I Section 4.
2
See MOU Annex I Section 4.
11
Expanded inspection and mandatory expanded inspection
An expanded inspection may be carried out for the categories of ships listed below:
a) gas and chemical carriers older than ten years of age, as determined on the basis of the
date of construction indicated in the ships safety construction certificate;
b) bulk carriers, older than 12 years of age, as determined on the basis of the date of con-
struction indicated in the ships safety construction certificate;
c) oil tankers of 3,000 gross tonnage or above which are older than 15 years of age, as de-
termined on the basis of the date of construction indicated in the ships safety construc-
tion certificate; and
d) passenger ships older than 15 years of age other than the passenger ships falling within
the scope of Directive 1999/35/EC of 29 April 1999 on a system of mandatory surveys
for the safe operation of regular ro-ro ferry and high speed passenger craft services (host
State control); and only after a period of 12 months has elapsed since the last expanded
inspection in a port of an MOU State.
An expanded inspection of a ship in any of the above categories shall be carried out where the
ship concerned has a priority according to 8 or a target factor of 7 or more.
An expanded inspection shall be carried out in conformity with the procedures of Directive 95/
21/EC of 19 June 1995, Annex V, Part C (ref. Appendix 2 to this regulation).
An inspection according to 9 may be carried out at any time between two expanded inspec-
tions.
12
Information to be notified for expanded inspection purposes
The operator or master of a ship, in the case of ships or mobile offshore units which may be sub-
ject to an expanded inspection according to 11 and which calls at a port within the EEA after a
period of 12 months since the last expanded inspection, shall communicate information about the
ships name, flag, IMO identification number, if any, tonnage, date of construction, time of arrival
at the port of destination or pilot station, planned duration of the call, planned operations, planned
survey inspections and substantial maintenance and repair work to be carried out. For tankers, in-
formation shall also be provided on the ships configuration, the condition of its cargo and ballast
tanks, and the volume and nature of the cargo.
The information referred to above shall be provided at least three days before the expected time
of arrival in the port or before leaving the previous port if the voyage is expected to take fewer
than three days.
Any ship or mobile offshore unit not complying with the provisions of the first and second pa-
ragraphs shall be subject to an expanded inspection.
13
Procedure in case certain ships cannot be inspected
In cases where, for operational reasons, it is impossible to carry out an inspection of a ship or
mobile offshore unit covered by 7 first paragraph or a ship or mobile offshore unit which is sub-
996
ject to a mandatory expanded inspection as referred to in 11 second paragraph, the Sirenac sys-
tem shall be informed without delay that such inspection did not take place.
Such cases shall be notified, at intervals of six months, to the EFTA Surveillance Authority
(ESA), together with the reasons for not inspecting the ships or mobile offshore units concerned.
During any calendar year, such non-inspections shall not exceed 5 % of the average annual
number of individual ships eligible for the inspections referred to in the first paragraph and calling
at a port within the EEA, calculated on the basis of the three most recent calendar years for which
statistics are available.
Ships or mobile offshore units not inspected in accordance with the first paragraph shall be in-
spected in the next port of call within the EEA.
14
Supervision of provisions relating to hours of work and rest
The supervising authority shall inspect ships calling at Norwegian ports to supervise their com-
pliance with the ECSA Agreement.
When an inspection is carried out to find evidence that a ship does not comply with the require-
ments of the ECSA Agreement, the inspection shall include verification that:
a) an overview of the working arrangements on board is posted in a readily accessible
place;
b) there are records of the seafarers hours of work or rest and that such documents are en-
dorsed by the Administration; and
c) the overview and records as mentioned in subparagraphs a) and b) are made in the
working language(s) of the ship and in the English language and in conformity with An-
nex I and Annex II to Directive 1999/95/EC of 13 December 1999.
If the supervising authority receives a complaint or there is reason to believe, on the basis of the
supervising authoritys own observations on board, that the seafarers are unreasonably tired, a
more detailed inspection shall be carried out in accordance with the second paragraph to ascertain
whether the hours of work or rest entered in the records are in accordance with the standards laid
down in the ECSA Agreement and that the standards are complied with. In this connection, con-
sideration shall be given to other documentary evidence of the ships operation.
If the supervising authority receives a complaint which it does not consider to be clearly un-
founded, or it possesses evidence that a ship calling at Norwegian port does not comply with the
requirements of the ECSA Agreement, it shall prepare a report to the Administration. Where an
inspection performed in accordance with the second or third paragraph produces the necessary
evidence, the supervising authority shall take such action as is deemed necessary to ensure correc-
tion of those conditions on board that clearly constitute a hazard to the safety or health of the crew
members.
The identity of the person making the complaint must not be revealed to the master or the
owner of the ship concerned.
Chapter 3
Reporting, detention and other measures
15
Reporting
On completion of an inspection, a more detailed inspection and/or an expanded inspection, the
master of the ship shall be provided with an inspection report in accordance with Directive 95/21/
EC of 19 June 1995 giving the results of the inspection (ref. Appendix 3 to this regulation). This
report shall contain details of the inspection and any follow-up action to be taken by the ships
master, owner or operator.
998
In the case of deficiencies warranting the detention of the ship, the report shall include informa-
tion about the possible publication of the detention.
16
Detention
The provisions of 24 and 118 of the Seaworthiness Act regarding the detention of ships are
applicable to foreign ships and mobile offshore units. A ship or mobile offshore unit having def-
iciencies which are clearly hazardous to safety, health and/or the environment shall be detained. A
hazardous operation shall be stopped. The detention order or stoppage of an operation shall not be
lifted until the hazard has been removed or until the supervising authority has permitted the ship
or mobile offshore unit, subject to any necessary conditions, to proceed to sea or continue the op-
eration. Such permission shall be given only on the condition that it will not cause a hazard to sa-
fety or health, a risk to other ships or an unreasonable threat of harm to the marine environment.
Guidelines for criteria forming the basis for detentions are set out in MOU Annex 1 and Directive
95/21/EC of 19 June 1995, Annex VI.
A ship or mobile offshore unit which under the conventions is subject to the requirements of the
ISM Code but which is not provided with certificates issued under the Code shall be detained.
A ship or mobile offshore unit which is not provided with a properly functioning voyage data
recorder (VDR system), where such equipment is mandatory under Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June
1995, Annex XII, shall be detained.
A ship or mobile offshore unit shall not be detained if the reason for the detention is an incident
which occurred under way to the port, when
a) notification is given to the flag State, the designated surveyor or the recognized survey
institution in accordance with SOLAS 74 regulation I/11c;
b) the master or company has provided the port State with details of the incident and the
damage and information on the notification of the flag State;
c) appropriate precautionary measures are taken to the satisfaction of the port State; and
d) the port State is satisfied that deficiencies that clearly constitute a hazard to safety,
health and the environment are corrected.
In exceptional circumstances, where the overall impression is that the ship is obviously sub-
standard, further inspection may be suspended until the responsible party demonstrates that the
ship complies with the requirements of the conventions.
17
Procedure of detention
When an inspector, in exercising his or her professional judgment, considers whether or not a
ship or mobile offshore unit should be detained, the inspector shall apply the criteria set out in An-
nex VI to Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June 1995 and the MOU manual, section 9c.
In the event of detention etc., the master of the ship or mobile offshore unit shall be notified im-
mediately, in writing, of the reason for the measure taken, and shall be informed of the possibility
afforded by 27 of the Seaworthiness Act of having the decision reconsidered by judicial survey
at the District Court where the ship or mobile offshore unit is located.
If the detention has already been implemented, the master shall be given a list of the rec-
ommendations to be complied with before the ship or mobile offshore unit is permitted to proceed
to sea.
25 and 27 through 33 of the Seaworthiness Act apply correspondingly to foreign ships and
mobile offshore units in cases of decisions made under 24 and 118 first paragraph of the Sea-
worthiness Act.
1000
18
Notification of measures taken
Where a measure has been taken in accordance with 16 and 17 herein the official who has
carried out the inspection shall immediately notify the Norwegian Maritime Directorate, attn. In-
spection Department.
The Administration, the consul or the nearest diplomatic representative of the State whose flag
the ship or mobile offshore unit flies, shall be notified immediately, in writing by forwarding of
the inspection report, of the decision and of the circumstances in which intervention was deemed
necessary. Such notification shall be given by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate if this is pos-
sible without undue delay, or direct by the official involved.
The Administration or, where relevant, the organization which has issued the certificates, shall
be notified by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate of the measure taken and the reasons for such
measure.
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall report the measures taken to the IMO according to
the guidelines currently applied by the organization. Additionally, information as set out in Annex
X to Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June 1995 shall be reported annually, by 1 April, to the EFTA Sur-
veillance Authority (ESA)
The Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall notify EEA member countries of equipment which
is not type-approved in accordance with the Regulations of 29 December 1998 No. 1455 concern-
ing marine equipment.
19
Follow-up to inspection and detention
The operator or master of the ship shall provide evidence to the supervising authority that de-
fects and deficiencies found at inspections pursuant to 7 and 11 are or will be rectified in ac-
cordance with the conventions.
Where recommendations cannot be followed up in the port of inspection, the supervising au-
thority may allow the ship or mobile offshore unit to proceed to the nearest appropriate repair yard
available. In such circumstances all precautions must be taken to ensure that the ship or mobile
offshore unit does not represent any risk to safety, health or other ships or an unreasonable threat
of harm to the marine environment. In such cases, the supervising authority shall follow up by en-
suring that the ship or mobile offshore unit is refused access to ports within the EEA until it has
produced evidence of compliance with the conventions to the port State control authorities of the
port where the inspection was carried out.
Where compliance with the VDR requirement cannot be ensured in the port concerned, the su-
pervising authority may permit the ship or mobile offshore unit to proceed to the next port or re-
quire the installation to be performed within 30 days. The procedure shall be according to the gui-
delines of MOU Annex 2.
Information about recommendations and any conditions applying to them, and any relevant in-
formation about the ship or mobile offshore unit, shall be communicated to the authorities in the
next port of call, the Administration or its representative, or the authorities of any other State
whose interests are affected. Guidelines for this information are set out in MOU Annex 2.
1
A ship or mobile offshore unit which is detained on grounds of deficient ISM certification may
be permitted by the supervising authorities to depart provided that there are no other deficiencies
which constitute a hazard to safety or may cause damage to the marine environment. Such lifting
of detention shall immediately be communicated to other EEA member countries. In such cases,
the supervising authority shall follow up by ensuring that the ship is refused access to ports within
the EEA until it has produced evidence of compliance with the certification requirements of the
ISM Code to the port State control authorities of the port where the inspection was carried out.
1
The next port of call within the MOU area which has received information about recommendations will report back on the
follow-up measures taken.
1002
20
Refusal of access to ports
A ship or mobile offshore unit for which a recommendation is issued at a port State inspection
carried out by another EEA member country, the ship or unit then being permitted to proceed to a
specific port to undergo repairs or to depart despite deficient ISM certification; where such ship or
unit subsequently fails to
a) comply with the recommendations issued;
b) call at the specific port to undergo repairs; or
c) hold valid certificates issued under the ISM Code it shall be refused access to any Nor-
wegian port until the owner/company has produced documentary evidence of com-
pliance with all relevant requirements of international conventions to the port where the
inspection was carried out and the recommendations issued.
With the exception of emergencies, all gas carriers, chemical tankers, bulk carriers, oil tankers
and passenger ships shall be refused access to Norwegian ports if the ship
either:
a) flies the flag of a State appearing in the black list as published in the annual report of the
MOU, and
b) has been detained more than twice in the course of the preceding 24 months in a port of
a State signatory of the MOU,
or
a) flies the flag of a State described as very high risk or high risk in the black list as
published in the annual report of the MOU, and
b) has been detained more than once in the course of the preceding 36 months in a port of a
State signatory of the MOU.
The refusal of access shall become applicable immediately after the ship has been authorized to
leave the port where it has been the subject of a second or third detention, as appropriate, and shall
be carried out in accordance with the procedures of Annex XI to Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June
1995 (ref. Appendix 4 to this regulation).
21
Qualifications
The person inspecting ships or mobile offshore units shall be qualified and authorized in ac-
cordance with the MOU guidelines. If the authorized inspector does not possess the necessary ex-
pertise for the survey to be carried out, he may be assisted by any person with the required exper-
tise. Such persons shall have no commercial interest in the ship or inspection.
22
Cooperation
The supervising authority shall cooperate with port authorities, other relevant authorities and
private organizations to ensure the provision of all relevant information about any ship or mobile
offshore unit calling at its ports. EEA member countries shall maintain provisions for the ex-
change of information and cooperation between their competent authorities and the competent au-
thorities of all other Member States and maintain the established operational link between their
competent authority, the Commission and the Sirenac information system.
Inspectors shall consult the public and private databases relating to ship inspection accessible
through the Equasis information system in respect of inspections falling within the scope of 7
and 11.
1004
23
Publication of information
Through available channels, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate shall ensure the monthly
publication of information on detained ships or ships refused access to ports with regard to the
items set out in Directive 95/21/EC of 19 June 1995, Annex VIII Part I. The information in Annex
VIII Parts I and II and information on any change of class or suspension or exclusion from class in
accordance with art. 15 para. 3 in Directive 94/57/EC of 22 November 1994 should be available in
the Sirenac information system. The same information shall be published through the information
system Equasis as soon as possible after the inspection is completed or the detention lifted.
24
Reporting by police, port and customs authorities, pilot service and
coastguard
Police, port and customs authorities, pilots and coastguard officials which in the course of their
duties learn that a ship or mobile offshore unit has such defects or deficiencies as may give rise to
doubt as to its seaworthiness, shall immediately inform the Norwegian Maritime Directorates
head office or the Norwegian Maritime Directorates nearest local office (station).
Chapter 4
25
Penalty
Wilful or negligent violation of 3 herein shall be punishable by fines or imprisonment of up to
three months pursuant to the General Civil Penal Code of 22 May 1902 No. 10, 416, ref. 48a
and 48b.
26
This regulation enters into force on 1 July 2003.
As from the same date, the Regulations of 1 July 1996 No. 774 concerning the Control of For-
eign Ships and Mobile Offshore Units in Norwegian Ports, etc., are repealed.
Appendix 1.
List of certificates and documents
List of certificates and documents
1. International Tonnage Certificate (1969)
2. Passenger Ship Safety Certificate;
Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate,
Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate,
Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificate,
Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelephony Certificate,
Cargo Ship Safety Radio Certificate,
Exemption Certificate, including where appropriate the list of cargoes,
Cargo Ship Safety Certificate.
1006
3. International Certificate of Fitness for Carriage of Liquefied Gases in Bulk;
Certificate of Fitness for the Carriage of Liquefied Gases in Bulk.
4. International Certificate of Fitness for the Carriage of Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk;
Certificate of Fitness for the Carriage of Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk.
5. International Oil Pollution Prevention Certificate.
6. International Pollution Prevention Certificate for the Carriage of Noxious Liquid Substances
in Bulk.
7. International Load Line Certificate (1966);
International Load Line Exemption Certificate.
8. Oil record book, parts I and II.
9. Cargo record book.
10. Minimum Safe Manning Document.
11. Certificates issued in accordance with the STCW Convention.
12. Medical certificates (see ILO Convention No 73 concerning Medical Examination of Seafar-
ers).
13. Stability information.
14. Copy of Document of Compliance and Safety Management Certificate issued in accordance
with The International Management Code of the Safe Operation of Ships and for Pollution
Prevention (SOLAS, Chapter IX).
15. Certificates as to the ships hull strength and machinery installations issued by the classifica-
tion society in question (only to be required if the ship maintains its class with a classifica-
tion society).
16. Document of compliance with the special requirements for ships carrying dangerous goods.
17. High speed craft safety certificate and permit to operate high speed craft.
18. Dangerous goods special list or manifest, or detailed stowage plan.
19. Ships logbook with respect to the records of tests and drills and the log for records of in-
spection and maintenance of life-saving appliances and arrangements.
20. Special purpose ship safety certificate.
21. Mobile offshore drilling unit safety certificate.
22. For oil tankers, the record of oil discharge monitoring and control system for the last ballast
voyage.
23. The muster list, fire control plan, and for passenger ships, a damage control plan.
24. Shipboard oil pollution emergency plan.
25. Survey report files (in case of bulk carriers and oil tankers).
26. Reports of previous port State control inspections.
27. For ro-ro passenger ships, information on the A/A maximum ratio.
28. Document of authorization for carriage of grain.
29. Cargo Securing manual.
30. Garbage management plan and garbage record book.
31. Decision support system for masters of passenger ships.
32. SAR cooperation plan for passenger ships trading fixed routes.
33. List of operational limitations for passenger ships.
34. Bulk carrier booklet.
35. Loading and unloading plan for bulk carriers.
36. Certificate of insurance or any other financial security in respect of civil liability for oil pol-
lution damage (International Convention on Civil Liability for Oil Pollution Damage, 1992).
Appendix 2.
Procedures relating to expanded inspection of certain categories of ships
Subject to their practical feasibility or any constraints relating to the safety of persons, the ship or
the port, the following items at least must be part of an expanded inspection:
1008
1. Ships in general (categories in section A)
Black-out and start of emergency generator,
inspection of emergency lighting,
operation of emergency fire-pump with two fire hoses connected to the fire main-line,
operation of bilge pumps,
closing of watertight doors,
lowering of one lifeboat to the water,
test of remote emergency stop for, e.g., boilers, ventilation and fuel pumps,
testing of steering gear including auxiliary steering gear,
inspection of emergency source of power to radio installations,
inspection and, to the extent possible, test of engine room separator.
2. Gas and chemical tankers
In addition to the items listed under section 1 of this Appendix, the following items are to be
considered as part of the expanded inspection for gas and chemical tankers:
cargo tank monitoring and safety devices relating to temperature, pressure and ullage,
oxygen analysing and explosimeter devices, including their calibration. Availability of
chemical detection equipment (bellows) with an appropriate number of suitable gas detec-
tion tubes for the specific cargo being carried,
cabin escape sets giving suitable respiratory and eye protection for every person on board
(if required by the products listed on the International Certificate of Fitness or Certificate
of Fitness for the Carriage of Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk or Liquefied Gases in Bulk, as
applicable),
check that the product being carried is listed in the International Certificate of Fitness or
Certificate of Fitness for the Carriage of Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk or Liquefied Gases
in Bulk, as applicable,
the fixed fire-fighting installations on deck, whether they be foam or dry chemical or other
as required by the product carried.
3. Bulk carriers
In addition to the items listed under section 1 of this Appendix, the following items are to be
considered as part of the expanded inspection for bulk carriers:
possible corrosion of deck machinery mountings,
possible deformation and/or corrosion of hatch covers,
possible cracks or local corrosion in transverse bulkheads,
access to cargo holds,
verification that the following documents are on board, review them and confirm that the
flag State or classification society has endorsed them:
a) reports of structural surveys,
b) condition evaluation reports,
c) thickness measurement reports,
d) descriptive document referred to by IMO resolution A.744(18).
4. Oil tankers
In addition to the items listed under section 1 of this Appendix, the following items are to
be considered as part of an expanded inspection of oil tankers:
fixed deck foam system,
fire-fighting equipment in general,
inspection of fire dampers in engine room, pump room and accommodation,
control of pressure of inert gas and oxygen content thereof,
ballast tanks: at least one of the ballast tanks within the cargo area to be examined from
tank manhole/deck access in first instance and entered if inspector establishes clear
ground for further inspection,
verification that the following documents are on board, review them and confirm that the
flag State or classification society has endorsed them:
1010
a) reports of structural surveys,
b) condition evaluation reports,
c) thickness measurement reports,
d) descriptive document referred to by IMO resolution A.744(18).
5. Passenger ships not covered by directive 1999/35/EC of 29 April 1999
In addition to the items listed under section 1 of this Appendix, the following items are to
be considered as part of the expanded inspection for passenger ships:
testing of fire detection and alarm system,
testing of proper closing of fire doors,
test of public address system,
fire drill where, as a minimum, all sets of firemens outfits must be demonstrated and part
of the catering crew take part,
demonstration that key crew members are acquainted with the damage control plan.
If deemed appropriate, the inspection may be continued while the ship is on passage to or from
the port in the Member State, with the consent of the ships master or the operator. Inspectors must
not obstruct the operation of the ship, nor must they induce situations that, in the masters judge-
ment, could endanger the safety of the passengers, the crew and the ship.
Inspectors must be aware that it may jeopardise the safe execution of certain on-board oper-
ations, e.g. cargo handling, if tests having a direct effect thereon are required to be carried out dur-
ing such operations.
Appendix 3.
Inspection report
The inspection report must contain at least the following items:
I. General
1. Competent authority that wrote the report
2. Date and place of inspection
3. Name of the ship inspected
4. Flag
5. Type of ship
6. IMO number
7. Call sign
8. Tonnage (gt)
9. Deadweight tonnage (where relevant)
10. Year of construction as determined on the basis of the date indicated in the ships safety certi-
ficates
11. The classification society or classification societies, where relevant, which has/have issued
to this ship the class certificates, if any
12. The classification society or classification societies and/or any other party which has/have
issued to this ship certificates in accordance with the applicable conventions on behalf of the
flag State
13. Name and address of the ships owner or the operator
14. Name and address of the charterer responsible for the selection of the vessel and type of char-
ter in the case of ships carrying liquid or solid cargoes in bulk
15. Final date of writing the inspection report
16. Indication that detailed information on an inspection or a detention may be subject to public-
ation.
II. Information relating to inspection
1. Certificates issued in application of the relevant international conventions, authority or orga-
nization that issued the certificate(s) in question, including the date of issue and expiry
1012
2. Parts or elements of the ship that were inspected (in the case of more detailed or expanded in-
spection)
3. Type of inspection (inspection, more detailed inspection, expanded inspection)
4. Nature of the defects and deficiencies
5. Measures taken.
III. Additional information in the event of detention
1. Date of detention order
2. Date of lifting the detention order
3. Nature of the defects and deficiencies warranting the detention order (references to Conven-
tions, if relevant)
4. Information on the last intermediate or annual survey
5. Indication, where relevant, of whether the classification society or any other private body
that carried out the survey has a responsibility in relation to the deficiencies which, alone or
in combination, led to detention
6. Measures taken.
Appendix 4.
Procedures relating to refusal of access to Community ports
1. If the provisions of 20 are applicable, the competent authority of the port in which the ship
is detained for the second or third time, as appropriate, must inform the captain and the
owner or the operator of the ship in writing of the access refusal order served on the ship.
The competent authority must also inform the flag State administration, the classification
society concerned, the other Member States, the Commission, the Centre administratif des
affaires maritimes and the MOU Secretariat.
The access refusal order will take effect as soon as the ship has been authorized to leave
the port after the defects or deficiencies leading to the detention have been remedied.
2. In order to have the access refusal order lifted, the owner or the operator must address a for-
mal request to the competent authority of the Member State that imposed the access refusal
order. This request must be accompanied by a certificate from the flag State administration
showing that the ship fully conforms to the applicable provisions of the international conven-
tions. The request for the lifting of the access refusal order must also be accompanied, where
appropriate, by a certificate from the classification society which has the ship in class show-
ing that the ship conforms to the class standards stipulated by that society.
3. The access refusal order may only be lifted following a re-inspection of the ship at an agreed
port by inspectors of the competent authority of the Member State that imposed the access
refusal order and if evidence is provided to the satisfaction of this Member State that the ves-
sel fully complies with the applicable requirements of the International Conventions.
If the agreed port is located within the EEA, the competent authority of the Member State
of the port of destination may, with the agreement of the competent authority of the Member
State that imposed the access refusal order, authorize the ship to proceed to the port of desti-
nation in question, for the sole purpose of verifying that the ship meets the conditions spec-
ified in paragraph 2.
The re-inspection shall consist of an expanded inspection that must cover at least the rele-
vant items of Appendix 2.
All costs of this expanded inspection will be borne by the owner or the operator.
4. If the results of the expanded inspection satisfy the Member State, the access refusal order
will be lifted. The owner or the operator of the ship must be informed thereof in writing.
The competent authority must also notify its decision in writing to the flag State admini-
stration, the classification society concerned, the other Member States, the Commission, the
Centre administratif des affaires maritimes and the MOU Secretariat.
1014
5. Information relating to ships that have been refused access to ports within the EEA must be
made available in the Sirenac information system and published in conformity with the pro-
visions of 23.
1016
SECTION VI-12:
Maritime inquiries
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 1 September 1987 no. 742 concerning the implementation of the rules in
Chapter 14, Part II, of the Maritime Act of 1994 concerning maritime inquiries . . . . . 1018
742/87 Maritime inquiries
1018
Regulations 1 September 1987 No. 742
Concerning the Implementation of the Rules
in Chapter 18, Part II, of the Maritime Act
of 1994 Concerning Maritime Inquiries
1020
SECTION VI-13:
Fees
CONTENTS
Page
Regulations of 2 February 1996 concerning collection of fees to the treasury for sur-
veys, issue of certificates etc. carried out pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act etc. (the fee
regulations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Regulation of 20 December 2001 No.1578 (Tariff of Fees) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
Regulation of 21 December 2001 No. 1490 (Fees for the issue of competency docu-
ments). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
1490/01 Fees
1022
Regulations 2 February 1996 no. 115
concerning collection of fees to the Treasury
for surveys, issue of certificates etc. carried
out pursuant to the Seaworthiness Act, etc.
(the Fees Regulations)
Regulation 20 December 2001 No. 1578
(Tariff of Fees)
Regulation 21 December 2001 No. 1490
(Fees for the issue of competency documents)
1
Instructions in using the search functions
Search in chapter:
Click on the bookmark Search in chapter, or use the speed command:
Ctrl+F. You can also use the menu line by clicking: Edit/Find.
Type in the word you want to search for and push the Find-button. The
search engine will automatically take you to the first word in the text that
coheres with your request. If you want to continue this search you can do this
operation again and again using the same method. You can also use the
speed command: Ctrl+G or choose: Edit/Find Again on the menu line.

Search in the whole book:
Click on the bookmark Search in book, or use the speed command:
Ctrl+Shift+F. You can also choose: Edit/Search/Query on the menu line.
The following window will appear:

Click on the Indexes- button:

Locate the file named: RFFI2003.pdx by using the Add button .

2

This file is located in the folder you saved the installed version of this CD in. A
typical example of where you will find this file is: C:\program files\RFFI2003.
When you find the file you mark the file and choose Open.

Click on the OK button.
Write in the word you want to search for and click on the Search button.
RFFI2003.pdx is the file that is controlling all the information you are
searching for. You can remove all of your old choices (checkboxes) if you
dont want to search for them too. Remember to activate your index selection
by clicking on the square beside RFFI2003. You only need to do this one
time, although we recommend you to control your choices.

If you have any questions regarding the use of the CD-ROM, please e-mail:
helpdesk@imh.no or contact Support on + 47 21 95 35 95.

General Regulations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

General Regulations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

194

VI. General Regulations

You might also like